Test Specification for Eurobalise FFFIS
Test Specification for Eurobalise FFFIS
Test Specification for Eurobalise FFFIS
You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles
YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.
ALSTOM * ANSALDO * BOMBARDIER * INVENSYS * SIEMENS * THALES<br />
ERTMS/ETCS – Class 1<br />
<strong>Test</strong> <strong>Specification</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Eurobalise</strong> <strong>FFFIS</strong><br />
REF : SUBSET-085<br />
ISSUE : 2.2.2<br />
DATE : November 9, 2007<br />
Company Technical Approval Management approval<br />
ALCATEL<br />
ALSTOM<br />
ANSALDO<br />
BOMBARDIER<br />
INVENSYS<br />
SIEMENS<br />
© This document is the property of<br />
ALSTOM * ANSALDO * BOMBARDIER * INVENSYS * SIEMENS * THALES<br />
SUBSET-085<br />
Issue 2.2.2<br />
<strong>Test</strong> <strong>Specification</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Eurobalise</strong> <strong>FFFIS</strong> Page 1/332
Page 2 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Foreword<br />
This Norm incorporates results from the original work (“<strong>Eurobalise</strong> FFFS”) carried out by the EUROSIG Consortium<br />
1 under the financial support of the European Commission (<strong>Eurobalise</strong>/Euroloop Project -’92/94’,<br />
ERTMS/Eurosig Project -‘95/98’, and EMSET Project -‘96/00’), and in close co-operation with technical bodies<br />
of the UIC 2 and of the EEIG ERTMS User Group 3 . The EUROSIG specifications were subsequently updated<br />
by the UNISIG Consortium 4 in consideration of further technical work in development and test areas.<br />
The main body of Part 2 of this Norm, and the relevant Annexes designated as “normative”, constitute the mandatory<br />
requirements <strong>for</strong> test methods and tools <strong>for</strong> verification of compliance with the mandatory requirements<br />
of Part 1. Annexes designated as “in<strong>for</strong>mative”, either provide background in<strong>for</strong>mation, or outline nonmandatory<br />
requirements and optional features.<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
The EUROSIG Consortium was composed of the following European Companies working in the Railway Signalling<br />
area: ACEC Transport, Adtranz Signal, Alcatel SEL, GEC Alsthom Transport, Ansaldo Trasporti, CSEE Transport,<br />
SASIB Railway, Siemens, and Westinghouse Signal.<br />
UIC: Union Internationale de Chemins de Fer.<br />
EEIG ERTMS User Group: European Economic Interest Group was composed of some European Railways (DBAG, FS<br />
SpA, NS, RENFE, SNCF, BR) managing the implementation of ERTMS trial sites aimed at full functional verifications.<br />
The UNISIG Consortium was composed of the following European Companies working in the Railway Signalling area:<br />
Adtranz Signal, Alcatel, Alstom, Ansaldo Signal, Invensys Rail, and Siemens.
Page 3 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Contents<br />
1 INTRODUCTION ________________________________________________________ 17<br />
1.1 Application Range __________________________________________________________17<br />
1.2 Scope_____________________________________________________________________17<br />
2 NORMATIVE REFERENCES _______________________________________________ 19<br />
3 TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINITIONS _________________________________________ 19<br />
3.1 Acronyms and Abbreviations_________________________________________________19<br />
3.2 Definitions ________________________________________________________________20<br />
3.3 Influence of Tolerances ______________________________________________________20<br />
4 TESTS OF THE UP-LINK BALISE____________________________________________ 21<br />
4.1 Reference <strong>Test</strong> Configurations________________________________________________21<br />
4.1.1 General ________________________________________________________________________21<br />
4.1.2 Monitored Interfaces ______________________________________________________________22<br />
4.1.3 <strong>Test</strong> Tools and Procedures__________________________________________________________22<br />
4.2 Laboratory <strong>Test</strong>s ___________________________________________________________23<br />
4.2.1 Generic <strong>Test</strong> and Calibration Set-up notes _____________________________________________23<br />
4.2.2 Up-link Field Con<strong>for</strong>mity __________________________________________________________25<br />
4.2.2.1 General ____________________________________________________________________25<br />
4.2.2.2 Calibration of 4.2 MHz Balise Loop Current in the Contact Zone_______________________26<br />
4.2.2.3 Balise Up-link Con<strong>for</strong>mity Measurements in the Contact Zone_________________________28<br />
4.2.2.4 Evaluation of Up-link Con<strong>for</strong>mity in the Contact Zone _______________________________30<br />
4.2.2.5 Calibration of 4.2 MHz Balise Loop Current in the Side Lobe Zone_____________________31<br />
4.2.2.6 Up-link Reference Field in the Side Lobe Zone _____________________________________31<br />
4.2.2.7 Balise Up-link Con<strong>for</strong>mity Measurements in the Side Lobe Zone_______________________31<br />
4.2.2.8 Evaluation of Up-link Con<strong>for</strong>mity in the Side Lobe Zone _____________________________32<br />
4.2.2.9 Calibration of 4.2 MHz Balise Loop Current in the Cross-talk Protected Zone_____________33<br />
4.2.2.10 Up-link Reference Field in the Cross-talk Protected Zone __________________________35<br />
4.2.2.11 Balise Up-link Con<strong>for</strong>mity Measurements in the Cross-talk Protected Zone ____________36<br />
4.2.2.12 Evaluation of Up-link Con<strong>for</strong>mity in the Cross-talk Protected Zone __________________37<br />
4.2.3 Tele-powering Field Con<strong>for</strong>mity_____________________________________________________38<br />
4.2.3.1 General ____________________________________________________________________38<br />
4.2.3.2 Calibration of 27 MHz Tele-powering flux in the Contact Zone ________________________39<br />
4.2.3.3 Balise Tele-powering Con<strong>for</strong>mity Measurements in Contact Zone ______________________42<br />
4.2.3.4 Evaluation of Tele-powering Con<strong>for</strong>mity in the Contact Zone _________________________44
Page 4 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.3.5 Calibration of 27 MHz Tele-powering flux in the Side Lobe Zone ______________________45<br />
4.2.3.6 Tele-powering Reference Field in the Side Lobe Zone _______________________________45<br />
4.2.3.7 Balise Tele-powering Con<strong>for</strong>mity Measurements in the Side Lobe Zone _________________46<br />
4.2.3.8 Evaluation of Tele-powering Con<strong>for</strong>mity in the Side Lobe Zone _______________________46<br />
4.2.4 I/O Characteristics________________________________________________________________47<br />
4.2.4.1 General ____________________________________________________________________47<br />
4.2.4.2 Calibration of 4.2 MHz <strong>for</strong> Balise Input to Output Characteristics ______________________48<br />
4.2.4.3 Balise Input to Output Characteristics Measurements ________________________________50<br />
4.2.4.4 Evaluation of I/O Characteristics ________________________________________________53<br />
4.2.5 Cross-talk Immunity with Cables ____________________________________________________54<br />
4.2.5.1 General ____________________________________________________________________54<br />
4.2.5.2 Calibration of 27 MHz Tele-powering flux ________________________________________54<br />
4.2.5.3 Calibration of Balise response __________________________________________________56<br />
4.2.5.4 Cross-talk Measurements ______________________________________________________59<br />
4.2.5.5 LZB Cable <strong>Test</strong>ing ___________________________________________________________62<br />
4.2.6 Balise Impedance_________________________________________________________________66<br />
4.2.6.1 General ____________________________________________________________________66<br />
4.2.6.2 <strong>Test</strong> Conditions______________________________________________________________67<br />
4.2.6.3 Calibration of 27 MHz Tele-powering flux ________________________________________68<br />
4.2.6.4 Balise Impedance Measurements ________________________________________________69<br />
4.2.7 Up-link Signal Characteristics_______________________________________________________71<br />
4.2.7.1 General ____________________________________________________________________71<br />
4.2.7.2 Nominal <strong>Test</strong> Conditions ______________________________________________________72<br />
4.2.7.3 Specific <strong>Test</strong> Conditions_______________________________________________________74<br />
4.2.7.4 Toggling AM <strong>Test</strong> Conditions __________________________________________________75<br />
4.2.7.5 Calibration of 27 MHz Tele-powering flux ________________________________________77<br />
4.2.7.6 <strong>Test</strong> of Centre Frequency and Frequency Deviation _________________________________79<br />
4.2.7.7 <strong>Test</strong> of Start-up after Side Lobe _________________________________________________80<br />
4.2.7.8 <strong>Test</strong> of Mean Data Rate _______________________________________________________80<br />
4.2.7.9 <strong>Test</strong> of MTIE (Maximum Time Interval Error) _____________________________________81<br />
4.2.7.10 <strong>Test</strong> of Amplitude Jitter during start-up ramp____________________________________81<br />
4.2.7.11 <strong>Test</strong> of Amplitude Jitter during steady state flux _________________________________82<br />
4.2.7.12 <strong>Test</strong> of Signal Bandwidth ___________________________________________________82<br />
4.2.7.13 <strong>Test</strong> of Delay Time and Balise controlling interface Parameter Variation ______________82<br />
4.2.7.14 <strong>Test</strong> of Compatibility ______________________________________________________83<br />
4.2.7.15 <strong>Test</strong> of Balise start with Toggling AM and steep Tele-powering slope ________________83<br />
4.2.7.16 <strong>Test</strong> Matrices_____________________________________________________________84
Page 5 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.8 Balise controlling interface per<strong>for</strong>mance measurements___________________________________88<br />
4.2.8.1 Introduction ________________________________________________________________88<br />
4.2.8.2 General <strong>Test</strong> Conditions _______________________________________________________88<br />
4.2.8.3 Electrical Data Requirements ___________________________________________________89<br />
4.2.8.4 Calibration of the 27 MHz Tele-powering flux _____________________________________94<br />
4.2.8.5 Functional <strong>Test</strong>s _____________________________________________________________96<br />
4.2.9 <strong>Test</strong> <strong>for</strong> damaging _______________________________________________________________108<br />
4.2.9.1 General ___________________________________________________________________108<br />
4.2.9.2 Calibration of Tele-powering flux level __________________________________________108<br />
4.2.9.3 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure, <strong>Test</strong> <strong>for</strong> damaging ______________________________________________108<br />
4.3 Requirements <strong>for</strong> <strong>Test</strong> Tools ________________________________________________108<br />
5 TESTS OF THE ON-BOARD EQUIPMENT_____________________________________ 109<br />
5.1 Reference <strong>Test</strong> Configurations_______________________________________________109<br />
5.1.1 General _______________________________________________________________________109<br />
5.1.2 Monitored Interfaces _____________________________________________________________109<br />
5.1.3 <strong>Test</strong> Tools and Procedures_________________________________________________________110<br />
5.2 Laboratory <strong>Test</strong>s __________________________________________________________111<br />
5.2.1 General _______________________________________________________________________111<br />
5.2.1.1 Introduction _______________________________________________________________111<br />
5.2.1.2 General <strong>Test</strong> Set-up _________________________________________________________112<br />
5.2.1.3 <strong>Test</strong> Set-up Notes ___________________________________________________________113<br />
5.2.2 <strong>Test</strong> Conditions _________________________________________________________________114<br />
5.2.2.1 Nominal Conditions _________________________________________________________114<br />
5.2.2.2 Specific Conditions__________________________________________________________116<br />
5.2.3 Evaluation of Radiation Pattern_____________________________________________________118<br />
5.2.3.1 General Description _________________________________________________________118<br />
5.2.3.2 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure, Evaluation of Radiation Pattern ___________________________________120<br />
5.2.4 Creation of Signal Pattern <strong>for</strong> Dynamic <strong>Test</strong>s__________________________________________122<br />
5.2.4.1 General Description _________________________________________________________122<br />
5.2.4.2 Example of Signal Pattern Generation ___________________________________________124<br />
5.2.4.3 Example of Algorithm <strong>for</strong> Signal Pattern Generation _______________________________126<br />
5.2.5 Transmission <strong>Test</strong>s ______________________________________________________________128<br />
5.2.5.1 General Description _________________________________________________________128<br />
5.2.5.2 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure, Transmission <strong>Test</strong>s _____________________________________________129<br />
5.2.5.3 Acceptance Criteria, Transmission <strong>Test</strong>s _________________________________________131<br />
5.2.6 Electrical Tele-powering Characteristics______________________________________________131<br />
5.2.6.1 General Description _________________________________________________________131
Page 6 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.6.2 <strong>Test</strong> Set-up <strong>for</strong> Tele-powering verification _______________________________________132<br />
5.2.6.3 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure, CW Mode ____________________________________________________133<br />
5.2.6.4 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure, Interoperable Mode_____________________________________________134<br />
5.2.6.5 Acceptance Criteria, Electrical Tele-powering Characteristics ________________________135<br />
5.2.7 Maximum Flux Level ____________________________________________________________135<br />
5.2.7.1 General Description _________________________________________________________135<br />
5.2.7.2 <strong>Test</strong> Set-up <strong>for</strong> Maximum Flux Level verification __________________________________136<br />
5.2.7.3 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure, Maximum Flux Level ___________________________________________137<br />
5.2.7.4 Acceptance Criteria, Maximum Flux Level _______________________________________137<br />
5.2.8 Electrical Up-link Signal Characteristics______________________________________________138<br />
5.2.8.1 General Description _________________________________________________________138<br />
5.2.8.2 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure, Electrical Up-link Characteristics__________________________________138<br />
5.2.8.3 <strong>Test</strong> Cases _________________________________________________________________139<br />
5.2.8.4 Acceptance Criteria, Electrical Up-link Characteristics ______________________________139<br />
5.2.9 Cross-talk Immunity _____________________________________________________________140<br />
5.2.9.1 General Description _________________________________________________________140<br />
5.2.9.2 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure, Cross-talk Immunity ____________________________________________141<br />
5.2.9.3 Acceptance Criteria, Cross-talk Immunity ________________________________________142<br />
5.2.10 Cross-talk Immunity with Cables _________________________________________________143<br />
5.2.10.1 General ________________________________________________________________143<br />
5.2.10.2 Cross-talk Measurements __________________________________________________144<br />
5.2.10.3 LZB Cable <strong>Test</strong>ing _______________________________________________________148<br />
5.2.11 Balise Detectability Supervision __________________________________________________151<br />
5.2.11.1 General Description ______________________________________________________151<br />
5.2.11.2 Acceptance Criteria, Balise Detectability Supervision ____________________________151<br />
5.2.12 Handling of various Telegrams___________________________________________________152<br />
5.2.12.1 General Description ______________________________________________________152<br />
5.2.12.2 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure, Handling of various Telegrams_________________________________152<br />
5.2.12.3 Acceptance Criteria, Handling of various Telegrams _____________________________152<br />
5.2.13 Handling of Balise Sequences____________________________________________________153<br />
5.2.13.1 General Description ______________________________________________________153<br />
5.2.13.2 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure, Handling of Balise Sequences__________________________________153<br />
5.2.13.3 Acceptance Criteria, Handling of Balise Sequences ______________________________153<br />
5.2.14 Fundamental concepts of Basic Receiver ___________________________________________154<br />
5.2.14.1 General Description ______________________________________________________154<br />
5.2.14.2 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure, Fundamental concepts of Basic Receiver _________________________154<br />
5.2.14.3 Acceptance Criteria, Fundamental concepts of Basic Receiver _____________________155
Page 7 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.3 Requirements <strong>for</strong> <strong>Test</strong> Tools ________________________________________________155<br />
ANNEX A (NORMATIVE), REFERENCE TEST TELEGRAMS _________________________ 156<br />
A1 GENERAL __________________________________________________________ 156<br />
A2 TEST TELEGRAMS ___________________________________________________ 157<br />
A3 SPECIFIC TEST TELEGRAMS ___________________________________________ 161<br />
ANNEX B (NORMATIVE), AIR-GAP REFERENCE EQUIPMENT _______________________ 163<br />
B1 GENERAL __________________________________________________________ 163<br />
B2 REFERENCE LOOPS __________________________________________________ 163<br />
B2.1 Size of Reference Loops __________________________________________________163<br />
B2.2 Field Requirements ______________________________________________________164<br />
B2.2.1 Magnetic Field (H-field) ________________________________________________________164<br />
B2.2.2 Electric Field (E-field) _________________________________________________________165<br />
B2.3 Compensation <strong>for</strong> the Impedance of the Reference Loop _______________________166<br />
B2.4 Frequency Characteristics of the Reference Field _____________________________167<br />
B2.5 Influence of Debris ______________________________________________________167<br />
B2.5.1 The flux through the Reference Area ______________________________________________167<br />
B2.5.2 The field from the Balise________________________________________________________167<br />
B2.6 Con<strong>for</strong>mity <strong>Test</strong>ing of Reference Loops _____________________________________168<br />
B2.6.1 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure________________________________________________________________168<br />
B2.6.2 Measurement set-up ___________________________________________________________169<br />
B2.6.3 Instrument set-up and Calibration_________________________________________________170<br />
B2.6.4 Compensation <strong>for</strong> the impedance of the Reference Loop _______________________________170<br />
B2.6.5 <strong>Test</strong> Environment _____________________________________________________________172<br />
B2.6.6 Calculation of correction factors__________________________________________________172<br />
B2.6.7 Labelling and Marking of Reference Loops _________________________________________174<br />
B2.7 Application <strong>for</strong> Reference Loop Calibration _________________________________175<br />
B2.7.1 General _____________________________________________________________________175<br />
B2.7.2 Standard Size Reference Loop ___________________________________________________176<br />
B2.7.3 Reduced Size Reference Loop ___________________________________________________180<br />
B3 TEST ANTENNA _____________________________________________________ 184<br />
B3.1 Size of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna __________________________________________________184<br />
B3.2 Field Requirements ______________________________________________________184<br />
B3.3 Impedance _____________________________________________________________184
Page 8 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B4 ACTIVATION ANTENNA _______________________________________________ 185<br />
B4.1 Size of the Activation Antenna _____________________________________________185<br />
B4.2 Field Requirements ______________________________________________________185<br />
B4.3 Impedance _____________________________________________________________185<br />
B5 CONDITIONS TO BE TESTED ____________________________________________ 185<br />
B5.1 General ________________________________________________________________185<br />
B5.2 Debris _________________________________________________________________186<br />
B5.2.1 General _____________________________________________________________________186<br />
B5.2.2 Liquid Debris ________________________________________________________________186<br />
B5.2.3 Non-liquid Debris _____________________________________________________________187<br />
B5.2.4 Reference Loop and Balise ______________________________________________________188<br />
B5.2.4.1 Salt Water ______________________________________________________________188<br />
B5.2.4.2 Clear Water _____________________________________________________________188<br />
B5.2.4.3 Iron Ore (Magnetite) ______________________________________________________188<br />
B5.2.4.4 Iron Ore (Hematite)_______________________________________________________188<br />
B5.2.4.5 Fresh Snow _____________________________________________________________188<br />
B5.2.4.6 Wet Snow ______________________________________________________________189<br />
B5.2.4.7 Ice ____________________________________________________________________189<br />
B5.2.4.8 Ballast _________________________________________________________________189<br />
B5.2.4.9 Dry Sand _______________________________________________________________189<br />
B5.2.4.10 Wet Sand _______________________________________________________________189<br />
B5.2.4.11 Mud without Salt Water ___________________________________________________189<br />
B5.2.4.12 Mud with Salt Water ______________________________________________________189<br />
B5.2.4.13 Iron Dust _______________________________________________________________190<br />
B5.2.4.14 Coal Dust_______________________________________________________________190<br />
B5.2.4.15 Oil and Grease___________________________________________________________190<br />
B5.2.5 Antenna _____________________________________________________________________190<br />
B5.2.5.1 Ice ____________________________________________________________________190<br />
B5.2.5.2 Fresh Snow _____________________________________________________________190<br />
B5.2.5.3 Wet Snow ______________________________________________________________190<br />
B5.2.5.4 Mud without Salt Water ___________________________________________________191<br />
B5.2.5.5 Mud with Salt Water ______________________________________________________191<br />
B5.2.5.6 Iron Ore (Magnetite) ______________________________________________________191<br />
B5.2.5.7 Iron Ore (Hematite)_______________________________________________________191<br />
B5.2.5.8 Iron Dust _______________________________________________________________191<br />
B5.2.5.9 Coal Dust_______________________________________________________________191
Page 9 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B5.2.5.10 Oil and Grease___________________________________________________________191<br />
B5.3 Metallic Objects_________________________________________________________192<br />
B5.3.1 Iron Bars outside the metallic free volume of the Balise _______________________________192<br />
B5.3.2 Guard Rails __________________________________________________________________193<br />
B5.3.3 Metallic Plane underneath the Balise ______________________________________________194<br />
B5.3.4 Steel Sleepers ________________________________________________________________195<br />
B5.3.5 Other Sleepers________________________________________________________________196<br />
B5.3.6 Loop Cable __________________________________________________________________196<br />
B5.3.7 Metallic objects outside the metal free volume of the Antenna Unit ______________________197<br />
B5.3.8 Metallic Masses in the Track ____________________________________________________199<br />
ANNEX C (NORMATIVE), MEASUREMENT POINTS _______________________________ 200<br />
C1 GEOMETRICAL TEST POINTS CONTACT ZONE _____________________________ 200<br />
C2 GEOMETRICAL TEST POINTS SIDE LOBE ZONE ____________________________ 201<br />
C3 GEOMETRICAL TEST POINTS CROSS-TALK PROTECTED ZONE ________________ 202<br />
C4 TEST POINTS FOR CONTACT ZONE AND SIDE-LOBE ZONE_____________________ 203<br />
C5 TEST POINTS FOR CROSS-TALK PROTECTED ZONE__________________________ 204<br />
C6 TEST MATRIX FOR TRANSMISSION AND CROSS-TALK TESTS__________________ 205<br />
C6.1 <strong>Test</strong> Conditions versus <strong>Test</strong> Zones__________________________________________205<br />
C6.2 <strong>Test</strong> Conditions versus Geometrical <strong>Test</strong> Points ______________________________206<br />
C7 TEST MATRIX FOR OTHER CHARACTERISTICS ____________________________ 207<br />
C7.1 <strong>Test</strong> Conditions versus Characteristics ______________________________________207<br />
C7.2 <strong>Test</strong> Conditions versus Geometrical <strong>Test</strong> Points ______________________________208<br />
C7.3 Source of data <strong>for</strong> Controlled Balises versus <strong>Test</strong> Cases ________________________209<br />
ANNEX D (INFORMATIVE), DESCRIPTIONS OF TEST TOOLS ________________________ 210<br />
D1 DESCRIPTION OF TIME AND ODOMETER MODULE (LTOM) __________________ 210<br />
D1.1 Operational Context _____________________________________________________210<br />
D1.2 Functional requirements__________________________________________________211<br />
D1.2.1 Basic functions _______________________________________________________________211<br />
D1.2.2 Operational modes ____________________________________________________________211<br />
D1.2.2.1 General ________________________________________________________________211<br />
D1.2.2.2 Idle or static mode________________________________________________________211<br />
D1.2.2.3 Self-test mode ___________________________________________________________211
Page 10 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D1.2.2.4 Dynamic simulated mode __________________________________________________212<br />
D1.2.2.5 Real dynamic mode_______________________________________________________212<br />
D1.3 External interfaces ______________________________________________________213<br />
D1.3.1 Interface T4__________________________________________________________________213<br />
D1.3.2 Man Machine Interface _________________________________________________________214<br />
D1.3.3 Interface V2__________________________________________________________________214<br />
D1.3.4 Interface V3__________________________________________________________________214<br />
D1.3.5 Interface V4__________________________________________________________________215<br />
D1.3.6 Interface S1 __________________________________________________________________215<br />
D1.3.7 Interface S2 __________________________________________________________________215<br />
D1.3.8 Interface S3 __________________________________________________________________215<br />
D1.3.9 Interface S4 __________________________________________________________________215<br />
D1.3.10 Interface S5________________________________________________________________216<br />
D1.4 Required per<strong>for</strong>mance ___________________________________________________216<br />
D2 DESCRIPTION OF REFERENCE SIGNAL GENERATOR (RSG) __________________ 217<br />
D2.1 Operational Context _____________________________________________________217<br />
D2.2 Functional requirements__________________________________________________218<br />
D2.2.1 Basic functions _______________________________________________________________218<br />
D2.2.1.1 General ________________________________________________________________218<br />
D2.2.1.2 RSG_1_________________________________________________________________219<br />
D2.2.1.3 RSG_2_________________________________________________________________220<br />
D2.2.1.4 RSG_C ________________________________________________________________220<br />
D2.2.2 Operational modes ____________________________________________________________221<br />
D2.2.2.1 RSG_1_________________________________________________________________221<br />
D2.2.2.2 RSG_2_________________________________________________________________221<br />
D2.2.2.3 RSG_C ________________________________________________________________222<br />
D2.3 External interfaces ______________________________________________________223<br />
D2.3.1 RSG_1______________________________________________________________________223<br />
D2.3.1.1 Interface with the LTMS___________________________________________________223<br />
D2.3.1.2 Interface with the LTOM __________________________________________________223<br />
D2.3.2 RSG_2______________________________________________________________________223<br />
D2.3.2.1 Interface with the LTMS___________________________________________________223<br />
D2.3.2.2 <strong>Test</strong> Antenna ____________________________________________________________223<br />
D2.3.2.3 Current Sense (CS) from <strong>Test</strong> Antenna________________________________________224<br />
D2.3.2.4 Interface with the LRRT ___________________________________________________224<br />
D2.3.3 RSG_C _____________________________________________________________________224<br />
D2.3.3.1 Interface with the LTMS___________________________________________________224
Page 11 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D2.3.3.2 Interface with the LTOM __________________________________________________224<br />
D2.4 Required per<strong>for</strong>mance ___________________________________________________225<br />
D2.4.1 RSG_1______________________________________________________________________225<br />
D2.4.2 RSG_2______________________________________________________________________225<br />
D2.4.3 RSG_C _____________________________________________________________________227<br />
D3 DESCRIPTION OF ANTENNA POSITIONING TOOL (APT)______________________ 228<br />
D3.1 Operational Context _____________________________________________________228<br />
D3.2 Functional requirements__________________________________________________229<br />
D3.2.1 Basic functions _______________________________________________________________229<br />
D3.2.2 Operational modes ____________________________________________________________230<br />
D3.2.2.1 General ________________________________________________________________230<br />
D3.2.2.2 Idle mode_______________________________________________________________230<br />
D3.2.2.3 Self test mode ___________________________________________________________230<br />
D3.2.2.4 Recovery of the lost position________________________________________________230<br />
D3.2.2.5 Quasi static antenna positioning _____________________________________________231<br />
D3.2.2.6 Continuous longitudinal antenna movement____________________________________231<br />
D3.3 External interfaces ______________________________________________________232<br />
D3.3.1 Interface T2__________________________________________________________________232<br />
D3.3.2 Man Machine Interface _________________________________________________________232<br />
D3.3.3 Interface V3__________________________________________________________________233<br />
D3.4 Required per<strong>for</strong>mance ___________________________________________________233<br />
D3.4.1 <strong>Test</strong> bed characteristics _________________________________________________________233<br />
D3.4.2 Positioning Accuracy __________________________________________________________234<br />
D4 DESCRIPTION OF OFF-LINE TELEGRAM GENERATOR (OLTG)________________ 236<br />
D4.1 Operational Context _____________________________________________________236<br />
D4.2 Functional requirements__________________________________________________237<br />
D4.2.1 Basic functions _______________________________________________________________237<br />
D4.2.2 Functional architecture _________________________________________________________238<br />
D4.3 External Interfaces ______________________________________________________239<br />
D4.3.1 User Data____________________________________________________________________239<br />
D4.3.1.1 General ________________________________________________________________239<br />
D4.3.1.2 Packet and variables representation __________________________________________239<br />
D4.3.1.3 Hexadecimal representation ________________________________________________239<br />
D4.3.2 Telegram File ________________________________________________________________239<br />
D4.3.3 Printout _____________________________________________________________________239
Page 12 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D5 DESCRIPTION OF TEST MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (LTMS) ____________________ 240<br />
D5.1 Operational Context _____________________________________________________240<br />
D5.2 Functional requirements__________________________________________________241<br />
D5.2.1 Basic Functions_______________________________________________________________241<br />
D5.2.2 Operational Modes ____________________________________________________________242<br />
D5.2.2.1 General ________________________________________________________________242<br />
D5.2.2.2 Idle and self-test mode ____________________________________________________242<br />
D5.2.2.3 <strong>Test</strong> procedure control_____________________________________________________243<br />
D5.3 External interfaces ______________________________________________________249<br />
D5.3.1 Man Machine Interface (MMI) ___________________________________________________249<br />
D5.3.2 Interface V1__________________________________________________________________250<br />
D5.3.3 Interface T1__________________________________________________________________250<br />
D5.3.4 Interface T2__________________________________________________________________250<br />
D5.3.5 Interface T3__________________________________________________________________250<br />
D5.3.6 Interface T4__________________________________________________________________250<br />
D5.3.7 Interface T5__________________________________________________________________250<br />
D5.3.8 Interface T6__________________________________________________________________250<br />
D5.3.9 Interface T7__________________________________________________________________251<br />
D5.4 Required per<strong>for</strong>mance ___________________________________________________251<br />
D6 DESCRIPTION OF REFERENCE RECEIVER TOOL (LRRT) ____________________ 252<br />
D6.1 Operational Context _____________________________________________________252<br />
D6.2 Functional requirements__________________________________________________253<br />
D6.2.1 Basic functions _______________________________________________________________253<br />
D6.2.2 Operational modes ____________________________________________________________254<br />
D6.2.2.1 Idle and self-test mode ____________________________________________________254<br />
D6.2.2.2 Up-link signal analysis (LRRT_1) ___________________________________________254<br />
D6.2.2.3 Tele-powering signal analysis (LRRT_2) ______________________________________258<br />
D6.2.2.4 Interface ‘C’ signal analysis (LRRT_C) _______________________________________260<br />
D6.3 External interfaces ______________________________________________________263<br />
D6.3.1 Interface T1__________________________________________________________________263<br />
D6.3.2 Fast trigger Interface S6 ________________________________________________________264<br />
D6.3.3 Man Machine Interface – MMI___________________________________________________264<br />
D6.4 Required per<strong>for</strong>mance ___________________________________________________265<br />
D6.4.1 LRRT_1 ____________________________________________________________________265<br />
D6.4.2 LRRT_2 ____________________________________________________________________265<br />
D6.4.3 LRRT_C ____________________________________________________________________265
Page 13 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
ANNEX E (INFORMATIVE), TEST INTERFACES FOR THE ON-BOARD EQUIPMENT _______ 266<br />
E1 INTERFACE V1 ______________________________________________________ 266<br />
E1.1 General ________________________________________________________________266<br />
E1.2 Operational Data ________________________________________________________266<br />
E1.2.1 Mode Selection (TESTCONF) ___________________________________________________266<br />
E1.2.2 Mode Status (BTMSTAT) ______________________________________________________267<br />
E1.2.3 Link Status (ALIVE)___________________________________________________________268<br />
E1.3 <strong>Test</strong> Data ______________________________________________________________268<br />
E1.3.1 Self-test Report (ANTTEST) ____________________________________________________268<br />
E1.3.2 Balise Passage Report (BALL_PASS) _____________________________________________269<br />
E2 INTERFACE V2 ______________________________________________________ 271<br />
E2.1 General ________________________________________________________________271<br />
E2.2 Interface V2 Data _______________________________________________________272<br />
E3 INTERFACE V4 ______________________________________________________ 273<br />
E3.1 General ________________________________________________________________273<br />
E3.2 Interface V4 Signals _____________________________________________________273<br />
E4 PHYSICAL AND LINK CONTROL_________________________________________ 274<br />
E4.1 Architecture ____________________________________________________________274<br />
E4.2 Physical Control ________________________________________________________275<br />
E4.2.1 General _____________________________________________________________________275<br />
E4.2.2 Interface ‘V 1 ’, Mechanical Data __________________________________________________275<br />
E4.2.3 Interface ‘V 2 ’, Mechanical Data __________________________________________________277<br />
E4.3 Link Control ___________________________________________________________279<br />
E4.3.1 General _____________________________________________________________________279<br />
E4.3.2 Interface ‘V 1 ’_________________________________________________________________279<br />
E4.3.3 Interface ‘V 2 ’_________________________________________________________________280<br />
E4.4 Interface ‘V 1 ’ Link Synchronisation ________________________________________281<br />
E4.4.1 General _____________________________________________________________________281<br />
E4.4.2 Case 1 – The BTM is switched on be<strong>for</strong>e the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver _______________________281<br />
E4.4.3 Case 2 – The Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver is switched on be<strong>for</strong>e the BTM _______________________282<br />
E4.4.4 Case 3 – The Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver is re-started but the BTM remains on __________________283<br />
E4.4.5 Case 4 – The BTM is re-started but the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver remains on __________________284<br />
E4.4.6 Behaviour of the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver _____________________________________________285<br />
ANNEX F (INFORMATIVE), TEST TOOLS AND INSTRUMENTS _______________________ 287
Page 14 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
F1 RECOMMENDED TEST TOOLS AND INSTRUMENTS __________________________ 287<br />
F2 RECOMMENDED HIGH POWER LOW PASS FILTER__________________________ 289<br />
F2.1 CHARACTERISTICS_________________________________________________ 289<br />
F2.2 SUGGESTED IMPLEMENTATION _______________________________________ 290<br />
F2.3 INDUCTOR CHARACTERISTICS ________________________________________ 291<br />
F3 SPECIFIC LOW PASS FILTER CHARACTERISTICS ___________________________ 292<br />
ANNEX G (INFORMATIVE), RECOMMENDED TEST PROCEDURES ____________________ 293<br />
G1 TESTING OF LEU OUTPUT RETURN LOSS_________________________________ 293<br />
G1.1 <strong>Test</strong> Abstract ___________________________________________________________293<br />
G1.2 <strong>Test</strong> Set-up <strong>for</strong> Interface ‘C1’ _____________________________________________293<br />
G1.3 Calibration of the test set-up <strong>for</strong> Interface ‘C1’ _______________________________294<br />
G1.4 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure <strong>for</strong> Interface ‘C1’ __________________________________________294<br />
G1.5 <strong>Test</strong> Set-up <strong>for</strong> Interface ‘C6’ _____________________________________________295<br />
G1.6 Calibration of the test set-up <strong>for</strong> Interface ‘C6’ _______________________________296<br />
G1.7 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure <strong>for</strong> Interface ‘C6’ __________________________________________297<br />
G2 HARMONIC CONTENTS ON THE INTERFACE ‘C6’ LEU OUTPUT________________ 298<br />
ANNEX H (INFORMATIVE), AIR-GAP REFERENCE EQUIPMENT _____________________ 299<br />
H1 GENERAL __________________________________________________________ 299<br />
H2 REFERENCE LOOPS __________________________________________________ 299<br />
H2.1 Reference Loop Design ___________________________________________________299<br />
H2.1.1 Overall Design _______________________________________________________________299<br />
H2.1.2 Loop Structure Mechanics ______________________________________________________301<br />
H2.1.3 Non-conductive Joints__________________________________________________________302<br />
H2.1.4 Printed Circuit Board __________________________________________________________302<br />
H2.1.5 PCB Components _____________________________________________________________302<br />
H2.1.6 Encapsulation ________________________________________________________________303<br />
H2.2 Utilisation of the Reference Loops __________________________________________303<br />
H2.3 Tuning of the Reference Loops ____________________________________________304<br />
H2.4 Calibration of the Reference Loops _________________________________________305<br />
H3 TEST ANTENNAS ____________________________________________________ 306<br />
H3.1 General ________________________________________________________________306
Page 15 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
H3.2 <strong>Test</strong> Antenna Design _____________________________________________________307<br />
H3.2.1 Overall Design _______________________________________________________________307<br />
H3.2.2 Screen Plate__________________________________________________________________308<br />
H3.2.3 Holder ______________________________________________________________________308<br />
H3.2.4 Loops_______________________________________________________________________308<br />
H3.2.4.1 General ________________________________________________________________308<br />
H3.2.4.2 Capacitors ______________________________________________________________308<br />
H3.2.4.3 Printed Circuit Board (PCB) ________________________________________________309<br />
H3.2.4.4 27.095 MHz Trans<strong>for</strong>mer __________________________________________________309<br />
H3.2.4.5 Current Sense Trans<strong>for</strong>mer and Current Probe __________________________________309<br />
H3.2.4.6 4.23 MHz Trans<strong>for</strong>mer ____________________________________________________310<br />
H3.2.5 Balun _______________________________________________________________________310<br />
H3.3 Modified <strong>Test</strong> Antenna Design_____________________________________________310<br />
H3.4 Tuning of <strong>Test</strong> Antenna __________________________________________________310<br />
H3.5 Per<strong>for</strong>mance Check of <strong>Test</strong> Antenna________________________________________311<br />
H4 ACTIVATION ANTENNAS ______________________________________________ 312<br />
H4.1 General ________________________________________________________________312<br />
H4.2 Activation Antenna Design ________________________________________________313<br />
H4.2.1 Overall Design _______________________________________________________________313<br />
H4.2.2 Spacer ______________________________________________________________________314<br />
H4.2.3 Loop _______________________________________________________________________314<br />
H4.2.3.1 General ________________________________________________________________314<br />
H4.2.3.2 Capacitors ______________________________________________________________314<br />
H4.2.3.3 Printed Circuit Board (PCB) ________________________________________________314<br />
H4.2.3.4 27.095 MHz Trans<strong>for</strong>mer __________________________________________________315<br />
H4.2.3.5 Current Sense Trans<strong>for</strong>mer and Current Probe __________________________________315<br />
H4.2.4 Connector Holder _____________________________________________________________315<br />
H4.2.5 Balun _______________________________________________________________________315<br />
H4.3 4.2 MHz Antenna Design _________________________________________________316<br />
H4.4 Tuning of Activation Antenna _____________________________________________316<br />
H4.5 Per<strong>for</strong>mance Check of Activation Antenna __________________________________316<br />
H5 BALUNS____________________________________________________________ 317<br />
H5.1 General ________________________________________________________________317<br />
H5.2 General Purpose Balun Design_____________________________________________317<br />
H5.2.1 Overall Design _______________________________________________________________317<br />
H5.2.2 Toroid ______________________________________________________________________318
Page 16 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
H5.3 Reference Loop Balun Design _____________________________________________318<br />
H5.3.1 Overall Design _______________________________________________________________318<br />
H5.3.2 Toroid ______________________________________________________________________318<br />
H5.4 Current Sense Balun Design_______________________________________________319<br />
H5.4.1 Overall Design _______________________________________________________________319<br />
H5.4.2 Toroid ______________________________________________________________________319<br />
H5.4.3 Current Probe ________________________________________________________________320<br />
H5.5 Calibration of the Current Sense Balun _____________________________________320<br />
ANNEX I (INFORMATIVE), BIBLIOGRAPHY _____________________________________ 322<br />
ANNEX J (INFORMATIVE), TEST TOOL FOR LZB CABLE TESTING ___________________ 324<br />
J1 GENERAL __________________________________________________________ 324<br />
J2 OVERALL DESIGNS __________________________________________________ 324<br />
J2.1 General __________________________________________________________________324<br />
J2.2 Vertical Loop used <strong>for</strong> 4.2 MHz Balise <strong>Test</strong>s ___________________________________324<br />
J2.3 Horizontal Loop used <strong>for</strong> 4.2 MHz On-board Equipment <strong>Test</strong>s____________________326<br />
J2.4 Vertical Loop used <strong>for</strong> 27 MHz <strong>Test</strong>s _________________________________________329<br />
J3 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD AND COMPONENTS _____________________________ 331<br />
J4 TUNING OF THE LZB LOOP____________________________________________ 332
Page 17 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
1 Introduction<br />
1.1 Application Range<br />
This Norm is part of the overall set of normative background that constitutes the basis <strong>for</strong> the European Union<br />
Directive 96/48/EC on trans-European High Speed Railway Network Interoperability, and <strong>for</strong> the relevant Technical<br />
<strong>Specification</strong> <strong>for</strong> Interoperability (TSI).<br />
The TSI (Technical <strong>Specification</strong> <strong>for</strong> Interoperability) defines the concept of “Technical Interoperability” that<br />
applies to the “Constituents” of the Control-Command Sub-System.<br />
As far as the Balise Location and Transmission System is concerned, the wayside Balises and the complete Onboard<br />
ATP/ATC equipment, including the Balise Location and Transmission Functionality, are interoperability<br />
“Constituents” considered in this Norm.<br />
Wherever this document refers to “Part 1 of this Norm”, it means referring to UNISIG SUBSET-036.<br />
1.2 Scope<br />
This Part 2 of the Norm defines the specific set of verifications required <strong>for</strong> certification of con<strong>for</strong>mity and<br />
suitability <strong>for</strong> use <strong>for</strong> all the <strong>Eurobalise</strong> data transmission products, as defined by Part 1.<br />
These units are the Balises, (standing alone fixed data Balises, or controlled data Balises linked to the wayside<br />
signalling system) and the On-board Antenna Units integrated with the transmission functionality of the overall<br />
On-board ATP/ATC equipment.<br />
The verifications dealt with in this Norm are aimed at ensuring full and safe interoperability between wayside<br />
and On-board equipment of any supplier. For this purpose, this part of the Norm mostly addresses all those<br />
requirements that are specifically stated as mandatory in the Part 1.<br />
Some interesting non-mandatory requirements (defined as recommended, preferred, or optional solutions) are<br />
also considered in the annexes herein. This is <strong>for</strong> the purposes of supporting product interchangeability and<br />
maintainability.<br />
The “<strong>Eurobalise</strong>” denomination can only identify those commercial products that have got certification of con<strong>for</strong>mity<br />
compliance, based on the test requirements of the present Norm, by an officially recognised body.<br />
This part of the Norm specifies detailed functional and non-functional test requirements <strong>for</strong> the Balise, identified<br />
as a basic wayside constituent of interoperability.<br />
A special focus is given to the air-gap interface, where the Balise interacts with the On-board equipment. The<br />
air-gap requirements <strong>for</strong> the Balise have been defined in all needed details in Part 1 of the Norm.<br />
The interface of the Balise with the wayside equipment is also considered, mainly <strong>for</strong> the purpose of interchangeability<br />
of wayside components.<br />
This part of the Norm specifies a set of functional and non-functional test requirements <strong>for</strong> the transmission<br />
parts of the On-board equipment, which are deemed indispensable <strong>for</strong> the purpose of interoperability. Also in<br />
this case, a special focus is given to the air-gap interface, where the On-board Antenna Unit interacts with the<br />
wayside Balise.
Page 18 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Compared with the Balise case, only a minimum set of mandatory test requirements has been defined <strong>for</strong> the Onboard<br />
equipment. This allows any kind of optimisation, in costs and per<strong>for</strong>mance, <strong>for</strong> the overall architecture of<br />
the On-board system, while still ensuring interoperability.<br />
The specific test set-ups presented herein are recommendations only, and should primarily be regarded of principal<br />
nature. However, they are detailed enough to provide a solid basis <strong>for</strong> designing actual test set-ups, and<br />
they do include hints on important properties. Modifications are allowed as long the measurement accuracy is<br />
maintained, the same results are obtained, and the same properties are explored. There might in some cases be a<br />
need <strong>for</strong> additional precautions not to destroy specific instruments (due to high power levels).
Page 19 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
2 Normative References<br />
This Norm incorporates, by dated or undated references, provisions from other publications. These normative<br />
references are cited at the appropriate places in the text, and the publications are listed hereafter. For dated<br />
references, subsequent amendments to, or revisions of, any of these publications apply to this Norm only when<br />
incorporated herein by amendment or revision. For undated references, the latest edition of the publication<br />
referred to apply.<br />
Additional in<strong>for</strong>mative references are included in Annex I, Bibliography.<br />
I. UNISIG <strong>Specification</strong>s:<br />
A. UNISIG SUBSET-036, <strong>FFFIS</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Eurobalise</strong><br />
B. UNISIG SUBSET-023, Glossary of UNISIG Terms and Abbreviations<br />
3 Terminology and Definitions<br />
3.1 Acronyms and Abbreviations<br />
In general, the acronyms and abbreviations of Part 1 of this Norm (UNISIG SUBSET-036), and of UNISIG<br />
SUBSET-023, apply. The following list of additional acronyms applies within this part of the Norm:<br />
Acronym<br />
APT<br />
CS<br />
DUT<br />
GUI<br />
ID<br />
LRRT<br />
LTMS<br />
LTOM<br />
OLTG<br />
PCB<br />
RF<br />
RSG<br />
VSWR<br />
Explanation<br />
Antenna Positioning Tool<br />
Current Sense<br />
Device Under <strong>Test</strong><br />
Graphical User Interface<br />
Identity<br />
Laboratory Reference Receiver Tool<br />
Laboratory <strong>Test</strong> and Measurement System<br />
Laboratory Time and Odometer Module<br />
Off-line Telegram Generator<br />
Printed Circuit Board<br />
Radio Frequency<br />
Reference Signal Generator<br />
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
Page 20 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
The following additional abbreviations apply:<br />
Abbreviation<br />
Char<br />
Tel.<br />
Explanation<br />
Character<br />
Telegram<br />
3.2 Definitions<br />
In general, the definitions of Part 1 of this Norm (UNISIG SUBSET-036), and of UNISIG SUBSET-023, apply.<br />
3.3 Influence of Tolerances<br />
The general requirement stated in Part 1 of this Norm regarding test tolerances should be observed. The requirements<br />
in the specification limits do not involve the error of the test equipment that is used in the test process,<br />
unless this is expressly written. This means that a maximum limit value shall be decreased, and a minimum<br />
limit value shall be increased with the applicable equipment error during test. Thus, the use of a very accurate<br />
test tool widens the allowed tolerances <strong>for</strong> the actual test object.<br />
The number of digits, which the specific parameter values are expressed in, regarding the limits stated within<br />
Part 1 of this Norm are not to be regarded as significant digits. The tolerances state the accuracy, and thus the<br />
significance of the digits. Thus, they (the expressed number of digits) do not imply a certain required accuracy<br />
or resolution. The required resolution and accuracy must be evaluated by other means. A general principle is<br />
that the accuracy/resolution of test tools should be in the order of 1 % (or possibly 5 %) of the specified tolerance<br />
range (if feasible), or better. Using better tools allow a wider tolerance range <strong>for</strong> the actual device under<br />
test (DUT). In some cases this high accuracy is not feasible (can not be achieved in a reasonable way), but the<br />
reason <strong>for</strong> this shall be explained/justified.<br />
In this Norm, calibration procedures and calibration set-ups are repeated in each test description. The spirit is<br />
neither that this reflects the sequence of the activities, nor that re-calibration is frequently required. The important<br />
thing is to calibrate when deemed necessary to achieve the required accuracy.
Page 21 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4 <strong>Test</strong>s of the Up-link Balise<br />
4.1 Reference <strong>Test</strong> Configurations<br />
4.1.1 General<br />
The following conditions should apply <strong>for</strong> the majority of the tests where no specific environmental or operational<br />
condition is required.<br />
Ambient temperature 25 °C ± 10 °C<br />
Relative humidity 25 % to 75 %<br />
Atmospheric Pressure<br />
86 kPa to 106 kPa<br />
Debris in the air-gap<br />
None<br />
Tele-powering mode<br />
CW<br />
EMC noise within the Up-link frequency band<br />
Negligible<br />
The environmental conditions of the table above should be maintained as far as reasonably possible. Monitoring<br />
of the conditions should apply if it can not be guaranteed that the limits are fulfilled.<br />
In order to minimise the possible influence from the surrounding environment, there shall be a volume around<br />
the Antenna Unit and the Balise under test that is free from metallic objects. The minimum extent of this volume<br />
is defined in Figure 1. This volume is also referred to as “free space“ condition. The space below 0.4 m<br />
(but above 0.7 m) underneath the Balise shall not contain any solid metal planes, and only a few metallic supports<br />
are allowed within 0.7 m underneath the Balise.<br />
Antenna<br />
center<br />
X<br />
center<br />
Balise<br />
0.4 m / 0.7 m<br />
Z<br />
Min. 1 m<br />
No metallic objects are<br />
allowed in this zone.<br />
Min. 1 m<br />
Min. 1 m<br />
Antenna<br />
Balise<br />
Min. 1 m<br />
Min. 1 m<br />
Min. 1 m<br />
Min. 1 m<br />
Figure 1: Definition of “free space” around the sub-system under test
Page 22 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.1.2 Monitored Interfaces<br />
The following interfaces are used:<br />
• Interface ‘A’ (the air-gap interface).<br />
• Interface ‘C’ (the Balise controlling interface).<br />
4.1.3 <strong>Test</strong> Tools and Procedures<br />
The following list summarises the herein-defined tests:<br />
1. Verification of Interface ‘A’ (air-gap):<br />
1.1. Field con<strong>for</strong>mity in the contact zone, and in the side-lobe zone, <strong>for</strong> the Tele-powering field received<br />
by the Balise;<br />
1.2. Field con<strong>for</strong>mity in the contact zone, side lobe zone, and cross-talk protected zone, <strong>for</strong> the Uplink<br />
field generated by the Balise;<br />
1.3. Compliance of the electrical characteristics of the Up-link signal;<br />
2. Verification of Balise controlling interface <strong>for</strong> controlled Balises:<br />
2.1. Up-link data signal characteristics at Interface ‘C1’;<br />
2.2. Biasing signal characteristics at Interface ‘C6’;<br />
2.3. Return Loss at the source end (LEU output) of Interfaces ‘C1’ and ‘C6’;<br />
2.4. Switching from Interface ‘C1’ telegram to the Default Telegram when an invalid signal is temporarily<br />
or permanently simulated at Interface ‘C1’;<br />
2.5. Blocking signal characteristics at Interface ‘C4’ (where applicable).<br />
3. Verification of internal functionality:<br />
3.1. I/O characteristics;<br />
3.2. Balise impedance with respect to the Tele-powering source;<br />
3.3. Time delay between data at Interfaces ‘C1’ and ‘A1’ (controlled Balises only);<br />
3.4. Start-up behaviour of the Up-link signal;<br />
3.5. KER compatible response with a “non-toggling” Tele-powering signal.<br />
4. Verification of cross-talk immunity with nearby cables (transversal cables according to the specific<br />
installation constraints given by the manufacturer).<br />
5. Verification of the compliance with some specific EMC requirements.<br />
The following tools are anticipated <strong>for</strong> the Balise tests:<br />
• <strong>Test</strong> Management System, used <strong>for</strong> co-ordinating the measurements, controlling the other tools of<br />
the test set-up, and <strong>for</strong> logging and reporting the test results;<br />
• Antenna Positioning Tool;<br />
• Reference Loops (Standard or Reduced Size type) equipped with Baluns;<br />
• <strong>Test</strong> and Activation Antennas;<br />
• Reference Signal Generators;<br />
• Telegram Generator;<br />
• Reference Receiver;<br />
• RF instruments and accessories of general use;<br />
• Reference Units <strong>for</strong> debris, metallic masses, and cables.
Page 23 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2 Laboratory <strong>Test</strong>s<br />
4.2.1 Generic <strong>Test</strong> and Calibration Set-up notes<br />
The following aspects shall be respected <strong>for</strong> all test set-ups within this clause (clause 4). For some set-ups all<br />
aspects apply, but <strong>for</strong> others only some apply. The applicability is evident from the recommended test set-ups<br />
presented herein.<br />
• A spectrum analyser or similar equipment may substitute any power meter. However, this device shall be<br />
calibrated against a power meter prior to the test.<br />
• It shall be verified that all harmonics are suppressed by at least 40 dB if power meters are used. Otherwise,<br />
sufficient filtering shall be per<strong>for</strong>med.<br />
• All input and output ports of the devices in accordance with clause H3 on page 306 and H4 on page 312<br />
shall be equipped with suitable baluns (these are part of the defined devices).<br />
• The attenuators connected be<strong>for</strong>e and after the RF power amplifier shall be positioned as close as possible<br />
to the amplifier, and are used <strong>for</strong> ensuring good VSWR. The attenuator on the amplifier output is also used<br />
<strong>for</strong> protecting the amplifier from reflected power.<br />
• It is important that all cabling is of low loss double shielded type (e.g., RG 214). Furthermore, the cables<br />
shall be “de-bugged” using suitable ferrite clamps, evenly spaced along the cables, at distances less than<br />
70 cm. The core material in the ferrite clamps shall be “Amidon 43” or equivalent.<br />
• The calibrations and tests shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with Balise telegram of type 1 defined in clause A2 of Annex<br />
A on page 157, unless otherwise explicitly stated. The Balise, the Reference Loop and the “cable” (during<br />
cross-talk tests) shall transmit the same telegram.<br />
• RMS values are applicable unless otherwise explicitly stated.<br />
• Iron bars shall be at least 50 cm from metal objects like a concrete floor containing iron rein<strong>for</strong>cements.<br />
• The cable carrying the 27 MHz signal to the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna (see clause H3 of Annex H on page 306) shall be<br />
identical throughout the entire test process.<br />
• It is essential that the Reference Loops used during the tests fulfil the requirements of clause B2 of Annex B<br />
on page 163, and are characterised prior to testing. The procedure <strong>for</strong> characterisation of the equipment is<br />
defined by sub-clause B2.6 of Annex B on page 168.<br />
• Ferrite devices shall be used in order to reduce the RF field effect on the measurements. A balun basically<br />
consists of a ferrite core (see clause H5 of Annex H on page 317 <strong>for</strong> more details). A balun shall be positioned<br />
at the end of the cable, i.e., at the Reference Loop connector, unless otherwise explicitly stated.<br />
• All distances are in millimetres unless explicitly otherwise stated.<br />
• The orientation of the Reduced Size Balise/Reference Loop is irrelevant unless otherwise explicitly stated.<br />
However, calibrations and measurements shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with the same orientation.<br />
• In case of testing with some debris conditions, please observe the increase of flux levels (when applicable)<br />
as defined in Part 1 of this Norm.
Page 24 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
• In case of verifying characteristics at the upper extreme temperature, it is judged sufficient to per<strong>for</strong>m testing<br />
with constant temperature only (without concurrent solar radiation). It is judged relevant that the maximum<br />
increase in temperature that would have been caused by the (non-existing) specified solar radiation<br />
level (see sub-clause 4.9 of EN 50125-3), in the worst Balise conditions, is 30 °C. This shall be considered<br />
when applying the requirements of Part 1 of this Norm, unless the manufacturer can provide evidence that a<br />
lower temperature increase applies.<br />
• The defined installation case with metallic plane in the extreme vicinity of the Balise may require specifically<br />
tuned Balises (see UNISIG SUBSET-036). In such a case, the metallic plane is considered an integral<br />
part of the Balise. However, please observe that field con<strong>for</strong>mity requirements apply to free air conditions.<br />
• For specifically tuned Balises (with an integral metallic plane), the herein defined “Case 1” and “Case 2”<br />
metallic planes do not apply.<br />
• In general, testing the condition with the metallic plane in the extreme vicinity of the Balise is optional and<br />
applies only to products stated to fulfil this specific installation condition.<br />
• If not otherwise explicitly stated, the defined “Case 1” metallic plane condition applies <strong>for</strong> Balise testing<br />
(when metallic plane conditions apply).<br />
• Applicable sources of data <strong>for</strong> controlled Balises versus test cases are clarified in sub-clause C7.3 on page<br />
209. 5<br />
5<br />
Sub-clause C7.3 does not introduce any new test cases relative to the previous version of this test specification. It merely<br />
clarifies the intent of the main text.
Page 25 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.2 Up-link Field Con<strong>for</strong>mity<br />
4.2.2.1 General<br />
This sub-clause defines the test procedure <strong>for</strong> Up-link field con<strong>for</strong>mity testing. It also includes the various test<br />
set-ups that are recommended. The test procedures include two different steps with partially different test setups.<br />
The steps are:<br />
• Calibration of 4.2 MHz Balise loop current I loop .<br />
• Balise con<strong>for</strong>mity measurements.<br />
There are two versions of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna used in this test procedure. The first is the Standard <strong>Test</strong> Antenna,<br />
or simply <strong>Test</strong> Antenna. The second is the Modified <strong>Test</strong> Antenna. This device has no 27 MHz loop but is<br />
apart from this identical to the Standard <strong>Test</strong> Antenna. Both versions are described in clause H3 of Annex H on<br />
page 306.<br />
There are also two versions of Activation Antennas. The first is the standard Activation Antenna with a 27 MHz<br />
loop. The second device is modified so that the 27 MHz loop is replaced by a 4.2 MHz loop. This device is<br />
only used as a measurement probe, and is identical to the Activation Antenna apart from the change of loops.<br />
This device is named 4.2 MHz Antenna. Both versions are described in clause H4 of Annex H on page 312.<br />
The calibrations and tests shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with a Balise telegram of type 1 defined in clause A2 of Annex A<br />
on page 157. Both the Balise and the Reference Loop shall transmit the same telegram. In all tests and calibrations<br />
with controlled Balise, telegrams transmitted via the Balise controlling interface shall be used (with nominal<br />
Balise controlling interface conditions).<br />
Balise con<strong>for</strong>mity measurements shall be per<strong>for</strong>med during free air conditions only.
Page 26 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.2.2 Calibration of 4.2 MHz Balise Loop Current in the Contact Zone<br />
4.2.2.2.1 Calibration Configuration<br />
A proposed calibration set-up is shown in Figure 2 below. Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an example<br />
of suitable test equipment. Power Meter 2 shall be able to accurately measure signal levels down to -55 dBm. If<br />
Power Meter 2 is substituted by <strong>for</strong> instance a spectrum analyser, then the measurement bandwidth of this device<br />
shall be 1.2 MHz. The preamplifier, and the filter be<strong>for</strong>e it, shall be connected as close as possible to the <strong>Test</strong><br />
Antenna. The filter after the preamplifier shall be connected as close as possible to the Power Meter 2. See also<br />
sub-clause 4.2.1 on page 23.<br />
Power<br />
Meter 3<br />
P lc<br />
11.<br />
Attenuator<br />
Balun<br />
14.<br />
P in<br />
3.<br />
2.<br />
13.<br />
RF<br />
Amplifier<br />
Attenuator<br />
Signal<br />
Generator<br />
50 Ω<br />
50 Ω<br />
C.S.<br />
18.<br />
Activation<br />
Antenna<br />
Reference Loop<br />
Interface ‘A’<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Antenna<br />
Filter 12.<br />
4.2 MHz<br />
7.<br />
6.<br />
15.<br />
Power<br />
Meter 2<br />
P M2<br />
12.<br />
Filter<br />
Pre-amplifier 16.<br />
Figure 2: <strong>Test</strong> set-up <strong>for</strong> calibration of 4.2 MHz Balise Loop Current
Page 27 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.2.2.2 Calibration Abstract<br />
This calibration procedure will give a reference value P 42RL <strong>for</strong> each measurement point, defined in clause C1 of<br />
Annex C on page 200, which shall be compared with the corresponding value P 42BA <strong>for</strong> the Balise. The reference<br />
value P 42RL is reflecting the flux received by the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna, and measured by Power Meter 2 (P M2 ) and<br />
then compensated, and called P 42RL . The calibration is per<strong>for</strong>med with the current I u2 /B through the Reference<br />
Loop. The current through the Reference Loop is monitored by Power Meter 3 (P lc ).<br />
4.2.2.2.3 Calibration Procedure<br />
1. Position the Modified <strong>Test</strong> Antenna (without 27 MHz loop) in position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220] relative to<br />
the Reference Loop. Be sure to position the electrical centre of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna aligned with the electrical<br />
centre of the Reference Loop. Also check that the X, Y, and Z axes of the Reference Loop are correctly<br />
aligned to the X, Y, and Z axes of the positioning system. Position the Activation Antenna, in position<br />
[X = 440, Y = 220, Z = 0] relative to the Reference Loop. This position shall be fixed during the<br />
calibration.<br />
2. Set the Signal Generator to generate the FSK signal that carries telegram type 1.<br />
3. Adjust the Signal Generator amplitude in order to achieve a current of approximately I u2 /B through the<br />
Reference Loop.<br />
For calibration and compensation of the Current Sense Balun see clause H5 of Annex H on page 317.<br />
Record the reading of Power Meter 3 and call it P lc .<br />
4. Record the reading of Power Meter 2 (called P M2 ) and Power Meter 3 (called P M3 ).<br />
Repeat<br />
<strong>for</strong> each<br />
position<br />
5. Compensate the P M2 reading with the difference between the P M3 reading and the power level P lc ,<br />
<strong>for</strong> I u2 /B measured in step 3. 6 Call the new value P 42RL .<br />
P 42RL = P M2 + (P lc - P M3 ), all values in dBm.<br />
6. Per<strong>for</strong>m steps 4 and 5 <strong>for</strong> all the [X, Y, Z] positions listed in clause C1 of Annex C on page 200.<br />
6<br />
The reason <strong>for</strong> this compensation is that the relative accuracy <strong>for</strong> the value of P 42RL between the different positions needs<br />
to be very good, and that this procedure compensates <strong>for</strong> power amplifier drift and impedance changes in the Reference<br />
Loop when moving the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna.
Page 28 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.2.3 Balise Up-link Con<strong>for</strong>mity Measurements in the Contact Zone<br />
4.2.2.3.1 <strong>Test</strong> Configuration<br />
A proposed test set-up is shown in Figure 3 below. Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an example of<br />
suitable test equipment. Power Meter 3 shall be able to accurately measure signal levels down to –55 dBm. If<br />
Power Meter 3 is substituted, by <strong>for</strong> instance a spectrum analyser, then the measurement bandwidth of this device<br />
shall be 1.2 MHz. The preamplifier, and the filter be<strong>for</strong>e it, shall be connected as close as possible to the<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Antenna. The filter after the preamplifier shall be connected as close as possible to Power Meter 3. See<br />
also sub-clause 4.2.1 on page 23.<br />
15.<br />
Power<br />
Meter 3<br />
P M3<br />
12.<br />
Filter<br />
Pre-amplifier 16.<br />
4.2 MHz<br />
Filter<br />
12.<br />
4.<br />
Attenuator<br />
27 MHz<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Antenna<br />
6.<br />
3.<br />
RF<br />
Amplifier<br />
18.<br />
Activation<br />
Antenna<br />
Balise<br />
Interface ‘A’<br />
2.<br />
1.<br />
Attenuator<br />
Signal<br />
Generator<br />
C.S.<br />
P M2<br />
Power<br />
Meter 2<br />
10.<br />
Figure 3: <strong>Test</strong> set-up <strong>for</strong> Balise Up-Link Con<strong>for</strong>mity Measurements
Page 29 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.2.3.2 <strong>Test</strong> Abstract<br />
This measurement procedure will give a value P 42BA <strong>for</strong> each measurement point, defined in clause C1 of Annex<br />
C on page 200, which shall be compared with the corresponding reference value P 42RL <strong>for</strong> the Reference Loop<br />
measured in sub-clause 4.2.2.2.3 on page 27. The value P 42BA is reflecting the 4.2 MHz flux received by the<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Antenna, measured by Power Meter 3 (P M3 ) and subsequently compensated as defined by the test procedure.<br />
The Balise is Tele-powered by an Activation Antenna with a 27 MHz flux that results in the corresponding<br />
Up-link Balise current I u2 .<br />
4.2.2.3.3 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure<br />
1. Position the Modified <strong>Test</strong> Antenna (without 27 MHz loop) in position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220] relative to<br />
the Balise. Be sure to position the electrical centre of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna aligned with the centre of the<br />
Balise. Also check that the X, Y, and Z axes of the Balise are correctly aligned to the X, Y, and Z axes of<br />
the positioning system.<br />
Position the Activation Antenna, in position [X = 440, Y = 220, Z = 0] relative to the Balise. This position<br />
shall be fixed during the test.<br />
2. Set the Signal Generator to the frequency 27.095 MHz, and to CW.<br />
3. Adjust the Signal Generator amplitude in order to achieve a 4.2 MHz current in the Balise of approximately<br />
I U2 . This is accomplished by adjusting the Signal Generator until Power Meter 3 (P M3 ) gives a<br />
reading equal to the value of P 42RL measured in sub-clause 4.2.2.2.3 on page 27 <strong>for</strong> position [X = 0,<br />
Y = 0, Z = 220].<br />
Record the reading of Power Meter 2, and call it P CS .<br />
4. Record the reading of Power Meter 2 (P M2 ) and Power Meter 3 (P M3 ).<br />
Repeat<br />
<strong>for</strong> each<br />
position<br />
5. Compensate the P M3 reading with the difference between the P M2 reading and the P CS measured<br />
in step 3. Call the new value P 42BA . 7<br />
P 42BA = P M3 + (P CS - P M2 ), all values in dBm.<br />
6 Calculate the difference between P 42BA and P 42RL from sub-clause 4.2.2.2.3 on page 27, and call<br />
it P 42DIFF.<br />
P 42 DIFF = P 42BA - P 42RL<br />
7. Per<strong>for</strong>m steps 4, 5, and 6 <strong>for</strong> all the [X, Y, Z] positions of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna listed in clause C1 of Annex<br />
C on page 200. Note that the Activation Antenna position shall be fixed relative to the Balise.<br />
7<br />
The reason <strong>for</strong> this compensation is that the relative accuracy <strong>for</strong> the value of P 42BA , between the different positions,<br />
needs to be very good, and this procedure compensates <strong>for</strong> power amplifier drift and impedance changes in the Activation<br />
Antenna when moving the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna.
Page 30 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.2.4 Evaluation of Up-link Con<strong>for</strong>mity in the Contact Zone<br />
The results from the measurements in sub-clause 4.2.2.3.3 on page 29 (P 42DIFF ) shall be compared with the requirements<br />
in Part 1 of this Norm regarding con<strong>for</strong>mity in the contact zone. The field generated by the Balise<br />
shall be compared with the “Reference Field”. The requirement stated in Part 1 of this Norm is:<br />
• For the field generated by the Balise ± 1.5 dB.<br />
The value P 42DIFF reflects the absolute difference between the Reference Loop and the Balise. The requirement<br />
states the relative con<strong>for</strong>mity. There<strong>for</strong>e, the comparison with the requirement shall be relative.<br />
The Balise is con<strong>for</strong>m <strong>for</strong> the field generated by the Balise if:<br />
The highest P 42DIFF - the lowest P 42DIFF is less than 3 dB<br />
(P 42DIFFMAX - P 42DIFFMIN ) < 3 dB
Page 31 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.2.5 Calibration of 4.2 MHz Balise Loop Current in the Side Lobe Zone<br />
Use the same test set-up as in sub-clause 4.2.2.2.1 on page 26. The calibration procedure is the same as in subclause<br />
4.2.2.2.3 on page 27 except <strong>for</strong> the geometrical test points. Per<strong>for</strong>m the calibration procedure with the<br />
geometrical test points listed in clause C2 of Annex C on page 201.<br />
4.2.2.6 Up-link Reference Field in the Side Lobe Zone<br />
The output signal in the Side Lobe Zone <strong>for</strong> Up-link is defined in Part 1 of this Norm. The output signal from<br />
the Reference Loop is measured in sub-clause 4.2.2.5, and the result is a set of P 42RL values that shall be used to<br />
<strong>for</strong>m a “Reference Field”. This Reference Field gives the limits <strong>for</strong> the Balise output field strength in the Side<br />
Lobe Zone. The tolerances <strong>for</strong> con<strong>for</strong>mity with the Reference Field, stated in Part 1 of this Norm, are +5 dB<br />
to -∞. The Balise shall consequently give test results that show lower values than the Reference Field increased<br />
by 5 dB. The Reference Loop output shall also be translated +5 cm and –5 cm along the X and Y axes to <strong>for</strong>m<br />
the Reference Field. See Figure 4 that shows a Reference Field in one quadrant. Similar curves shall be plotted<br />
<strong>for</strong> all quadrants. The Reference Field is the curve <strong>for</strong>med by the highest of:<br />
• 35 dB below R0 (P 42RL value <strong>for</strong> position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220])<br />
• Reference Loop output displaced –5 cm<br />
• Reference Loop output<br />
• Reference Loop output displaced +5 cm<br />
5 cm<br />
Reference field<br />
35 dB<br />
R0<br />
Reference Loop<br />
field strength<br />
Contact zone<br />
Side lobe<br />
zone<br />
Cross-talk<br />
protected zone<br />
Figure 4 Up-link Reference Field in the Side Lobe Zone<br />
The co-ordinates that shall be evaluated are:<br />
X = 250 to 1300, Y = 0, Z = 220 X = -250 to -1300, Y = 0, Z = 220<br />
X = 0, Y = 200 to 1400, Z = 220 X = 0, Y = -200 to -1400, Z = 220<br />
4.2.2.7 Balise Up-link Con<strong>for</strong>mity Measurements in the Side Lobe Zone<br />
Use the same test set-up as in sub-clause 4.2.2.3.1 on page 28. The test procedure is the same as in sub-clause<br />
4.2.2.3.3 on page 29, except <strong>for</strong> the geometrical test points and that it is not needed to calculate the difference<br />
between P 42RL and P 42BA . Per<strong>for</strong>m the test procedure with the geometrical test points listed in clause C2 of<br />
Annex C on page 201. Exclude the geometrical points: [X = 200, Y = 0, Z = 220], [X = -200, Y = 0, Z = 220],<br />
[X = 0, Y = 150, Z = 220], and [X = 0, Y = -150, Z = 220].<br />
Plot the value P 42BA as a function of the position in four graphs, one <strong>for</strong> each quadrant.
Page 32 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.2.8 Evaluation of Up-link Con<strong>for</strong>mity in the Side Lobe Zone<br />
Part 1 of this Norm specifies that the Balise shall be con<strong>for</strong>m with the “Reference Field” in the Side Lobe Zone.<br />
The Reference Field <strong>for</strong> the Up-link is defined in Part 1 of this Norm, and recalled in sub-clause 4.2.2.6 on page<br />
31. The result of the Balise measurements <strong>for</strong> the Up-link in sub-clause 4.2.2.7 on page 31 shall be compared<br />
with the Reference Field. The tolerances <strong>for</strong> con<strong>for</strong>mity are stated in Part 1 of this Norm to be from -∞ to 5 dB<br />
above the Reference Field. See Figure 5.<br />
Maximum Balise response<br />
5 dB<br />
35 dB<br />
R0<br />
Reference field<br />
Contact zone<br />
Reference Loop<br />
field strength<br />
Side lobe<br />
zone<br />
Cross-talk<br />
protected zone<br />
Figure 5: Maximum Balise response (4.2 MHz) in the Side Lobe Zone
Page 33 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.2.9 Calibration of 4.2 MHz Balise Loop Current in the Cross-talk Protected Zone<br />
4.2.2.9.1 Calibration Configuration<br />
A proposed calibration set-up is shown in Figure 6 below. Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an example<br />
of suitable test equipment. A Reduced size Reference loop is used as field probe <strong>for</strong> these tests, instead of the<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Antenna, because of the very low field intensity to be measured. Power Meter 2 could alternatively be<br />
replaced by a narrow band measuring device, because it shall be able to accurately measure signal levels down<br />
to –75 dBm. In this case, the measurement bandwidth of this device shall be 1.2 MHz. See also sub-clause<br />
4.2.1 on page 23.<br />
10.<br />
Power<br />
Meter 3<br />
P lc<br />
11.<br />
Attenuator<br />
Balun<br />
14.<br />
P in<br />
3.<br />
RF<br />
Amplifier<br />
Reference Loop<br />
7.<br />
2.<br />
13.<br />
Attenuator<br />
Signal<br />
Generator<br />
50 Ω<br />
50 Ω<br />
18.<br />
Activation<br />
Antenna<br />
C.S.<br />
Interface ‘A’<br />
Reference Loop 19.<br />
Balun 8.<br />
4.2 MHz<br />
Filter 12.<br />
15.<br />
Power<br />
Meter 2<br />
P M2<br />
12.<br />
Filter<br />
Pre-amplifier 16.<br />
Figure 6: <strong>Test</strong> set-up <strong>for</strong> calibration of Up-link in the Cross-talk protected zone
Page 34 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.2.9.2 Calibration Abstract<br />
This calibration procedure will give a reference value P 42RL <strong>for</strong> each measurement point, defined in clause C3 of<br />
Annex C on page 202, which shall be used to define the Reference Field in the Cross-talk protected zone. The<br />
reference value P 42RL is reflecting the flux received by the Reduced Size Reference Loop, item 19, measured by<br />
Power Meter 2 (P M2 ), and subsequently compensated and called P 42RL . The compensation is done to give corresponding<br />
values between measurements with a <strong>Test</strong> Antenna and a Reference Loop used as measuring devices.<br />
The calibration is per<strong>for</strong>med with the current I u2 /B through the transmitting Reference Loop (item 7). The current<br />
through the receiving Reference Loop (item 19) is monitored by Power Meter 3 (P lc ).<br />
The orientation of the receiving Reference Loop is with its longest size parallel to the X axis. Locate the Activation<br />
Antenna in position [X = 440, Y = 220, Z = 0] relative to the Reference Loop, item 7.<br />
4.2.2.9.3 Calibration Procedure<br />
1. Position the Reference Loop, item 19 (below called RL_probe), in the position [X = 1000, Y = 0,<br />
Z = 220] relative to the Reference Loop. This position has previously been measured in the Side Lobe<br />
Zone and is only measured to refer the values measured with the RL_probe to the values previously<br />
measured with the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna. Be sure to position the electrical centre of the RL_probe aligned with<br />
respect to the electrical centre of the Reference Loop. Also check that the X, Y, and Z axes of the Reference<br />
Loop are correctly aligned to the X, Y, and Z axes of the positioning system.<br />
2. Set the Signal Generator to generate an FSK signal that carries telegram type 1.<br />
3. Adjust the Signal Generator amplitude in order to achieve a current of approximately I u2 /B through the<br />
transmitting Reference Loop.<br />
For calibration and compensation of the Current Sense Balun see clause H5 of Annex H on page 317.<br />
Record the reading of Power Meter 2 and call it P SB . Calculate the difference between P SB and the value<br />
P 42RL <strong>for</strong> position [X = 1000, Y = 0, Z = 220] measured in sub-clause 4.2.2.5 on page 31. Call it P OFFSET .<br />
P OFFSET = P SB - P 42RL (measured in sub-clause 4.2.2.5)<br />
Repeat<br />
<strong>for</strong> each<br />
position<br />
4. Record the reading of Power Meter 2 (called P M2 ).<br />
5. Compensate the P M2 reading with the offset value calculated in step 3. 8 Call the new value<br />
P 42RL .<br />
P 42RL = P M2 - P OFFSET , all values in dBm.<br />
6. Per<strong>for</strong>m 4 and 5 <strong>for</strong> all the [X, Y, Z] positions listed in clause C3 of Annex C on page 202.<br />
7. Position the RL_probe, in position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220] relative to the Reference Loop. Record the<br />
reading of Power Meter 2 and call it P RLPREF . This value is used in the Balise measurement below.<br />
8<br />
The reason <strong>for</strong> this compensation is that the value of P 42RL shall be compared with the corresponding values measured<br />
with the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna.
Page 35 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.2.10 Up-link Reference Field in the Cross-talk Protected Zone<br />
The output signal in the Cross-talk protected zone <strong>for</strong> Up-link is defined in Part 1 of this Norm. The output<br />
signal from the Reference Loop is measured in sub-clause 4.2.2.9, and the result is a set of P 42RL values that shall<br />
be used to <strong>for</strong>m a “Reference Field”. This Reference Field gives the limits <strong>for</strong> the Balise output field strength in<br />
the Cross-talk protected zone. The tolerances <strong>for</strong> con<strong>for</strong>mity with the Reference Field, stated in Part 1 of this<br />
Norm, are +5 dB to -∞. The Balise shall consequently give test results that show lower values than the Reference<br />
Field increased by 5 dB. See Figure 7 that shows a Reference Field in one quadrant. Similar curves shall<br />
be plotted <strong>for</strong> all quadrants. The Reference Field is the curve <strong>for</strong>med by the highest of:<br />
• 60 dB below R0 (P 42RL value <strong>for</strong> position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220])<br />
• Reference Loop field strength (measured in sub-clause 4.2.2.9)<br />
Reference field<br />
R0<br />
60 dB<br />
Contact zone<br />
Reference Loop<br />
field strength<br />
Side lobe<br />
zone<br />
Cross-talk<br />
protected zone<br />
Figure 7: Up-link Reference Field in the Cross-talk protected zone<br />
The co-ordinates that shall be evaluated are:<br />
X = 1300 to 3000, Y = 0, Z = 220 X = -1300 to -3000, Y = 0, Z = 220<br />
X = 0, Y = 1400 to 3000, Z = 220 X = 0, Y = -1400 to -3000, Z = 220
Page 36 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.2.11 Balise Up-link Con<strong>for</strong>mity Measurements in the Cross-talk Protected Zone<br />
4.2.2.11.1 <strong>Test</strong> Configuration<br />
A proposed test set-up is shown in Figure 8 below. Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an example of<br />
suitable test equipment. Power Meter 2 could alternatively be replaced by a narrow band measuring device,<br />
because it shall be able to accurately measure signal levels down to –75 dBm. In this case, the measurement<br />
bandwidth of this device shall be 1.2 MHz. See also sub-clause 4.2.1 on page 23.<br />
Power<br />
Meter 2<br />
15.<br />
P M2<br />
12.<br />
Filter<br />
16.<br />
Pre<br />
Amplifier<br />
12.<br />
Filter<br />
4.2 MHz<br />
Balun 8.<br />
Reference Loop 19.<br />
4.<br />
Attenuator<br />
27 MHz<br />
3.<br />
RF<br />
Amplifier<br />
18.<br />
Activation<br />
Antenna<br />
Balise<br />
Interface ‘A’<br />
2.<br />
1.<br />
Attenuator<br />
Signal<br />
Generator<br />
C.S.<br />
P M3<br />
Power<br />
Meter 3<br />
10.<br />
Figure 8: <strong>Test</strong> set-up <strong>for</strong> Balise measurement of Up-link in the Cross-talk protected zone<br />
4.2.2.11.2 <strong>Test</strong> Abstract<br />
This measurement procedure will give a value P 42BA <strong>for</strong> each measurement point, defined in clause C3 of Annex<br />
C on page 202, which shall be compared with the Reference Field defined in sub-clause 4.2.2.10. The value<br />
P 42BA is reflecting the 4.2 MHz flux received by the Reference Loop, item 19, measured by Power Meter 2 (P M2 )<br />
and subsequently compensated as defined by the test procedure. The compensation is per<strong>for</strong>med to give corresponding<br />
values between measurements with a <strong>Test</strong> Antenna and a Reference Loop used as measuring devices.<br />
The Balise is Tele-powered by an Activation Antenna with a 27 MHz flux that results in the corresponding Uplink<br />
Balise current I u2 .
Page 37 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.2.11.3 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure<br />
1. Position the Reference Loop, item 19 (below called RL_probe), in position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220] relative<br />
to the Balise. This position has previously been measured in sub-clause 4.2.2.9.3 on page 34, and is<br />
used <strong>for</strong> the adjustment of Balise current. Be sure to position the electrical centre of the RL_probe<br />
aligned with the electrical centre of the Balise. Also check that the X, Y, and Z axes of the Balise are<br />
correctly aligned to the X, Y, and Z axes of the positioning system. Position the Activation Antenna in<br />
position [X = 440, Y = 220, Z = 0] relative to the Balise. This position shall be fixed during the test.<br />
2. Set the Signal Generator to the frequency 27.095 MHz, and to CW.<br />
3. Adjust the Signal Generator amplitude in order to achieve a 4.2 MHz current in the Balise of approximately<br />
I U2 . This is accomplished by adjusting the Signal Generator until Power Meter 2 (P M2 ) gives a<br />
reading equal to the value of P RLPREF measured in sub-clause 4.2.2.9.3 on page 34 <strong>for</strong> position [X = 0,<br />
Y = 0, Z = 220].<br />
4. Position the RL_probe in the first position listed in clause C3 of Annex C on page 202.<br />
Repeat<br />
<strong>for</strong> each<br />
position<br />
5. Record the reading of Power Meter 2 (called P M2 ).<br />
6. Compensate the P M2 reading with the offset value calculated in sub-clause 4.2.2.9.3 on page 34. 9<br />
Call the new value P 42BA .<br />
P 42BA = P M2 - P OFFSET , all values in dBm.<br />
7. Per<strong>for</strong>m 5 and 6 <strong>for</strong> all the [X, Y, Z] positions listed in clause C3 of Annex C on page 202. Note that the<br />
Activation Antenna position shall be fixed relative to the Balise.<br />
4.2.2.12 Evaluation of Up-link Con<strong>for</strong>mity in the Cross-talk Protected Zone<br />
Part 1 of this Norm specifies that the Balise shall be con<strong>for</strong>m with the “Reference Field” in the Cross-talk protected<br />
zone. The Reference Field <strong>for</strong> the Up-link is defined in Part 1 of this Norm and recalled in sub-clause<br />
4.2.2.10 on page 35. The result of the Balise measurements <strong>for</strong> the Up-link in sub-clause 4.2.2.11.3 on page 37<br />
shall be compared with the Reference Field. The tolerances <strong>for</strong> con<strong>for</strong>mity are stated in Part 1 of this Norm to<br />
be from -∞ to 5 dB above the Reference Field. See Figure 9.<br />
Contact zone<br />
Reference Loop<br />
field strength<br />
Reference field<br />
Side lobe<br />
zone<br />
Maximum Balise<br />
response<br />
Cross-talk<br />
protected zone<br />
R0<br />
60 dB<br />
5 dB<br />
Figure 9 Maximum Balise response (4.2 MHz) in the Cross-talk protected zone<br />
9<br />
The reason <strong>for</strong> this compensation is that the value of P 42BA shall be compared with the corresponding values measured<br />
with the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna.
Page 38 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.3 Tele-powering Field Con<strong>for</strong>mity<br />
4.2.3.1 General<br />
This sub-clause defines the test procedure <strong>for</strong> Tele-powering flux con<strong>for</strong>mity testing. It also includes the various<br />
test set-ups that are recommended. The test procedures include two different steps with partially different<br />
test set-ups. The steps are:<br />
• Calibration of 27 MHz Tele-powering flux φ.<br />
• Balise con<strong>for</strong>mity measurements.<br />
There are two versions of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna used in this test procedure. The first is the Standard <strong>Test</strong> Antenna,<br />
or simply <strong>Test</strong> Antenna. The second is the Modified <strong>Test</strong> Antenna. This device has no 27 MHz loop but is<br />
apart from this identical to the Standard <strong>Test</strong> Antenna. Both versions are described in clause H3 of Annex H on<br />
page 306.<br />
There are also two versions of Activation Antennas. The first is the standard Activation Antenna with a 27 MHz<br />
loop. The second device is modified so that the 27 MHz loop is replaced by a 4.2 MHz loop. This device is<br />
only used as a measurement probe, and is identical to the Activation Antenna apart from the change of loops.<br />
This device is named 4.2 MHz Antenna. Both versions are described in clause H4 of Annex H on page 312.<br />
The calibrations and tests shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with a Balise telegram of type 1 defined in clause A2 of Annex A<br />
on page 157. Both the Balise and the Reference Loop shall transmit the same telegram. In general, <strong>for</strong> all tests<br />
and calibrations with controlled Balise, telegrams transmitted via the Balise controlling interface shall be used<br />
(with nominal Balise controlling interface conditions). However, <strong>for</strong> free air conditions (but not other conditions),<br />
and in case of a controlled Balise, I/O Characteristics tests (see sub-clause 4.2.4 on page 47) shall be<br />
per<strong>for</strong>med both when the telegram is sent through the Balise controlling interface, and from the internal default<br />
telegram.<br />
Balise con<strong>for</strong>mity measurements shall be per<strong>for</strong>med during free air conditions only.
Page 39 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.3.2 Calibration of 27 MHz Tele-powering flux in the Contact Zone<br />
4.2.3.2.1 Calibration Configuration<br />
A proposed calibration set-up is shown in Figure 10 below. Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an example<br />
of suitable test equipment. See also sub-clause 4.2.1 on page 23.<br />
C.S.<br />
27 MHz<br />
4. Attenuator<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Antenna 5.<br />
4.2 MHz<br />
3.<br />
2.<br />
1.<br />
RF<br />
Amplifier<br />
Attenuator<br />
Signal<br />
Generator<br />
50 Ω<br />
4.2 MHz<br />
Antenna<br />
50 Ω<br />
P M2<br />
Balun<br />
Attenuator<br />
Power<br />
Meter 2<br />
Reference Loop<br />
8.<br />
9.<br />
17.<br />
10.<br />
Interface ‘A’<br />
7.<br />
P M3<br />
P L<br />
Power<br />
Meter 3<br />
10.<br />
Figure 10: <strong>Test</strong> set-up <strong>for</strong> calibration of 27 MHz Tele-powering flux
Page 40 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.3.2.2 Calibration Abstract<br />
This calibration procedure will give a reference value P 27RL <strong>for</strong> each measurement point, defined in clause C1 of<br />
Annex C on page 200, which shall be compared with the corresponding value P 27BA <strong>for</strong> the Balise. The reference<br />
value P 27RL is proportional to the square of the current needed <strong>for</strong> obtaining a flux level of φ d1 through the<br />
Reference Area. The current is measured by Power Meter 2 (P M2 ), subsequently compensated, and called P 27RL.<br />
The calibration procedure <strong>for</strong> one of the geometrical positions, [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220], shall be per<strong>for</strong>med also<br />
under other test conditions than free air, and without the 4.2 MHz Antenna. The result shall be used in subclause<br />
4.2.4 on page 47. The following test conditions specified in clause B5 of Annex B on page 185 shall be<br />
used:<br />
Debris: Salt Water, debris class (A or B) defined by the manufacturer.<br />
Clear Water, debris class (A or B) defined by the manufacturer.<br />
Iron Ore (Magnetite), debris class (A or B) defined by the manufacturer.<br />
Metallic object: Metallic plate underneath the Balise, Case 1.<br />
Steel Sleepers<br />
Other Sleepers (mounting assemblies)
Page 41 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.3.2.3 Calibration Procedure<br />
1. Position the (Standard) <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in position [x = 0, y = 0, z = 220] relative to the Reference Loop.<br />
Be sure to position the electrical centre of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna aligned with the electrical centre of the Reference<br />
Loop. Also check that the X, Y, and Z axes of the Reference Loop are correctly aligned to the X,<br />
Y, and Z axes of the positioning system. Position the 4.2 MHz Antenna in position [X = 0, Y = 0,<br />
Z = 100] relative to the Reference Loop. This position shall be fixed during the test.<br />
2. Determine a suitable power level, P L , <strong>for</strong> a flux of φ d1 . The power, P L , is determined by:<br />
P<br />
L<br />
( 2 ⋅ π ⋅ f ⋅ φ )<br />
=<br />
⎛ 50 + Z<br />
50 ⋅ ⎜<br />
⎝ 50<br />
2<br />
d1<br />
2<br />
loop<br />
⎞<br />
⎟<br />
⎠<br />
⋅ B<br />
2<br />
where:<br />
f = 27.095 MHz<br />
Z loop = R loop + j X loop Ω (actual impedance in the absence of any antenna)<br />
P L = Power measured out of the Reference Loop [W]<br />
B = Reference Loop matching transfer ratio.<br />
P<br />
M3<br />
= 10⋅log(PL<br />
⋅1000)<br />
− Attenuation [dBm]<br />
where: Attenuation equals the attenuation of items 8 and 9 together with the cable from the Reference<br />
Loop to the power meter sensor head. 10<br />
Measure the Attenuation and calculate the value of P M3 . Call the calculated value P M3REF .<br />
3. Set the Signal Generator to the frequency 27.095 MHz, and to CW.<br />
Repeat<br />
<strong>for</strong> each<br />
position<br />
4. Adjust the input power to the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in order to achieve approximately φ d1 through the<br />
Reference Loop.<br />
Record the reading of Power Meter 3 (called P M3 ).<br />
5. Record the reading of Power Meter 2 (called P M2 ).<br />
6. Compensate the P M2 reading with the difference between the P M3 reading and the power level<br />
P M3REF calculated in step 2. 11 Call the new value P 27RL .<br />
P 27RL = P M2 + (P M3REF - P M3 ), all values in dBm.<br />
7. Per<strong>for</strong>m steps 4, 5, and 6 <strong>for</strong> all the [X, Y, Z] positions listed in clause C1 of Annex C on page 200.<br />
8. Per<strong>for</strong>m steps 4, 5, and 6 <strong>for</strong> the different test conditions specified in sub-clause 4.2.3.2.2 at position<br />
[X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220].<br />
10<br />
11<br />
Assuming that Z loop is small compared to 50 Ω, φ d1 =7.7 nVs, and that the Attenuation equals 20 dB, then the power level<br />
PM3 will be –4.6 dBm <strong>for</strong> the Standard Size Reference Loop. For the Reduced Size Reference Loop, the corresponding<br />
value <strong>for</strong> φ d1 =4.9 nVs is –8.6 dBm.<br />
The reason <strong>for</strong> this compensation is that the relative accuracy <strong>for</strong> the value of P 27RL between the different positions needs<br />
to be very good, and this procedure compensates <strong>for</strong> signal generator adjustment error.
Page 42 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.3.3 Balise Tele-powering Con<strong>for</strong>mity Measurements in Contact Zone<br />
4.2.3.3.1 <strong>Test</strong> Configuration<br />
A proposed test set-up is shown in Figure 11 below. Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an example of<br />
suitable test equipment. See also sub-clause 4.2.1 on page 23.<br />
10.<br />
Power<br />
Meter 2<br />
50 Ohm<br />
3.<br />
RF<br />
Amplifier<br />
4.<br />
Attenuator<br />
27 MHz<br />
P M2<br />
C.S.<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Antenna<br />
4.2 MHz<br />
5.<br />
2.<br />
1.<br />
Attenuator<br />
Signal<br />
Generator<br />
12.<br />
15.<br />
Filter<br />
Power<br />
Meter 3<br />
P M3<br />
17.<br />
Balise<br />
Interface ‘A’<br />
4.2 MHz<br />
Antenna<br />
Figure 11: <strong>Test</strong> set-up <strong>for</strong> Balise con<strong>for</strong>mity Tele-powering<br />
4.2.3.3.2 <strong>Test</strong> Abstract<br />
This measurement procedure will give a value P 27BA <strong>for</strong> each measurement point, defined in clause C1 of Annex<br />
C on page 200, which shall be compared with the corresponding reference value P 27RL <strong>for</strong> the Reference Loop<br />
measured in sub-clause 4.2.3.2.3 on page 41. The value P 27BA is proportional to the square of the 27 MHz current<br />
needed <strong>for</strong> obtaining a flux level of φ d1 through the Balise. The current is measured with Power Meter 2<br />
(P M2 ), compensated, and called P 27BA. .<br />
To find out when the Balise receives a flux of φ d1 the Balise response is measured with a fixed 4.2 MHz Antenna.<br />
In the first measurement position the 4.2 MHz response is measured with the same 27 MHz current that<br />
in the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna gave a flux of φ d1 through the Reference Loop. For each new position of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna<br />
the 27 MHz power in the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna is adjusted to give a 4.2 MHz response that is equal to the first measurement<br />
position.<br />
It is allowed to modify the φ d1 test level so that it is ensured that the Balise is operating in a linear region (at least<br />
±1.5 dB wide) suitable <strong>for</strong> the test. In case there is no such region, a smaller region can be selected individually<br />
<strong>for</strong> each position.
Page 43 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.3.3.3 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure<br />
1. Position the Standard <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220] relative to the Balise. Be sure to<br />
position the electrical centre of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna aligned with the centre of the Balise. Also check that<br />
the X, Y, and Z axes of the Balise are correctly aligned to the X, Y, and Z axes of the positioning system.<br />
Position the 4.2 MHz Antenna in position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 100] relative to the Balise. This position<br />
shall be fixed during the test.<br />
2. Set the Signal Generator to the frequency 27.095 MHz, and to CW.<br />
3. Verify if hysteresis effects exist by the following procedure:<br />
Increase the power from zero until Power Meter 2 reads P 27RL <strong>for</strong> position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 460]<br />
measured in sub-clause 4.2.3.2.3 on page 41. Observe Power Meter 3 reading. Increase the power<br />
until Power Meter 2 reads 3 dB more. Decrease the power back again. Check that Power Meter 3<br />
reads the same value as be<strong>for</strong>e the increase of power.<br />
If hysteresis exists, the power adjustments below shall either start from zero <strong>for</strong> each new point, or the related<br />
uncertainty must be included in the measurement inaccuracy if not staring from zero.<br />
4. Adjust the input power to the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in order to achieve the chosen value of the reference flux<br />
through the Balise. This adjustment can be stopped when a linear region around the reference flux level<br />
is reached. This is accomplished when the reading of Power Meter 2 is equal to P 27RL <strong>for</strong> position<br />
[X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220] measured in sub-clause 4.2.3.2.3 on page 41.<br />
Record the reading of Power Meter 3, and call it P 42 .<br />
5. Adjust the input power to the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in order to achieve a Power Meter 3 reading equal to<br />
P 42 .<br />
Repeat<br />
<strong>for</strong> each<br />
position<br />
6. Record the reading of Power Meter 2 and Power Meter 3.<br />
Compensate the P M2 reading with the difference between the P M3 reading and the power level P 42<br />
recorded in step 4. 12 Call the new value P 27BA .<br />
P 27BA = P M2 + (P 42 - P M3 ) all values in dBm.<br />
7. Calculate the difference between P 27BA and P 27RL from sub-clause 4.2.3.2.3 on page 41, and call<br />
it P 27DIFF.<br />
P 27 DIFF = P 27BA - P 27RL<br />
8. Per<strong>for</strong>m steps 5, 6, and 7 <strong>for</strong> all the [X, Y, Z] positions of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna listed in clause C1 of Annex<br />
C on page 200. Note that the 4.2 MHz Antenna position shall be fixed relative to the Balise.<br />
12<br />
The reason <strong>for</strong> this compensation is that the relative accuracy <strong>for</strong> the value of P 27BA between the different positions needs<br />
to be very good, and this procedure compensates <strong>for</strong> signal generator adjustment error.
Page 44 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.3.4 Evaluation of Tele-powering Con<strong>for</strong>mity in the Contact Zone<br />
The results from the measurements in sub-clause 4.2.3.3.3 on page 43 (P 27DIFF ) shall be compared with the requirements<br />
in Part 1 of this Norm regarding con<strong>for</strong>mity in the contact zone. The field received by the Balise<br />
shall be compared with the “Reference Field”. The requirement stated in Part 1 of this Norm is:<br />
• For the field received by the Balise ± 1.5 dB.<br />
The measurement errors shall be subtracted from the requirements be<strong>for</strong>e the comparison with the requirements.<br />
The value P 27DIFF reflects the absolute difference between the Reference Loop and the Balise. The requirement<br />
states the relative con<strong>for</strong>mity. There<strong>for</strong>e, the comparison with the requirement shall be relative.<br />
The Balise is con<strong>for</strong>m <strong>for</strong> the field received by the Balise if:<br />
The highest P 27DIFF - the lowest P 27DIFF is less than 3 dB<br />
(P 27DIFFMAX – P 27DIFFMIN ) < 3 dB
Page 45 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.3.5 Calibration of 27 MHz Tele-powering flux in the Side Lobe Zone<br />
Use the same test set-up as in sub-clause 4.2.3.2.1 on page 39. The calibration procedure is the same as in subclause<br />
4.2.3.2.3 on page 41, except <strong>for</strong> the geometrical test points. Per<strong>for</strong>m the calibration procedure with the<br />
geometrical test points listed in clause C2 of Annex C on page 201.<br />
The calibration measurements shall be limited to a maximum Tele-powering signal level of the reference value<br />
R0 in Figure 12 below, augmented by 35 dB (in the notch and in the most extreme regions of the side-lobe<br />
zone). During this specific test, it is allowed that the input power to a <strong>Test</strong> Antenna implemented in accordance<br />
with clause H3 on page 306 is increased to a maximum level resulting in a current sense output of 15 dBm.<br />
4.2.3.6 Tele-powering Reference Field in the Side Lobe Zone<br />
The input signal in the Side Lobe Zone <strong>for</strong> Tele-powering is defined in Part 1 of this Norm to have the same<br />
tolerances as <strong>for</strong> the Up-link. The input signal response is reflected by the current needed in a <strong>Test</strong> Antenna to<br />
give a flux of φ d1 in the Reference Loop / Balise. In sub-clause 4.2.3.5 the current is measured in the Side Lobe<br />
Zone and the result is a set of P 27RL values that shall be used to <strong>for</strong>m a “Reference Field”. This Reference Field<br />
gives the limits <strong>for</strong> the Balise response of Tele-powering flux in the Side Lobe Zone. The tolerances <strong>for</strong> con<strong>for</strong>mity<br />
with the Reference Field, stated in Part 1 of this Norm, are –5 dB to +∞. The Balise shall consequently<br />
give test results that show higher values, than the Reference Field lowered by 5 dB, or considered acceptable if<br />
the Balise has not started transmitting at the Reference Field level lowered by 5 dB (caused by test tool limitations).<br />
The Reference Loop response shall also be translated +5 cm and –5 cm along the X and Y axes to <strong>for</strong>m<br />
the Reference Field. See Figure 12 that shows a Reference Field in one quadrant. Similar curves shall be plotted<br />
<strong>for</strong> all quadrants. The Reference Field is the curve <strong>for</strong>med by the lowest of:<br />
• 35 dB above R0 (P 27RL value <strong>for</strong> position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220])<br />
• Reference Loop response displaced –5 cm<br />
• Reference Loop response<br />
• Reference Loop response displaced +5 cm<br />
Contact zone<br />
Side lobe<br />
zone<br />
Reference Loop<br />
response<br />
Cross-talk<br />
protected zone<br />
5 cm<br />
35 dB<br />
Reference field<br />
Figure 12: Tele-powering Reference Field in the Side Lobe Zone<br />
R0<br />
The co-ordinates that shall be evaluated are:<br />
X = 250 to 1300, Y = 0, Z = 220 X = -250 to -1300, Y = 0, Z = 220<br />
X = 0, Y = 200 to 1400, Z = 220 X = 0, Y = -200 to -1400, Z = 220
Page 46 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.3.7 Balise Tele-powering Con<strong>for</strong>mity Measurements in the Side Lobe Zone<br />
Use the same test set-up as in sub-clause 4.2.3.3.1 on page 42. The test procedure is the same as in sub-clause<br />
4.2.3.3.3 on page 43, except <strong>for</strong> the geometrical test points, and that it is not needed to calculate the difference<br />
between P 27RL and P 27BA . Per<strong>for</strong>m the test procedure with the geometrical test points listed in clause C2 of<br />
Annex C on page 201. Exclude the geometrical points: [X = 200, Y = 0, Z = 220], [X = -200, Y = 0, Z = 220],<br />
[X = 0, Y = 150, Z = 220], and [X = 0, Y = -150, Z = 220].<br />
Plot the value P 27BA as a function of the position in four graphs, one <strong>for</strong> each quadrant.<br />
Please observe the limitations of the test tool expressed in sub-clause 4.2.3.6.<br />
4.2.3.8 Evaluation of Tele-powering Con<strong>for</strong>mity in the Side Lobe Zone<br />
Part 1 of this Norm specifies that the Balise shall be con<strong>for</strong>m with the “Reference Field” in the Side Lobe Zone.<br />
The Reference Field <strong>for</strong> the Tele-powering is defined in Part 1 of this Norm and recalled in sub-clause 4.2.3.6<br />
on page 45. The result of the Balise measurements <strong>for</strong> the Tele-powering in sub-clause 4.2.3.7 on page 46 shall<br />
be compared with the Reference Field. The tolerances <strong>for</strong> con<strong>for</strong>mity are stated in Part 1 of this Norm to be the<br />
same as <strong>for</strong> the Up-link, which means that the 27 MHz field needed to power the Balise may be from 5 dB below<br />
the Reference Field up to ∞. See Figure 13<br />
Contact zone<br />
Side lobe<br />
zone<br />
Cross-talk<br />
protected zone<br />
Reference field<br />
Reference Loop<br />
response<br />
5 dB<br />
Minimum current needed<br />
to activate Balise<br />
35 dB<br />
R0<br />
Figure 13: Minimum current (27 MHz) needed to activate the Balise in the Side Lobe Zone
Page 47 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.4 I/O Characteristics<br />
4.2.4.1 General<br />
This sub-clause defines the test procedure <strong>for</strong> Input to Output Characteristics testing. It also includes the various<br />
test set-ups that are recommended.<br />
In case of a controlled Balise, it shall be checked that the Balise shows the same behaviour both when the telegram<br />
is sent trough the Balise controlling interface, and from the internal default telegram. This check shall be<br />
per<strong>for</strong>med in free air, and with nominal Balise controlling interface conditions as defined by sub-clause 4.2.8.3<br />
on page 89. In all other tests with controlled Balise, telegrams transmitted via the Balise controlling interface<br />
shall be used (with nominal Balise controlling interface conditions).<br />
Hysteresis effects shall be considered when testing the Balise I/O characteristics.<br />
I/O Characteristics measurements shall be per<strong>for</strong>med during free air conditions, and in the presence of a defined<br />
amount of debris and metallic objects.<br />
When testing the Water Class A debris case, adequate protection shall be added to the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in order to<br />
avoid immersion of the loop element into water. This protection shall not alter the electrical characteristics of<br />
the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna. See sub-clause H3.2.1 on page 307.<br />
Amplification of Up-link signals received by the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna, and/or the use of additional filters is allowed if<br />
improved accuracy is deemed necessary. If applicable, this shall be considered in calibrations as well as during<br />
measurements, it shall be stable, and it shall not affect general per<strong>for</strong>mance such as bandwidth etc.
Page 48 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.4.2 Calibration of 4.2 MHz <strong>for</strong> Balise Input to Output Characteristics<br />
4.2.4.2.1 Calibration Configuration<br />
A proposed calibration set-up is shown in Figure 14 below. Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an example<br />
of suitable test equipment. If Power Meter 2 is substituted, by <strong>for</strong> instance a spectrum analyser, then the<br />
measurement bandwidth of this device shall be 1.2 MHz. The <strong>Test</strong> Antenna (item 5) and the cable from the <strong>Test</strong><br />
Antenna to Power Meter 1 (the sensor head), shall be the same as in the calibration procedure in sub-clause<br />
4.2.3.2 on page 39. See also sub-clause 4.2.1 on page 23.<br />
10.<br />
Power<br />
Meter 1<br />
P M1<br />
11.<br />
Attenuator<br />
Balun<br />
14.<br />
3.<br />
RF<br />
Amplifier<br />
Reference Loop<br />
Interface ‘A’<br />
7.<br />
2.<br />
Attenuator<br />
50 Ω<br />
50 Ω<br />
CS<br />
27 MHz<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Antenna<br />
5.<br />
13.<br />
Signal<br />
Generator<br />
15.<br />
Power<br />
Meter 2<br />
P M2<br />
12.<br />
Filter<br />
4.2 MHz<br />
Figure 14: <strong>Test</strong> set-up <strong>for</strong> calibration of 4.2 MHz Balise Loop Current
Page 49 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.4.2.2 Calibration Abstract<br />
This calibration procedure will give a reference value P 42RL used in sub-clause 4.2.4.3 on page 50. The reference<br />
value P 42RL is reflecting the flux received by the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna, measured by Power Meter 2 (P M2 ). The calibration<br />
is per<strong>for</strong>med with the current I u2 /B through the Reference Loop. The current through the Reference Loop is<br />
monitored by Power Meter 1 (P M1 ). The calibration procedure shall be per<strong>for</strong>med also under other test conditions<br />
than free air. The following test conditions specified in clause B5 of Annex B on page 185 shall be used:<br />
Debris: Salt Water, debris class (A or B) defined by the manufacturer.<br />
Clear Water, debris class (A or B) defined by the manufacturer.<br />
Iron Ore (Magnetite), debris class (A or B) defined by the manufacturer.<br />
Metallic object: Metallic plate underneath the Balise, Case 1.<br />
Steel Sleepers<br />
Other Sleepers (mounting assemblies)<br />
4.2.4.2.3 Calibration Procedure<br />
1. Position the Standard <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220] relative to the Reference Loop.<br />
Be sure to position the electrical centre of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna aligned with the electrical centre of the Reference<br />
Loop. Also check that the X, Y, and Z axes of the Reference Loop are correctly aligned to the X,<br />
Y, and Z axes of the positioning system.<br />
2. Set the Signal Generator to generate the FSK signal that carries telegram type 1.<br />
3. Calculate the exact power level P lc that gives I u2 /B in the Reference Loop. For calibration and compensation<br />
of the Current Sense Balun see clause H5 of Annex H on page 317.<br />
4. Adjust the Signal Generator amplitude in order to achieve a current of approximately I u2 /B through the<br />
Reference Loop, measured by Power Meter 1.<br />
5. Record the reading of Power Meter 1 (called P M1 ) and Power Meter 2 (called P M2 ).<br />
6. Compensate the P M2 reading with the difference between the P M1 reading and the exact power level, P lc<br />
<strong>for</strong> I u2 /B, from the Current Sense Balun calibration in step 3. 13 Call the new value P 42RL .<br />
P 42RL = P M2 + (P lc - P M1 ) all values in dBm.<br />
The calibration procedure (steps 4 trough 6) shall be repeated <strong>for</strong> the test conditions defined in sub-clause<br />
4.2.4.2.2.<br />
13<br />
The reason <strong>for</strong> this compensation is that the absolute accuracy <strong>for</strong> the value of P 42RL needs to be good, and this procedure<br />
compensates <strong>for</strong> power amplifier drift and adjustment errors.
Page 50 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.4.3 Balise Input to Output Characteristics Measurements<br />
4.2.4.3.1 <strong>Test</strong> Configuration<br />
A proposed test set-up is shown in Figure 15 below. Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an example of<br />
suitable test equipment. If Power Meter 2 is substituted, by <strong>for</strong> instance a spectrum analyser, then the measurement<br />
bandwidth of this device shall be 1.2 MHz. The filter (item 12), the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna (item 5) and the<br />
4.2 MHz cables from the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna to the measurement point (i.e., the sensor head), shall be the same as in<br />
the calibration procedure in sub-clause 4.2.4.2 on page 48. See also sub-clause 4.2.1 on page 23.<br />
C.S.<br />
27 MHz<br />
4. Attenuator<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Antenna 5.<br />
P CS<br />
Power<br />
Meter 1<br />
10.<br />
3.<br />
RF<br />
Amplifier<br />
12.<br />
Filter<br />
4.2 MHz<br />
Balise<br />
Interface ‘A’<br />
2.<br />
Attenuator<br />
P 42<br />
1.<br />
Signal<br />
Generator<br />
Power<br />
Meter 2<br />
15.<br />
Figure 15: <strong>Test</strong> set-up <strong>for</strong> Input to Output Characteristics Measurements<br />
Please observe that it needs to be verified that 27 MHz suppression in Up-link signal measurements is sufficient<br />
<strong>for</strong> achievement of the required accuracy. If not, additional filtering must be introduced (e.g., several filters in<br />
cascade).
Page 51 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.4.3.2 <strong>Test</strong> Abstract<br />
This measurement procedure will result in curves of the Balise response, which shall be compared with the<br />
requirement in Part 1 of this Norm. The Balise response is measured <strong>for</strong> both increasing and decreasing Telepowering<br />
flux levels. A (Standard) <strong>Test</strong> Antenna is used to generate the 27 MHz flux from below φ d1 , up to φ d4 ,<br />
and back down below φ d1 again. The flux is proportional to the current in the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna and reflected by<br />
Power Meter 1. The 4.2 MHz response is measured with the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna and Power Meter 2. The corresponding<br />
4.2 MHz current in the Balise is calculated and plotted. The <strong>Test</strong> procedure shall be per<strong>for</strong>med in free air<br />
and <strong>for</strong> the following test conditions specified in clause B5 of Annex B on page 185 14 :<br />
Debris: Salt Water, debris class (A or B) defined by the manufacturer.<br />
Clear Water, debris class (A or B) defined by the manufacturer.<br />
Iron Ore (Magnetite), debris class (A or B) defined by the manufacturer.<br />
Metallic object: Metallic plate underneath the Balise, Case 1.<br />
Steel Sleepers<br />
Other Sleepers (mounting assemblies)<br />
14<br />
<strong>Test</strong>ing in the presence of the LZB loop cable is judged not relevant since the resulting impact on the I/O characteristic<br />
itself is negligible compared with the other test conditions specified in this sub-clause. However, there are other critical<br />
mechanisms related to an LZB cable carrying undesired currents. This is detailed in sub-clause 4.2.5.5 on page 62.
Page 52 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.4.3.3 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure<br />
1. Determine suitable P CS power levels relevant <strong>for</strong> transfer characteristic measurements. The measurement<br />
shall be per<strong>for</strong>med <strong>for</strong> the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220].<br />
Use the measured value P 27RL <strong>for</strong> the above position, and the actual test condition from sub-clause<br />
4.2.3.2.3 on page 41 as reference <strong>for</strong> the φ d1 Tele-powering flux level. The table below gives the P CS offset<br />
values to be used <strong>for</strong> the 27 MHz flux levels. The measurements shall start with the lowest flux, and<br />
with increasing flux reach φ d4 , then the flux shall be decreased again to the lowest flux in the table. This<br />
procedure will also show if the Balise response has hysteresis.<br />
Flux φ d1 φ d2 φ d4<br />
P CS<br />
offset<br />
-3 dB -1 dB 0 dB +1 dB +2 dB +3 dB +4 dB +5 dB +6 dB +9 dB +12 dB +18 dB +24 dB φ<br />
d4<br />
2. Set the Signal Generator to the frequency 27.095 MHz, and to CW.<br />
3. Position the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220] relative to the Balise.<br />
4. Adjust the Signal Generator amplitude in order to achieve a P CS reading that corresponds to the sum of<br />
present P CS offset and P 27RL . Record the exact P CS reading.<br />
5. Record the 4.2 MHz power level P 42 .<br />
6. Calculate the flux φ, and the Balise loop current I loop using:<br />
(( PCS<br />
−P27RL<br />
) ÷ 20)<br />
Φ = 10 × Φ<br />
I<br />
loop<br />
= 10<br />
((P<br />
−P<br />
) ÷ 20)<br />
42 42RL<br />
×<br />
d1<br />
I<br />
U2<br />
[nVs]<br />
[mA]<br />
Where P 42RL is the calibration power, <strong>for</strong> the position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220], and the actual test condition,<br />
achieved from Sub-clause 4.2.4.2.3 on page 49.<br />
7. With increasing flux, repeat steps 4, 5, and 6 <strong>for</strong> all flux levels.<br />
8. With decreasing flux, repeat steps 4, 5, and 6 <strong>for</strong> all flux levels.<br />
9. Plot I loop as a function of φ <strong>for</strong> both increasing flux and decreasing flux.<br />
The test procedure (steps 1 through 9) shall be repeated <strong>for</strong> the test conditions defined in sub-clause 4.2.4.3.2.
Page 53 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.4.4 Evaluation of I/O Characteristics<br />
Part 1 of this Norm specifies that the Balise response shall be inside the area limited by the shaded areas in<br />
Figure 16, and considering the measurement errors. Furthermore, the Balise response shall be inside this area<br />
<strong>for</strong> all the geometrical positions of the contact zone considering the actual Balise con<strong>for</strong>mity per<strong>for</strong>mance. The<br />
latter requirement means that the upper restriction shall be further limited by the difference between the actual<br />
Balise con<strong>for</strong>mity tolerance <strong>for</strong> the geometrical test point in question, and the worst case maximum Balise con<strong>for</strong>mity<br />
deviation <strong>for</strong> any geometrical point. Similarly, the lower restriction shall be further limited by the difference<br />
between the actual Balise con<strong>for</strong>mity tolerance <strong>for</strong> the geometrical test point in question, and the worst<br />
case minimum Balise con<strong>for</strong>mity deviation <strong>for</strong> any geometrical point.<br />
In other words, A, B, C, and D used in the equations below shall be expressed according to:<br />
A = P 42DIFFMAX - P 42DIFF<br />
B = P 42DIFF - P 42DIFFMIN<br />
C = P 27DIFF - P 42DIFF + max{P 42DIFFi - P 27DIFFi }<br />
D = P 27DIFFMAX - P 27DIFF<br />
where P 27DIFF and P 42DIFF are the Balise con<strong>for</strong>mity deviations in the actual geometrical test point (in this case<br />
[X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220]). P 27DIFFMAX , P 27DIFFMIN , P 42DIFFMAX , and P 42DIFFMIN are worst case Balise con<strong>for</strong>mity<br />
deviations evaluated in sub-clause 4.2.2.4 on page 30. The difference P 42DIFFi - P 27DIFFi is the difference of the<br />
con<strong>for</strong>mity deviations <strong>for</strong> Up-link and Tele-powering <strong>for</strong> each individual geometrical test point (index i). The<br />
maximum of this difference <strong>for</strong> all geometrical test points shall be evaluated and considered regarding the constant<br />
C above. The reason is that the border of the shaded area is not a horizontal or vertical line <strong>for</strong> this region.<br />
Please observe that A, B, C, and D above are expressed in dB.<br />
Iloop<br />
Iu3<br />
P 3[x, y]<br />
P 1[x, y]<br />
P 2[x, y]<br />
Iu2<br />
Iu1<br />
[0, 0]<br />
Φd1 Φd3<br />
Φd2<br />
Φd4<br />
Figure 16: Input-to output transfer characteristics <strong>for</strong> a Balise<br />
The co-ordinates of the points P 1 , P 2 , and P 3 respectively are:<br />
• P 1[x, y] = [φ d1 10 -D/20 , I u1 10 B/20 ]<br />
• P 2[x, y] = [φ d2 10 -D/20 , I u2 10 B/20 ]<br />
• P 3[x, y] = [φ d3 10 C/20 , I u3 10 -A/20 ]<br />
flux<br />
Φ<br />
Part 1 of this Norm also specifies that the response may not decrease more than 0.5 [dB/dB] with increasing flux<br />
values when the Balise is operating in saturated mode (i.e., when the flux through the reference area of the Balise<br />
is high). The values <strong>for</strong> I u1 , I u2 , I u3 , φ d1 , φ d2 , φ d3 , and φ d4 are found in Part 1 of this Norm.
Page 54 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.5 Cross-talk Immunity with Cables<br />
4.2.5.1 General<br />
This sub-clause defines measurement methods <strong>for</strong> verifying potential cable related cross talk <strong>for</strong> the Balise.<br />
It includes the test set-up that is required. For the <strong>Test</strong> set-up two calibrations are needed. One to calibrate the<br />
Activation Antenna to give a Tele-powering flux equal to φ d4 –6 dB, and one to find out how much 4.2 MHz<br />
current that flows in the Balise when it receives that flux.<br />
4.2.5.2 Calibration of 27 MHz Tele-powering flux<br />
4.2.5.2.1 Calibration Configuration<br />
A proposed calibration set-up is shown in Figure 17 below. Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an example<br />
of suitable test equipment. See also sub-clause 4.2.1 on page 23.<br />
P M1<br />
Power<br />
Meter 1<br />
C.S.<br />
4. Attenuator<br />
27 MHz<br />
Activation Antenna 18.<br />
10.<br />
Interface ‘A’<br />
3.<br />
RF<br />
Amplifier<br />
Reference Loop<br />
7.<br />
2.<br />
1.<br />
Attenuator<br />
Signal<br />
Generator<br />
Balun<br />
Attenuator<br />
8.<br />
31.<br />
P M2<br />
P L<br />
Power<br />
Meter 2<br />
10.<br />
Figure 17: <strong>Test</strong> set-up <strong>for</strong> calibration of 27 MHz Tele-powering flux
Page 55 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.5.2.2 Calibration Abstract<br />
This calibration procedure will give a reference value P 27AA . The reference value P 27AA is used when activating<br />
the Balise with a flux level of φ d4 –6 dB through the Reference Area.<br />
4.2.5.2.3 Calibration Procedure<br />
1. Position the Activation Antenna in position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220] relative to the Reference<br />
Loop.<br />
2. Determine a suitable power level, P M2 , <strong>for</strong> a flux of φ d4 –6 dB. The power <strong>for</strong> φ d4 (P L ), and the<br />
power <strong>for</strong> φ d4 –6 dB (P M2 ), are determined by:<br />
P<br />
P<br />
L<br />
( 2 ⋅ π ⋅ f ⋅ φ )<br />
=<br />
⎛ 50 + Z<br />
50 ⋅ ⎜<br />
⎝ 50<br />
M2<br />
2<br />
d4<br />
2<br />
loop<br />
⎞<br />
⎟<br />
⎠<br />
⋅ B<br />
2<br />
= 10 ⋅ log(PL<br />
⋅1000)<br />
− Attenuation − 6dB [dBm]<br />
where: f = 27.095 MHz<br />
Z loop = R loop + j X loop Ω (actual impedance in the absence of any antenna)<br />
P L = Power measured out of the Reference Loop [W]<br />
B = Reference Loop matching transfer ratio<br />
P M2 = The power <strong>for</strong> φ d4 –6 dB<br />
Attenuation = Attenuation of Balun (item 20) + Attenuator (item 31) together with<br />
the cable from the Reference Loop to the power meter sensor head [dB] 15<br />
The flux level absolute accuracy should be ± 1 dB. The relative accuracy when this flux level<br />
shall be re-created needs to be ± 0.2 dB.<br />
Measure the Attenuation and calculate the value of P M2 .<br />
3. Set the Signal Generator to the frequency 27.095 MHz, and to CW.<br />
4. Adjust the input power to the Activation Antenna in order to achieve φ d4 – 6 dB through the Reference<br />
Loop.<br />
Record the reading of Power Meter 1 and call it P 27AA .<br />
15<br />
As an example, assuming that Z loop is small compared to 50 Ω, φ d4 =200 nVs, B=1, and that the Attenuation equals 20 dB,<br />
then the power level P M2 will be 17.6 dBm <strong>for</strong> the Standard Size Reference Loop. For the Reduced Size Reference Loop,<br />
the corresponding value <strong>for</strong> φ d4 is 130 nVs, which gives P M2 =13.9 dBm.
Page 56 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.5.3 Calibration of Balise response<br />
4.2.5.3.1 Calibration Configuration<br />
Proposed calibration set-ups are shown in Figure 18 and Figure 19 below. Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287<br />
gives an example of suitable test equipment. See also sub-clause 4.2.1 on page 23.<br />
Power<br />
Meter 2<br />
10.<br />
Filter<br />
12.<br />
Attenuator<br />
31.<br />
Balun<br />
8.<br />
Reference Loop<br />
7.<br />
4.<br />
Attenuator<br />
27 MHz<br />
10.<br />
C.S.<br />
Activation Antenna 18.<br />
3.<br />
RF<br />
Amplifier<br />
Power<br />
Meter 1<br />
1.<br />
Interface ‘A’<br />
2.<br />
Attenuator<br />
Signal<br />
Generator<br />
Balise<br />
Figure 18: <strong>Test</strong> set-up 1 <strong>for</strong> calibration of 4.2 MHz Up-link current
Page 57 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Power<br />
Meter 2<br />
10.<br />
3.<br />
Filter<br />
12.<br />
RF<br />
Amplifier<br />
Attenuator<br />
31.<br />
4.<br />
Attenuator<br />
8.<br />
Balun Reference Loop 7.<br />
50 Ω<br />
Activation Antenna 18.<br />
50 Ω<br />
C.S.<br />
Interface ‘A’<br />
14.<br />
2.<br />
Attenuator<br />
Balun<br />
C.S.<br />
Reference Loop<br />
7.<br />
13.<br />
Signal<br />
Generator<br />
Power<br />
Meter 1<br />
10.<br />
Figure 19: <strong>Test</strong> set-up 2 <strong>for</strong> calibration of 4.2 MHz Up-link current<br />
4.2.5.3.2 Calibration Abstract<br />
This calibration procedure will give a value of the Up-link current in the Balise. The current is measured at a<br />
flux level of φ d4 –6 dB through the Reference Area. The procedure to measure the current is divided in two<br />
parts.<br />
First, the Balise is Tele-powered with a flux of φ d4 –6 dB and the Up-link signal from the Balise is measured<br />
with a Reference Loop. The test set-up in Figure 18 is used <strong>for</strong> this first part.<br />
Then, the Balise is replaced with a second Reference Loop that acts as a transmitter of the Up-Link signal. The<br />
current in the transmitting Loop is increased until the receiving Loop measures the same Up-link signal level as<br />
from the Balise. The current in the transmitting Loop is measured with a Current Sense Balun. The test set-up<br />
in Figure 19 is used <strong>for</strong> this second part.
Page 58 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.5.3.3 Calibration Procedure<br />
1. Position the Activation Antenna in position [x = 0, y = 0, z = 220] relative to the Balise, see Figure 18 on<br />
page 56 <strong>for</strong> calibration set-up.<br />
2. Position the Reference Loop in position [x = 0, y = 0, z = 460] relative to the Balise.<br />
3. Set the Signal Generator to the frequency 27.095 MHz, and to CW.<br />
4. Adjust the input power to the Activation Antenna in order to achieve approximately φ d4 -6 dB through the<br />
Balise. This is per<strong>for</strong>med by increasing the power from the signal generator until Power Meter 1 reads<br />
P 27AA , which is the calibration value <strong>for</strong> φ d4 -6 dB measured in sub-clause 4.2.5.2.3 on page 55.<br />
5. Record the reading of Power Meter 2 and call it P 42REF .<br />
6. Change the calibration set-up by replacing the Balise with a Reference Loop that shall transmit the<br />
4.2 MHz signal. See Figure 19 on page 57 <strong>for</strong> calibration set-up.<br />
7. Set the Signal Generator to transmit the 4.2 MHz FSK signal carrying telegram type 1.<br />
8. Adjust the input power to the transmitting Reference Loop in order to achieve the same current in the<br />
Reference Loop as in the Balise. This is per<strong>for</strong>med by increasing the power from the signal generator until<br />
Power Meter 2 reads P 42REF .<br />
9. Power Meter 1 now shows a value that corresponds to the current in the Reference Loop. This current is<br />
equal to the 4.2 MHz current that flows in this particular Balise at a Tele-Powering flux of φ d4 -6 dB. To<br />
calibrate the Current Sense balun and to calculate the actual current from Power Meter 1 reading, see<br />
clause H5 of Annex H on page 317. Calculate the current and call it I BAL .
Page 59 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.5.4 Cross-talk Measurements<br />
4.2.5.4.1 <strong>Test</strong> Configuration, Up-Link Cross-talk from Balise to cable<br />
A proposed test set-up is shown in Figure 20 below. Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an example of<br />
suitable test equipment. In the configuration below the distances A, B and C refer to distances in the “track”,<br />
see also sub-clause 4.2.5.4.2 on page 60. The Spectrum Analyser shall be able to measure signal levels down to<br />
-85 dBm. See also sub-clause 4.2.1 on page 23.<br />
y-axis<br />
x-axis<br />
Balise<br />
x-axis<br />
B<br />
C<br />
z-axis<br />
Balise<br />
y-axis<br />
A<br />
C<br />
500<br />
500<br />
Cable parallel with track<br />
Cable crossing track<br />
4.<br />
3.<br />
2.<br />
Attenuator<br />
RF<br />
Amplifier<br />
Attenuator<br />
27 MHz<br />
P M1 35<br />
Power<br />
10.<br />
Meter 1<br />
40<br />
C.S.<br />
Activation<br />
Antenna<br />
18.<br />
z-axis<br />
8 Bar Profile<br />
Spectrum<br />
Analyser<br />
P M2<br />
35.<br />
1.<br />
Signal<br />
Generator<br />
Balise<br />
I<br />
R2<br />
Filter<br />
12.<br />
C<br />
R1<br />
32.<br />
I<br />
500<br />
600 600<br />
Figure 20: Up-link <strong>Test</strong> Configuration, Balise to cable<br />
The tool used <strong>for</strong> simulating the cables should be positioned 200 mm or more above the floor in order to minimise<br />
the potential disturbance from rein<strong>for</strong>cement rods.
Page 60 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.5.4.2 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure, Up-link Cross-talk from Balise to cable<br />
One case of cross-talk with cable <strong>for</strong> the Up-Link is when a Balise in one track is activated by a vehicle, and at<br />
the same time another vehicle is present over a cable crossing both tracks. See figure below.<br />
Antenna 1 Antenna 2<br />
Cable case 2<br />
93 493<br />
Balise<br />
Cable case 1<br />
Two different cases are specified in Part 1 of this Norm. The first case, in this document called case 1, is a cable<br />
crossing the track without Balise in the area from 493 mm below top of rail and further down. The second case,<br />
in this document called case 2, is a cable crossing the track without Balise in the area from 93 mm to 493 mm<br />
below the top of rail. The maximum 4.2 MHz current defined in Part 1 of this Norm is:<br />
in case 1 10 mA<br />
in case 2 2 mA<br />
The distances A, B, and C shown in Figure 20 on page 59 are defined by the supplier of the Balise, and it shall<br />
be stated by the supplier <strong>for</strong> which installation case (1 or 2) the distances are valid. This gives the allowed current<br />
induced in a cable. The distances A, B, and C refer to directions in the track. A is in the x-direction, B is in<br />
the y-direction, and C is in the z-direction.<br />
The test set-up shown in Figure 20 on page 59 shall be used. The resistors R1 and R2 shall be 400 Ω. In case<br />
no A, B, and C are given by the supplier, use A, B, and C = 1000 mm, and installation case 2, which allows a<br />
maximum current of 2 mA in a cable. This test measure the current induced from the Balise in a cable with the<br />
characteristic impedance 400 Ω. The Balise under test may be a “strong” or a “weak” Balise. There<strong>for</strong>e, the<br />
measured result shall be compensated to reflect a Balise with the strongest allowed signal. Cables out in reality<br />
may have other impedance than in this test set-up. There<strong>for</strong>e, the measured current shall be compensated to<br />
reflect the current in a “worst case” cable. This compensation needs to take into account standing waves and<br />
other phenomena.<br />
For a Reduced size Balise that may be mounted both longitudinal and transversal, the supplier of the Balise shall<br />
give two sets of A, B, and C, one <strong>for</strong> each mounting. The measurement procedure shall in this case be per<strong>for</strong>med<br />
with both sets of A, B, and C values.<br />
Cable parallel with track:<br />
1. Position the Activation Antenna in position [x = 0, y = 0, z = 220] relative to the Balise. This position<br />
shall be fixed relative to the Balise during the test. Throughout this test “position the Balise” means<br />
“position the Balise and the Activation Antenna”. Please note that the same Activation Antenna and the<br />
same Balise shall be used also in the calibration in sub-clause 4.2.5.2.3 on page 55.<br />
2. Position the Balise at the distance B and C = supplier minimum distance in y and z direction from the<br />
iron bars simulating the cable.<br />
3. Set the Signal Generator to the frequency 27.095 MHz, and to CW.<br />
4. Adjust the input power to the Activation Antenna in order to achieve approximately φ d4 – 6 dB through<br />
the Balise. This is per<strong>for</strong>med by increasing the power from the signal generator until Power Meter 1<br />
reads P 27AA , which is the calibration value <strong>for</strong> φ d4 -6 dB measured in sub-clause 4.2.5.2.3 on page 55.
Page 61 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5. Record the reading of the Spectrum Analyser and call it P 42IBC .<br />
6. Position the Balise at regular intervals of +20 mm further away from the iron bars, up to the distance B<br />
= supplier minimum distance +500 mm. For each position, record the reading of the Spectrum Analyser,<br />
and call it P 42IBC .<br />
Cable crossing track:<br />
1. Position the Activation Antenna in position [x = 0, y = 0, z = 220] relative to the Balise. This position<br />
shall be fixed relative to the Balise during the test. Throughout this test “position the Balise” means<br />
“position the Balise and the Activation Antenna”.<br />
2. Position the Balise at the distances A and C = supplier minimum distances in the x and z directions<br />
from the iron bars.<br />
3. Set the Signal Generator to the frequency 27.095 MHz, and to CW.<br />
4. Adjust the input power to the Activation Antenna in order to achieve approximately φ d4 – 6 dB through<br />
the Balise. This is per<strong>for</strong>med by increasing the power from the signal generator until Power Meter 1<br />
reads P 27AA , which is the calibration value <strong>for</strong> φ d4 -6 dB measured in sub-clause 4.2.5.2.3 on page 55.<br />
5. Record the reading of the Spectrum Analyser, and call it P 42IBC .<br />
6. Position the Balise at regular intervals of +20 mm further away from the iron bars, up to the distance A<br />
= supplier minimum distance +500 mm. For each position, record the reading of the Spectrum Analyser<br />
and call it P 42IBC .<br />
The results from the test are a set of P 42IBC values. Calculate the current that corresponds to the maximum value<br />
and call it I 42BC . For the suggested current probe, the current of 1 mA will give a voltage of 1 mV into 50 Ω.<br />
There<strong>for</strong>e, the current is calculated with the following equation:<br />
I<br />
= P 50<br />
Where P is measured in [W], and I is measured in [A]<br />
42 BC 42IBC<br />
×<br />
Compensate the current <strong>for</strong> the difference between the actual Balise current and the company specific maximum<br />
Balise current possible (I umax ) <strong>for</strong> the Balise type under test (I umax ≤ I u3 ). The actual Balise current I BAL is measured<br />
in sub-clause 4.2.5.3.3 on page 58. Call the compensated value I 42BCCOMP .<br />
I<br />
42BCCOMP<br />
I<br />
=<br />
42BC<br />
I<br />
× I<br />
BAL<br />
u max<br />
To reflect the current induced in real cables, the value I 42BCCOMP shall be compensated <strong>for</strong> the difference between<br />
the test set-up impedance and the “worst case” real impedance using the following equation.<br />
I<br />
42BCWORST<br />
I42BCCOMP<br />
× Zsetup<br />
= Where Z setup = 800 Ω<br />
Z<br />
worst _ case<br />
The value I 42BCWORST shall be lower than the current allowed <strong>for</strong> the specified installation case 1 or 2, which<br />
allows 10 mA or 2 mA respectively.<br />
Note that Z worst_case is a fictitious impedance that includes the cable impedance and effects of standing waves,<br />
metallic objects etceteras, and that it is used to trans<strong>for</strong>m the current induced in the test set-up to real conditions.<br />
The value of Z worst_case consequently depends on cable installation rules (and thus is manufacturer dependent),<br />
and shall be stated by the Balise manufacturer.
Page 62 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.5.5 LZB Cable <strong>Test</strong>ing<br />
4.2.5.5.1 General<br />
The following considerations apply:<br />
• The test object is the Balise combined with appropriate fixation devices <strong>for</strong> the cable, and company<br />
specific installation rules.<br />
• The test tools of Annex J need adaptations to cope with the actual test object <strong>for</strong> properly fitting the<br />
test object to the tools.<br />
• <strong>Test</strong>ing related to the Balise is optional (applicable only when the Balise is intended to be used in the<br />
presence of LZB cables).<br />
In general the optional testing applies to:<br />
• Measurement of 4.2 MHz Up-link induction from the Balise into a simulated LZB loop with an impedance<br />
of 75 Ω.<br />
• Balise behaviour when subjected to 27 MHz induction from an On-board equipment into a simulated<br />
LZB loop with an impedance of 75 Ω.<br />
Requirements are defined in Part 1 of this Norm.<br />
The tools described in Annex J should be the basis <strong>for</strong> further adaptations that are needed <strong>for</strong> properly fitting the<br />
test object to the tools. Please observe that the 75 Ω set-up impedance must always remain <strong>for</strong> the purpose of<br />
testing of Up-link induction.
Page 63 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.5.5.2 <strong>Test</strong> set-up, Up-link Induction from the Balise<br />
The test set-up according to Figure 21 below applies. Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an example of<br />
suitable test equipment. Additional details related to the vertically positioned LZB loop is found in sub-clause<br />
J2.2 on page 324. See also sub-clause 4.2.1 on page 23.<br />
Signal<br />
Generator (1)<br />
Attenuator (2)<br />
Power Meter<br />
(10)<br />
C.S.<br />
RF Amplifier<br />
(3)<br />
Attenuator<br />
(4)<br />
27 MHz<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Antenna<br />
(5)<br />
4.2 MHz<br />
50 Ω<br />
Z<br />
X<br />
1200 mm<br />
Y<br />
LZB - cable<br />
Possible Balise positions<br />
Current probe<br />
(32)<br />
500 mm<br />
Low impedance<br />
connection<br />
PCB with components<br />
Low impedance<br />
connection<br />
Filter (12)<br />
> 200 mm<br />
LZB - cable<br />
Power Meter<br />
(10)<br />
Ground<br />
Figure 21: <strong>Test</strong> set-up, Up-link induction from the Balise
Page 64 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.5.5.3 <strong>Test</strong> procedure, Up-link Induction from the Balise<br />
The following procedure applies:<br />
1. Position the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna such that it is in position [X=0, Y=0, Z=460] with respect to the position where<br />
the reference marks of the Balise is to be placed.<br />
2. Calibrate the flux such that φ d4 – 10 dB is obtained through the Balise. The proper calibration procedure<br />
is found in sub-clause 4.2.3.2.3 on page 41.<br />
3. Insert the Balise, and appropriate fixation devices <strong>for</strong> the cable according to company specific installation<br />
rules. The reference position of the tool (X = 0) is at the midpoint of the longer upper horizontal cable<br />
segment of the tool.<br />
4. Measure and record the current through the LZB loop when the LZB loop segment is positioned according<br />
to the nominal company specific installation rules.<br />
5. Verify that the limit defined in Part 1 of this Norm is not exceeded.<br />
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at the worst case installation conditions derived from the associated manufacturer<br />
dependent installation tolerances.<br />
4.2.5.5.4 <strong>Test</strong> set-up, Tele-powering Induction from the On-board Equipment<br />
The test set-up according to Figure 22 below applies. Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an example of<br />
suitable test equipment. Additional details related to the vertically positioned LZB loop is found in sub-clause<br />
J2.4 on page 329. See also sub-clause 4.2.1 on page 23.<br />
Signal<br />
Generator (1)<br />
Signal<br />
Generator (13)<br />
Attenuator<br />
(27)<br />
RF Amplifier<br />
(28)<br />
Attenuator<br />
(29)<br />
Attenuator (2)<br />
Power Meter 1<br />
(10)<br />
CS<br />
27 MHz<br />
RF Amplifier<br />
(3)<br />
Attenuator (4)<br />
Power Meter 2<br />
(10)<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Antenna (5)<br />
4.2 MHz Antenna<br />
Filter<br />
(12)<br />
Pre Amplifier<br />
(16)<br />
Filter<br />
(12)<br />
Balun (20)<br />
Possible Balise positions<br />
Z<br />
Vector Signal<br />
Analyser (15)<br />
27 MHz<br />
N-connector<br />
Y<br />
X<br />
> 200 mm<br />
Ground<br />
Figure 22: <strong>Test</strong> set-up, Tele-powering injection from the LZB Cable
Page 65 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.5.5.5 <strong>Test</strong> procedure, Tele-powering Induction from the On-board Equipment<br />
The following procedure applies:<br />
1. Position the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna such that it is in position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 460] with respect to the position<br />
where the reference marks of the Balise are to be placed, and the 4.2 MHz Antenna such that it is<br />
in position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 100] with respect to the position where the reference marks of the Balise<br />
are to be placed.<br />
2. Calibrate the 4.2 MHz Antenna with respect to the response from the Up-link signal using a Reference<br />
loop temporarily positioned at the intended position of the Balise. This is per<strong>for</strong>med through<br />
driving the current I u1 -10 dB through the Reference Loop and recording the reading of the vector signal<br />
analyser.<br />
3. Remove the Reference Loop and insert the Balise, appropriate fixation devices <strong>for</strong> the cable, but without<br />
possible RF chokes or similar devices, according to company specific installation rules. The reference<br />
position of the tool (X = 0) is at the midpoint of the longer upper horizontal cable segment of<br />
the tool.<br />
4. Calibrate the 27.095 MHz CW current through the LZB loop (using Power Meter 2) such that the current<br />
defined in Part 1 of Norm is obtained through the tool.<br />
5. Measure and record the Up link signal possibly generated by the Balise (using the 4.2 MHz Antenna<br />
and the vector signal analyser).<br />
6. Verify that the Balise is not activated (see the related definition of UNISIG SUBSET-036).<br />
Please observe that the balun shall be the same unit as the one used during tuning of the LZB loop.<br />
7. Temporarily insert a Reference Loop at the position where the Balise is supposed to be positioned.<br />
8. Per<strong>for</strong>m a calibration of 27.090 MHz CW flux generated by item 13 in accordance with sub-clause<br />
4.2.7.5 on page 77. Please observe that there shall be no (intentional) current through the LZB tool.<br />
9. Insert the Balise instead of the Reference Loop.<br />
10. Apply the defined calibrated 27.100 MHz CW current through the LZB loop (using Power Meter 2)<br />
such that the current defined in Part 1 of Norm is obtained through the tool.<br />
11. For the condition CW Tele-powering, nominal start-up ramp, and flux level 2 (all according to subclause<br />
4.2.7.2.3 on page 72), per<strong>for</strong>m the following tests:<br />
• <strong>Test</strong> of Centre Frequency (sub-clause 4.2.7.6 on page 79)<br />
• <strong>Test</strong> of Frequency Deviation (sub-clause 4.2.7.6 on page 79)<br />
12. Repeat step 11 using toggling Tele-powering transmitted by the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna.<br />
Please observe that item 1 shall be set to generate the frequency 27.100 MHz and item 13 shall be set to generate<br />
the frequency 27.090 MHz in steps 7 through 13.
Page 66 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.6 Balise Impedance<br />
4.2.6.1 General<br />
4.2.6.1.1 Introduction<br />
This sub-clause defines the test procedure <strong>for</strong> Balise Impedance <strong>Test</strong>s and the related calibrations that<br />
are required. A set of recommended test equipment is also included.<br />
The <strong>Test</strong> Procedure includes a number of different steps with partially different test set-ups. The main<br />
steps are:<br />
• Calibration of 27 MHz Tele-powering flux φ.<br />
• Calibration of Network Analyser set-up.<br />
• Balise Impedance measurements.<br />
The calibration of 27 MHz Tele-powering is per<strong>for</strong>med in order to define a specific magnetic flux through the<br />
Balise active Reference Area.<br />
Verification of 4.2 MHz Balise Up-link current can be omitted, because it can be assumed that the input-tooutput<br />
characteristics of the Balise to be submitted to the Impedance <strong>Test</strong> are compliant with the requirements of<br />
Part 1 of this Norm.<br />
The calibration of 27 MHz Tele-powering defines the measurement point <strong>for</strong> the Impedance <strong>Test</strong> of<br />
the Balise to be around the shaded point in Figure 23 below.<br />
Balise loop current<br />
I u3<br />
I u2<br />
I u1<br />
Φ d1 Φ d3 Φ d2 Φ d4 -3dB Φ d4<br />
Tele-powering<br />
magnetic flux<br />
Figure 23: Balise Impedance Calibration Point
Page 67 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.6.1.2 Impedance Requirements<br />
When the Balise receives a flux φ d from the Antenna Unit, a voltage is induced in the Balise receiver<br />
loop. The Balise loads the induced voltage, which in turn generates a current I reflected in the receiver loop.<br />
This current may influence the Antenna Unit. This interaction can be expressed as the impedance Z reflected<br />
(the induced voltage ωφ d divided by the current Ireflected).<br />
Part 1 of this Norm states that the absolute value of the complex impedance Z reflected of the Standard Size<br />
Balise shall be higher than 60 Ω when the Balise receives a flux reaching φ d4 +0/–3 dB.<br />
Part 1 of this Norm states that the absolute value of the complex impedance Z reflected of the Reduced Size<br />
Balise shall be higher than 40 Ω when the Balise receives a flux reaching φ d4 +0/–3 dB.<br />
4.2.6.2 <strong>Test</strong> Conditions<br />
The test should be per<strong>for</strong>med in a laboratory environment where no other H-field exists except the one<br />
that is to be present <strong>for</strong> test purposes. The Reference Loops and Balises shall be separated more than 1 m<br />
from any metallic object during the measurements.<br />
Calibrations and measurements shall be per<strong>for</strong>med <strong>for</strong> the following position of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna,<br />
relative to the Reference Loop:<br />
[X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220]<br />
The positioning system should have accuracy in displacement in the X, Y, and Z directions of better<br />
than 2 mm. It is also essential that the positioning system does not disturb the field distribution.
Page 68 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.6.3 Calibration of 27 MHz Tele-powering flux<br />
4.2.6.3.1 Calibration Configuration<br />
See sub-clause 4.2.3.2.1 on page 39.<br />
After calibration of the 27 MHz Tele-powering flux, the Balise Impedance Measurements are per<strong>for</strong>med using<br />
the test configuration shown in Figure 24 on page 69. For this configuration the Signal Generator (item 1) in<br />
Figure 10 on page 39 <strong>for</strong> 27 MHz is substituted by the network analyser (item 22).<br />
4.2.6.3.2 Calibration Procedure<br />
1. Position the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220] relative to the Reference Loop.<br />
2. Determine the power level <strong>for</strong> where it is relevant to per<strong>for</strong>m the calibration using the following<br />
equation:<br />
where:<br />
B ⋅ 50 ⋅ P<br />
φ =<br />
2 ⋅ π ⋅ f<br />
L<br />
⎛ 50 + Z<br />
⋅⎜<br />
⎝ 50<br />
loop<br />
⎞<br />
⎟<br />
⎠<br />
f = 27.095 MHz<br />
Z loop = R loop + j X loop Ω (actual impedance in the absence of any antenna)<br />
P L = P M3 + Attenuation<br />
B = Reference Loop matching transfer ratio<br />
P M3 = Power measured by Power Meter 3 16<br />
Attenuation = Attenuation of Balun (item 20) + Attenuator (item 9)<br />
3. Set the Signal Generator to the frequency 27.095 MHz, and to CW.<br />
4. Adjust the power level such that the requested flux level is obtained. As an example, the input power to<br />
the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna should be approximately +21 dBm measured by Power Meter 3 (or +17.5 dBm <strong>for</strong> the<br />
Reduced Size type). For this power measurement, the attenuator, item 9, should be capable of handling a<br />
power dissipation of 20 W.<br />
5. Record the exact reading of Power Meter 3.<br />
6. Record the reading of Power Meter 2. This power value shall be maintained to the same level<br />
during the impedance measurements according to sub-clause 4.2.6.4 on page 69 (when the network<br />
analyser substitutes the signal generator <strong>for</strong> 27 MHz).<br />
16<br />
As an example, assuming that Z loop is small compared to 50 Ω and that B equals one, then a power level P M3 of +21 dBm<br />
should be selected <strong>for</strong> the Standard Size Reference Loop. This corresponds to a flux of approximately 150 nVs. This is<br />
a relevant calibration point <strong>for</strong> the Standard Size Reference Loop. For the Reduced Size Reference Loop, the corresponding<br />
values are +17,5 dBm and 100 nVs respectively. If the assumptions are not fulfilled, then the power levels<br />
have to be modified.
Page 69 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.6.4 Balise Impedance Measurements<br />
4.2.6.4.1 <strong>Test</strong> Configuration<br />
A proposed test set-up is shown in Figure 24 below. Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an example of<br />
suitable test equipment. “Reference Load” refers to “open”, “short”, and “50 Ω reference” normally used during<br />
a full one port calibration of the network analyser. Item 7 is substituted by a Balise during the Balise Impedance<br />
Measurement described in sub-clause 4.2.6.4.3 on page 70. Please note that no balun shall be used when connecting<br />
the Reference Load to the Reference Loop. See also sub-clause 4.2.1 on page 23.<br />
4.<br />
Attenuator<br />
In<br />
23.<br />
Directional<br />
Coupler<br />
J1<br />
J3<br />
J2<br />
J4<br />
Out<br />
27 MHz<br />
10.<br />
P M2<br />
Power<br />
Meter 2<br />
C.S.<br />
3.<br />
RF<br />
Amplifier<br />
Forw.<br />
Refl.<br />
50 Ω<br />
4.2 MHz<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Antenna 5.<br />
Interface ‘A’<br />
22.<br />
RFout R A<br />
Network Analyser<br />
7.<br />
Balise<br />
Reference Loop<br />
Reference Load<br />
Figure 24: <strong>Test</strong> set-up <strong>for</strong> Balise Impedance Measurements
Page 70 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.6.4.2 Calibration Procedure<br />
The network analyser (item 22) is used to measure the input impedance of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna. The<br />
following set-up should be used:<br />
Network analyser set-up:<br />
Measurement Type:<br />
Format:<br />
Sweep Type:<br />
Centre:<br />
Span:<br />
Cont. Wave:<br />
S11 (A/R)<br />
Smith Chart<br />
Power Sweep<br />
X dBm (X related to the flux)<br />
0 dBm<br />
27.095 MHz<br />
A “full one port calibration” shall be per<strong>for</strong>med by connecting “open”, “short”, and “50 Ω reference” to<br />
the output port of the Reference Loop. Please note that high power will occur in this point, and that the<br />
calibration load might be damaged. 17<br />
1. Position the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220] relative to the Reference Loop.<br />
2. Connect the Reference Loop according to the set-up in Figure 24 on page 69.<br />
3. Switch on the input power to the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna. Adjust the power in order to achieve the same<br />
power level recorded with Power Meter 2 as during the calibration of 27 MHz Tele-powering flux<br />
(see sub-clause 4.2.6.3 on page 68).<br />
4. Per<strong>for</strong>m a “full one port calibration” as described above (with Reference Loads connected to the<br />
output of the Reference Loop).<br />
5. Switch off the power.<br />
6. Disconnect the Reference Loop.<br />
4.2.6.4.3 <strong>Test</strong>s Procedure<br />
For the Balise Impedance Measurements, the same test set-up as shown in Figure 24 on page 69 shall be<br />
maintained. The only difference is that the Balise now replaces the Reference Loop (and the Reference<br />
Load).<br />
1. Maintain the network analyser set-up and calibration as used in sub-clause 4.2.6.4.2.<br />
2. Position the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220] relative to Balise.<br />
3. Adjust the input power to the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in order to achieve the same power level recorded by<br />
Power Meter 2 as during the calibration of 27 MHz Tele-powering flux (see sub-clause 4.2.6.3 on<br />
page 68).<br />
4. Measure the input impedance of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna (Z in ) with the network analyser and record the<br />
value.<br />
5. Calculate the final value <strong>for</strong> the Balise impedance using the following:<br />
Zbalise = Zin + Zloop<br />
where Z loop is the free air impedance of the Reference Loop (marked on the device).<br />
17<br />
A suitable solution is to use a power attenuator with low VSWR (< 1.05) in front of the 50 Ω calibration load during the<br />
network analyser calibration. The use of a potential attenuator only applies to the case when calibrating with the 50 Ω<br />
reference load.
Page 71 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.7 Up-link Signal Characteristics<br />
4.2.7.1 General<br />
4.2.7.1.1 Introduction<br />
This sub-clause defines measurement methods <strong>for</strong> verifying Up-link FSK per<strong>for</strong>mance of Balises, as defined by<br />
Part 1 of this Norm. It also includes recommended test set-ups.<br />
The measurement conditions according to 4.2.7.2.3 on page 72 include several different levels of 27 MHz Telepowering<br />
flux. To achieve these levels, a calibration in accordance with sub-clause 4.2.7.5 on page 77 is required<br />
be<strong>for</strong>e testing.<br />
The general test set-up <strong>for</strong> all tests is found in sub-clause 4.2.7.1.2 below, and the specific set-up recommended<br />
<strong>for</strong> calibration is found in sub-clause 4.2.7.5.1 on page 77.<br />
4.2.7.1.2 <strong>Test</strong> set-up <strong>for</strong> Up-link FSK measurements<br />
A proposed test set-up is shown in Figure 25 below. Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an example of<br />
suitable test equipment. The Reference Signal Generator is only applicable <strong>for</strong> controlled Balises. See also subclause<br />
4.2.1 on page 23.<br />
29. Attenuator<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Antenna 5.<br />
4.2 MHz<br />
Interface ‘A’<br />
12.<br />
Filter<br />
RF<br />
28.<br />
Amplifier<br />
Balise<br />
27.<br />
Attenuator<br />
37.<br />
16.<br />
12.<br />
P M1<br />
27 MHz C.S.<br />
Oscilloscope<br />
Pre-<br />
Amplifier<br />
Filter<br />
Power<br />
Meter 1<br />
Signal<br />
Generator<br />
13.<br />
10.<br />
13.<br />
Signal<br />
Generator<br />
15.<br />
Vector<br />
Signal<br />
Analyser<br />
Figure 25: <strong>Test</strong> set-up <strong>for</strong> Up-link FSK measurements<br />
If the received 4.2 MHz signal is judged being too low <strong>for</strong> accurately per<strong>for</strong>ming the measurements, it is preferred<br />
to complement the test set-up with a 4.2 MHz Antenna at sufficiently low height used <strong>for</strong> reception of the<br />
Up-link signal. In such a case, the calibration principle should be in accordance with sub-clause 4.2.3.2 on page<br />
39.
Page 72 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.7.2 Nominal <strong>Test</strong> Conditions<br />
4.2.7.2.1 Metallic objects and Debris<br />
No metallic objects shall be present.<br />
No debris shall be applied.<br />
4.2.7.2.2 <strong>Test</strong> Distance<br />
The vertical distance between the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna and the Balise shall be 460 mm ±2 mm from the centre of the<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Antenna loop to the Reference marks of the Balise.<br />
4.2.7.2.3 Tele-powering flux characteristics<br />
The Tele-powering flux shall have the following characteristics:<br />
The frequency shall be 27.095 MHz ±200 ppm.<br />
Three different modulations shall apply:<br />
• CW<br />
• Toggling AM<br />
• Non-toggling AM<br />
CW is defined as no modulation (constant amplitude).<br />
Unless otherwise stated, measurements shall be per<strong>for</strong>med <strong>for</strong> “CW” and <strong>for</strong> “Toggling AM” 27 MHz Telepowering<br />
signal.<br />
“Toggling AM” is defined according to Part 1 of this Norm. The modulation depth shall be at 52 % ±2 %, and<br />
the pulse width variation shall be 0.81 µs ±0.01 µs during these tests. The current specification (UNISIG<br />
SUBSET-036) allows <strong>for</strong> various rise and fall times.<br />
“Non-toggling AM” is defined according to Part 1 of this Norm. The modulation depth shall be 52 % ±2 %, and<br />
within the range 85 % to 100 % during these tests. These conditions are intended to be “worst case” of those<br />
defined in Part 1 of this Norm.<br />
In addition to the above defined modulation characteristics, the flux shall also be modulated to simulate a train<br />
passage according to the following:<br />
Flux<br />
Peak level<br />
Ton<br />
Toff<br />
Time<br />
Figure 26: Simulated train passage<br />
The start-up and end ramps shall have a slope of 10 nVs/ms <strong>for</strong> a standard size Balise, and 5 nVs/ms <strong>for</strong> a reduced<br />
size Balise.<br />
Please consider that the slopes are typical test cases only, not implying any On-board limitations.
Page 73 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Unless otherwise explicitly stated, “CW” measurements shall start 150 µs after the 27 MHz Tele-powering flux<br />
has reached the level φ d1 on the start up ramp, or when the flux has reached the defined peak level, whichever<br />
comes last.<br />
Unless otherwise explicitly stated, “Toggling AM” measurements shall start 250 µs after the 27 MHz Telepowering<br />
flux has reached the level φ d1 on the start up ramp, or when the flux has reached the defined peak<br />
level, whichever comes last.<br />
Calibrate triggering level with the actual test object, using the current sense output from the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna.<br />
Dynamic properties of the signal shall be measured at the current sense output of the test antenna.<br />
The duration, T on , shall be sufficient <strong>for</strong> the measurements per<strong>for</strong>med.<br />
The off-time between successive activation periods, T off , shall be sufficient to give a duty cycle of less than 1 %.<br />
The duty cycle shall be calculated based on the 50 % points on the flux level curve.<br />
The Tele-powering flux shall be defined at three different levels:<br />
Level<br />
Value<br />
1 φ d1 +0.8 dB ±0.5 dB<br />
2 φ d2 ±1 dB<br />
3 φ d2 +10 dB ±1 dB<br />
Table 1: Tele-powering Flux Levels<br />
4.2.7.2.4 Telegram Contents<br />
The Balise shall transmit a randomised 341 bit telegram that is valid (fulfilling the coding requirements according<br />
to Part 1 of this Norm), and which consists of 50 % ±2 % of logical “one”. The telegram shall comprise an<br />
even distributed run length, based upon a truncated close to exponential distribution of transitions. This is Telegram<br />
Type 1 according to clause A2 of Annex A on page 157.<br />
4.2.7.2.5 Balise controlling interface characteristics<br />
If the Balise is controlled by a Reference Signal Generator, the signals in the Balise controlling interface shall<br />
either have their nominal parameter values (“enabled Reference Signal Generator”) or be according to “disabled<br />
Reference Signal Generator” conditions. “Disabled Reference Signal Generator” means that no signals are<br />
present at the Balise controlling interface.<br />
Unless otherwise stated, <strong>for</strong> controlled Balises, measurements shall be per<strong>for</strong>med both with the Reference Signal<br />
Generator enabled, and with it disabled.
Page 74 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.7.3 Specific <strong>Test</strong> Conditions<br />
4.2.7.3.1 Metallic objects<br />
• The “Metallic plane underneath the Balise” condition is defined in sub-clause B5.3.3 of Annex B on page<br />
194. The <strong>Test</strong> Antenna shall be subjected to free air conditions.<br />
• The “Steel sleeper underneath the Balise” condition is defined in sub-clause B5.3.4 of Annex B on page 195.<br />
The <strong>Test</strong> Antenna shall be subjected to free air conditions.<br />
4.2.7.3.2 Debris<br />
The design of the Debris Box, and the utilisation, is according to sub-clause B5.2.1 of Annex B on page 186<br />
• The “Salt water” condition is defined in sub-clause B5.2.4.1 of Annex B on page 188. The <strong>Test</strong> Antenna<br />
shall be subjected to free air conditions. The manufacturer of the Balise shall define which debris class (A or<br />
B) that is applicable.<br />
• The “Clear water” condition is defined in sub-clause B5.2.4.2 of Annex B on page 188. The <strong>Test</strong> Antenna<br />
shall be subjected to free air conditions. The manufacturer of the Balise shall define which debris class (A or<br />
B) that is applicable.<br />
• The “Iron ore (Magnetite)” condition is defined in sub-clause B5.2.4.3 of Annex B on page 188. The <strong>Test</strong><br />
Antenna shall be subjected to free air conditions. The manufacturer of the Balise shall define which debris<br />
class (A or B) that is applicable.<br />
4.2.7.3.3 <strong>Test</strong> Distance<br />
See sub-clause 4.2.7.2.2 on page 72.<br />
4.2.7.3.4 Tele-powering flux characteristics<br />
See sub-clause 4.2.7.2.3 on page 72.<br />
4.2.7.3.5 Telegram Contents<br />
The telegrams to be tested shall be of the short (341 bits) and long (1023 bits) length, and be valid (fulfilling the<br />
coding requirements according to Part 1 of this Norm). Eighteen different characteristics shall be defined according<br />
to clause A2 of Annex A on page 157.<br />
4.2.7.3.6 Balise controlling interface characteristics<br />
Extreme Balise controlling interface conditions are defined by sub-clause 4.2.8.3 on page 89.<br />
For controlled Balises, two conditions are applicable, both with a physical connection between the Balise and<br />
the Reference Signal Generator. The first is with the Reference Signal Generator enabled (producing valid<br />
Balise controlling interface signals). The second is with the Reference Signal Generator disabled (producing no<br />
signals at the Balise controlling interface).<br />
Unless otherwise stated, <strong>for</strong> controlled Balises, measurements shall be per<strong>for</strong>med both with the Reference Signal<br />
Generator enabled, and with it disabled.
Page 75 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.7.4 Toggling AM <strong>Test</strong> Conditions<br />
4.2.7.4.1 Metallic objects and Debris<br />
See sub-clause 4.2.7.2.1 on page 72.<br />
4.2.7.4.2 <strong>Test</strong> Distance<br />
See sub-clause 4.2.7.2.2 on page 72.<br />
4.2.7.4.3 Tele-powering flux characteristics<br />
“Toggling AM” is defined according to Part 1 of this Norm. The following characteristics apply:<br />
The carrier frequency shall be 27.095 MHz ±200 ppm.<br />
Rise and fall times of the modulation pulses shall be in accordance with Figure 27 and Table 2 below.<br />
Modulation pulse width shall be 2.1 µs ±0.1 µs.<br />
Toggling shall be 0.81 µs ±0.01 µs (i.e., one pulse is nominally 2.1 µs and the other is 2.9 µs).<br />
Modulation depth shall be at 52 % ±2 %, and within the range 85 % to 100 %.<br />
100 % of actual<br />
modulation<br />
depth<br />
90 %<br />
50 %<br />
t 1<br />
10 %<br />
t 1<br />
t 2<br />
t 2<br />
Figure 27: Definition of Modulation Pulse parameters (<strong>for</strong> testing)<br />
Parameter Nominal value Tolerance<br />
t1 fast 300 ns ±10 %<br />
t2 fast 950 ns ±10 %<br />
t1 slow 2.1 450 ns ±10 %<br />
t2 slow 2.1 1500 ns ±10 %<br />
t1 slow 2.9 500 ns ±10 %<br />
t2 slow 2.9 1750 ns ±10 %<br />
Table 2: Modulation Pulse parameter values (<strong>for</strong> testing)
Page 76 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
In addition to the above defined modulation characteristics, the flux shall also be modulated to simulate a train<br />
passage according to the following:<br />
Flux<br />
Peak level<br />
Ton<br />
Toff<br />
Time<br />
Figure 28: Simulated train passage<br />
The start-up and end ramps shall have a slope of 2 nVs/ms and 80 nVs/ms <strong>for</strong> a Standard Size Balise. For the<br />
Reduced Size Balise, 1 nVs/ms and 40 nVs/ms apply.<br />
Please consider that the slopes are typical test cases only, not implying any On-board limitations.<br />
Measurements shall start 250 µs after the 27 MHz Tele-powering flux has reached the level φ d1 on the start up<br />
ramp.<br />
Calibrate triggering level with the actual test object, using the current sense output from the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna.<br />
Dynamic properties of the signal shall be measured at the current sense output of the test antenna.<br />
The duration, T on , shall be sufficient <strong>for</strong> the measurements per<strong>for</strong>med.<br />
The off-time between successive activation periods, T off , shall be sufficient to give a duty cycle of less than 1 %.<br />
The duty cycle shall be calculated based on the 50 % points on the flux level curve.<br />
The Tele-powering flux peak level shall be defined at φ d2 +10 dB ±1 dB.<br />
4.2.7.4.4 Telegram Contents<br />
See sub-clause 4.2.7.2.4 on page 73.<br />
4.2.7.4.5 Balise controlling interface characteristics<br />
See sub-clause 4.2.7.2.5 on page 73.
Page 77 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.7.5 Calibration of 27 MHz Tele-powering flux<br />
4.2.7.5.1 Calibration Configuration<br />
A proposed calibration set-up is shown in Figure 29 below. Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an example<br />
of suitable test equipment. See sub-clause 4.2.1 on page 23.<br />
P M1<br />
Power<br />
Meter 1<br />
C.S.<br />
27 MHz<br />
29. Attenuator<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Antenna 5.<br />
4.2 MHz<br />
50 Ω<br />
Interface ‘A’<br />
10.<br />
28.<br />
RF<br />
Amplifier<br />
Reference Loop<br />
7.<br />
27.<br />
Attenuator<br />
Balun<br />
8.<br />
13.<br />
Signal<br />
Generator<br />
Attenuator<br />
9.<br />
P M2<br />
Power<br />
Meter 2<br />
10.<br />
Figure 29: <strong>Test</strong> set-up <strong>for</strong> calibration of 27 MHz Tele-powering flux<br />
Please observe the note regarding the test set-up in sub-clause 4.2.7.1.2 on page 71.
Page 78 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.7.5.2 Calibration Abstract<br />
This calibration procedure will give a reference value P 27AA . The reference value P 27AA is used when activating<br />
the Balise with flux levels according to Table 1 on page 73 through the Reference Area.<br />
4.2.7.5.3 Calibration Procedure<br />
1. Position the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in position [x = 0, y = 0, z = 460] relative to the Reference Loop.<br />
2. Apply debris according to one of the relevant conditions (including the no debris condition).<br />
3. Determine a suitable power level, P M2 , <strong>for</strong> a flux of φ d (one of the values from Table 1). The power <strong>for</strong><br />
φ d , P L , is determined by:<br />
P<br />
L<br />
( 2⋅<br />
π⋅f<br />
⋅φ )<br />
=<br />
⎛ 50 + Z<br />
50⋅⎜<br />
⎝<br />
50<br />
d<br />
loop<br />
2<br />
⎞<br />
⎟<br />
⎠<br />
2<br />
⋅ B<br />
2<br />
where:<br />
f = 27.095 MHz<br />
Z loop = R loop + j X loop Ω (actual impedance in the absence of any antenna)<br />
P L = Power measured out of the Reference Loop [W]<br />
B = Reference Loop matching transfer ratio.<br />
P<br />
M2<br />
= 10⋅log(PL<br />
⋅1000)<br />
− Attenuation [dBm]<br />
where: Attenuation equals the attenuation of items 9 and 20 together with the cable from the Reference<br />
Loop to the power meter sensor head. 18<br />
Measure the Attenuation and calculate the value of P M2 .<br />
4. Set the Signal Generator to the frequency 27.095 MHz, and to CW. Ramping the signal according to<br />
Figure 26 on page 72 is not applicable to the calibration procedure.<br />
5. Adjust the input power to the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in order to achieve approximately φ d through the Reference<br />
Loop (through observing the reading of Power Meter 2).<br />
Record the reading of Power Meter 1 and call it P 27AA . This is the future reference <strong>for</strong> the specific flux<br />
level within the continued testing of signal characteristics.<br />
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 <strong>for</strong> all flux levels in Table 1 on page 73.<br />
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 <strong>for</strong> all relevant debris conditions.<br />
18<br />
As an example, assuming that Z loop is small compared to 50 Ω, φ d = 200 nVs, B = 1, and that the Attenuation equals<br />
20 dB, then the power level P M2 will be 23.6 dBm <strong>for</strong> the Standard Size Reference Loop. For the Reduced Size Reference<br />
Loop, the corresponding value <strong>for</strong> φ d = 130 nVs gives P M2 = 19.9 dBm.
Page 79 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.7.6 <strong>Test</strong> of Centre Frequency and Frequency Deviation<br />
This test shall verify Centre Frequency and Frequency Deviation.<br />
The proposed test set-up is according to Figure 25 on page 71. <strong>Test</strong> cases are according to sub-clause 4.2.7.16.2<br />
on page 84.<br />
Measure the carrier amplitude and phase of the Up-link signal over a 1 ms time frame. A bandwidth of more<br />
than 2 MHz shall be used, and it is recommended that 8 MHz should be used to avoid errors due to spectrum<br />
truncation.<br />
1. Evaluate Up-link frequency during the measured period, determining the times during which “0” (f L )<br />
respectively “1” (f H ) are transmitted.<br />
2. Apply a window, 16 bits long, to the first 16 bits of the measured data.<br />
3. For the bits within the window, find the average frequency <strong>for</strong> each bit.<br />
4. For the bits within the window, find the minimum and maximum value of the average frequencies of the<br />
“0” (f L ) bits, f Lmin and f Lmax . In the same manner, find the minimum and maximum value of the average<br />
frequencies of the “1” (f H ) bits, f Hmin and f Hmax .<br />
5. Evaluate “Centre frequency” respectively “Deviation” according to “(f L +f H )/2 = 4.234 MHz ±175 kHz”<br />
respectively “(f H -f L )/2 = 282.24 kHz ±7 %”, using the worst case combinations of f Lmin and f Lmax respectively<br />
f Hmin and f Hmax . This means that:<br />
• (f Lmax +f Hmax )/2 < 4.234 MHz +175 kHz = 4.409 MHz<br />
• (f Lmin +f Hmin )/2 > 4.234 MHz –175 kHz = 4.059 MHz<br />
• (f Hmax -f Lmin )/2 < 282.24 kHz +7 % = 302.00 kHz<br />
• (f Hmin -f Lmax )/2 > 282.24 kHz –7 % = 262.48 kHz<br />
6. Step the window <strong>for</strong>ward 1 bit through the measured data.<br />
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 until the end of the measured data is reached.<br />
A time period of not more than the time equivalent to one period of the carrier (236 ns) should be ignored<br />
around the bit transition.
Page 80 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.7.7 <strong>Test</strong> of Start-up after Side Lobe<br />
This test shall verify Centre Frequency and Frequency Deviation <strong>for</strong> start-up after a preceding side lobe.<br />
The proposed test set-up is according to Figure 25 on page 71. <strong>Test</strong> cases are according to sub-clause 4.2.7.16.3<br />
on page 84.<br />
The test shall be per<strong>for</strong>med according to sub-clause 4.2.7.6, but with an extra burst of 27 MHz signal preceding<br />
the one used <strong>for</strong> the test:<br />
Flux<br />
Flux level<br />
T side<br />
Side lobe<br />
level<br />
Time<br />
T on<br />
T off<br />
T dip<br />
Figure 30: Simulated train passage with side lobe<br />
The flux level <strong>for</strong> the side lobe (“Side lobe level”) shall be 17 dB below that of the main lobe (“Flux level”).<br />
The timing of the side lobe shall be T side = 1 ms, T dip = 25 µs. The start-up and end ramps shall have the same<br />
slope as those <strong>for</strong> the main lobe.<br />
4.2.7.8 <strong>Test</strong> of Mean Data Rate<br />
The proposed test set-up is according to Figure 25 on page 71. <strong>Test</strong> cases are according to sub-clause 4.2.7.16.4<br />
on page 85.<br />
The analyser shall be configured <strong>for</strong> measuring demodulated FSK over 1500 symbols with a resolution of<br />
4 samples/symbol. A bandwidth of 8 MHz should be used to avoid errors due to spectrum truncation.<br />
The mean data rate is defined as<br />
T<br />
1500<br />
( bit ) − T( )<br />
1500 bit 0<br />
.<br />
When the exact timing of bit 0 or bit 1500 can not be determined from measurement data due to a sequence of consecutive<br />
‘0’ or ‘1’, the timing of these bit transitions shall be calculated through linear interpolation between the<br />
timing of the closest bit transitions, where this can be determined from measurement data.<br />
The mean data rate shall be 564.48 kbit/s ± 2.5 %.
Page 81 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.7.9 <strong>Test</strong> of MTIE (Maximum Time Interval Error)<br />
The proposed test set-up is according to Figure 25 on page 71. <strong>Test</strong> cases are according to sub-clause 4.2.7.16.5<br />
on page 85.<br />
The analyser shall be configured <strong>for</strong> measuring carrier amplitude and phase over at least 1500 bits. A bandwidth<br />
of 8 MHz should be used to avoid errors due to spectrum truncation.<br />
The actual signal timing of the bits shall be evaluated <strong>for</strong> the measured data. The measurement method shall be<br />
based on phase demodulation of the Up-link signal per<strong>for</strong>med in a sufficient amount of points during a one bit<br />
window, evaluation of the best linear fit of these phase samples (linear regression) during the bit window, identification<br />
of the exact instants of bit transition, evaluation of the overall time interval error considering the combination<br />
of data rate and carrier phase errors, and a verification of the MTIE1 or MTIE2 requirements. The bit<br />
transitions are defined as where the two best fit lines of successive “one” and “zero” (or “zero” and “one”) bits<br />
meet. In the event of many successive “ones” or “zeroes”, the distance between discernible bit transitions is<br />
split into a suitable amount of equally long bits, and consequently the overall time interval error is assigned<br />
(split) in equal parts to the same number of bits.<br />
The data shall comply with either MTIE1 requirement or MTIE2 requirement according to Part 1 of this Norm.<br />
This shall be verified <strong>for</strong> all possible 1000 bit windows in the measurement data. It shall also be verified that the<br />
mean data rate calculated according to the <strong>for</strong>mula given in sub-clause 4.2.7.8 complies with the requirement<br />
given there <strong>for</strong> all possible 1500 bit windows in the measurement data.<br />
If the MTIE2 requirement is chosen, the “mean data rate” referred to in the requirement shall be derived from<br />
the same set of measurement data as the bit timings.<br />
4.2.7.10 <strong>Test</strong> of Amplitude Jitter during start-up ramp<br />
The proposed test set-up is according to Figure 25 on page 71. <strong>Test</strong> cases are according to sub-clause 4.2.7.16.6<br />
on page 86.<br />
The analyser shall be configured <strong>for</strong> measuring carrier amplitude and phase over a time sufficient to cover the<br />
entire start-up ramp of the 27 MHz signal. A bandwidth of 4 MHz shall be used to avoid errors due to spectrum<br />
truncation.<br />
As an alternative to using the Vector Signal Analyser included in the test set-up according to Figure 25 on page<br />
71, direct sampling and digitising may be per<strong>for</strong>med if it can be proven that the related software algorithms<br />
required <strong>for</strong> analysis of the acquired data gives the same end results. The sampling rate should be at least<br />
100 MHz, and the amplitude resolution should be at least 12 bits.<br />
A sliding 50 µs to 100 µs wide window shall be defined in the measured data. Initially the window shall start<br />
150 µs after the passage of the φ d1 flux level if Tele-powering is CW, and 250 µs after the passage of the φ d1 flux<br />
level if Tele-powering is toggling.<br />
The average (RMS) amplitude value shall be evaluated over a 1.77 µs long interval at the centre of the sliding<br />
window. The amplitude jitter shall be defined as the difference between this RMS value over the centre interval<br />
and the average 19 amplitude value over the entire sliding window.<br />
The amplitude jitter shall be less than +1.5/-2.0 dB <strong>for</strong> all positions of the sliding window.<br />
19<br />
Either true RMS average or arithmetic average of the demodulated sine amplitude (normalised to RMS value) is allowed<br />
<strong>for</strong> the longer window.
Page 82 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.7.11 <strong>Test</strong> of Amplitude Jitter during steady state flux<br />
The proposed test set-up is according to Figure 25 on page 71. <strong>Test</strong> cases are according to sub-clause 4.2.7.16.7<br />
on page 86.<br />
The analyser shall be configured <strong>for</strong> measuring carrier amplitude and phase over a period of 20 ms. A bandwidth<br />
of 4 MHz shall be used to avoid errors due to spectrum truncation.<br />
As an alternative to using the Vector Signal Analyser included in the test set-up according to Figure 23 on page<br />
67, direct sampling and digitising may be per<strong>for</strong>med if it can be proven that the related software algorithms<br />
required <strong>for</strong> analysis of the acquired data is in correspondence with the specification. The sampling rate should<br />
be at least 100 MHz, and the amplitude resolution should be at least 12 bits.<br />
A sliding 400 µs to 800 µs wide window shall be defined in the measured data. Initially the window shall start<br />
at a time when steady state conditions have occurred <strong>for</strong> input flux.<br />
The average (RMS) amplitude value shall be evaluated over a 1.77 µs long window at the centre of the sliding<br />
window. The amplitude jitter shall be defined as the difference between this RMS value over the centre interval<br />
and the average 20 amplitude value over the entire sliding window.<br />
The amplitude jitter shall be less than +1.5/-2.0 dB <strong>for</strong> all positions of the sliding window.<br />
4.2.7.12 <strong>Test</strong> of Signal Bandwidth<br />
The proposed test set-up is according to Figure 25 on page 71. <strong>Test</strong> cases are according to sub-clause 4.2.7.16.8<br />
on page 87.<br />
The 10 dB signal bandwidth shall be measured directly with the analyser in the spectrum analyser mode and<br />
shall be less than 1 MHz.<br />
In a first step, the signal power shall be measured in a 1 MHz wide band centred around the already determined<br />
centre frequency. This shall be per<strong>for</strong>med through evaluation of the RMS averaged spectrum of the signal,<br />
using a Resolution Bandwidth of approximately 4.8 kHz, a Span of 4 MHz (corresponding to a signal record<br />
length of 800 µs), and an averaging factor of 10. The signal power shall then be obtained by integration of this<br />
spectrum within the above defined 1 MHz band. Thereafter, the same process shall be repeated, but with the<br />
1 MHz window centred respectively 1 MHz above, and 1 MHz below, the already determined centre frequency.<br />
The sum of the signal power within the latter two 1 MHz windows shall be at least 10 dB below the signal<br />
power of the 1 MHz window that was centred around the centre frequency (the first measurement).<br />
4.2.7.13 <strong>Test</strong> of Delay Time and Balise controlling interface Parameter Variation<br />
The proposed test set-up is according to Figure 25 on page 71. <strong>Test</strong> cases are according to sub-clause 4.2.7.16.9<br />
on page 87.<br />
The test shall verify that the Balise functions correctly, and that the delay of the signal from the Balise controlling<br />
interface to the Interface ‘A’ is less than 10 µs <strong>for</strong> the specified conditions of the input signal on the Balise<br />
controlling interface defined in sub-clause 4.2.7.16.9 on page 87.<br />
The start of the telegram sent from the Reference Signal Generator to the Balise controlling interface shall be<br />
indicated by the trigger output signal from the Reference Signal Generator. The received telegram shall be<br />
analysed, and the delay of the signal between the two interfaces shall be evaluated. It shall also be verified that<br />
the whole sent telegram has been received correctly.<br />
20<br />
Either true RMS average or arithmetic average of the demodulated sine amplitude (normalised to RMS value) is allowed<br />
<strong>for</strong> the longer window.
Page 83 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.7.14 <strong>Test</strong> of Compatibility<br />
The proposed test set-up is according to Figure 25 on page 71. <strong>Test</strong> cases are according to sub-clause<br />
4.2.7.16.10 on page 87.<br />
It shall be verified that <strong>for</strong> a “Non-toggling AM” 27 MHz input Tele-powering signal, the Balise does not transmit<br />
an Up-link signal <strong>for</strong> a longer period of time than 80 µs.<br />
4.2.7.15 <strong>Test</strong> of Balise start with Toggling AM and steep Tele-powering slope<br />
The proposed test set-up is according to Figure 25 on page 71. <strong>Test</strong> cases are according to sub-clause<br />
4.2.7.16.11 on page 87.<br />
It shall be verified that <strong>for</strong> a “Toggling AM” 27 MHz input Tele-powering signal with steep Tele-powering<br />
slope, the Balise starts each time a simulated train passage is per<strong>for</strong>med. For each simulated passage, verify that<br />
the Balise starts no later than 250 µs after the passage of the flux level φ d1 (<strong>for</strong> the purpose of this test, through<br />
verifying that the Up-link signal level exceeds I u1 ). Measurement tolerances shall be considered when selecting<br />
the actual test limits.
Page 84 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.7.16 <strong>Test</strong> Matrices<br />
4.2.7.16.1 General<br />
The following test matrices define the applicable test cases. See also sub-clauses 4.2.7.2 on page 72 and 4.2.7.3<br />
on page 74, i.e., sub-clause 4.2.7.4 on page 75 only applies where explicitly stated.<br />
Unless otherwise explicitly stated, all conditions are nominal in the herein defined test matrices.<br />
4.2.7.16.2 Centre Frequency and Frequency Deviation<br />
Measurements shall be done after a start-up ramp according to sub-clause 4.2.7.2.3 on page 72.<br />
Measurements during nominal conditions shall be per<strong>for</strong>med <strong>for</strong> all flux levels according to Table 1 on page 73.<br />
For other conditions, only flux level 3 applies.<br />
The following combinations of <strong>Test</strong> Conditions and Telegrams shall be tested:<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Condition<br />
Telegram<br />
Type 4<br />
Telegram<br />
Type 5<br />
Nominal X X<br />
Lower temperature limit<br />
Upper temperature limit<br />
Metallic Plate<br />
Steel Sleeper<br />
Salt Water<br />
Clear Water<br />
Iron Ore<br />
Table 3: <strong>Test</strong> Conditions versus Telegrams <strong>for</strong> Centre Frequency and Frequency Deviation<br />
X<br />
X<br />
X<br />
X<br />
X<br />
X<br />
X<br />
4.2.7.16.3 Start-up after Side Lobe<br />
Measurements shall be per<strong>for</strong>med <strong>for</strong> all flux levels according to Table 1 on page 73.<br />
The following combinations of <strong>Test</strong> Conditions and Telegrams shall be tested:<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Condition<br />
Telegram<br />
Type 4<br />
Telegram<br />
Type 5<br />
Nominal X X<br />
Table 4: <strong>Test</strong> Conditions versus Telegrams <strong>for</strong> Start-up after Side Lobe
Page 85 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.7.16.4 Mean Data Rate<br />
Measurements shall start at least 10 ms after the 27 MHz Tele-powering flux has reached the level φ d1 on a startup<br />
ramp according to sub-clause 4.2.7.2.3 on page 72.<br />
Measurements shall be per<strong>for</strong>med <strong>for</strong> flux level 3 according to Table 1 on page 73.<br />
The following combinations of <strong>Test</strong> Conditions and Telegrams shall be tested:<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Condition<br />
Telegram<br />
Type 2<br />
Telegram<br />
Type 3<br />
Telegram<br />
Type 5<br />
Nominal X X X<br />
Metallic Plate<br />
Steel Sleeper<br />
Salt Water<br />
Clear Water<br />
Iron Ore<br />
Table 5: <strong>Test</strong> Conditions versus Telegrams <strong>for</strong> Mean Data Rate<br />
X<br />
X<br />
X<br />
X<br />
X<br />
4.2.7.16.5 MTIE (Maximum Time Interval Error)<br />
Measurements shall be done after a start-up ramp according to sub-clause 4.2.7.2.3 on page 72.<br />
Measurements shall be per<strong>for</strong>med <strong>for</strong> flux level 3 according to Table 1 on page 73.<br />
The following combinations of <strong>Test</strong> Conditions and Telegrams shall be tested:<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Condition<br />
Telegram<br />
Type 1<br />
Telegram<br />
Type 2<br />
Telegram<br />
Type 3<br />
Telegram<br />
Type 4<br />
Telegram<br />
Type 5<br />
Nominal X X X X X<br />
Lower temperature limit<br />
Upper temperature limit<br />
Metallic Plate<br />
Steel Sleeper<br />
Salt Water<br />
Clear Water<br />
Iron Ore<br />
Table 6: <strong>Test</strong> Conditions versus Telegrams <strong>for</strong> MTIE<br />
X<br />
X<br />
X<br />
X<br />
X<br />
X<br />
X
Page 86 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.7.16.6 Amplitude Jitter during start-up ramp<br />
Measurements shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with ‘CW’ Tele-powering only, and <strong>for</strong> flux level 3 according to Table 1 on<br />
page 73.<br />
The following combinations of <strong>Test</strong> Conditions and Telegrams shall be tested:<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Condition<br />
Telegram<br />
Type 1<br />
Telegram<br />
Type 5<br />
Nominal X X<br />
Metallic Plate<br />
Steel Sleeper<br />
Salt Water<br />
Clear Water<br />
Iron Ore<br />
X<br />
X<br />
X<br />
X<br />
X<br />
Table 7: <strong>Test</strong> Conditions versus Telegrams <strong>for</strong> Amplitude Jitter<br />
4.2.7.16.7 Amplitude Jitter during steady state flux<br />
Measurements shall be per<strong>for</strong>med <strong>for</strong> all Tele-powering flux levels according to Table 1 on page 73.<br />
A start-up ramp according to sub-clause 4.2.7.2.3 on page 72 is not applicable.<br />
The following combinations of <strong>Test</strong> Conditions and Telegrams shall be tested:<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Condition<br />
Telegram<br />
Type 1<br />
Telegram<br />
Type 5<br />
Nominal X X<br />
Metallic Plate<br />
Steel Sleeper<br />
Salt Water<br />
Clear Water<br />
Iron Ore<br />
X<br />
X<br />
X<br />
X<br />
X<br />
Table 8: <strong>Test</strong> Conditions versus Telegrams <strong>for</strong> Amplitude Jitter
Page 87 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.7.16.8 Signal Bandwidth<br />
Measurements shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with ‘CW’ Tele-powering only, at flux level 3 (according to Table 1 on page<br />
73), and with telegram type 1 only.<br />
A start-up ramp according to sub-clause 4.2.7.2.3 on page 72 is not applicable.<br />
For controlled Balises, this test shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with the Reference Signal Generator enabled only.<br />
4.2.7.16.9 Delay Time and Balise controlling interface Parameter Variation<br />
This test is applicable to controlled Balises only, and shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with a Reference Signal Generator<br />
connected (“enabled Reference Signal Generator”).<br />
Measurements shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with ‘CW’ Tele-powering only, at flux level 3 (according to Table 1 on page<br />
73), and with telegram type 1 only.<br />
A start-up ramp according to sub-clause 4.2.7.2.3 on page 72 is not applicable.<br />
The signals in the Balise controlling interface shall have their parameter values set to the nominal values according<br />
to sub-clause 4.2.8.3 on page 89, except <strong>for</strong> Interface ‘C1’ and Interface ‘C6’ signal levels that shall be set to<br />
their defined minimum values.<br />
4.2.7.16.10 Compatibility<br />
Measurements shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with ‘Non-toggling AM’ Tele-powering only, at flux level 3 (according to<br />
Table 1 on page 73), and with telegram type 1 only.<br />
This test shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with start-up and end ramps at slopes that are 1/1000 of the nominal slopes defined<br />
in sub-clause 4.2.7.2.3 on page 72, and at the nominal slopes defined in sub-clause 4.2.7.2.3 on page 72. The<br />
requirement on duty cycle according to sub-clause 4.2.7.2.3 on page 72 is not applicable to this measurement (it<br />
is of a one-shot nature).<br />
Measurements shall start in the window from the start of the ramp to the flux level reaching φ d1 –10 dB.<br />
Measurements at the modulation depth 52 % ±2 % shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with a modulation pulse width of 2.1 µs<br />
±0.1 µs, and measurements at the modulation depth 85 % to 100 % shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with a modulation pulse<br />
width of 3.4 µs ±0.1 µs. In order to consider the possibility of a certain amount of toggling (as opposed to random<br />
jitter that might contain a pattern similar to toggling), the test with short pulses shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with<br />
toggling pulse widths of 2.1 µs and 2.2 µs, and the test with long pulses shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with toggling pulse<br />
widths of 3.3 µs and 3.4 µs. This allows <strong>for</strong> additional ±0.05 µs random jitter that is caused by imperfections in<br />
the test set-up.<br />
4.2.7.16.11 <strong>Test</strong> of Balise start with Toggling AM and steep Tele-powering slope<br />
Measurements shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with ‘Toggling AM’ Tele-powering conditions in accordance with the definitions<br />
of sub-clause 4.2.7.4 on page 75.<br />
A total of eight combinations of modulation pulse rise and fall times, modulation depth, and slope of Telepowering<br />
flux shall be tested.<br />
Two hundred and fifty consecutive simulated train passages shall be per<strong>for</strong>med <strong>for</strong> each test case, and the Balise<br />
shall start each time.
Page 88 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.8 Balise controlling interface per<strong>for</strong>mance measurements<br />
4.2.8.1 Introduction<br />
This sub-clause defines the measurement methods <strong>for</strong> verifying Up-link FSK per<strong>for</strong>mance versus the Balise<br />
controlling interface per<strong>for</strong>mance, and the Balise controlling interface per<strong>for</strong>mance of the Up-link controlled<br />
Balise.<br />
Measurements of FSK Up-link per<strong>for</strong>mance are defined in sub-clause 4.2.7 on page 71.<br />
For the purpose of testing, the source impedance of the tool generating the Interface 'C' signals should provide a<br />
minimum Return Loss of 23 dB unless otherwise explicitly stated.<br />
4.2.8.2 General <strong>Test</strong> Conditions<br />
4.2.8.2.1 General<br />
The following conditions apply <strong>for</strong> all measurements unless nothing else is indicated.<br />
4.2.8.2.2 Climatic Conditions<br />
Ambient Temperature 25 °C ± 10 °C<br />
Relative Humidity 25 % to 75 %<br />
Atmospheric Pressure 86 kPa to 106 kPa<br />
4.2.8.2.3 Metallic Object and Debris<br />
No metallic objects shall be present.<br />
No debris shall be applied.<br />
4.2.8.2.4 <strong>Test</strong> Distance<br />
The vertical distance between the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna and the Balise shall be 220 mm ±2 mm from the centre of the<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Antenna loop to the reference marks of the Balise or the Reference Loop.<br />
4.2.8.2.5 Tele-powering Flux Characteristics<br />
The Tele-powering flux shall have the following characteristics:<br />
• The frequency shall be 27.095 MHz ± 5 kHz.<br />
• The signal shall be CW, i.e., without modulation.<br />
• Additionally (<strong>for</strong> some specific tests) the flux shall also be modulated to simulate a train passage according<br />
to sub-clause 4.2.7.2.3 on page 72.<br />
Transient measurements shall start 150 µs after the 27 MHz flux has reached the level φ d1 on the start up ramp.<br />
The transient measurements are per<strong>for</strong>med <strong>for</strong> "blocking Up-link telegram switching" (see sub-clause 4.2.8.5.6<br />
on page 104).
Page 89 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
For the following tests, the Tele-powering flux shall be calibrated at three different levels:<br />
Level<br />
Value<br />
1 φ d1 +0.8 dB ± 0.5 dB<br />
2 φ d2 +10 dB ± 1 dB<br />
3 φ d4 –1 dB ± 1 dB<br />
Table 9 : Tele-powering Flux Levels<br />
4.2.8.2.6 Telegram Contents<br />
For the purpose of the tests, the Balise shall transmit a valid randomised 341 bits telegram (i.e., fulfilling the<br />
coding requirements of Part 1 of this Norm). This telegram shall be of types 1 through 5 of Table 24 in clause<br />
A2 on page 157.<br />
4.2.8.3 Electrical Data Requirements<br />
4.2.8.3.1 Interface ‘A1’<br />
The electrical characteristics of the signal in the Interface ‘A1’ are summarised in Table 10 below.<br />
Characteristics Nominal value Tolerance<br />
range<br />
Modulation<br />
FSK<br />
Notes<br />
Centre frequency 4.234 MHz ±175 kHz See sub-clause 4.2.7.6 on page 79.<br />
Frequency deviation 282.24 kHz ±7 % See sub-clause 4.2.7.6 on page 79.<br />
Bandwidth < 1 MHz See sub-clause 4.2.7.12 on page 82.<br />
Amplitude jitter < +1.5/-2.0 dB See sub-clause 4.2.7.11 on page 82.<br />
Mean data rate 564.48 kbits/s ±2.5 % See sub-clause 4.2.7.8 on page 80.<br />
MTIE (and carrier phase<br />
jitter)<br />
MTIE1 or<br />
MTIE2<br />
See sub-clause 4.2.7.9 on page 81.<br />
Table 10: Electrical characteristics of the Interface ‘A1’ Up-link signal
Page 90 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.8.3.2 Interface ‘C1’<br />
The electrical characteristics of the signal in the Interface ‘C1’ are summarised in Table 11 below (referring to<br />
the LEU output).<br />
Characteristics Nominal value Tolerance<br />
range<br />
Notes<br />
Signal level V 2 > 14 Vpp Into a resistive 120 Ω load<br />
Signal level V 2 < 18 Vpp Into a resistive 120 Ω load<br />
Wave<strong>for</strong>m and bit encoding<br />
DBPL<br />
Mean Data Rate 564.48 kbits/s ± 200 ppm Averaged over 1500 consecutive bits<br />
Time Jitter<br />
Rise Time 10 % to 90 %<br />
< 60 ns<br />
> 100 ns<br />
Return Loss (at LEU output) > 6 dB With reference to 120 Ω<br />
Table 11: Electrical characteristics of the Interface ‘C1’ Up-link signal<br />
The signal into a resistive 120 Ω load shall also fulfil the requirements according to Figure 31 and Table 12<br />
below. The shaded areas constitute a mask into which the signal shall not enter (considering the actual mean<br />
data rate and the actual V 2 signal level).<br />
T T 1<br />
V 1<br />
V 2<br />
T jitter<br />
T jitter<br />
Figure 31: Interface ‘C1’ eye diagram
Page 91 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Parameter<br />
T<br />
T jitter<br />
T 1<br />
Requirement<br />
at the LEU output<br />
1<br />
2 • actual Mean Data Rate<br />
60 ns<br />
0.6 • T<br />
V 1 0.74 • V 2<br />
Table 12: Interface ‘C1’ eye diagram parameters<br />
The test of the characteristics <strong>for</strong> the eye diagram, shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with a wave<strong>for</strong>m <strong>for</strong>ming an exponential<br />
signal with the following characteristic equation:<br />
⎧<br />
⎪<br />
⎪Vout<br />
⎪<br />
⎨<br />
⎪<br />
⎪Vout<br />
⎪<br />
⎩<br />
=<br />
=<br />
1<br />
2<br />
1<br />
2<br />
⎡<br />
t<br />
−<br />
⎤<br />
⎢<br />
⎥<br />
⎢<br />
−1.87<br />
⋅ V ⋅ τ<br />
2 e + V2<br />
⎥<br />
⎢⎣<br />
⎥⎦<br />
⎡<br />
t<br />
−<br />
⎤<br />
⎢<br />
⎥<br />
⎢<br />
1.87 ⋅ V ⋅e<br />
τ<br />
2 − V2<br />
⎥<br />
⎢⎣<br />
⎥⎦<br />
, rising edge<br />
, falling edge<br />
with:<br />
V out and V 2 in Volt<br />
τ = 332 3 ns unless otherwise explicitly stated. For test purposes, the acceptable range is 330 ns<br />
±30 ns<br />
For the purpose of adjusting the V 2 signal level during testing, the connected load impedance shall be<br />
120 Ω ±1 Ω resistive, with a maximum imaginary part of ±j1 Ω.<br />
Please observe that the value 1.87 applies to the theoretical time constant 332.3 ns, and that this must be suitably<br />
modified when other time constants apply, such that a continuous signal is still obtained.
Page 92 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.8.3.3 Interface ‘C6’<br />
The electrical characteristics of the signal in the Interface ‘C6’ are summarised in Table 13 below (referring to<br />
the LEU output).<br />
Characteristics Nominal value Tolerance<br />
range<br />
Notes<br />
Nominal value 22 Vpp +1 V / -2 V Into a resistive 170 Ω load<br />
Wave<strong>for</strong>m<br />
Sinusoidal<br />
Frequency 8.820 kHz ± 0.1 kHz<br />
Second harmonic amplitude<br />
< -20 dBc<br />
Harmonic content < -40 dBc Between 0.1 MHz and 1 MHz into a<br />
restive 120 Ω load impedance<br />
Return Loss (at LEU output) > 4 dB With reference to 170 Ω<br />
Table 13: Electrical characteristics of the Interface ‘C6’ signal<br />
For the purpose of adjusting the peak to peak voltage during testing, the connected load impedance shall be<br />
170 Ω ±1 Ω resistive, with a maximum imaginary part of ±j1 Ω.
Page 93 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.8.3.4 Interface ‘C4’<br />
Blocking of Up-link telegram switching is an optional function. The signal on Interface ‘C4’ shall fulfil the<br />
diagrams of Figure 32 below. Data and characteristics refer to the Balise itself (excluding the Interface ‘C’<br />
cable).<br />
Flux<br />
φ d1<br />
0<br />
time<br />
|Z|<br />
|Z| inactive<br />
|Z| active<br />
0<br />
Td<br />
T<br />
time<br />
Figure 32: Signal on Interface ‘C4’<br />
The characteristics of this signal are summarised in Table 14 below.<br />
Characteristics Min. Max.<br />
|Z| inactive [Ω] 150 300<br />
|Z| active [Ω]<br />
0.1 ⋅|Z| inactive<br />
T [µs] 150 350<br />
Td [µs] 150<br />
Table 14: Characteristics of the Interface ‘C4’ signal<br />
Please observe that T d is allowed to be negative as defined above, because the Balise is allowed to start earlier<br />
than at the φ d1 level.<br />
The modulus of the impedance shall be evaluated over the frequency range 8.720 kHz to 8.920 kHz.
Page 94 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.8.4 Calibration of the 27 MHz Tele-powering flux<br />
4.2.8.4.1 Calibration Abstract<br />
This calibration procedure only deals with constant level of the 27 MHz Tele-powering flux, and not with a<br />
ramping flux simulating a train passage. It gives a reference value P27BA that is used when activating the Balise<br />
with flux levels according to Table 9 on page 89 through the Reference Area.<br />
4.2.8.4.2 Calibration Configuration<br />
The recommended calibration set-up is shown in Figure 33 below. Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an<br />
example of suitable test equipment. See also sub-clause 4.2.1 on page 23.<br />
4.<br />
13.<br />
Attenuator<br />
50 Ω<br />
10.<br />
4.2 MHz<br />
Power<br />
Meter 1<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Antenna<br />
C.S.<br />
5.<br />
P M1<br />
Signal<br />
Generator<br />
Reference Loop<br />
7.<br />
Balun<br />
8.<br />
P L<br />
Attenuator<br />
9.<br />
Power<br />
Meter 2<br />
10.<br />
P M2<br />
Figure 33: <strong>Test</strong> set-up <strong>for</strong> calibration of Tele-powering
Page 95 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.8.4.3 Calibration Procedure<br />
1. Position the (Standard) <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220] relative to the Reference Loop. Be<br />
sure to position the electrical centre of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna aligned with the electrical centre of the Reference<br />
Loop. Also check that the X, Y and Z axes of the Reference Loop are correctly aligned to the X, Y and Z<br />
axes of the positioning system.<br />
2. Determine a suitable power level, P M2 , <strong>for</strong> a flux of φ d1 +0.8 dB (one of the values from Table 9 on page 89).<br />
The power <strong>for</strong> φ, P L , is determined by<br />
where :<br />
P<br />
L<br />
( 2⋅<br />
π⋅f<br />
⋅Φ )<br />
=<br />
⎛ 50 + Z<br />
50⋅⎜<br />
⎝<br />
50<br />
loop<br />
⎞<br />
⎟<br />
⎠<br />
2<br />
2<br />
⋅ B<br />
2<br />
f = 27.095 MHz,<br />
Z loop = R loop + j X loop (actual impedance in the absence of any antenna),<br />
P L = Power measured out of the Reference Loop [W],<br />
B = Reference Loop matching transfer ratio.<br />
The power <strong>for</strong> φ, P M2 , is determined by:<br />
P<br />
M 2<br />
= 10⋅log (1000⋅<br />
P ) − Attenuation (dBm)<br />
L<br />
where Attenuation equals the attenuation of the items 8 and 9 together with the cable from the Reference<br />
Loop to the power sensor head. 21<br />
Measure Attenuation, and calculate the value of P M2 . Call the calculated value P M2REF .<br />
4. Set the Signal Generator to the frequency 27.095 MHz, and to CW.<br />
5. Adjust the input power to the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in order to achieve approximately φ d1 +0.8 dB through the Reference<br />
Loop (through observing Power Meter 2).<br />
Record the reading of Power Meter 2 (called P M2 ). Record the reading of Power Meter 1 (called P M1 ).<br />
6. Compensate the P M1 reading with the difference between the P M2 reading and the power level P M2REF calculated<br />
in step 3 22 . Call the new value P 27RL .<br />
P<br />
27RL<br />
= P<br />
M1<br />
+ (P<br />
M2REF<br />
- P<br />
M2<br />
),<br />
all values in dBm.<br />
7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 <strong>for</strong> all flux levels in Table 9 on page 89.<br />
21<br />
22<br />
As an example, assuming that Z loop is small compared to 50 Ω, φ d1 +0.8 dB = 8.5 nVs, B = 1 and Attenuation = 20 dB,<br />
then the power level P M2 will be –3.8 dBm in the Reference Loop. For the Reduced Size Reference Loop, the corresponding<br />
value <strong>for</strong> φ d1 +0.8 dB = 5.7 nVs is –7.2 dBm.<br />
The reason <strong>for</strong> this compensation is that the relative accuracy <strong>for</strong> the value of P 27RL between the different positions needs<br />
to be very good, and this procedure compensates <strong>for</strong> signal generator adjustment error.
Page 96 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.8.5 Functional <strong>Test</strong>s<br />
4.2.8.5.1 <strong>Test</strong> Set-up<br />
The recommended test set-up is shown in Figure 34 below. Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an example<br />
of suitable test equipment. See also sub-clause 4.2.1 on page 23.<br />
1.<br />
Signal<br />
Generator<br />
2.<br />
Attenuator<br />
3. 4.<br />
RF<br />
Amplifier<br />
Attenuator<br />
27 MHz<br />
37.<br />
16.<br />
12.<br />
5.<br />
Oscilloscope<br />
Pre-<br />
Amplifier<br />
Low pass<br />
filter<br />
4.2 MHz<br />
<strong>Test</strong><br />
Antenna<br />
C.S.<br />
Power<br />
Meter 1<br />
12.<br />
Low pass<br />
filter<br />
10.<br />
Reference<br />
Receiver<br />
(Up-link)<br />
42.<br />
Balise<br />
Trigger <strong>for</strong> start of telegram<br />
Reference<br />
Receiver<br />
(Interface ‘C’)<br />
42.<br />
13.<br />
Signal<br />
Generator<br />
Figure 34: <strong>Test</strong> set-up <strong>for</strong> Up-link measurements
Page 97 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.8.5.2 Electrical Data versus Signal Level<br />
4.2.8.5.2.1 <strong>Test</strong> Abstract<br />
This test verifies that the Balise transmission characteristics on the Interface ‘A1’ are within the allowed tolerance<br />
ranges when the signals on the Interface ‘C1’ and Interface ‘C6’ are set at the limit of the defined signal<br />
level ranges. See sub-clause 4.2.8.3.2 on page 90, and sub-clause 4.2.8.3.3 on page 92. For the purpose of this<br />
test, the edges of the Interface 'C1' signal shall be such that testing is per<strong>for</strong>med both with τ = 100 ns +10/-0 ns<br />
and τ = 330 ns ±30 ns.<br />
4.2.8.5.2.2 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure<br />
1. Position the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220].<br />
2. Set the Signal Generator (item 1) to the frequency 27.095 MHz, and to CW.<br />
3. Adjust the input power to the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in order to achieve approximately φ d1 +0.8 dB through the Balise.<br />
This is accomplished when the reading of the Power Meter 1 is equal to P 27RL measured in sub-clause<br />
4.2.8.4.3 on page 95.<br />
4. Set the Interface ‘C’ signal generator (item 13) to the following configuration:<br />
Interface ‘C1’ Level (Vpp) following C1 test level (Table 15<br />
on page 98)<br />
Mean Data Rate<br />
Telegram<br />
564.48 kbits/s ± 40 ppm<br />
type 1, without jitter<br />
Interface ‘C6’ Level (Vpp) following C6 test level (Table 16<br />
on page 98)<br />
Frequency<br />
5. Check with the reference receiver <strong>for</strong> Up-link (item 42) that:<br />
• The Balise transmits the selected telegram.<br />
8.820 kHz ± 0.01 kHz<br />
• The centre frequency, frequency deviation, mean data rate, and MTIE are within the required range (see<br />
Table 10 on page 89).<br />
6. Per<strong>for</strong>m steps 3 through 5 <strong>for</strong> all the configurations listed in sub-clause 4.2.8.5.2.4 on page 98.
Page 98 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.8.5.2.3 <strong>Test</strong> Signal Level Definition<br />
Level at the LEU output<br />
Minimum level (Vpp)<br />
V 2 = 14 V +0.25/-0 V<br />
Maximum level (Vpp)<br />
V 2 = 18 V +0/-0.25 V<br />
Table 15: Definition of the Interface ‘C1’ signal levels<br />
Level at the LEU output<br />
Minimum level (Vpp) Maximum level (Vpp)<br />
20 V +0.3/-0 V 23 V +0/-0.3 V<br />
Table 16: Definition of the Interface ‘C6’ signal levels<br />
4.2.8.5.2.4 <strong>Test</strong> Matrix<br />
Flux Interface ‘C1’ level Interface ‘C6’ level<br />
Level Min. Max. Min. Max.<br />
Slope<br />
[ns]<br />
1 X X 100<br />
1 X X 100<br />
1 X X 330<br />
1 X X 330<br />
2 X X 100<br />
2 X X 100<br />
2 X X 330<br />
2 X X 330<br />
3 X X 100<br />
3 X X 100<br />
3 X X 330<br />
3 X X 330<br />
Table 17: <strong>Test</strong> conditions versus signal level on Interface ‘C1’ and ‘C6’ at LEU output
Page 99 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.8.5.3 Electrical Data versus Mean Data Rate<br />
4.2.8.5.3.1 <strong>Test</strong> Abstract<br />
This test verifies that the Balise transmission characteristics on the Interface ‘A1’ are within the tolerance ranges<br />
when the mean data rate of the signal on the Interface ‘C1’ is altered over the specified range (see sub-clause<br />
4.2.8.3.2 on page 90). For the purpose of this test, the edges of the Interface 'C1' signal shall be such that testing<br />
is per<strong>for</strong>med both with τ = 100 ns +10/-0 ns and τ = 330 ns ±30 ns.<br />
4.2.8.5.3.2 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure<br />
1. Position the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220].<br />
2. Set the Signal Generator (item 1) to the frequency 27.095 MHz, and to CW.<br />
3. Adjust the input power to the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in order to achieve approximately φ d1 +0.8 dB through the Balise.<br />
This is accomplished when the reading of the Power Meter 1 is equal to P 27RL measured in sub-clause<br />
4.2.8.4.3 on page 95.<br />
4. Set the Interface ‘C’ signal generator (item 13) to the following configuration:<br />
Interface ‘C1’ Level (Vpp) V 2 = 14 V +0.25/-0 V<br />
Mean Data Rate sub-clause 4.2.8.5.3.3 on page 100<br />
Telegram type 1, without jitter<br />
Interface ‘C6’ Level (Vpp) 20 V +0.3/-0 V<br />
Frequency 8.820 kHz ± 0.01 kHz<br />
5. Check with the reference receiver <strong>for</strong> Up-link (item 42) that:<br />
• The Balise transmits the selected telegram.<br />
• The centre frequency, frequency deviation, mean data rate, and MTIE are within the required range (see<br />
Table 10 on page 89).<br />
6. Per<strong>for</strong>m steps 3 through 5 <strong>for</strong> all the configurations listed in sub-clause 4.2.8.5.3.3 on page 100.
Page 100 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.8.5.3.3 <strong>Test</strong> Matrix<br />
Flux<br />
Mean data rate<br />
Level 564.38 kbits/s +40/-0 ppm 564.58 kbits/s +0/-40 ppm<br />
Slope<br />
[ns]<br />
1 X 100<br />
1 X 100<br />
1 X 330<br />
1 X 330<br />
2 X 100<br />
2 X 100<br />
2 X 330<br />
2 X 330<br />
3 X 100<br />
3 X 100<br />
3 X 330<br />
3 X 330<br />
Table 18: <strong>Test</strong> conditions versus mean data rate on Interface ‘C1’
Page 101 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.8.5.4 Electrical Data versus Jitter Properties<br />
4.2.8.5.4.1 <strong>Test</strong> Abstract<br />
This test verifies that the Balise transmission characteristics on the Interface ‘A1’ are within the tolerance range<br />
when the signal on the Interface ‘C1’ is within the defined eye diagram (see sub-clause 4.2.8.3.2 on page 90).<br />
For the purpose of this test, the edges of the Interface 'C1' signal shall be such that testing is per<strong>for</strong>med both with<br />
τ = 100 ns +10/-0 ns and τ = 330 ns ±30 ns.<br />
4.2.8.5.4.2 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure<br />
1. Position the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220].<br />
2. Set the Signal Generator (item 1) to the frequency 27.095 MHz, and to CW.<br />
3. Adjust the input power to the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in order to achieve approximately φ d1 +0.8 dB through the Balise.<br />
This is accomplished when the reading of the Power Meter 1 is equal to P 27RL measured in sub-clause<br />
4.2.8.4.3 on page 95.<br />
4. Set the Interface ‘C’ signal generator (item 13) to the following configuration:<br />
Interface ‘C1’ Level (Vpp) V 2 = 14 V +0.25/-0 V<br />
Mean Data Rate 564.48 kbits/s ± 40 ppm<br />
Telegram<br />
type 4, jitter 60 ns<br />
Interface ‘C6’ Level (Vpp) 20 V +0.3/-0 V<br />
Frequency 8.820 kHz ± 0.01 kHz<br />
Considering the initial DBPL coded message with the required mean data rate, a time jitter is randomly applied<br />
to each edge of this signal. The time jitter can vary from –30 ns to +30 ns (see Table 12 on page 91).<br />
5. Check with the reference receiver <strong>for</strong> Up-link (item 42) that:<br />
• The Balise transmits the selected telegram.<br />
• The centre frequency, frequency deviation, mean data rate, and MTIE are within the required range (see<br />
Table 10 on page 89).<br />
6. Per<strong>for</strong>m steps 3 through 5 <strong>for</strong> all Tele-powering flux levels defined in Table 9 on page 89.<br />
4.2.8.5.4.3 <strong>Test</strong> Matrix<br />
<strong>Test</strong>s shall be per<strong>for</strong>med both with τ = 100 ns +10/-0 ns and τ = 330 ns ±30 ns.
Page 102 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.8.5.5 Balise <strong>Test</strong>ing under various Return Loss conditions<br />
4.2.8.5.5.1 <strong>Test</strong> Abstract<br />
This test shall verify that the Balise and its Interface ‘C’ cable correctly transmit the chosen telegram under<br />
various Return Loss conditions on Interface ‘C1’ and Interface ‘C6’.<br />
4.2.8.5.5.2 <strong>Test</strong> Set-up<br />
A proposed partial test set-up is shown on the Figure 35 below including specific details on the Reference Signal<br />
Generator (item 13). See sub clause 4.2.8.5.1 on page 96 <strong>for</strong> additional details on the complete test set-up.<br />
Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an example of suitable test equipment (see also sub clause 4.2.1 on<br />
page 23).<br />
C1 signal<br />
generator<br />
Amplifier<br />
C1 Return<br />
loss network<br />
Check correctness<br />
of telegram and<br />
signal<br />
5.<br />
<strong>Test</strong><br />
Antenna<br />
Filter 1<br />
RSG_CRL output<br />
RSG<br />
13.<br />
Filter 2<br />
Interface ‘C’ cable<br />
(Length ≈ 180m)<br />
Balise<br />
C6 signal<br />
generator<br />
Amplifier<br />
C6 Return<br />
loss network<br />
Figure 35: Signal generator (item 13) <strong>for</strong> Return Loss testing<br />
The C1/C6 Return Loss network shall be capable of providing combinations of several complex Return Loss<br />
conditions as indicated in Table 1. A minimum of three different Return Loss conditions shall be tested <strong>for</strong><br />
Interface ‘C1’ and <strong>for</strong> Interface ‘C6’ (e.g., a low ohm resistive, a capacitive and an inductive condition shall be<br />
tested). For Interface ‘C1’, also a high ohm resistive condition applies.<br />
The test tool shall allow achieving Interface ‘C1’ Return Losses of 6 dB +0/-0.5 dB within the entire Interface<br />
‘C1’ signal bandwidth.<br />
The test tool shall allow achieving Interface ‘C6’ Return Losses of 4 dB +0/-0.2 dB at the Interface ‘C6’ frequency.<br />
The test object is the Balise with its Interface ‘C’ cable. The cable type is manufacturer dependent but its length<br />
should be around 180 m. The actual length of the Interface ‘C’ cable shall be such that potential symbol overlap<br />
(due to reflections) is simulated in Interface ‘C1’.
Page 103 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.8.5.5.3 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure<br />
1. Position the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 460].<br />
2. Set the Tele-powering Signal Generator (item 1 in sub-clause 4.2.8.5.1) to the frequency 27.095 MHz, and to<br />
CW.<br />
3. Adjust the input current into the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in order to achieve approximately φ d2 +10 dB through the<br />
Balise. This is accomplished when the reading of the Power Meter 1 is equal to P 27RL measured as in subclause<br />
4.2.8.4.3 on page 95. Calibration data is obtained from sub-clause 4.2.7.5 on page 77.<br />
4. Set the C1/C6 Return Loss network to test case 1 of the matrix (see Table 19).<br />
5. Set the C1 and C6 signal generators (item 13) to the following configuration:<br />
Interface ‘C1’ Level (Vpp) V 2 = 16 V ±0.25 V<br />
Mean Data Rate<br />
564.48 kbits/s ± 40 ppm<br />
Telegram type 1<br />
Interface ‘C6’ Level (Vpp) 22 V ±0.3 V<br />
Frequency<br />
8.820 kHz ± 0.01 kHz<br />
Interface ‘C1’ and Interface’C6’ signal levels shall be measured at the RSG_CRL output (see Figure 35) into<br />
the specified resistive loads (120 Ω and 170 Ω respectively).<br />
6. Check with the reference receiver <strong>for</strong> Up-link (item 42) that:<br />
• The Balise transmits the selected telegram.<br />
• The centre frequency, frequency deviation, mean data rate, and MTIE are within the required range<br />
(see Table 9 on page 81).<br />
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 <strong>for</strong> each of the four test case of the test matrix.<br />
<strong>Test</strong><br />
case<br />
‘C1’ Return loss (within 0.2 MHz to 0.6 MHz)<br />
RSG_CRL<br />
angle of reflection<br />
coefficient<br />
23 at 423 kHz<br />
6 dB +0/- 0.5 dB<br />
RSG_CRL<br />
angle of reflection<br />
coefficient<br />
23 at 423 kHz<br />
RSG_CRL<br />
angle of reflection<br />
coefficient<br />
23 at 423 kHz<br />
‘C6’ Return loss (within 8.820 kHz ±0.1 kHz)<br />
RSG_CRL<br />
angle of reflection<br />
coefficient<br />
23 at 8.82 kHz<br />
4 dB +0/- 0.2 dB<br />
RSG_CRL<br />
angle of reflection<br />
coefficient<br />
23 at 8.82 kHz<br />
RSG_CRL<br />
angle of reflection<br />
coefficient<br />
23 at 8.82 kHz<br />
“Resistive” “Capacitive” “Inductive” “Resistive”<br />
1 180 ° ±10 ° 180 ° ±10 °<br />
“Capacitive”<br />
“Inductive”<br />
2 0 ° ±10 ° “Direct connection” with Return Loss > 23 dB<br />
and phase angle of 0 ° ±10 °<br />
3 -90 ° ±10 ° -90 ° ±10 °<br />
4 90 ° ±10 ° 90 ° ±10 °<br />
Table 19: <strong>Test</strong> conditions versus Return Loss on Interface ‘C1’ and ‘C6’ at LEU output<br />
8. Repeat steps 5 and 6 <strong>for</strong> test case 1 of the test matrix above when transmitting the Interface 'C1' signal with<br />
slopes such that τ = 100 ns +10/-0 ns.<br />
23<br />
The reflection coefficient is defined as r=(Zn-1)/(Zn+1), where Zn=Z/Z0, and Z0 is 120 Ω and 170 Ω <strong>for</strong> Interface ‘C1’<br />
and Interface ‘C6’ respectively.
Page 104 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.8.5.6 Blocking of Up-link Telegram Switching<br />
4.2.8.5.6.1 <strong>Test</strong> Abstract<br />
At the beginning of a train passage, the Balise shall optionally alter its impedance to signal to the LEU not to<br />
change the telegram until after a defined delay. This test verifies this functionality.<br />
4.2.8.5.6.2 Specific Notes<br />
The maximum length of the Interface ‘C’ cable is 10 m. The influence of the cable from the Balise to the test<br />
equipment must be considered and compensated <strong>for</strong>. This should be automatically per<strong>for</strong>med by the test tool<br />
through a calibration procedure using well-known load impedance. The recommended test tool (see item IIIA of<br />
Annex I on page 322) together with its handling instructions automatically facilitates this task.<br />
The measurements shall start as soon as the 27 MHz Tele-powering flux has reached the level φ d1 – 10 dB on the<br />
start up ramp. As far as the calibration of the measurement-triggering instant is concerned, see sub-clause<br />
4.2.7.2.3 on page 72.
Page 105 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.8.5.6.3 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure<br />
1. Position the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 460].<br />
2. Set the Signal Generator (item 1) to the frequency 27.095 MHz, and to CW.<br />
3. Adjust the input power to the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in order to achieve approximately φ d2 +10 dB through the Balise.<br />
This is accomplished when the reading of the Power Meter 1 is equal to P 27RL measured in sub-clause<br />
4.2.8.4.3 on page 95. Calibration data is obtained from sub-clause 4.2.7.5 on page 77.<br />
4. Set the Tele-powering signal generator (item 1) to simulate a train passage (see sub-clause 4.2.7.2.3 on page<br />
72).<br />
5. Set the Interface ‘C’ signal generator (item 13) to the following configuration:<br />
Interface ‘C1’ Level (Vpp) V 2 = 18 V +0/-0.25 V<br />
Mean Data Rate 564.48 kbits/s ± 40 ppm<br />
Telegram all ones, without jitter<br />
Interface ‘C6’ Level (Vpp) 23 V +0/-0.3 V<br />
Frequency 8.820 kHz ± 0.01 kHz<br />
The Interface ‘C’ signal generator shall transmit a continuous stream of ones.<br />
6. Check with the reference receiver <strong>for</strong> Up-link (item 42) that:<br />
• The Balise transmits the selected telegram, and that the telegram is not disturbed while the signal is active.<br />
7. Check with the reference receiver <strong>for</strong> Interface ‘C’ (item 42) that:<br />
• Τ d and T are within the required ranges (see Table 14 on page 93).<br />
• The input impedance when the signal is active is within the required range (see Table 14 on page 93).<br />
Please note that a trigger is necessary in the test set-up in order to correlate Interface ‘C’ measurements with<br />
Interface ‘A’ measurements, and that the Interface ‘C’ signal generator must transmit a continuous stream of<br />
ones.<br />
Please note that the blocking signal may be transmitted as soon as the Balise has decided to start-up. This is<br />
allowed to happen be<strong>for</strong>e φ d1 . However, there is no requirement that the actual data transmitted earlier that<br />
150 µs after φ d1 is correct. Consequently, the evaluation of step 6 is dependent on when the blocking signal is<br />
transmitted relative to 150 µs after φ d1 .
Page 106 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.8.5.7 Default Telegram Switching<br />
4.2.8.5.7.1 <strong>Test</strong> Abstract<br />
This test concerns controlled Balises only. It shall verify that the Balise switches over to the Default Telegram<br />
under the following failure conditions on Interface ‘C’:<br />
• A cut cable.<br />
• Absence of signal.<br />
4.2.8.5.7.2 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure<br />
1. Position the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 220].<br />
2. Set the Interface ‘C’ signal generator (item 13) to nominal conditions, and select a telegram of type 1.<br />
3. Set the Signal Generator (item 1) to the frequency 27.095 MHz, and to CW.<br />
4. Adjust the input power to the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in order to achieve approximately φ d2 +10 dB through the Balise.<br />
This is accomplished when the reading of the Power Meter 1 is equal to P 27RL measured in sub-clause<br />
4.2.8.4.3 on page 95.<br />
5. Check with the reference receiver <strong>for</strong> Up-link (item 42) that the Balise transmits the selected telegram.<br />
6. Simulate a failure of type 1 with the Interface ‘C’ signal generator (see sub-clause 4.2.8.5.7.3 on page 107).<br />
7. Check with the reference receiver <strong>for</strong> Up-link (item 42) that the Balise switched over to the default telegram.<br />
Verify that a sequence of between 75 and 128 bits of only logical ‘1’ or only logical ‘0’ is inserted immediately<br />
be<strong>for</strong>e transmission of the default telegram. The sequence of logical ‘1’ or logical ‘0’ shall be ended no<br />
later than a time corresponding to 341 bits after the event that caused the switch to the default telegram. 24<br />
8. Remove the failure.<br />
9. Check with the reference receiver <strong>for</strong> Up-link (item 42) that the Balise continues to send the default telegram<br />
during the entire simulated Balise passage.<br />
10. Switch off the Tele-powering <strong>for</strong> 10 ms.<br />
11. Switch on the Tele-powering. Per<strong>for</strong>m steps 5 through 10 <strong>for</strong> all the failures listed in sub-clause 4.2.8.5.7.3<br />
on page 107.<br />
24<br />
The point of time <strong>for</strong> the event that caused the switch is defined such that a stable failure condition is achieved. This<br />
means that potential transition regions when changing input signal from fully correct to fully fail shall be excluded from<br />
the time corresponding to the 341 bits. Furthermore, the failure condition must be stable <strong>for</strong> the entire duration of the<br />
simulated failure. As <strong>for</strong> the verification of the length of the sequence of equal bits (75 - 128) preceding the default telegram,<br />
consider that the data transmitted by the Balise during the failure condition, up to the transmission of such sequence,<br />
can be unpredictable.
Page 107 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.8.5.7.3 <strong>Test</strong> Matrix<br />
The failure conditions on Interface ‘C’ are given in Table 20 below.<br />
Failure Description Duration<br />
1 Cut cable 0.6 ms -0/+0.4 ms<br />
2 The signal on Interface ‘C1’ is 0 V,<br />
The signal on Interface ‘C6’ is in nominal conditions<br />
0.6 ms -0/+0.4 ms<br />
Table 20: Failure to be tested <strong>for</strong> the default telegram switching<br />
Nominal conditions on Interface ‘C6’ are detailed in sub-clause 4.2.8.3.3 on page 92.
Page 108 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4.2.9 <strong>Test</strong> <strong>for</strong> damaging<br />
4.2.9.1 General<br />
This test aims at verifying that the Balise survives exposure of Tele-powering flux levels of up φ d5 as defined in<br />
Part 1 of this Norm. This test shall be preceded by the normal I/O characteristic test of sub-clause 4.2.4 on page<br />
47, and be succeeded by a limited test to the extent defined herein.<br />
It shall be verified that the Balise is properly working be<strong>for</strong>e the test.<br />
4.2.9.2 Calibration of Tele-powering flux level<br />
The results of the calibration from sub-clause 4.2.5.2 on page 54 shall be used, and shall be extrapolated up to<br />
the φ d5 level.<br />
The target value of the power level from the current sense output of the test antenna may be linearly extrapolated<br />
from the Φ d4 -6 dB level, but when adjusting this level in the presence of the Balise, a pulsed field should be<br />
applied. The length of the pulses should be 10 ms and the duty factor should be 1:100.<br />
4.2.9.3 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure, <strong>Test</strong> <strong>for</strong> damaging<br />
1. Position the Balise with the same geometry of the test set-up used during calibration (with respect to the<br />
Reference Mark of the Balise). It is allowed not to connect the Balise controlling interface.<br />
2. Simulate a train passage according to Figure 26 on page 72, with the peak level φ d5 and the T on duration 10 s<br />
(T off is infinite).<br />
3. Per<strong>for</strong>m a limited I/O characteristic test (at φ d1 , φ d2 , and φ d4 ) according to sub-clause 4.2.4 on page 47, and<br />
verify compliance with the requirements. <strong>Test</strong>ing shall be per<strong>for</strong>med only during free air conditions, and<br />
only <strong>for</strong> the Balise transmitting the Default Telegram (i.e., the Balise controlling interface is not connected).<br />
4.3 Requirements <strong>for</strong> <strong>Test</strong> Tools<br />
See Annex B on page 163, Annex D on page 210, and Annex H on page 299.
Page 109 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5 <strong>Test</strong>s of the On-board Equipment<br />
5.1 Reference <strong>Test</strong> Configurations<br />
5.1.1 General<br />
The following conditions should apply <strong>for</strong> the majority of the tests where no specific environmental or operational<br />
condition is required.<br />
Ambient temperature 25 °C ± 10 °C<br />
Relative humidity 25 % to 75 %<br />
Atmospheric Pressure<br />
86 kPa to 106 kPa<br />
Debris in the air-gap<br />
None<br />
Antenna Unit speed <strong>for</strong> dynamic laboratory verifications 0.1 m/s to 0.5 m/s<br />
Antenna Unit speed <strong>for</strong> dynamic simulated verifications 0 km/h to 500 km/h<br />
Tele-powering mode<br />
CW<br />
EMC noise within the Up-link frequency band<br />
Negligible<br />
The environmental conditions of the table above should be maintained as far as reasonably possible. Monitoring<br />
of the conditions should apply if it can not be guaranteed that the limits are fulfilled.<br />
In order to minimise the possible influence from the surrounding environment, the requirements of sub-clause<br />
4.1.1 on page 21 related to the metal free zone, shall be fulfilled.<br />
5.1.2 Monitored Interfaces<br />
The following test interfaces are <strong>for</strong>eseen <strong>for</strong> accessing the test data, <strong>for</strong> controlling the required operational<br />
mode, and <strong>for</strong> simulating defined test inputs:<br />
• Interface V 1 (see Annex E). It is used <strong>for</strong> reading the On-board test data reported by the BTM functionality,<br />
and <strong>for</strong> controlling its operational mode. The Interface V 1 can possibly be embedded in the<br />
overall <strong>Test</strong> Interface of the On-board Equipment.<br />
• Interface V 2 (see Annex E) used <strong>for</strong> periodically sending the current time and odometer data to the<br />
BTM functionality in accordance with the train movement (real or simulated) conditions.<br />
• Interface V 4 (see Annex E) used <strong>for</strong> providing the On-board Equipment, embedding the BTM functionality,<br />
with speed sensor signals in accordance with the train movement (real or simulated) conditions.<br />
These test interfaces might require company specific adapters in order to translate <strong>for</strong>mat and typology of the<br />
in<strong>for</strong>mation passed through them to the specific needs of the equipment under test.
Page 110 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.1.3 <strong>Test</strong> Tools and Procedures<br />
For the purposes of uni<strong>for</strong>m verifications, it is required that:<br />
• When the On-board equipment is set in “test mode”, some test related functions can be driven from<br />
the unified <strong>Test</strong> Interface ‘V 1 ’, ‘V 2 ’, or ‘V 4 ’;<br />
• Some operational and test related data are made available at the test Interface ‘V 1 ’.<br />
The following list gives a set of anticipated tests:<br />
• Verification of the Tele-powering signal characteristics;<br />
• Verification of the capability of the On-board equipment to handle extreme values of the electrical<br />
characteristics of the Up-link signal;<br />
• Characterisation of the static Tele-powering and Up-link radiation patterns of the Antenna Unit;<br />
• Verification of reliable data communication, of correct Balise detection, of correct side lobe management,<br />
and of correct location reporting, by simulation of dynamic Up-link Balise signal patterns;<br />
• Verification of the correct handling of different telegram types in steady state as well as in presence<br />
of telegram switching, or in presence of telegram errors;<br />
• Verification of the correct handling of different Balise sequence cases, including the simulation of a<br />
Balise Group of eight Balises passed at the maximum allowed speed;<br />
• Verification of the correct handling of different telegrams sent by a Balise passed at very low speed;<br />
• Verification of the compatibility with KER Balises;<br />
• Evaluation of physical cross-talk protection margins according to the specified longitudinal and<br />
transversal cases;<br />
• Verification of the Antenna Unit supervision function in presence of the defined metal masses;<br />
• Verification of the cross-talk immunity with nearby cables, including the LZB cable;<br />
• Verification of the correct function of the Basic Receiver with respect to various telegram types<br />
transmitted one after the other.<br />
The effects of the debris conditions, and of the metallic objects, listed in Part 1 of this Norm, should also be<br />
individually considered in the transmission tests.<br />
The following tools are anticipated <strong>for</strong> the Antenna Unit/BTM function tests:<br />
• <strong>Test</strong> Management System, used <strong>for</strong> co-ordinating the measurements, controlling the other tools of<br />
the test set-up, and <strong>for</strong> logging and reporting the test results;<br />
• Antenna Positioning Tool;<br />
• Reference Loops (Standard and Reduced Size types) equipped with Baluns;<br />
• Time and Odometer Module <strong>for</strong> the simulation of the Antenna Unit movement;<br />
• Adapters <strong>for</strong> <strong>Test</strong> Interfaces (Company specific);<br />
• Telegram Generator;<br />
• Reference Signal Generators;<br />
• RF instruments and accessories of general use;<br />
• Reference Units <strong>for</strong> debris, metallic masses, and cables.
Page 111 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2 Laboratory <strong>Test</strong>s<br />
5.2.1 General<br />
5.2.1.1 Introduction<br />
This sub-clause (5.2) defines a test procedure <strong>for</strong> Antenna Unit and BTM function tests. It also includes the<br />
various test set-ups that are required. The test procedure includes the following steps with partially different test<br />
set-ups and under different test conditions:<br />
• Characterisation of radiation pattern and creation of signal pattern <strong>for</strong> dynamic tests.<br />
• Transmission tests.<br />
• Cross-talk tests.<br />
• Up-link characteristics tests.<br />
• <strong>Test</strong>s of handling various telegrams.<br />
• Tele-powering characteristics tests.<br />
• Balise sequence capability tests.<br />
Each Antenna Unit - BTM function combination shall be tested with all the different Reference Loops.<br />
Reference Loop currents and the flux values shall be in accordance with the input-to output characteristic definition<br />
of Part 1 of this Norm.<br />
It is essential that the Reference Loops used during the tests fulfil the requirements of clause B2 of Annex B on<br />
page 163, and are characterised prior to testing. The procedure <strong>for</strong> characterisation of the equipment is defined<br />
by sub-clause B2.6 of Annex B on page 168.<br />
All distances are in millimetres unless explicitly otherwise stated.<br />
RMS values are applicable unless otherwise stated. Integration time shall be selected in order to achieve sufficient<br />
measurement accuracy.
Page 112 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.1.2 General <strong>Test</strong> Set-up<br />
The recommended general test set-up is shown in Figure 36 below. Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an<br />
example of suitable test equipment.<br />
34.<br />
Interface ‘V 1 ’<br />
Adapter<br />
BTM<br />
function<br />
APT<br />
Antenna Unit<br />
Interface ‘V 1 ’<br />
38.<br />
Interface A<br />
Laboratory <strong>Test</strong><br />
Management System<br />
29.<br />
Reference Loop<br />
7.<br />
Marker 1<br />
LTOM<br />
39.<br />
Attenuator<br />
C<br />
Current Sense Balun<br />
C.S.<br />
14.<br />
Interface ‘V 2 ’<br />
Interface ‘V 2 ’<br />
Adapter<br />
10.<br />
RF<br />
Switch<br />
P2<br />
36.<br />
P1 45.<br />
Low Pass Filter<br />
Low Pass Filter<br />
12.<br />
12.<br />
40.<br />
Power<br />
Meter 2<br />
Low Pass<br />
Filter<br />
Vector Signal<br />
Analyser<br />
41.<br />
31.<br />
Attenuator<br />
Attenuator 4.<br />
Trigger<br />
IEEE 488<br />
bus<br />
RS 232<br />
RSG_1<br />
13.<br />
2.<br />
Attenuator<br />
RF Amplifier<br />
3.<br />
Figure 36: General <strong>Test</strong> set-up<br />
Items 10 and 36 are computer controlled via the Laboratory <strong>Test</strong> Management System (the computer control is<br />
intentionally not indicated in the figure). Additionally, the Laboratory <strong>Test</strong> Management System shall provide a<br />
trigger signal to item 13 (that starts a pre-defined sequence).<br />
The RS 232 link is a possible solution <strong>for</strong> transferring data files from the Laboratory Management System to the<br />
RSG.
Page 113 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.1.3 <strong>Test</strong> Set-up Notes<br />
Note 1:<br />
Note 2:<br />
Note 3:<br />
Note 4:<br />
Note 5:<br />
Note 6:<br />
Note 7:<br />
Note 8:<br />
Note 9:<br />
Note 10:<br />
Note 11:<br />
The attenuator (item 29) is used <strong>for</strong> ensuring a well defined 50 Ω source <strong>for</strong> driving the Reference<br />
Loop.<br />
It is important that all HF transmitter cabling is of low loss double shielded type (e.g., RG214).<br />
Furthermore, the cables shall be “de-bugged” using suitable ferrite clamps, evenly spaced along<br />
the cables, at distances less than 70 cm.<br />
A Vector Signal Analyser might be needed <strong>for</strong> verification of correct settings of the Arbitrary<br />
Generator.<br />
Please note that attenuation in the RF switches, balun, attenuator, and cabling shall be considered.<br />
The requirement on the RF switch is that the frequency range is DC to several hundred MHz, and<br />
that the attenuation is less than approximately 0.2 dB at 30 MHz. At 2 MHz to 30 MHz, isolation<br />
and VSWR should be better than 50 dB and 1:1.1 respectively. Switch time should be less than<br />
20 ms. The switch shall be able to withstand a current of at least 2 A.<br />
The two test-set-ups according to Figure 36 on page 112 and Figure 43 on page 132 may be compressed<br />
into one uni<strong>for</strong>m set-up provided that a “single pole four throw” RF switch is available<br />
(substituting the switches [36] indicated in the figures). This would enable having all the equipment<br />
(power meter [10], spectrum analyser [35], oscilloscope [37] and attenuator [31]) permanently<br />
connected, and selected by simply controlling the switch.<br />
The attenuator (item 29) may optionally be replaced by one with lower attenuation during Crosstalk<br />
tests if this is required in order to achieve sufficient signal levels <strong>for</strong> obtaining reliable test results.<br />
In this case special precautions must be considered in order to characterise the actual Reference<br />
Loop load conditions.<br />
It is important to synchronise the observation of the BTM function reporting with the simulation<br />
of the Balise passage.<br />
Item 45 (the low pass filter) is used to filter out the 27 MHz power signal sent by the Reference<br />
Loop towards the Power Amplifier. The recommended per<strong>for</strong>mance of the filter is found in clause<br />
F2 of Annex F on page 289. The filter shall be connected directly at the output of the attenuator<br />
close to the Reference Loop.<br />
Item 12 (the low pass filters) are used to filter out the 27 MHz signal sent by the Reference Loop<br />
towards the Vector Signal Analyser. The specifically recommended per<strong>for</strong>mance of the filters is<br />
found in clause F3 of Annex F on page 292. The filters shall be located directly at the Current<br />
Sense output of the Balun.<br />
The RSG should be programmed in order to issue a trigger pulse in correspondence of the centre<br />
of the dynamic up-link signal. This pulse triggers the Vector Analyser to measure the Up-link<br />
signal level, and the LTOM to record the corresponding time and odometer data.
Page 114 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.2 <strong>Test</strong> Conditions<br />
5.2.2.1 Nominal Conditions<br />
5.2.2.1.1 General<br />
The nominal conditions defined in this sub-clause apply to all measurements unless otherwise explicitly stated.<br />
5.2.2.1.2 Climatic Conditions<br />
Ambient temperature: 25 °C ± 10 °C.<br />
Relative humidity: 25 % to 75 %.<br />
Atmospheric Pressure: 86 kPa to 106 kPa.<br />
5.2.2.1.3 Metallic Objects and Debris<br />
No metallic objects shall be present.<br />
No debris shall be applied.<br />
In order not to get any disturbance from the surrounding environment, there shall be a volume around the Antenna<br />
Unit and the Balise under test that is free from metallic objects. The minimum extent of this volume is<br />
defined in 4.1.1 on page 21. This volume is also referred to as “free space“ condition. The space below 0.4 m<br />
(but above 0.7 m) underneath the Balise shall not contain any solid metal planes, and only a few metallic supports<br />
are allowed within 0.7 m underneath the Balise.
Page 115 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.2.1.4 Up-link signal Characteristics<br />
The parameters of the 4.23 MHz FSK signal in the air gap shall be set to their nominal values as defined by<br />
Part 1 of this Norm.<br />
• f L = 3.951 MHz ± 20 kHz<br />
• f H = 4.516 MHz ± 20 kHz<br />
• Centre Frequency = 4.234 MHz ± 20 kHz<br />
• Frequency Deviation = 282.24 kHz ± 3 kHz<br />
• Mean Data Rate = 564.48 kbits/s ± 100 ppm<br />
• MTIE characteristics in accordance with Figure 37 below.<br />
• In a shift between two frequencies, the carrier shall have a continuous phase<br />
• Amplitude jitter = less than ±1.2 dB<br />
[ns]<br />
MTIE<br />
Slope = 2⋅10 -4<br />
50<br />
t<br />
20<br />
[bit]<br />
Figure 37: Nominal MTIE requirements<br />
5.2.2.1.5 Tele-powering Characteristics<br />
The 27 MHz Tele-powering signal shall be CW.<br />
5.2.2.1.6 Telegram Contents<br />
In general, the Reference Loop shall transmit a randomised 1023 bit telegram that is valid (fulfilling the coding<br />
requirements according to the coding requirements of Part 1 of this Norm), and which consists of 50 % ± 2 % of<br />
logical “one”. The telegram shall comprise an evenly distributed run length, based upon a truncated close to<br />
exponential distribution of transitions. This is Telegram Type 8 according to clause A2 of Annex A on page<br />
157.<br />
However, <strong>for</strong> the purpose of per<strong>for</strong>ming tests simulating that a Reduced Size Balise is installed in a line designed<br />
<strong>for</strong> more than 300 km/h, Telegram Type 1 according to clause A2 on page 157 shall be used<br />
5.2.2.1.7 Tilt, Pitch, and Yaw<br />
Tilt, Pitch, and Yaw angles shall be set to 0 (zero).
Page 116 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.2.2 Specific Conditions<br />
5.2.2.2.1 Climatic Conditions<br />
Temperature extremes apply to the antenna under test in accordance with the requirements given in sub-clause<br />
6.6 of Part 1 of this Norm.<br />
5.2.2.2.2 Tilt, Pitch, and Yaw<br />
According to Part 1 of this Norm, tilting shall be applied to both the Antenna Unit and the Reference Loop.<br />
There<strong>for</strong>e, tilt angles shall be set to worst case maximum angle according to Antenna Unit manufacturer specification<br />
and the maximum tilting of the Reference Loop of ± 2°. Both the Antenna Unit and the Reference Loop<br />
are subject to tilting, and the worst case combination applies.<br />
According to Part 1 of this Norm, pitching shall be applied to both the Antenna Unit and the Reference Loop.<br />
There<strong>for</strong>e, pitch angles shall be set as defined below. Both the Antenna Unit and the Reference Loop are subject<br />
to pitching, and the worst case combination applies.<br />
• Reference Loop pitch angle maximum ± 5°.<br />
• Antenna Unit pitch angle at maximum according to supplier specification.<br />
The influence of yaw angles should not be tested, because no major influence is anticipated.<br />
5.2.2.2.3 Metallic Objects<br />
The test conditions are defined by sub-clause B5.3 of Annex B on page 192. The Antenna Unit shall be subjected<br />
to free air conditions during all test conditions except <strong>for</strong> “Metallic Objects outside the Antenna Unit<br />
metal free volume”. In the latter case, the Reference Loop shall be subjected to free air conditions.<br />
Please observe that the testing height shall in some cases be limited in accordance with Part 1 of this Norm<br />
during testing with metallic plane underneath the Reference Loop, and during testing with steel sleepers underneath<br />
the Reference Loop.<br />
The following applies to metallic plane underneath the Reference Loop:<br />
• Standard Size: Maximum test height reduced by (210 - Zb)<br />
• Reduced Size: Maximum test height reduced by (193 - Zb)<br />
The following applies to steel sleepers underneath the Reference Loop:<br />
• Maximum test height reduced by the value d<br />
• Minimum test height reduced by 14 mm <strong>for</strong> Reduced Size (no reduction <strong>for</strong> Standard Size)
Page 117 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.2.2.4 Debris<br />
<strong>Test</strong> conditions, and the design and utilisation of the debris box, are defined by sub-clause B5.2 of Annex B on<br />
page 186.<br />
For the Reference Loop, the following conditions apply:<br />
• Salt Water<br />
• Clear Water<br />
• Iron Ore (Magnetite)<br />
The Antenna Unit shall be subjected to free air conditions during these conditions. During these tests, the maximum<br />
test height shall be reduced with 20 mm when testing debris Class A applied to the Standard Size Reference<br />
Loop. For the Reduced Size Reference Loop the reduction is 43 mm. <strong>Test</strong>ing shall be per<strong>for</strong>med <strong>for</strong> both<br />
debris Class A and Debris Class B. The latter shall be tested without reduction of the maximum height.<br />
For the Antenna Unit, the condition “Ice on the Antenna” applies. The Reference Loop shall be subjected to<br />
free air conditions during this test condition. The supplier of the Antenna Unit shall specify the applicable<br />
thickness of the ice layer.
Page 118 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.3 Evaluation of Radiation Pattern<br />
5.2.3.1 General Description<br />
The purpose of this test is to find the weakest possible Balise signal and activation flux, during static conditions,<br />
where the Antenna Unit - BTM function combination has the ability to detect the Balise and to receive the intended<br />
telegram <strong>for</strong> static geometrical points in the region above the Reference Loop (i.e., exploring the behaviour<br />
of the BTM function threshold V th , and the Tele-powering flux). It shall also provide in<strong>for</strong>mation on side<br />
lobe characteristics. The results from this test shall be used as input <strong>for</strong> creating the signal pattern <strong>for</strong> a simulated<br />
dynamic Balise passage as defined in sub-clause 5.2.4 on page 122, and used during the applicable tests of<br />
this document.<br />
The procedure includes two steps. One is to measure the actual Tele-powering flux through the Reference Loop.<br />
The other is to determine the required Up-link current through the Reference Loop corresponding to the BTM<br />
function threshold (V th ). This corresponding current is denominated I th . Tele-powering and Up-link characterisation<br />
are per<strong>for</strong>med in two different passes unless it can be shown that concurrent evaluation (keeping Telepowering<br />
signal on while simultaneously measuring Up-link per<strong>for</strong>mance) gives the same results (considering<br />
the measurement accuracy as defined in sub-clause 3.3 on page 20).<br />
During Tele-powering measurements, the actual flux φ through the Reference Loop is measured. Spot check<br />
testing with toggling Tele-powering signal shall be per<strong>for</strong>med in case this is supported by the equipment under<br />
test. In case that differences are identified compared to when the CW signal was applied, then this shall be<br />
considered when calculating the signal pattern described in sub-clause 5.2.4 on page 122.<br />
During Up-link testing, the Reference Loop shall be connected to a signal generator generating an FSK Up-link<br />
signal that simulates a representative Balise passage (see Figure 38 below), and carrying a correct telegram with<br />
a peak current level stepwise varied in order to reach I th (as described below). The BTM function output response<br />
shall be observed via Interface ‘V 1 ’. The BTM function is set in normal operational mode.<br />
t dur = 18.1 ms<br />
I TH<br />
5 ms<br />
5 ms<br />
Time<br />
Figure 38: Up-link signal<br />
The time t dur shall be selected so that ten complete 1023 bit telegrams are transmitted. The odometer input signal<br />
shall be selected so that the flat part of the sequence according to Figure 38 above corresponds to approximately<br />
0.5 m at a speed of 100 km/h (the entire sequence from start of rising edge to end of falling edge corresponds to<br />
approximately 0.78 m).<br />
During Up-link testing, a start value of I u1 through the Reference Loop shall be selected. Thereafter, the current<br />
level is either increased or decreased in steps until the BTM function threshold is reached. For increased current<br />
levels, steps of 0.2 dB are applicable up to I u1 + 7 dB, thereafter steps of 0.5 dB apply up to a maximum current<br />
level of I u1 +24 dB. For decreasing current levels, steps of 0.5 dB apply down to the level I th . Please observe<br />
that potential hysteresis phenomena shall be evaluated and considered. In case of hysteresis, I th shall always be<br />
determined <strong>for</strong> increasing current levels.
Page 119 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Actual Tele powering flux φ, and the threshold current I th are recorded <strong>for</strong> each single geometrical test point<br />
defined in clause C4 of Annex C on page 203. This procedure shall be repeated <strong>for</strong> all the test conditions defined<br />
in sub-clause 5.2.2 on page 114 and limited by the test matrices of clauses C6 and C7 in Annex C on pages<br />
205 and 207 respectively. It is important that the position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = maximum height] is explored,<br />
because this <strong>for</strong>ms the reference <strong>for</strong> the calculations of sub-clause 5.2.4 on page 122. The threshold current <strong>for</strong><br />
this position will be denominated I THREF .<br />
Telegram Type 8 as defined by clause A2 of Annex A on page 157 shall be used during this process.
Page 120 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.3.2 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure, Evaluation of Radiation Pattern<br />
<strong>Test</strong> set-up in accordance with sub-clause 5.2.1.2 on page 112 applies.<br />
1. Position the Antenna Unit in the geometrical test point [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = maximum height], and select<br />
nominal test conditions defined by sub-clause 5.2.2.1 on page 114.<br />
2. Set the RF switch in position P2.<br />
3. Command the BTM function to its normal operational mode regarding CW Tele-powering, or to any<br />
other mode equivalent to this (from the point of view of the Up-link diagram evaluation).<br />
4. Record the value of power meter 2.<br />
5. Temporarily command the BTM function to transmit toggling Tele-powering signal in case this is supported<br />
by the equipment under test, and record the value of power meter 2. Potential change of worst<br />
case conditions shall be considered in calculations of sub-clause 5.2.4 on page 122.<br />
6. Command the BTM function back to nominal conditions (CW signal).<br />
7. Repeat step 4 <strong>for</strong> all remaining geometrical test points defined by clause C4 on page 203 and clause C6<br />
on page 205.<br />
8. Calculate and record the flux through the Reference Loop using the following equation:<br />
Φ =<br />
50 ⋅ P<br />
PM2<br />
⎛ 50 Z<br />
B<br />
⎜<br />
+<br />
⋅ ⋅<br />
⎜ 50<br />
⎝<br />
2 ⋅ π ⋅ f<br />
27<br />
loop<br />
⎞<br />
⎟<br />
⎟<br />
⎠<br />
where: P PM2 is power recorded by power meter 2<br />
B is the Reference Loop transfer matching ratio<br />
Z loop is the actual impedance of the Reference Loop in the absence of any antenna<br />
f 27 is the Tele-powering frequency (27.095 MHz)<br />
Please observe that the attenuation and impedance of the RF switch, the attenuator, and the current sense<br />
Balun have to be considered (characterised prior to testing). This is not considered in the equation above.<br />
9. Set the RF switch in position P1.<br />
10. Set the arbitrary generator to generate an Up-link signal in accordance with Figure 38 on page 118. The<br />
initial current setting shall be the minimum controllable current (in the order of 1 mA). The current is<br />
measured by the Vector Signal Analyser, and the related transfer response of the Current Sense Balun is<br />
in accordance with sub-clause H5.4 on page 319. Please observe that the current measured by the Vector<br />
Signal Analyser needs to be compensated <strong>for</strong> the B-factor of the Reference Loop (i.e., the measured target<br />
current shall be the desired Reference Loop current divided by B). Set the time and odometer in<strong>for</strong>mation<br />
to comply with a speed of 100 km/h.<br />
11. Position the Antenna Unit in the geometrical test point [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = maximum height].<br />
12. Record the output from the BTM function (via Interface ‘V 1 ’), and determine whether the Up-link signal<br />
was above or below the BTM function threshold (V th ). That is correct Balise localisation and reception<br />
of the intended telegram, out of those sent in the Up-link signal pattern, is reported.<br />
13. In case that the signal was above the threshold, gradually decrease the current level in steps as defined by<br />
sub-clause 5.2.3.1 on page 118 until the signal drops below the threshold. In case that the signal was below<br />
the threshold, gradually increase the current level in steps as defined by sub-clause 5.2.3.1 on page<br />
118 until the signal exceeds the threshold. Record the actual threshold value I th . Please observe the note<br />
regarding hysteresis in sub-clause 5.2.3.1 (this may always require determination of I th <strong>for</strong> increasing current<br />
levels).
Page 121 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
14. Repeat steps 12 and 13 <strong>for</strong> all remaining geometrical test points defined by clause C4 on page 203 and<br />
clause C6 on page 205. In order to speed up the procedure, the iterative evaluation of the new threshold<br />
value I th can be done starting from an optimised value based on the values evaluated <strong>for</strong> the previous<br />
nearby positions.<br />
15. Repeat steps 1 through 14 <strong>for</strong> all specific test conditions defined by sub-clause 5.2.2.2 on page 116 and<br />
clause C6 on page 205. Please observe that “nominal conditions” of step 1 is substituted by the relevant<br />
“specific condition” <strong>for</strong> each subsequent pass.<br />
16. Repeat steps 1 trough 5 and 9 through 13 at the temperature extremes, and evaluate possible change of<br />
per<strong>for</strong>mance. Potential change of per<strong>for</strong>mance shall be considered in calculations of sub-clause 5.2.4 on<br />
page 122.<br />
It must be verified that reliable Up-link measurements can be per<strong>for</strong>med in the presence of the applicable<br />
27 MHz Tele-powering signal.
Page 122 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.4 Creation of Signal Pattern <strong>for</strong> Dynamic <strong>Test</strong>s<br />
5.2.4.1 General Description<br />
The aim is to create a time varying 4.2 MHz current through the Reference Loop that simulates a Balise passage<br />
without any physical movements of the equipment. In other words, it is a time dependent modulation of the Uplink<br />
signal (in addition to the normal modulation <strong>for</strong>ming the FSK signal). During the following applicable tests<br />
of this document, the Reference Loop will be positioned in [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = maximum height]. This is the<br />
geometrical reference point.<br />
The recorded Tele-powering flux level (φ in Figure 39 on page 124) shall be used <strong>for</strong> determining the response<br />
from two different worst case Balises (I LOW and I HIGH in Figure 39 on page 124), utilising the lower and upper<br />
limits of the transfer response curve defined by Part 1 of this Norm.<br />
Thereafter, considering data (I th ) obtained during the radiation pattern tests defined by sub-clause 5.2.3 on page<br />
118, a signal pattern simulating a Balise passage shall be calculated. For all geometrical positions (and all applicable<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Conditions) the actual current required <strong>for</strong> passing the BTM function threshold (I th ) shall be compared<br />
with I THREF (see below). A special geometrical test point is [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = maximum height] that<br />
serves as reference. The corresponding threshold value is denominated I THREF .<br />
The φ and I th patterns recorded along the X-axis <strong>for</strong> each lateral and vertical displacement, and <strong>for</strong> each Balise<br />
type (illustrated in Figure 39 on page 124), will have to be stored in separate files in order to use them <strong>for</strong> simulating<br />
dynamic signals of Balise passages.<br />
The signal pattern to be calculated (and simulated) is the Up-link signal current through the Reference Loop,<br />
constituting the sum of the weakest or strongest possible Balise and the difference between I th and I THREF (considering<br />
the correct sign). Furthermore, realistic start-up behaviour of the Balise shall be simulated (including a<br />
certain delay time T bal ) <strong>for</strong> the weakest possible Balise. The latter includes that the Balise is inactive until a flux<br />
level of φ d1 is reached, and that a delay time T bal of 150 µs is applicable. Each simulated Balise passage shall be<br />
normalised with respect to I THREF .<br />
In order to visualise that data has to be collected once only, followed by proper scaling to simulate a desired<br />
velocity, the example of signal pattern generation is split up in two parts (see Figure 39 on page 124 and Figure<br />
40 on page 125). The first part, required to be per<strong>for</strong>med once only, deals with position related events (see<br />
Figure 39). The second part, to be repeated <strong>for</strong> each single velocity to be simulated, deals with time related<br />
events (see Figure 40). The following examples of algorithms <strong>for</strong> signal pattern generation (see sub-clause<br />
5.2.4.3 on page 126) deals with the position related part only.<br />
Figure 39 on page 124 and Figure 40 on page 125 visualise the process described above. The upper diagram in<br />
Figure 39 is an example of flux level (φ) through the Reference Loop <strong>for</strong> various geometrical positions (as determined<br />
from sub-clause 5.2.3 on page 118). The lower curve of the middle diagram (I LOW ) is the 4.2 MHz<br />
current through a weakest possible Balise considering the lower limits of the transfer response characteristics of<br />
Part 1 of this Norm. A similar curve is shown with dotted lines <strong>for</strong> the strongest possible Balise (I HIGH ). The<br />
upper curve of the middle diagram (I TH ) is the actual 4.2 MHz current through the Reference Loop that results in<br />
an Up-link signal reaching the BTM function threshold (result from sub-clause 5.2.3 on page 118). The lower<br />
diagram of Figure 39 constitutes the calculated current (I (x) ) versus position that is to be driven through a Reference<br />
Loop positioned directly underneath the Antenna Unit in position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = maximum height] in<br />
order to simulate a Balise passage. Finally, Figure 40 illustrates how to consider time-related events, thus calculating<br />
the current through the Reference Loop as a function of time (I CALC ). The time scale is dependent on the<br />
velocity to be simulated. The Balise start up behaviour mentioned above is also indicated.
Page 123 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Please note that the normalisation with respect to I THREF has to be per<strong>for</strong>med. This is per<strong>for</strong>med by calculating<br />
the difference in threshold value between the geometrical reference point (I THREF ) and the threshold value <strong>for</strong><br />
each position.<br />
Please note that I THREF is one single value taken at the reference position during free air conditions without any<br />
tilting (i.e., nominal conditions).<br />
Please also note that potential changes of worst case conditions due to changed per<strong>for</strong>mance at the temperature<br />
extremes, and due to potential changes during toggling Tele-powering signal, shall be considered.<br />
The Tele-powering radiation diagrams evaluated <strong>for</strong> all the tested conditions (in CW) shall be lowered by the<br />
same amount (in dB) found in toggling mode in case this is supported by the equipment under test, when considering<br />
the weakest Balise. The temperature effect (increase or decrease effects) should cause (when it causes a<br />
flux reduction) a lowering of the lowest Tele-powering radiation diagram in nominal conditions, <strong>for</strong> the case of<br />
the weakest Balise. On the contrary, a flux increase should apply to the highest Tele-powering radiation diagram<br />
in nominal conditions, <strong>for</strong> the strongest Balise. Similarly <strong>for</strong> the temperature effect on the up-link diagrams,<br />
an increase of the reference current due to temperature should raise by the same amount the highest Uplink<br />
diagram applicable to the weakest Balise, and a decrease should result in a lowering of the same amount of<br />
the lowest Up-link diagrams applicable to the strongest Balise.<br />
The time scale shall be determined using the following equation:<br />
x<br />
t =<br />
v<br />
where v is the velocity to be simulated (supplier dependent).<br />
The following cases shall as a minimum apply:<br />
• Each 50 km/h from 20 km/h up to and including the maximum speed <strong>for</strong> the break points in the lateral deviation<br />
versus speed diagrams defined by the supplier, and 300 km/h. This shall be per<strong>for</strong>med <strong>for</strong> all the Antenna<br />
Unit heights defined by clause C4 on page 203.<br />
• Low speed conditions (approximately 10 km/h) at minimum height and no lateral deviation.<br />
I (x) of Figure 39 shall be calculated using the algorithm exemplified in sub-clause 5.2.4.3 on page 126.
Page 124 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.4.2 Example of Signal Pattern Generation<br />
φ<br />
d2<br />
φ d3<br />
φ d1<br />
X-position<br />
X=0<br />
I u3 +10 dB<br />
I u3<br />
I u2<br />
I u1<br />
Actual current at<br />
BTM threshold = I TH<br />
Current considering<br />
strongest Balise = I HIGH<br />
Current considering<br />
weakest Balise = I LOW<br />
X-position<br />
I (x)<br />
I u2<br />
Calculated current <strong>for</strong> the<br />
weakest Balise passage<br />
I u1<br />
X-position<br />
X=0<br />
Figure 39: Example of Signal Pattern Generation (position related events)
Page 125 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
I (x)<br />
I u2<br />
Calculated current <strong>for</strong><br />
a Balise passage<br />
I p1<br />
X-position<br />
X-position<br />
Time<br />
I CALC<br />
I u2<br />
Calculated current <strong>for</strong><br />
a Balise passage<br />
I u1<br />
Time<br />
T bal<br />
T bal<br />
T (X=0)<br />
T bal<br />
Figure 40: Example of Signal Pattern Generation (time related events)<br />
I p1 is the current level corresponding to the point of time when the flux level exceeds Φ d1 . In general, the delay<br />
T bal is applicable after the point of time when the flux exceeds Φ d1 . However, this only has potential impact on<br />
the ability to detect (weakest possible) Balises, since it shortens the contact length. When dealing with the<br />
strongest possible Balise, the focus is on cross-talk (where Balise Detection aspects are irrelevant from a contact<br />
length point of view). Hence, it is adequate to ignore aspects related to T bal <strong>for</strong> the strongest possible Balise.<br />
Consequently T bal should be ignored when generating signal patterns <strong>for</strong> the strongest possible Balise.
Page 126 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.4.3 Example of Algorithm <strong>for</strong> Signal Pattern Generation<br />
Start ([X=0,Y=0,Z=max])<br />
Yes<br />
Φ ≥ Φd2<br />
No<br />
δ I = 0 δ I = 20⋅log<br />
Φ<br />
Φd<br />
2<br />
[dB]<br />
I<br />
LOW<br />
I<br />
= δI<br />
+ 20⋅log<br />
I<br />
u2<br />
u1<br />
[dB Iu1 ]<br />
δ= 20⋅log I TH<br />
ITHREF<br />
I( x) = ILOW<br />
− δ<br />
[dB]<br />
[dB Iu1 ]<br />
I( x):<br />
= Iu1<br />
⋅10<br />
I ( x )<br />
20<br />
[mA]<br />
next position<br />
Figure 41: Algorithm <strong>for</strong> Signal Pattern Generation, weakest Balise<br />
Please note that it is the principle that is shown in Figure 41 only, and that the algorithm deals with the position<br />
related events illustrated in Figure 39 only. Also margins <strong>for</strong> variations over temperature, and <strong>for</strong> toggling Telepowering<br />
signal in case this is supported by the equipment under test, must be considered (see sub-clause 5.2.4.1<br />
on page 122). Units are indicated to the right of the figure.
Page 127 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Start ([X=0,Y=0,Z=max])<br />
δ I = 0<br />
Yes<br />
Φ ≥ Φd<br />
I<br />
HIGH<br />
I<br />
= δ<br />
I<br />
+ 20⋅log<br />
I<br />
δ= 20⋅log I<br />
I<br />
3<br />
I ( x)<br />
= I HIGH<br />
TH<br />
u3<br />
u1<br />
THREF<br />
−δ<br />
No<br />
δ<br />
I<br />
= 20⋅log<br />
Φ<br />
Φ<br />
d3<br />
[dB]<br />
[dB Iu1 ]<br />
[dB]<br />
[dB Iu1 ]<br />
I( x):<br />
= Iu1<br />
⋅10<br />
I ( x )<br />
20<br />
[mA]<br />
next position<br />
Figure 42: Algorithm <strong>for</strong> Signal Pattern Generation, strongest Balise<br />
Please note that it is the principle that is shown in Figure 42 only, and that the algorithm deals with the position<br />
related events illustrated in Figure 39 only. Additional margins <strong>for</strong> variations over temperature, and <strong>for</strong> toggling<br />
Tele-powering signal in case this is supported by the equipment under test, must be considered (see sub-clause<br />
5.2.4.1 on page 122). Units are indicated to the right of the figure.
Page 128 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.5 Transmission <strong>Test</strong>s<br />
5.2.5.1 General Description<br />
The purpose of this test is to determine the capability of the Antenna Unit - BTM function combination with<br />
respect to Balise Detection, reliable data transmission, side lobe management, and location accuracy during<br />
simulated dynamic conditions. It also serves as a test of system dynamics (strongest and weakest possible signals<br />
will occur during the test).<br />
Balise Detect is defined as when the field strength from the Balise is higher than V th during a minimum time<br />
T DET . T DET may vary with speed. Reliable data transmission means that an extra time T REL (resulting in multiple<br />
good telegrams) has been considered in order to ensure reliable transmission (all in accordance with Part 1 of<br />
this Norm).<br />
The input signal to the Reference Loop generating the Up-link signal shall be in accordance with results from<br />
sub-clause 5.2.4 on page 122. The time scale shall be selected in order to comply with speeds at each 50 km/h<br />
from 20 km/h up to the maximum specified velocity <strong>for</strong> the lateral deviation (Y position) to be simulated. The<br />
odometer input signal shall be selected accordingly.<br />
For each simulated case (simulating various lateral deviations and vertical heights), the BTM function output<br />
signal shall be observed via Interface V 1 and evaluated. The BTM function shall be set in the normal operational<br />
mode.<br />
The criteria <strong>for</strong> the Antenna Unit - BTM function being able to correctly handle a certain sequence is that the<br />
BTM function reports the correct telegram, the correct Balise location <strong>for</strong> the sequence in question, an adequate<br />
reliable data transmission time, and that the BTM function reporting time requirements are fulfilled.<br />
In order to evaluate the correctness of the reported Balise location, the Balise simulations should be precisely<br />
allocated (exact distance from a chosen reference point) in a “virtual test line” used <strong>for</strong> each test sequence. The<br />
evolution of each sequence will be controlled by the Laboratory <strong>Test</strong> Management System (the LTMS). The<br />
LTMS will off-line scale each position based Balise pattern into a sequence of time based patterns according to<br />
the desired Balise “positions” and to the chosen train speed (see Figure 40 on page 125). Then the LTMS downloads<br />
all the relevant data to the arbitrary generator, and finally looks at the real-time odometer data coming<br />
from the LTOM. It issues a triggering pulse <strong>for</strong> the arbitrary generator when the odometer in<strong>for</strong>mation of each<br />
Balise starting is reached. The Balise centre positions reported by the BTM function will be checked against the<br />
reference position of the simulated sequence.<br />
All <strong>Test</strong> Conditions according to sub-clause 5.2.2 on page 114 shall be considered. Certain tailoring is defined<br />
by clause C6 of Annex C on page 205.<br />
The present tests are per<strong>for</strong>med with the antenna located in the reference position and in nominal environmental<br />
conditions. The applicable specific test conditions are simulated by using the radiation diagrams corresponding<br />
to such real conditions.
Page 129 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.5.2 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure, Transmission <strong>Test</strong>s<br />
<strong>Test</strong> set-up in accordance with sub-clause 5.2.1.2 on page 112 applies. Steps 1 through 5 below constitute calibration<br />
of the level of the generated Up-link signal <strong>for</strong> the test case in consideration. Succeeding steps <strong>for</strong>m the<br />
actual test procedure.<br />
1. For each individual test case (of those listed in clauses C4, C6 and sub-clause 5.2.2.2), calculate the position<br />
related pattern exemplified in Figure 39 on page 124 (thus obtaining I (x) ) using the radiation pattern<br />
data obtained in sub-clause 5.2.3.2, properly scaled to the reference position used <strong>for</strong> the Antenna Unit<br />
under test. Thereafter, calculate the time related pattern <strong>for</strong> weakest Balise passage, using the equation of<br />
sub-clause 5.2.4.1 on page 122, and exemplified in Figure 40 on page 125 (thus obtaining I CALC ). For the<br />
purpose of the latter calculation, a speed of 26 km/h shall be applied.<br />
2. Position the Antenna Unit at a position corresponding to X = 0, Y = 0, and at maximum height defined by<br />
the Antenna Unit supplier (i.e., the same reference position used <strong>for</strong> the evaluation of the radiation diagrams).<br />
Set the BTM function in “normal CW operational mode”, and use nominal test conditions (see<br />
sub-clause 5.2.2.1 on page 114).<br />
3. Set the RF switch in position P1.<br />
4. Set the time and odometer input data (provided by the LTOM) to comply with the required speed of<br />
26 km/h. Please note that there might be system-related properties setting certain limitations on properties<br />
such as acceleration etceteras.<br />
5. Set the arbitrary generator to generate a nominal FSK Up-link signal and apply the time related pattern<br />
obtained from step 1 above. Adjust the output level from the RSG_1 (by means of subsequent Balise<br />
passage simulations) such that the correct level (within ±0.3 dB) is obtained at the below defined two<br />
points. The window used <strong>for</strong> the level measurements by the Vector Signal Analyser shall be such that a<br />
duration of 2.4 ms ±0.25 ms is used, and that this duration does not exceed a corresponding geometrical<br />
distance of 20 mm. The current is measured by the Vector Signal Analyser, and the related transfer response<br />
of the Current Sense Balun is in accordance with H5.4 on page 319. Please observe that the current<br />
measured by the Vector Signal Analyser needs to be compensated <strong>for</strong> the B-factor of the Reference<br />
Loop (i.e. the measured target current shall be the desired Reference Loop current divided by B). The<br />
level of the up-link pattern shall be checked in the following points:<br />
• The position in time where the peak current in the calculated pattern occurs.<br />
• The position in time closest to where the current exceeds the receiver threshold (measured at<br />
the reference position of the Antenna Unit) by 1 dB (but never lower than 0.5 dB above the<br />
threshold). The first position in time after the centre of the main lobe should be selected <strong>for</strong><br />
this purpose.<br />
In case there are problems fulfilling the target <strong>for</strong> both positions, the position close to the threshold has<br />
priority. In case not fulfilling both targets, this observation shall be recorded in the test record, and it<br />
25 26<br />
shall be made clear that this is a test set-up imperfection.<br />
6. Re-calculate the time based pattern to be used <strong>for</strong> testing according to the equation of sub-clause 5.2.4.1<br />
on page 122, according to the example in Figure 40 on page 125 (I CALC ), and using one applicable velocity<br />
defined by sub-clause 5.2.4.1 on page 122.<br />
25<br />
26<br />
It is also important to verify, off-line, that the Tele-powering signal does not influence the actual Up-link<br />
signal driven through the Reference Loop.<br />
This check needs to be per<strong>for</strong>med <strong>for</strong> the reference position only. The purpose is to identify potential test set-up imperfections.
Page 130 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
7. Set the time and odometer input data (provided by the LTOM) to comply with the desired speed (to be<br />
defined by the manufacturer of the BTM function and defined by sub-clause 5.2.4.1 on page 122). Please<br />
note that there might be system related properties setting certain limitations on properties such as acceleration<br />
etceteras.<br />
8. Per<strong>for</strong>m a sequence of at least 10 subsequent sweeps with the data determined above and record the<br />
output from the BTM function (via Interface ‘V 1 ’), together with the reference location data provided by<br />
the LTOM. Measure, by the Vector Signal Analyser, and record also the value of the up-link current<br />
peak at each Balise passage simulation, evidencing the occurrence of cases of peak values slightly out of<br />
tolerance, possibly due to drifts of the RSG_1. 27<br />
9. Repeat steps 6 through 8 <strong>for</strong> all remaining applicable velocities defined by sub-clause 5.2.4.1 on page<br />
122.<br />
10. Repeat steps 1 through 9 or 6 through 9 (as appropriate) <strong>for</strong> all remaining combinations of longitudinal<br />
ranges, lateral displacements and heights (as defined by the Antenna Unit supplier) using the cases defined<br />
in clause C4, on page 203 and clause C6 on page 205. Please note that the physical location of the<br />
Antenna Unit and the Reference Loop shall not be changed.<br />
11. Repeat steps 1 through 9 or 6 through 9 (as appropriate) <strong>for</strong> all remaining specific test conditions defined<br />
by sub-clause 5.2.2.2 on page 116 and clause C6 on page 205. Please note that the physical location of<br />
the Antenna Unit and the Reference Loop shall not be changed, and that no debris or metallic objects<br />
shall be present (the influence of such conditions is included in the data from the radiation pattern this is<br />
the basis <strong>for</strong> the calculation of the signal pattern).<br />
The Operator has the possibility to set the LTMS with the input parameter “Interface V 1 Delay Time” that accounts<br />
<strong>for</strong> the overall transit time of the BTM function report (regarding the “BALPASS variable”) through the<br />
Interface ‘V 1 ’. This includes from the instant in which the BTM function makes it available to the Interface<br />
Adapter up to the instant in which the variable is available to the LTMS upper level processing. This time<br />
(probably of the order of 1 s to 2 s) does not need to be very precise because of its use explained here below.<br />
The LTMS per<strong>for</strong>ms the following steps in relation to the simulation of a certain Balise passage:<br />
a) It clears the reports table of the Interface V 1 and the marker table of the LTOM (possibly present from the<br />
previous simulation) and then sends a trigger command to the RSG.<br />
b) It waits <strong>for</strong> the RSG answer. After receiving it, it waits <strong>for</strong> a time window given by the sum of the following<br />
terms:<br />
RSG_delay + Interface_V1_delay + 1.3 m/speed + 100 ms. Please consider that the time accuracy of the<br />
LTMS cannot be better than 100 ms to 200 ms.<br />
c) When this time-out expires, it checks the validity of all the reports received at the Interface ‘V1’ using<br />
the marker data provided by the LTOM <strong>for</strong> the Balise centre as a reference. Please consider that the<br />
LTOM data are very precise even at 500 km/h. The check of the BTM reports includes presence of at<br />
least one report, correct user bits, sufficient number of valid telegrams, validity of the “BTM Reporting<br />
Time” and accuracy of the location data (expressed as time and/or distance). In case of multiple reports,<br />
the LTMS accumulates the number of telegrams indicated in each report and uses this number <strong>for</strong> evaluation.<br />
It also checks the validity of the user bits in each report indicating a non-zero number of telegrams.<br />
The “BTM Reporting Time” is checked <strong>for</strong> all the reports present in the Interface ‘V1’ Table. The lower<br />
limit <strong>for</strong> the “BTM Reporting Time” is LTOM_centre_time – 1.3 m/speed, and the upper limit is<br />
LTOM_centre_time +1.3 m/speed +100 ms.<br />
d) Then it waits <strong>for</strong> a time corresponding to the location of the next Balise simulation (at the simulated train<br />
speed).<br />
e) When the time arrives <strong>for</strong> the new Balise simulation, firstly it checks that no new report has been added<br />
to the list examined in point 3 above. If this happen there is an error indication otherwise a new cycle is<br />
started from step 1 above.<br />
27<br />
The measurement is per<strong>for</strong>med within a time window corresponding to about 20 mm at the current test speed.
Page 131 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.5.3 Acceptance Criteria, Transmission <strong>Test</strong>s<br />
The criterion is that the BTM function is able to correctly receive a Balise during the simulated sequence. This<br />
means that the following properties are correctly reported:<br />
• Telegram.<br />
• Location.<br />
• Overall number of non-overlapping good telegrams considering the safety targets within the class of reception<br />
defined.<br />
• BTM function reporting time (time <strong>for</strong> data being available to the ERTMS/ETC Kernel).<br />
• Class of reception.<br />
∗ Class A without any error correction.<br />
∗ Class B n with error correction (where n is any number defined by the supplier).<br />
It shall be checked that there is a logical consistency between the various fields of the data transmitted by the<br />
BTM function. Missing or erroneous reporting means that the Balise could not be received. For low speed<br />
conditions, the BTM function could per<strong>for</strong>m reporting each 100 ms. In such case, the last report corresponding<br />
to a given Balise passage simulation should be considered <strong>for</strong> the verifications defined above. See also bullet ‘c’<br />
of sub-clause 5.2.5.2 on page 129.<br />
A BTM function report that is unduly given outside a Balise passage simulation (considering all relevant delays)<br />
shall be regarded as a failure condition.<br />
5.2.6 Electrical Tele-powering Characteristics<br />
5.2.6.1 General Description<br />
The purpose of this test is to systematically evaluate the per<strong>for</strong>mance of the Tele-powering signal generated by<br />
the Antenna Unit - BTM function combination. The electrical characteristics of the signal (such as carrier frequency<br />
and carrier noise) and modulation characteristics (in Interoperability mode if supported by the equipment<br />
under test) are subject to testing.<br />
The output signal shall be evaluated during static conditions in CW mode and Interoperability mode (if supported)<br />
respectively. The output signal shall be measured using a Reference Loop.<br />
The BTM function shall be <strong>for</strong>ced to applicable modes using suitable commands inserted via Interface V 1 .<br />
Geometrical test points and applicable test conditions are defined by sub-clauses C7.1 on page 207 and C7.2 on<br />
page 208.
Page 132 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.6.2 <strong>Test</strong> Set-up <strong>for</strong> Tele-powering verification<br />
The recommended test set-up is shown in Figure 43 below. Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an example<br />
of suitable test equipment.<br />
34.<br />
Interface ‘V 1 ’<br />
Adapter<br />
BTM<br />
function<br />
APT<br />
Antenna Unit<br />
Interface ‘V 1 ’<br />
38.<br />
Interface A<br />
Laboratory <strong>Test</strong><br />
Management System<br />
29.<br />
Reference Loop<br />
7.<br />
Marker 1<br />
Interface ‘V 2 ’<br />
40.<br />
Spectrum<br />
Analyser<br />
35.<br />
36.<br />
IEEE 488<br />
bus<br />
RS 232<br />
LTOM<br />
Interface ‘V 2 ’<br />
Adapter<br />
P1<br />
RF<br />
Switch<br />
39.<br />
P2<br />
C<br />
RSG_1<br />
13.<br />
37.<br />
Oscilloscope<br />
Attenuator<br />
2.<br />
31.<br />
Attenuator<br />
Attenuator<br />
RF<br />
Switch<br />
P2<br />
36.<br />
P1 45.<br />
Low Pass<br />
Filter<br />
Attenuator 4.<br />
RF Amplifier<br />
Current Sense Balun<br />
3.<br />
C.S.<br />
Low Pass Filter<br />
Low Pass Filter<br />
Vector Signal<br />
Analyser<br />
Trigger<br />
14.<br />
12.<br />
12.<br />
41.<br />
Figure 43: <strong>Test</strong> set-up <strong>for</strong> Tele-powering verification<br />
Items 35, 36, and 37 are computer controlled via the Laboratory <strong>Test</strong> Management System (the computer control<br />
is intentionally not indicated in the figure).
Page 133 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.6.3 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure, CW Mode<br />
<strong>Test</strong> set-up in accordance with sub-clause 5.2.6.2 on page 132 applies.<br />
The spectrum Analyser setting should be the following:<br />
• Centre Frequency = 27.095 MHz<br />
• Frequency Sweep = ± 100 kHz<br />
• Resolution Band Width = 100 Hz<br />
• Video Band Width = 100 Hz<br />
The noise measured by the spectrum analyser with 100 Hz resolution band width shall be 90 dB below the carrier.<br />
The evaluation of carrier noise shall be per<strong>for</strong>med within the frequency ranges f c -100 kHz to f c -10 kHz and<br />
f c +10 kHz to f c +100 kHz.<br />
1. Position the Antenna Unit in the position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = nominal height].<br />
2. Set the RF switches so that the signal from the Reference Loop is connected to the spectrum analyser.<br />
3. Command the BTM function to its normal operational mode regarding CW Tele-powering, or to any other<br />
mode equivalent to this (from the point of view of the Tele-powering evaluation).<br />
4. Measure and record the below defined properties of the Tele-powering signal.<br />
• Frequency of the 27.095 MHz field.<br />
• Carrier Noise of the 27.095 MHz field.<br />
5. Repeat steps 1 through 5 <strong>for</strong> upper and lower temperature extremes.
Page 134 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.6.4 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure, Interoperable Mode<br />
<strong>Test</strong> set-up in accordance with sub-clause 5.2.6.2 on page 132 applies.<br />
This test is only applicable to equipment having the ability to operate in Interoperability mode.<br />
1. Position the Antenna Unit in the position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = nominal height].<br />
2. Set the RF switches so that the signal from the Reference Loop is connected to the oscilloscope <strong>for</strong> verifying<br />
all properties except <strong>for</strong> the Modulation Frequency. Verification of Modulation Frequency shall be per<strong>for</strong>med<br />
with the RF switches positioned such that the signal from the Reference Loop is connected to the<br />
spectrum analyser.<br />
3. Command the BTM function to its normal operational mode regarding toggling Tele-powering, or to any<br />
other mode equivalent to this (from the point of view of the Tele-powering evaluation).<br />
4. Measure and record the below defined modulation properties of the Tele-powering signal.<br />
• Toggling behaviour<br />
• Modulation Frequency<br />
• Pulse Width<br />
• Jitter<br />
• Modulation Depth<br />
• Overshoot<br />
5. Repeat steps 1 through 5 <strong>for</strong> upper and lower temperature extremes.<br />
Modulation characteristic requirements are defined by Part 1 of this Norm.<br />
Verification of Modulation Frequency shall be per<strong>for</strong>med using the method described in sub-clause D6.2.2.3.2<br />
on page 258.
Page 135 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.6.5 Acceptance Criteria, Electrical Tele-powering Characteristics<br />
5.2.6.5.1 CW mode<br />
The requirements according to sub-clause 6.2.1.2.1 of Part 1 of this Norm apply.<br />
5.2.6.5.2 Interoperability mode<br />
The requirements according to sub-clause 6.2.1.2.2 of Part 1 of this Norm apply.<br />
5.2.7 Maximum Flux Level<br />
5.2.7.1 General Description<br />
The purpose of this test is to systematically evaluate the per<strong>for</strong>mance of the Tele-powering signal generated by<br />
the Antenna Unit - BTM function combination. The maximum flux generated through a Reference Loop is<br />
subject to testing.<br />
The output signal shall be evaluated during static conditions in CW mode and Interoperability mode (if supported<br />
by the equipment under test) respectively. The output signal shall be measured using a Reference Loop.<br />
The Reference Loop should be subjected to various load conditions during maximum flux measurements.<br />
The BTM function shall be <strong>for</strong>ced to applicable modes using suitable commands inserted via Interface V 1 .<br />
Geometrical test points and applicable test conditions are defined by sub-clauses C7.1 on page 207 and C7.2 on<br />
page 208.<br />
The maximum flux level test shall determine the flux level through the Reference Loop under various load conditions,<br />
and <strong>for</strong> various geometrical test points. Three different load conditions apply, 60 Ω (40 Ω), j60 Ω<br />
(j40 Ω), and -j60 Ω (-j40 Ω). The figures within parenthesis apply to the Reduced Size Reference Loop, and the<br />
others to the Standard Size Reference Loop. Geometrical test points are defined by sub-clause C7.2 on page<br />
208.
Page 136 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.7.2 <strong>Test</strong> Set-up <strong>for</strong> Maximum Flux Level verification<br />
The test set-up is shown in Figure 44 below. Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an example of suitable<br />
test equipment.<br />
Interface ‘V 1 ’<br />
34.<br />
Interface ‘V 1 ’<br />
Adapter<br />
38.<br />
Laboratory <strong>Test</strong><br />
Management<br />
System<br />
BTM<br />
function<br />
Load<br />
Antenna Unit<br />
Interface A<br />
Reference Loop 7.<br />
Current Sense Balun 14.<br />
P PM1<br />
Power<br />
Meter 1<br />
10.<br />
Figure 44: <strong>Test</strong> set-up <strong>for</strong> Maximum Flux Level <strong>Test</strong>s<br />
Item 10, is computer controlled via the Laboratory <strong>Test</strong> Management System (the computer control is intentionally<br />
not indicated in the figure).
Page 137 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.7.3 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure, Maximum Flux Level<br />
The test set-up in accordance with sub-clause 5.2.7.2 on page 136 applies.<br />
1. Connect the equipment as defined by sub-clause 5.2.7.2 on page 136, and ensure that the Current Sense<br />
Balun is calibrated as defined by sub-clause H5.5 on page 320.<br />
2. Connect a load to the Reference Loop <strong>for</strong>ming a total impedance of 60 Ω (40 Ω) in the circuit (i.e., the<br />
sum of the Reference Loop impedance and the external load and the Current Sense Balun shall be 60 Ω<br />
or 40 Ω).<br />
3. Position the Antenna Unit in the geometrical test point [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = minimum height].<br />
4. Command the BTM function to its normal operational mode regarding CW Tele-powering, or to any<br />
other mode equivalent to this (from the point of view of the maximum flux level evaluation).<br />
5. Record the power level of power meter 1 (P PM1 ).<br />
6. Calculate the flux through the Reference Loop using the following equation:<br />
Φ =<br />
P<br />
PM1<br />
⋅ B⋅<br />
k ⋅ Z<br />
A<br />
( Z + Z )<br />
load<br />
⋅ 2 ⋅ π ⋅ f<br />
27<br />
loop<br />
where: P PM1 is power in Watt recorded by power meter 1<br />
B is the Reference Loop transfer matching ratio<br />
Z loop is the actual impedance of the Reference Loop in the absence of any antenna<br />
Z load is the external load impedance connected to the Reference Loop<br />
f 27 is the Tele-powering frequency (27.095 MHz)<br />
k is the calibration factor determined by sub-clause H5.5 on page 320<br />
Z A is defined in sub-clause H5.5 on page 320<br />
7. Per<strong>for</strong>m steps 5 and 6 <strong>for</strong> all the other geometrical test points defined by sub-clause C7.2 on page 208.<br />
8. Repeat steps 2 through 7, but connect a load <strong>for</strong>ming a total circuit impedance of j60 Ω (j40 Ω) to the<br />
Reference Loop.<br />
9. Repeat steps 2 through 7, but connect a load <strong>for</strong>ming a total circuit impedance of -j60 Ω (-j40 Ω) to the<br />
Reference Loop.<br />
10. Repeat steps 2 through 9 <strong>for</strong> the specific condition “Metallic Plane underneath the Reference Loop” defined<br />
by sub-clause 5.2.2.2.3 on page 116.<br />
Please observe that the actual load values defined in this test procedure constitute the total load of the circuit. It<br />
means that a certain load defined above (e.g., 60 Ω) is the sum of the external load connected to the Reference<br />
Loop, the influence of the Current Sense Balun, and the actual Reference Loop impedance. Hence, the Reference<br />
Loop impedance has to be measured separately, and the impedance of the combination of the Current Sense<br />
Balun and the external load has to be measured separately, and the total impedance has to be calculated (and<br />
shall be <strong>for</strong> instance 60 Ω). This has to be characterised prior to the test.<br />
5.2.7.4 Acceptance Criteria, Maximum Flux Level<br />
The requirement is that the flux level never exceeds φ d4 .
Page 138 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.8 Electrical Up-link Signal Characteristics<br />
5.2.8.1 General Description<br />
The purpose of this test is to systematically evaluate the BTM function capability with respect to extremes of the<br />
electrical characteristics of the Up-link signal (such as centre frequency, frequency deviation, data rate, phase<br />
jitter, and amplitude jitter). Suitable test patterns shall be generated by the arbitrary generator in order to test the<br />
properties mentioned above.<br />
The input signal to the Reference Loop generating the Up-link signal shall be an FSK signal with “imperfections”<br />
as described above. Furthermore, an additional modulation in accordance with sub-clause 5.2.4 on page<br />
122 shall be present in order to simulate a Balise passage. <strong>Test</strong> data from sub-clauses 5.2.3 on page 118 and<br />
5.2.4 on page 122 shall be used <strong>for</strong> creation of the simulated Balise passage. The BTM function shall be set in<br />
normal operational mode.<br />
Only a limited amount of combinations of lateral deviation and vertical height will be considered (see sub-clause<br />
C7.2 on page 208). The BTM function output signal shall be observed via Interface V 1 and evaluated.<br />
The criteria <strong>for</strong> the Antenna Unit - BTM function being able to correctly handle a certain sequence are defined<br />
in paragraph 5 of sub-clause 5.2.5.1 on page 128.<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Conditions shall be in accordance with sub-clause C7.1 on page 207.<br />
5.2.8.2 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure, Electrical Up-link Characteristics<br />
<strong>Test</strong> set-up in accordance with sub-clause 5.2.1.2 on page 112 applies.<br />
Suitable test patterns <strong>for</strong> the arbitrary generator shall be developed that simulates the following extremes of the<br />
Up-link signal:<br />
• Centre frequency = 4.234 MHz ±175 kHz.<br />
• Frequency Deviation = 282.24 kHz ±7 %.<br />
• Mean Data Rate = 564.48 kbit/s ±2.5 %.<br />
• Limits of MTIE requirement 1 and requirement 2 according to Part 1 of this Norm.<br />
• Amplitude Jitter = +1.5/-2.0 dB.<br />
Please note that the test patterns shall be designed in order to comply with testing of the Up-link signal from the<br />
Balise as defined in sub-clause 4.2.7 on page 71. One main aspect as listed above shall be evaluated at a time.<br />
Start-up and steady state behaviour shall be considered where applicable.<br />
Apart from these modifications of the FSK signal and the selection of geometrical test points and test conditions,<br />
the test procedure is identical to the procedure defined in sub-clause 5.2.5.2 on page 129 (Transmission <strong>Test</strong>s).<br />
Geometrical test points and test conditions are defined by clause C7.1 on page 207, and clause C7.2 on page<br />
208.
Page 139 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.8.3 <strong>Test</strong> Cases<br />
Parameter Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Case 4 Case 5<br />
Centre Frequency 4.409 MHz Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal<br />
Frequency Deviation Nominal 302.0 kHz Nominal Nominal Nominal<br />
Mean Data Rate Nominal Nominal 578.6 kbits/s Nominal Nominal<br />
MTIE Nominal Nominal Nominal MTIE2 limits 28 Nominal<br />
Amplitude Jitter Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal +1.5/-2.0 dB 29<br />
Parameter Case 6 Case 7 Case 8 Case 9<br />
Centre Frequency 4.059 MHz Nominal Nominal Nominal<br />
Frequency Deviation Nominal 283.2 kHz Nominal Nominal<br />
Mean Data Rate Nominal Nominal 550.4 kbits/s Nominal<br />
MTIE Nominal Nominal Nominal MTIE1 limits 28<br />
Amplitude Jitter Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal<br />
Table 21: <strong>Test</strong> Cases<br />
Nominal characteristics <strong>for</strong> the respective parameter are defined in sub-clause 5.2.2.1.4 on page 115.<br />
Please observe that the implementation of the test patterns shall consider potential inaccuracy of the RSG/LRRT<br />
and the rest of the test set-up such that it is guaranteed that the specified limits are never exceeded. Air-gap<br />
properties shall be verified using the already used 4.2 MHz antenna (used during Balise testing).<br />
5.2.8.4 Acceptance Criteria, Electrical Up-link Characteristics<br />
See sub-clause 5.2.5.3 on page 131.<br />
28<br />
29<br />
As defined in Part 1 of this Norm. Three different cases using triangular simulated jitter patterns apply. The first should<br />
be with a period of 3 bits, the second with a period of 25 bits, and the third with a period of 1000 bits.<br />
The jitter should be such that it is correlated with the bit transitions. Low and high jitter frequencies should apply. Low<br />
jitter frequency is such that three jitter periods occur within an entire telegram. High frequency jitter is such that the amplitude<br />
changes every three data bits.
Page 140 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.9 Cross-talk Immunity<br />
5.2.9.1 General Description<br />
Cross-talk tests shall determine whether there are any potential cross-talk situations within the defined geometrical<br />
region and during the test conditions defined by sub-clause 5.2.2 on page 114. Where applicable, certain<br />
cross-talk margins should be evaluated. Specific cable related cross-talk is not included in this sub-clause, but<br />
separately dealt with in 5.2.10 on page 143.<br />
The Tele-powering flux shall be measured using a Reference Loop. The recorded flux level (φ) shall after this<br />
be used <strong>for</strong> determining the response from a strongest worst case Balise (I HIGH ) utilising the upper limits of the<br />
transfer response curve defined by Part 1 of this Norm. Thereafter, the Reference Loop shall be connected to a<br />
signal generator generating an FSK Up-link signal that simulates a representative Balise passage (see Figure 45<br />
below), and carrying a correct telegram with a peak current level as determined above (I HIGH ). The BTM function<br />
output response shall be observed via Interface ‘V 1 ’. The requirement is that no Balise detection is reported.<br />
Thereafter, the peak current level shall be gradually increased until Balise detection occurs, or until a<br />
peak current value of I U3 +20 dB is reached. The procedure is similar to the method described in sub-clause<br />
5.2.3.1 on page 118. The difference is that current levels up to the maximum peak current level I U3 +20 dB are<br />
quantitatively tested to evaluate the margin <strong>for</strong> cross-talk.<br />
t dur = 18.1 ms<br />
I HIGH<br />
5 ms<br />
5 ms<br />
Time<br />
Figure 45: Up-link signal <strong>for</strong> Cross-talk tests<br />
The time t dur shall be selected so that ten complete 1023 bit telegrams are transmitted. The odometer input signal<br />
shall be selected so that the flat part of the sequence according to Figure 45 above corresponds to approximately<br />
0.5 m at a speed of 100 km/h (the entire sequence from start of rising edge to end of falling edge corresponds to<br />
approximately 0.78 m).<br />
This procedure shall be per<strong>for</strong>med <strong>for</strong> all the geometrical positions defined by clause C5 on page 204, and <strong>for</strong> all<br />
test conditions defined by sub-clause 5.2.2 on page 114. Certain tailoring is defined by clause C6 on page 205.
Page 141 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.9.2 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure, Cross-talk Immunity<br />
<strong>Test</strong> set-up in accordance with sub-clause 5.2.1.2 on page 112 applies.<br />
1. Position the Antenna Unit in the first geometrical test point defined by clause C5 on page 204 and select<br />
nominal test conditions defined by sub-clause 5.2.2.1 on page 114.<br />
2. Set the RF switch in position P2.<br />
3. Command the BTM function to its normal operational mode regarding CW Tele-powering, or to any<br />
other mode equivalent to this (from the point of view of the Cross-talk evaluation).<br />
4. Record the value of power meter 2.<br />
5. Repeat step 4 <strong>for</strong> all remaining geometrical test points defined by clause C5 on page 204 and clause C6<br />
on page 205.<br />
6. Calculate the flux <strong>for</strong> all geometrical test points using the equation defined in sub-clause 5.2.3.2 on page<br />
120.<br />
7. Determine the corresponding worst case (strongest) response from the Balise (I HIGH ) as described in subclause<br />
5.2.9.1 on page 140.<br />
8. Set the RF switch in position P1.<br />
9. Set the arbitrary generator to generate an Up-link signal in accordance with Figure 45 on page 140. The<br />
initial current setting shall be the I u3 current. The current is measured by the Vector Signal Analyser, and<br />
the related transfer response of the Current Sense Balun is in accordance with sub-clause H5.4 on page<br />
319. Please observe that the current measured by the Vector Signal Analyser needs to be compensated<br />
<strong>for</strong> the B-factor of the Reference Loop (i.e., the measured target current shall be the desired Reference<br />
Loop current divided by B). Set the time and odometer in<strong>for</strong>mation to comply with a speed of 100 km/h.<br />
10. Position the Antenna Unit in the first geometrical test point defined by clause C5 on page 204 and select<br />
nominal test conditions defined by sub-clause 5.2.2.1 on page 114.<br />
11. Record the output from the BTM function (via Interface ‘V 1 ’) and determine whether Balise detection<br />
occurred or not. That is, Balise detect or Balise localisation is reported.<br />
12. In case that Balise detect did not occur, increase the peak current level in steps of 0.5 dB until Balise<br />
detect occurs or until I u3 + 20 dB is reached. Repeat steps 11 and 12 until the margin is determined.<br />
13. Repeat steps 11 and 12 <strong>for</strong> all remaining geometrical test points defined by clause C5 on page 204 and<br />
clause C6 on page 205, using the appropriate I HIGH <strong>for</strong> each separate point.<br />
14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 <strong>for</strong> all specific test conditions defined by sub-clause 5.2.2.2 on page 116 and<br />
clause C6 on page 205. Please observe that “nominal conditions” of step 1 is substituted by the relevant<br />
“specific condition” <strong>for</strong> each subsequent pass.<br />
It must be verified that reliable Up-link measurements can be per<strong>for</strong>med in the presence of the applicable<br />
27 MHz Tele-powering signal.
Page 142 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.9.3 Acceptance Criteria, Cross-talk Immunity<br />
5.2.9.3.1 General<br />
The requirement is that no cross-talk occurs. There is no explicit requirement on a certain margin, but the defined<br />
test procedure makes it possible to per<strong>for</strong>m this evaluation. The evaluation of the cross-talk margin must<br />
be separated into the two cases defined by Part 1 of this Norm.<br />
5.2.9.3.2 One Balise and one Antenna Unit<br />
This case is applicable <strong>for</strong> lateral deviations of 1400 mm or more.<br />
The cross-talk margin in dB is evaluated as follows:<br />
M argin<br />
=<br />
M argin<br />
=<br />
{ Φ ≤ Φ }<br />
d<br />
{ Φ > Φ }<br />
d<br />
I<br />
CT<br />
Φ<br />
d<br />
3<br />
= 20 ⋅ log + 20 ⋅ log<br />
I<br />
Φ<br />
I<br />
3<br />
= 20 ⋅ log<br />
I<br />
u3<br />
CT<br />
u3<br />
3<br />
Where:<br />
φ is the actual flux level in nVs <strong>for</strong> the geometrical position in question<br />
φ d3 is in nVs, and defined by the transfer characteristics of the Balise<br />
I CT is the actual current in mA <strong>for</strong> when cross-talk occurs<br />
I u3 is in mA, and defined by the transfer characteristics of the Balise<br />
Margin is the cross-talk margin in dB<br />
5.2.9.3.3 One Balise and two Antenna Units<br />
This case is applicable <strong>for</strong> lateral deviations of 3000 mm or more, and <strong>for</strong> longitudinal deviations as defined by<br />
the manufacturer of the Antenna Unit.<br />
The cross-talk margin in dB is evaluated as follows:<br />
Where:<br />
I<br />
M argin<br />
= 20 ⋅ log<br />
I<br />
CT<br />
u3<br />
I CT is the actual current in mA <strong>for</strong> when cross-talk occurs<br />
I u3 is in mA, and defined by the transfer characteristics of the Balise<br />
Margin is the cross-talk margin in dB
Page 143 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.10 Cross-talk Immunity with Cables<br />
5.2.10.1 General<br />
This sub-clause defines measurement methods <strong>for</strong> verifying potential cable related cross talk <strong>for</strong> the Antenna<br />
Unit. The tests are divided in two parts:<br />
• Up-Link Cross talk from cable to Antenna<br />
• Tele-powering Cross talk from Antenna to cable<br />
It also includes the test set-ups that are required.<br />
All distances are in millimetres unless explicitly otherwise stated.
Page 144 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.10.2 Cross-talk Measurements<br />
5.2.10.2.1 <strong>Test</strong> Configuration, Up-Link Cross-talk from cable to Antenna Unit<br />
A proposed test set-up is shown in Figure 46 below. Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an example of<br />
suitable test equipment. See also sub-clause 4.2.1 on page 23.<br />
x-axis<br />
Antenna<br />
y-axis<br />
D<br />
Minimum height (<strong>for</strong> the<br />
Antenna Type in question)<br />
13.<br />
Signal<br />
Generator<br />
z-axis<br />
E<br />
500<br />
Top of Rail (fictive)<br />
2.<br />
Attenuator<br />
8 Bar Profile<br />
3.<br />
45.<br />
4.<br />
RF<br />
Amplifier<br />
Filter<br />
Attenuator<br />
4.2 MHz<br />
BTM<br />
function<br />
Antenna<br />
V TH (yes or no)<br />
z-axis<br />
P M1<br />
40<br />
Power<br />
Meter 1<br />
35<br />
10.<br />
20. Balun<br />
Filter<br />
12.<br />
I<br />
R2<br />
R1<br />
32.<br />
I<br />
500<br />
600 600<br />
Figure 46: Up-link <strong>Test</strong> Configuration, cable to Antenna Unit
Page 145 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.10.2.2 <strong>Test</strong> Configuration, Tele-powering Cross-talk from Antenna Unit to cable<br />
A proposed test set-up is shown in Figure 47 below. Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an example of<br />
suitable test equipment. See also sub-clause 4.2.1 on page 23.<br />
x-axis<br />
Antenna<br />
y-axis<br />
D<br />
Minimum height (<strong>for</strong> the<br />
Antenna Type in question)<br />
z-axis<br />
E<br />
Top of Rail (fictive)<br />
500<br />
8 Bar Profile<br />
35<br />
BTM<br />
function<br />
40<br />
z-axis<br />
Power<br />
Meter 1<br />
10.<br />
Antenna<br />
P M1<br />
I<br />
R2<br />
R1<br />
32.<br />
I<br />
500<br />
600 600<br />
Figure 47: Tele-powering <strong>Test</strong> Configuration, Antenna Unit to cable
Page 146 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.10.2.3 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure, Up-link Cross-talk from cable to Antenna Unit<br />
The test set-up shown in Figure 46 on page 144 shall be used. The resistor R1 shall be 350 Ω and R2 shall be<br />
400 Ω. The distance D is the position in the x direction, and shall be in the range from –1000 mm to 1000 mm.<br />
This test determines the signal received in an Antenna induced from a cable with the current 2 mA and 10 mA<br />
<strong>for</strong> E = 93 mm and E = 493 mm respectively. See Figure 46 on page 144 <strong>for</strong> definition of E.<br />
1. Position the Antenna at position D = -1000 mm and E = 93 mm and set the BTM function in normal<br />
operational mode.<br />
2. Set the Signal Generator to generate a 4.2 MHz FSK signal carrying telegram type 1, and the current ‘I’<br />
to 2 mA. For telegram type 1 see clause A2 of Annex A on page 157. For the suggested current probe,<br />
a current of 1 mA will give a voltage of 1 mV into 50 Ω. There<strong>for</strong>e, the current is calculated using the<br />
following equation:<br />
I M 1 ×<br />
= P 50 Where P is measured in [W], and I is measured in [A]<br />
3. Verify that the response from the Antenna Unit is below V th (determined by the BTM function) by<br />
observing output data via Interface V 1 (i.e., that Balise detect or Balise localisation is not reported).<br />
4. Position the Antenna at regular intervals of +40 mm, up to the distance D = 1000 mm. For each position,<br />
verify that the response is below V th .<br />
5. Position the Antenna at position D = -1000 mm and E = 493 mm.<br />
6. Set the Signal Generator to generate a 4.2 MHz FSK signal carrying telegram type 1, and the current ‘I’<br />
to 10 mA. For telegram type 1 see clause A2 of Annex A on page 157.<br />
7. Verify that the response from the Antenna Unit is below V th (determined by the BTM function) by<br />
observing output data via Interface V 1 (i.e., that Balise detect or Balise localisation is not reported).<br />
8. Position the Antenna at regular intervals of +40 mm, up to the distance D = 1000 mm. For each position,<br />
verify that the response is below V th .
Page 147 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.10.2.4 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure, Tele-powering Cross-talk from Antenna Unit to cable<br />
The test set-up shown in Figure 47 on page 145 shall be used. The resistor R1 shall be 400 Ω, and R2 shall be<br />
400 Ω. The distance D is the position in the x direction, and shall be in the range from –1000 mm to 1000 mm.<br />
This test determines the current induced in a cable from an Antenna Unit <strong>for</strong> E = 93 mm and E = 493 mm. See<br />
Figure 47 on page 145 <strong>for</strong> definition of E.<br />
1. Position the Antenna at position D = -1000 mm and E = 93 mm.<br />
2. Command the BTM function to its normal operational mode regarding CW Tele-powering, or to any<br />
other mode equivalent to this (from the point of view of the Cross-talk evaluation).<br />
3. Record the reading of Power Meter 1 and call it P 27IACH .<br />
4. Position the Antenna at regular intervals of +40 mm, up to the distance D = 1000 mm. For each position,<br />
record the reading of Power Meter 1 and call it P 27IACH .<br />
5. Position the Antenna at position D = -1000 mm and E = 493 mm.<br />
6. Record the reading of Power Meter 1 and call it P 27IACL .<br />
7. Position the Antenna at regular intervals of +40 mm, up to the distance D = 1000 mm. For each position,<br />
record the reading of Power Meter 1 and call it P 27IACL .<br />
The results from the test are a set of P 27IACH values and a set of P 27IACL . Calculate the current that corresponds to<br />
the maximum value of each set of data, and call them I 27ACH and I 27ACL respectively. For the suggested current<br />
probe, the current of 1 mA will give a voltage of 1 mV into 50 Ω. There<strong>for</strong>e, the currents are calculated with the<br />
following equations:<br />
I<br />
I<br />
= P 50<br />
Where P is measured in [W], and I is measured in [A]<br />
27 ACH 27IACH<br />
×<br />
= P 50<br />
Where P is measured in [W], and I is measured in [A]<br />
27 ACL 27IACL<br />
×<br />
The value I 27ACH shall be lower than 25 mA.<br />
The value I 27ACL shall be lower than 10 mA.
Page 148 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.10.3 LZB Cable <strong>Test</strong>ing<br />
5.2.10.3.1 General<br />
In general, two different test set-ups apply <strong>for</strong> the tests with LZB cable:<br />
• Measurement of 27 MHz Tele-powering induction from a <strong>Eurobalise</strong> On-board Equipment.<br />
• Measurement on the <strong>Eurobalise</strong> On-board Equipment when 4.2 MHz current is injected into the tool.<br />
Requirements are defined in Part 1 of this Norm.<br />
Please observe that the 75 Ω set-up impedance must always remain <strong>for</strong> the purpose of testing of Tele-powering<br />
induction.<br />
5.2.10.3.2 Reference Axes and Origin of Co-ordinates<br />
Regarding measurements with 4.2 MHz Up-link current, directions <strong>for</strong> the Antenna Unit shall be defined according<br />
to three reference axes related to the horizontally placed LZB <strong>Test</strong> Loop described in sub-clause J2.3 on<br />
page 326.<br />
• A reference axis in parallel with the longer side of the LZB <strong>Test</strong> Loop (the X-axis).<br />
• A reference axis at right angles to the X-axis. This axis is in parallel with the short side and crosses<br />
the long side of the LZB <strong>Test</strong> Loop in the middle. The level of this axis is the centre of the LZB cable<br />
(the Y-axis).<br />
• A reference axis directed upwards, at right angles to the LZB <strong>Test</strong> Loop plane (the Z-axis).<br />
Z<br />
LZB <strong>Test</strong> Loop<br />
Y<br />
X<br />
Figure 48: Reference Axes
Page 149 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.10.3.3 <strong>Test</strong> set-up <strong>for</strong> 27 MHz Induction<br />
The test set-up according to Figure 49 below applies. Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an example of<br />
suitable test equipment. Additional details related to the vertically positioned LZB loop is found in sub-clause<br />
J2.4 on page 329. See also sub-clause 4.2.1 on page 23.<br />
BTM Function<br />
Power Meter<br />
(10)<br />
Antenna Unit<br />
Z<br />
X<br />
Y<br />
Short Circuit<br />
N-connector<br />
> 200 mm<br />
Ground<br />
Figure 49: <strong>Test</strong> set-up, Tele-powering induction from the antenna<br />
5.2.10.3.4 <strong>Test</strong> procedure <strong>for</strong> 27 MHz Induction<br />
The recommended test set-up of sub-clause 5.2.10.3.3 should be used. The following procedure applies:<br />
1. Position the On-board Antenna Unit at the position X = 0, Y = -300, and at the height representing the<br />
minimum antenna height defined by the supplier combined with an LZB cable position 105 mm below<br />
the Top of Rail. The reference position of the tool (X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 0) is at the midpoint of the<br />
longer upper horizontal cable segment of the tool.<br />
2. Set the On-board equipment into normal operation.<br />
3. Measure the 27 MHz current induced into the LZB loop.<br />
4. Repeat step 3 <strong>for</strong> increasing Y co-ordinates in steps of 20 mm up to a maximum of Y = 300.<br />
5. Repeat steps 1 trough 4 <strong>for</strong> an antenna height considering the case of the LZB cable positioned<br />
75 mm below the Top of Rail.<br />
6. Verify that the limits defined in Part 1 of this Norm are not exceeded.<br />
Please observe that the balun shall be the same unit as the one used during tuning of the LZB loop.
Page 150 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.10.3.5 <strong>Test</strong> set-up <strong>for</strong> 4.2 MHz Injection<br />
A recommended test set up is in accordance with Figure 50 below. Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an<br />
example of suitable test equipment. Additional details related to the horizontally positioned LZB loop is found<br />
in sub-clause J2.3 on page 326. See also sub-clause 4.2.1 on page 23.<br />
RSG (13)<br />
Attenuator (2)<br />
Power<br />
Amplifier (28)<br />
BTM function<br />
Antenna Unit<br />
Part of the LZB<br />
Loop tool<br />
Attenuator (4)<br />
Filter (12)<br />
520 mm<br />
LZB Loop (44)<br />
Balun<br />
Attenuator<br />
(11)<br />
1550 mm<br />
Current<br />
sense<br />
Filter (12)<br />
Vector Signal<br />
Analyser (41)<br />
Figure 50: <strong>Test</strong> set-up <strong>for</strong> 4.2 MHz Injection<br />
5.2.10.3.6 <strong>Test</strong> procedure <strong>for</strong> 4.2 MHz Injection<br />
The recommended test set-up of sub-clause 5.2.10.3.5 should be used. The following procedure applies:<br />
1. Generate an Up-link signal including telegram 17 (defined in Table 25 on page 160), modulated in<br />
accordance with sub-clause 5.2.9.1 on page 140, by the RSG. Adjust the output level (I HIGH in subclause<br />
5.2.9.1) to result in 0.3 mA through the LZB Loop. Please observe that Tele-powering shall be<br />
switched off during the adjustments of the current.<br />
2. Position the On-board antenna at the position X = 0, Y = -300, and at the height representing the<br />
minimum antenna height defined by the supplier combined with an LZB cable position 75 mm below<br />
the Top of Rail. The reference position of the tool (X = 0) is at the midpoint of one of the longer cable<br />
segment of the tool.<br />
3. Set the On-board equipment into normal operation.<br />
4. Verify that the On-board equipment does not detect the signal.<br />
5. Repeat steps 2 trough 4 <strong>for</strong> increasing Y co-ordinates in steps of 20 mm up to a maximum of Y = 300.
Page 151 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.11 Balise Detectability Supervision<br />
5.2.11.1 General Description<br />
This test may be per<strong>for</strong>med in a dynamic way if the Antenna Unit - BTM function combination requires this to<br />
operate properly. In this case, time and odometer in<strong>for</strong>mation may be required. Antenna mounting conditions<br />
shall be specified by the supplier.<br />
The test shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with the Reference Loop substituted by the metallic profile defined by “Metallic<br />
masses in the track” according to sub-clause 5.2.2.2.3 on page 116. The Antenna Unit shall first be positioned<br />
directly above the metallic profile ([X = 0, Y = 0]) at the minimum height specified by the supplier. No other<br />
debris or metallic objects shall be present during this test.<br />
In case the alarm is not triggered, then the distance ‘d’ (according to sub-clause 5.2.2.2.3 on page 116) shall be<br />
gradually increased in steps of 20 mm until an alarm is achieved. A maximum of three 20 mm steps shall be<br />
taken during this process.. In case the alarm is triggered the same procedure shall be per<strong>for</strong>med but <strong>for</strong> decreasing<br />
‘d’ distances in the same manner.<br />
5.2.11.2 Acceptance Criteria, Balise Detectability Supervision<br />
The requirement is that no alarm is triggered at Antenna Unit heights higher than specified by the supplier.
Page 152 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.12 Handling of various Telegrams<br />
5.2.12.1 General Description<br />
The purpose of this test is to systematically evaluate the BTM function capability with respect to handling of<br />
various types of telegrams (including telegram switching).<br />
The input signal to the Reference Loop generating the Up-link signal shall be in accordance with results from<br />
sub-clause 5.2.4 on page 122. The time scale shall be selected in order to comply with the maximum specified<br />
velocity <strong>for</strong> the lateral deviation (Y position) to be tested (except <strong>for</strong> during tests of telegram switching at very<br />
low speed). The odometer input signal shall be selected accordingly. The BTM function shall be set in normal<br />
operational mode.<br />
Only a limited amount of combinations of lateral deviation and vertical height will be considered (see sub-clause<br />
C7.2 on page 208). The BTM function output signal shall be observed via Interface V 1 and evaluated.<br />
The criteria <strong>for</strong> the Antenna Unit - BTM function being able to correctly handle a certain sequence are defined<br />
in paragraph 5 of sub-clause 5.2.5.1 on page 128.<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Conditions shall be in accordance with sub-clause C7.1 on page 207.<br />
Telegrams shall be selected among those defined by clause A2 of Annex A on page 157. Telegram switching<br />
shall be tested both at high speed, and very low speed conditions (contact time more than 100 ms).<br />
5.2.12.2 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure, Handling of various Telegrams<br />
<strong>Test</strong> set-up in accordance with sub-clause 5.2.1.2 on page 112 applies.<br />
Suitable test patterns <strong>for</strong> the arbitrary generator shall be developed that per<strong>for</strong>m transmission of the various<br />
telegram types defined by clause A2 of Annex A on page 157. One single telegram type shall be evaluated at a<br />
time. <strong>Test</strong> of telegram switching shall be per<strong>for</strong>med during simulation of maximum speed as well as during very<br />
low speed conditions.<br />
Apart from these modifications of the FSK signal and the selection of geometrical test points and test conditions,<br />
the test procedure is identical to the procedure defined in sub-clause 5.2.5.2 on page 129 (Transmission <strong>Test</strong>s).<br />
Geometrical test points and test conditions are defined by sub-clause C7.1 on page 207 and C7.2 on page 208.<br />
5.2.12.3 Acceptance Criteria, Handling of various Telegrams<br />
See sub-clause 5.2.5.3 on page 131.
Page 153 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.13 Handling of Balise Sequences<br />
5.2.13.1 General Description<br />
The purpose of this test is to verify that the BTM function correctly reports a sequence of Balises within a Balise<br />
group. The BTM function shall be set in normal operational mode.<br />
The input signal to the Reference Loop generating the Up-link signal shall be in accordance with results from<br />
sub-clause 5.2.4 on page 122, but consist of a sequence of eight consecutive Balises positioned at the minimum<br />
specified distance between each other. The time scale shall be selected in order to comply with the maximum<br />
specified velocity <strong>for</strong> the lateral deviation (Y position) to be tested. The time and odometer input signal shall be<br />
selected accordingly. Different telegrams and different lengths of telegrams shall be mixed within the sequence<br />
of eight Balises. Telegrams shall be selected among those defined by clause A2 of Annex A on page 157.<br />
Only a limited amount of combinations of lateral deviation and vertical height will be considered. The BTM<br />
function output signal shall be observed via Interface V 1 and evaluated.<br />
The criteria <strong>for</strong> the Antenna Unit - BTM function being able to correctly handle a certain sequence are defined<br />
in paragraph 5 of sub-clause 5.2.5.1 on page 128. See also paragraph 6 of sub-clause 5.2.5.1 on page 128<br />
Geometrical test points and <strong>Test</strong> Conditions are defined by sub clauses C7.1 on page 207 and C7.2 on page 208.<br />
5.2.13.2 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure, Handling of Balise Sequences<br />
<strong>Test</strong> set-up in accordance with sub-clause 5.2.1.2 on page 112 applies.<br />
Suitable test patterns <strong>for</strong> the arbitrary generator shall be developed that simulates a sequence of eight Balises<br />
carrying a mix of different telegrams. The following order of telegrams applies:<br />
• Balise 1 - Telegram type 8.<br />
• Balise 2 - Telegram type 1.<br />
• Balise 3 - Telegram type 9.<br />
• Balise 4 - Telegram type 2.<br />
• Balise 5 - Telegram type 10.<br />
• Balise 6 - Telegram type 3.<br />
• Balise 7 - Telegram type 11.<br />
• Balise 8 - Telegram type 4.<br />
Apart from these modifications of the FSK signal and the selection of geometrical test points and test conditions,<br />
the test procedure is identical to the procedure defined in sub-clause 5.2.5.2 on page 129 (Transmission <strong>Test</strong>s).<br />
The additional modulation simulating the Balise passage includes eight consecutive patterns as defined in subclause<br />
5.2.4 on page 122. The distance between the centres of consecutive Balises shall be set according to:<br />
• 2.3 m when simulating a speed of 180 km/h<br />
• 3.0 m when simulating a speed of 300 km/h<br />
• 5.0 m when simulating a speed of 500 km/h<br />
Geometrical test points and <strong>Test</strong> Conditions are defined by sub clauses C7.1 on page 207 and C7.2 on page 208.<br />
5.2.13.3 Acceptance Criteria, Handling of Balise Sequences<br />
See sub-clause 5.2.5.3 on page 131. Additionally, the simulated order of Balises must not be mixed.
Page 154 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.14 Fundamental concepts of Basic Receiver<br />
5.2.14.1 General Description<br />
The purpose of this test is to check the fundamental concepts of the Basic Receiver defined in sub-clause 4.3.4<br />
of Part 1 of this Norm.<br />
For the purpose of the tests, the specific set of test telegrams defined in clause A3 on page 161 shall be used. It<br />
should be observed that a complete test of all the requirements of the Basic Receiver is more extensive, and that<br />
this procedure focuses on the most important and fundamental requirements defined sub-clause 4.3.4 of Part 1 of<br />
this Norm.<br />
The test telegrams can not prove the safety of the receiver, but they do detect violation of the most obvious and<br />
critical properties (such as inversion of telegram, as well as the proper handling of synchronisation bits, check<br />
bits and extra bits).<br />
The test telegrams of clause A3 on page 161 are 1023 or 341 bits long. All test telegrams may be transmitted<br />
cyclically without interruptions between the last and the first bits of the telegram.<br />
Two of the test telegrams are valid inverted telegrams. The Basic Receiver shall reject the other six test telegrams.<br />
In fact (apart from the extra-bits test, where the exact number of required extra bits is slightly arbitrary),<br />
any safe receiver shall reject the defined test telegrams.<br />
The input signal to the Reference Loop generating the Up-link signal shall be in accordance with results from<br />
sub-clause 5.2.4on page 122. The time scale shall be selected in order to comply with the maximum specified<br />
velocity <strong>for</strong> the lateral deviation (Y position) to be tested. The odometer input signal shall be selected accordingly.<br />
The BTM function shall be set in normal operational mode.<br />
Only a limited amount of geometrical test points shall be considered (see sub-clause C7.2 on page 208). The<br />
BTM function response shall be observed via Interface V 1 and evaluated.<br />
5.2.14.2 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure, Fundamental concepts of Basic Receiver<br />
<strong>Test</strong> set-up in accordance with sub-clause 5.2.1.2 on page 112 applies.<br />
Suitable test patterns <strong>for</strong> the arbitrary generator shall be developed that per<strong>for</strong>m transmission of the various<br />
telegram types defined by clause A3 on page 161. One single telegram shall be evaluated at a time.<br />
Apart from these modifications of the FSK signal and the selection of geometrical test points and test conditions,<br />
the test procedure is identical to the procedure defined in sub-clause 5.2.5.2 on page 129 (Transmission <strong>Test</strong>s).<br />
Geometrical test points and test conditions are defined by sub-clauses C7.1 on page 207 and C7.2 on page 208.
Page 155 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
5.2.14.3 Acceptance Criteria, Fundamental concepts of Basic Receiver<br />
The telegrams in accordance with clause A3 on page 161 shall be handled as follows:<br />
• The telegram defined as identity S1 shall be either reported as a correctly decoded telegram, or be rejected.<br />
• The telegram defined as identity S2 shall be either reported as a correctly decoded telegram, or be rejected.<br />
• The telegram defined as identity S3 shall be rejected.<br />
• The telegram defined as identity S4 shall be rejected.<br />
• The telegram defined as identity S5 shall be rejected.<br />
• The telegram defined as identity S6 shall be rejected.<br />
• The telegram defined as identity S7 shall be rejected.<br />
• The telegram defined as identity S8 shall be rejected.<br />
5.3 Requirements <strong>for</strong> <strong>Test</strong> Tools<br />
See Annex B on page 163, Annex D on page 210, and Annex H on page 299.
Page 156 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Annex A (Normative), Reference <strong>Test</strong> Telegrams<br />
A1 General<br />
The telegrams entered into the Balise via its Interface ‘C1’, stored within the Balise (Default Telegram), or<br />
entered into the reference loop shall in general contain meaningful user data, consistent with the real, or partly<br />
simulated, movement of the antenna. They shall normally contain variables and data compliant with the<br />
ERTMS/ETCS language and must be encoded according to the coding requirements defined in Part 1 of this<br />
Norm. The exception from these rules is that during testing of the fundamental concepts of the Basic Receiver,<br />
the specific telegrams of clause A3 on page 161 shall be used, which do not fulfil these criteria<br />
Both lengths of telegrams (341 bits and 1023 bits) are used.<br />
Regarding the test telegrams considered in clause A2 on page 157, a complete list of application related data is<br />
given in Table 22. An explanation of their different typologies is given in Table 24. The finally encoded data<br />
corresponding to each telegram is given in Table 25, while the final set of “User Data” is given in Table 23.<br />
Hexadecimal notation is used <strong>for</strong> describing both final test telegrams and User Data.<br />
Table 26 gives the characteristics of each test telegram used <strong>for</strong> testing the Basic Receiver properties. Table 27<br />
gives the final telegram bits in the same way as in Table 25 <strong>for</strong> normal test telegrams.<br />
For each telegram of Table 25 and Table 27, the corresponding bit sequence can be obtained from the hexadecimal<br />
representation by replacing each hexadecimal digit with its four-bit binary digit notation (MSB on the<br />
leftmost position). For the short telegrams, the last 3 bits of the corresponding hexadecimal notation of Table 25<br />
and Table 27 shall be ignored. For the long telegrams, the last bit of the corresponding hexadecimal notation of<br />
Table 25 and Table 27 shall be ignored. The telegram transmission starts from the first leftmost bit of the string<br />
so obtained, and continues from left to right. According to sub-clause 4.3.1.2 of Part 1 of this Norm, the first<br />
transmitted bit is the MSB of the telegram (bit 340 or bit 1022), while the last transmitted bit is the LSB (bit 0).<br />
The checksum, included in Table 25 and Table 27 related to each telegram, is used <strong>for</strong> protecting the telegram<br />
notation with respect to possible corruption originating from text editing tools. The checksum is built-up by<br />
grouping the consecutive hexadecimal digits of each string in a string of hexadecimal two-digit numbers (where<br />
the leftmost digit is the most significant one), and by summing up all the two-digit numbers so obtained.
Page 157 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
A2 <strong>Test</strong> Telegrams<br />
Tel. ID Size Type Balise description<br />
M_BALISE M_PIG M_DUP M_MCOUNT M_PACKET L_PACKET NID_TRAIN L_XTEXT X_TEXT<br />
8 bits 4 bits 2 bits 8 bits 8 bits 8 bits 20 bits 8 bits variable<br />
1 Short 2 1000 0000b 0001b 00b 0d 71d (fixed) xxxxxxx 1d xxxxxxx xxxxxxx<br />
2 Short 2 1000 0000b 0010b 00b 0d 71d (fixed) xxxxxxx 2d xxxxxxx xxxxxxx<br />
3 Short 3 1000 0000b 0001b 00b 0d 71d (fixed) xxxxxxx 3d xxxxxxx xxxxxxx<br />
4 Short 3 1000 0000b 0010b 00b 0d 71d (fixed) xxxxxxx 4d xxxxxxx xxxxxxx<br />
5 Short 4 1000 0000b 0000b 00b 0d 71d (fixed) xxxxxxx 5d xxxxxxx xxxxxxx<br />
6 Short 4 1000 0000b 0000b 00b 0d 71d (fixed) xxxxxxx 6d xxxxxxx xxxxxxx<br />
7 Short 5 1000 0000b 0000b 00b 0d 71d (fixed) xxxxxxx 7d xxxxxxx xxxxxxx<br />
8 Short 5 1000 0000b 0000b 00b 0d 71d (fixed) xxxxxxx 8d xxxxxxx xxxxxxx<br />
9 Long 9 1000 0000b 0001b 00b 0d 71d (fixed) xxxxxxx 9d xxxxxxx xxxxxxx<br />
10 Long 9 1000 0000b 0010b 00b 0d 71d (fixed) xxxxxxx 10d xxxxxxx xxxxxxx<br />
11 Long 10 1000 0000b 0001b 00b 0d 71d (fixed) xxxxxxx 11d xxxxxxx xxxxxxx<br />
12 Long 10 1000 0000b 0010b 00b 0d 71d (fixed) xxxxxxx 12d xxxxxxx xxxxxxx<br />
13 Long 11 1000 0000b 0000b 00b 0d 71d (fixed) xxxxxxx 13d xxxxxxx xxxxxxx<br />
14 Long 11 1000 0000b 0000b 00b 0d 71d (fixed) xxxxxxx 14d xxxxxxx xxxxxxx<br />
15 Long 12 1000 0000b 0000b 00b 0d 71d (fixed) xxxxxxx 15d xxxxxxx xxxxxxx<br />
16 Long 12 1000 0000b 0000b 00b 0d 71d (fixed) xxxxxxx 16d xxxxxxx xxxxxxx<br />
17 Short 1 1000 0000b 0000b 00b 0d 71d (fixed) xxxxxxx 17d xxxxxxx xxxxxxx<br />
18 Long 8 1000 0000b 0000b 00b 0d 71d (fixed) xxxxxxx 18d xxxxxxx xxxxxxx<br />
Table 22: User data of the <strong>Test</strong> Telegrams (be<strong>for</strong>e coding)
Page 158 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Tel. ID<br />
Hexadecimal contents<br />
1 80 10 01 1C D8 00 00 42 91 D3 08 59 4D 17 9D D5 88 1A 3F FF FF FF FF FF FF FF C0<br />
2 80 20 01 1C 78 00 00 81 1C 15 0D 4D 7F FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF C0<br />
3 80 10 01 1D 38 00 00 C4 17 8C 99 5E 09 CD 8D DB D4 17 1C 54 DC 92 9C D1 3F FF C0<br />
4 80 20 01 1C A8 00 01 01 CA D8 52 0B 49 0D CA FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF C0<br />
5 80 00 01 1D 38 00 01 44 0B CC 8B CE 10 94 52 D5 48 0B D1 57 4E 9B DA C9 BF FF C0<br />
6 80 00 01 1D 28 00 01 83 DB 9B 88 9E 9D DB 52 98 D8 59 90 0F 51 95 11 FF FF FF C0<br />
7 80 00 01 1C 68 00 01 C0 D6 10 54 7F FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF C0<br />
8 80 00 01 1D 18 00 02 03 9A CF D6 D0 1A 8F DE 95 95 9A 90 CB 1E 1C 7F FF FF FF C0<br />
9 80 10 01 1C B8 00 02 42 19 89 DC CF D8 11 1D 19 3F FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF<br />
FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF<br />
FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FC<br />
10 80 20 01 1E 04 00 02 87 58 8B D6 48 9C D8 99 51 D4 55 8D 49 5A 18 53 D4 D3 4B D7 5A 9C 1C 0D 8C D4 54 91 CD<br />
DA 3F FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF<br />
FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FC<br />
11 80 10 01 1E AC 00 02 D1 C9 53 D5 9C D2 1C 4B 14 0C 0B C9 58 9C CD 8D 8D 14 4E 1A 1E 4D D0 DA 89 1D DA<br />
0E 99 59 1E 8F 89 5A 0D 56 4C 91 91 8B 96 11 08 0A 49 55 4E 49 DD D7 1D 95 4A CF 1A D8 95 92 9C 4B 19 DD 54<br />
8B DC 4D 0B 11 53 D5 17 0F 7F FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FC<br />
12 80 20 01 1D B8 00 03 06 08 16 54 0B 8B 98 1C 52 CD 55 DD CC D3 D5 D8 1E 12 11 5B 4C 89 1D 8F D5 3F FF FF<br />
FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF<br />
FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FC<br />
13 80 00 01 1E D4 00 03 54 5B 16 5B D2 8B CE 4C 5D 57 4D C8 51 58 09 0D 4D 09 9A 57 9E 59 4A 5E 1C 1E 9B 17 4E<br />
92 D3 57 55 9C 14 9B 4D 57 CC DD 49 CA CF 17 5D D2 55 8C 54 54 4A 97 10 94 1C CC 4D 5D 09 9D 17 5B 5A 13<br />
9C 54 1D D6 DA 09 D9 49 8F 14 57 D5 9D CA 19 15 D8 D5 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FC<br />
14 80 00 01 1D C8 00 03 86 5B 51 12 C8 8C 57 5D 9C 5E 12 16 0D 4B 55 8F 5B CE 0F 49 C8 9A 09 CA 10 D7 3F FF FF<br />
FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF<br />
FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FC<br />
15 80 00 01 1E BC 00 03 D2 DA 0A DE 0B D9 88 0B 52 98 48 9B 10 8D DA 52 D7 9C 91 8C 88 94 1A 53 88 0B 53 0A<br />
93 DD 14 0A CE 92 19 51 99 0C CB CE 8A D2 57 0F 57 4A 88 54 90 8A 09 1B 17 DA 49 53 D7 DD 55 CF 0E D2 10<br />
91 5E 1A 52 5D 12 15 58 93 1B 8C 15 CC 3F FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FC<br />
16 80 00 01 1E 88 00 04 0F 96 1B 0D 15 1D 5A 97 10 CF 8F CD 92 0A 54 12 1A 4E CE CE 89 15 19 4E 8A 8F D8 D9 D6<br />
0B 96 11 0C 50 12 1B 8E 5E 0C DD C8 DB 13 1B 54 9E 8C 14 CE CF 97 59 9B 13 0B 1A 19 5E 4A 1B 9D 15 4E 3F<br />
FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FC<br />
17 80 00 01 1C D8 00 04 42 95 8F 5C 99 95 11 D8 8B 89 4D BF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF C0<br />
18 80 00 01 1E 58 00 04 8C 90 5C 1A D2 13 4A D4 8C D4 0B 4F 18 DB D6 17 15 1C 8B 90 5A 91 0F 4D CE 1E 9D 12<br />
9A 4B 14 1C 88 C9 0C 1D 0C 0B 93 4F 8C 95 9B 53 8D 49 DD 5D 0C 1D 54 7F FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF<br />
FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FC<br />
Table 23: User data of the <strong>Test</strong> Telegrams (after encoding) in Hex <strong>for</strong>mat
Page 159 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Type<br />
Description<br />
1 Short Telegram with 50 % (± 2 %) of logical "1" and with an evenly distributed run length<br />
2 Short Telegram with 10 % to 40 % of logical "0" and with an evenly distributed run length<br />
3 Short Telegram with 60 % to 90 % of logical "0" and with an evenly distributed run length<br />
4 Short Telegram with 45 % to 55 % of logical "0" and with high frequency of transitions<br />
5 Short Telegram with 45 % to 55 % of logical "0" and with low frequency of transitions<br />
8 Long Telegram with 50 % (± 2 %) of logical "1" and with an evenly distributed run length<br />
9 Long Telegram with 10 % to 45 % of logical "0" and with an evenly distributed run length<br />
10 Long Telegram with 55 % to 90 % of logical "0" and with an evenly distributed run length<br />
11 Long Telegram with 45 % to 55 % of logical "0" and with high frequency of transitions<br />
12 Long Telegram with 45 % to 55 % of logical "0" and with low frequency of transitions<br />
Table 24: Typologies of the <strong>Test</strong> Telegrams<br />
ID Size Type 30 Check<br />
sum<br />
Hexadecimal value<br />
1 Short 2 18D0 75 BB BF 37 1E 7F 76 B9 25 D3 FD ED 46 BA D7 69 85 7B ED 37 F6 A5 F2 F4<br />
3E FD 8C DF 5A 40 DA 7F BB 71 22 C5 BF 22 CD A3 9B 07 78<br />
2 Short 2 1C2D DD 77 C1 57 C7 E7 F9 79 54 67 A8 B9 BE B1 FE 5F A8 37 D3 B7 A8 CD 2C EF<br />
F7 58 DC E6 D6 40 7C E7 B3 25 F8 B3 7B EF 6B 7C DA A8 E0<br />
3 Short 3 1058 0E 50 48 31 9E 85 A1 6B E4 A5 A4 88 A8 06 0A 70 18 A5 73 F0 2B 10 31 08 40<br />
72 30 C0 90 40 72 80 89 22 04 E5 0E 6C 51 57 03 44 80<br />
4 Short 3 0DFB 3B 47 71 49 18 C9 02 16 15 84 09 0C 49 31 C0 C9 0A E7 17 0C A0 44 53 12 66<br />
08 05 83 94 40 48 77 B1 80 8A 58 F2 37 02 07 49 71 30<br />
5 Short 4 12A1 E8 AB AD 7C AA CD 75 66 23 49 71 75 3E 09 19 2E DA 8A 4D 5F 6C 4F 5B A5<br />
51 09 56 CE 5E 40 4D 77 AA 52 B5 98 32 6A 47 51 76 ED 28<br />
6 Short 4 12D9 6D F2 AC D9 28 F5 5B 6F 4B 7F 15 22 AB 70 2C A9 6A D2 1B 52 72 0F 5A 16<br />
99 2A 9D 99 26 40 5B 89 AD 2C A9 53 D3 4B B9 D5 5A 2D 38<br />
7 Short 5 1633 B2 9B EB C1 99 DF 37 80 69 28 BC 6E 06 60 2C 3F 94 37 3F 87 87 79 F7 BB E2<br />
08 1C FE DE 40 71 16 11 C0 2F D2 7C F9 E3 C9 EB 4D 68<br />
8 Short 5 1710 DE FE F3 81 A7 7C 9F BE 05 E4 03 CD B3 BD 62 C7 03 DB B1 8E E3 10 F0 87<br />
67 57 78 20 E0 40 43 8C 10 1E 01 E4 BC 91 60 D3 82 1D F0<br />
9 Long 9 4483 98 3B E6 32 7B 23 75 ED 96 19 46 9A 3D 0E F2 A6 3D 2D 7C 37 88 CD F7 77<br />
C3 DD EB D1 82 65 A7 F5 22 D4 BB D4 75 3A DC 4D 34 2F 5E 63 91 C7 B3 92<br />
96 BA 7D 7B EC DB 14 2F 24 5C 87 F8 EA 7D 3E 0D 2B F6 F2 F1 AB 99 5B 7E<br />
DF 45 3C 41 3C AE 77 C2 3B E9 7C 47 5A 7D F2 C5 5D 49 AA F3 30 67 74 FC<br />
4A C7 59 F2 D9 ED 5E F9 13 E2 E6 17 85 92 CD 7B 0F D9 10 1B 51 67 29 2F B5<br />
DF 89 B8 AC DE DA 7C<br />
10 Long 9 473B BE 09 4B AD 38 41 5F E7 42 D4 6B A0 79 61 36 1B 64 27 9C DF 2B ED 3D E5<br />
BC D9 E2 F6 DF 78 CC 52 E2 B3 16 BC B9 5D CD 8E 73 D7 5B F6 08 B9 0E F5<br />
A3 E5 03 5B 3D D7 B3 15 E4 0C FB 45 55 D6 8F 75 5F 6D 75 1A 4F 7F 69 7C F6<br />
7B 6D 8A 19 3F 4C 07 B7 A9 6E FC 73 F4 C6 EF D4 D8 70 DB F7 EF 79 90 C9<br />
A1 25 8E 67 6E CA D0 E1 C2 69 CE D9 25 AE 0F F1 21 90 11 CD A9 7D BF A5<br />
60 F6 F5 F4 BD 0B D8<br />
30 See definitions in Table 24.
Page 160 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
ID Size Type 30 Check<br />
Hexadecimal value<br />
sum<br />
11 Long 10 36DA 70 88 05 88 70 13 48 B4 43 C0 F0 09 0A 45 D4 CC 19 02 54 BB 81 23 A8 91 CC<br />
2A 41 35 03 DA F1 65 AE 5A 01 4B A8 7A C1 1C 56 1C 1D 6A 22 EE 6A 5D 15<br />
37 E8 44 3D 52 62 1D 41 9E 2B 05 9F 0B 99 F2 8D 95 91 82 97 D6 10 1C 45 39<br />
83 CD 5A 1D 46 F1 51 C0 96 8A 51 32 93 C1 74 81 8E A9 6B 12 03 9B 4E C8 4C<br />
F4 B8 6B 3F 68 40 F0 12 C3 2E 86 BE 38 B0 FB 90 3F 09 55 15 86 41 20 6C FA<br />
E7 29 86 20<br />
12 Long 10 3834 70 DA 90 A3 DA 44 AF 4B CA E8 D0 F7 08 69 A2 85 7B DC A4 12 C4 88 22 BA<br />
F8 29 C1 0C 60 90 F2 1E 23 09 58 21 A0 B8 91 DE 1A E0 21 D2 63 84 51 FD 47<br />
24 A3 84 74 DC A5 ED 37 08 9C 77 12 03 EE 4D B2 97 30 85 40 C4 85 02 E6 E3<br />
48 B5 88 2B 46 31 34 F8 87 09 3F 0C 11 50 CB 28 70 9F 70 11 1E 95 42 10 E4 3A<br />
3C 74 83 51 13 A7 2C 12 D7 69 62 95 08 47 10 10 9F 4F 1F 52 30 D0 3D 0E 4A<br />
10 74 A6<br />
13 Long 11 42E1 A1 E4 F4 35 1A 93 5B 15 44 A2 AB 75 B5 B7 56 B6 80 D5 66 DF 95 EA D3 30<br />
3E 47 CD 15 BB BC 73 85 AC B6 7A 6F 31 DD 37 E8 9B DB 61 EA 24 BD 92 A2<br />
2A 53 A4 69 6A 2A 64 3C CA F6 F6 5D 86 2A 61 7D A7 45 71 38 52 5D 3F C4<br />
83 5A A4 AE 12 AD 15 6E 71 A6 6B 53 96 35 DA 01 F6 6A 93 B4 BC 14 E1 6C<br />
DA 7A DA 24 64 D1 0C 6B D2 8D E5 96 EA 18 F4 C4 F8 97 90 12 1C 94 E9 16<br />
F9 8A A3 BC 29 56 63 CC<br />
14 Long 11 4054 12 19 4F 8C C4 FB B5 42 95 6A 9A D2 1A 5B 51 61 C6 A8 E3 FB 88 BA E2 AE<br />
42 73 0C D9 9B E6 09 7D 92 B5 AE 45 A2 AD C6 61 5F 9C D5 5B CA 49 B2 0C<br />
5A B5 22 A5 09 78 71 ED 4E C0 B7 B1 4B 24 FF 0F 40 B1 52 21 D6 0D 96 F2 B7<br />
56 D4 BE 53 ED 29 B1 5D 2F 41 19 34 09 2B 76 AD 51 BC 97 0B A2 75 9A 60<br />
33 A9 89 CE A5 F6 8E 29 7B 53 CF DA 6D D2 DE B6 A8 90 14 2B 2B C8 0A 55<br />
45 E7 40 AA 95 99 5E<br />
15 Long 12 45ED 38 21 B1 BB BE C3 B8 73 C3 86 FC 0D F6 26 B4 C9 54 C7 C7 72 CD F1 C9 26<br />
F4 B8 F8 2A 07 AE 36 E8 78 F0 46 AF 46 88 60 B0 95 58 82 4C 43 9B E3 A1 E4<br />
3C 2F 2F 2D F3 E5 E5 F5 06 D9 A4 25 F2 FB BD 14 F2 1C 27 C7 CA F9 77 D4<br />
84 09 71 0F BD C6 38 A7 86 F3 1F E2 12 D3 0F C1 01 DC 31 98 B3 83 76 38 7E<br />
8E 0C C4 0C B9 BE F8 2D C8 C4 84 07 CB 13 40 C9 90 12 DB 38 88 B9 10 F0 94<br />
F5 8C F6 F9 26<br />
16 Long 12 4234 0E 6C 0C BD B1 B6 03 86 CD E6 59 DF 21 45 7F 50 10 FC CF 02 63 4F CE 32<br />
F2 08 51 64 03 76 97 6E DA 80 CF 9C A2 F4 E3 DB CB E7 57 A8 7E 46 F8 47 4B<br />
C0 E3 EF 06 D0 76 7E 81 F9 B8 78 83 03 9B FC EA F5 F7 18 77 74 46 FC 5C 59<br />
52 CF 2E E3 78 D3 12 A6 DC 22 1B 3A CE 57 C4 F0 49 6E 1D C3 82 1A 60 B8<br />
EF 7C F3 07 42 7B 7F 30 FF 7D EE 11 F4 BC B9 C4 10 34 22 13 09 A3 AD F6<br />
A6 4C 2B 9E 3C 36<br />
17 Short 1 15B6 BF 65 63 7E 56 AA 5C 65 D8 E6 51 F2 DB 38 ED CD 15 82 44 20 29 10 DE 35<br />
0D 55 A9 8C 38 40 63 61 DA C6 AE C6 68 A6 93 27 BB F1 80<br />
18 Long 8 3DFB 24 68 68 D4 F1 DE B6 13 DD 24 C3 4D AF A1 DF 6A AA CD 41 1C 0A 51 20 71<br />
5E E7 78 D3 28 7F 91 1D C2 2A 82 57 31 45 37 60 FF 42 E9 B6 A8 36 94 B6 71<br />
EF 19 6A 52 17 B6 C4 F6 AF CB C8 9B CE 1A 7D 63 32 83 0E AA CB 7A 81 9A<br />
9D 0F 8D 0F 8E 81 35 76 F6 CF 70 59 A5 D0 CD 09 34 76 46 15 23 04 C4 37 8F<br />
BC 7D 0C C9 BB 13 05 25 C0 72 C1 82 71 E5 CD C7 10 16 79 42 EB 9A 14 3B<br />
89 92 A1 62 DD 9E<br />
19 Short 3 Telegram 4 with 2 bit errors in random position<br />
20 Short 3 Telegram 4 with a 20 bit burst error in random position<br />
21 Short 3 Telegram 4 with 2 pairs of consecutive bit slip/insertions in random position<br />
22 Long 10 Telegram 11 with 2 bit errors in random position<br />
23 Long 10 Telegram 11 with a 50 bit burst error in random position<br />
24 Long 10 Telegram 11 with 2 pairs of consecutive bit slip/insertions in random position<br />
Table 25: Encoded <strong>Test</strong> Telegrams
Page 161 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
A3 Specific <strong>Test</strong> Telegrams<br />
ID<br />
S1<br />
S2<br />
S3<br />
S4<br />
S5<br />
S6<br />
S7<br />
S8<br />
Valid inverted short-<strong>for</strong>mat telegram.<br />
Valid inverted long-<strong>for</strong>mat telegram.<br />
Description<br />
Long-<strong>for</strong>mat telegram with erroneous control bit b107, which shall be rejected by the Basic Receiver.<br />
Short-<strong>for</strong>mat telegram with erroneous bit b108, which shall be rejected by the Basic Receiver.<br />
Inverted long-<strong>for</strong>mat telegram with erroneous control bits, which shall be rejected by the Basic<br />
Receiver.<br />
Repeated short-<strong>for</strong>mat telegram with invalid synch bits, which shall be rejected by the Basic Receiver.<br />
Long-<strong>for</strong>mat telegram with invalid word in check bits, which shall be rejected by the Basic Receiver.<br />
<strong>Test</strong> pattern <strong>for</strong> short-<strong>for</strong>mat extra bits checks, which shall be rejected by the Basic Receiver. The<br />
test pattern consists of a repeated short-<strong>for</strong>mat telegram, where bits 461..1022, but not bit 922, are<br />
inverted. Both bits 0..460 and bits 461..921 constitute error-free telegrams with 120 extra bits.<br />
Table 26: Characteristics of the Specific <strong>Test</strong> Telegrams<br />
ID Check sum Hexadecimal value<br />
S1 1458 21 FD 51 D8 40 6E F3 AC 30 C1 53 B3 8E 91 13 34 E1 12 2C 03 DE 30 9E 10 2F 7F<br />
4B CC FD BF A3 65 64 AB 8E 0F D3 5A 56 33 44 B2 A8<br />
S2 4068 71 C6 74 E5 B5 0C 1C 6C 2A 91 6D 53 74 49 2A AD DB F6 95 18 39 23 30 5D AE<br />
06 26 C3 2F 80 54 D3 EE 88 7E EC AD E6 23 17 DC FD DF 71 09 36 C5 1E F4 4E<br />
7D 23 DF 24 5A D5 50 47 67 CA FC D7 13 F7 AB 6B 1C 58 B8 23 AF B9 D6 84 27<br />
8A E4 9B 86 63 4B 84 83 5F 64 AE 6C 12 48 71 5C D7 41 80 90 6B 82 23 1C 28 FA<br />
9B D7 E8 C0 94 51 D5 F1 30 E0 70 61 5E 6F E6 28 1D F7 CB 73 41 FE 29 61 BB E0<br />
B2<br />
S3 42F1 82 6F BD 12 DA BD 29 45 90 C5 A5 CB 2E 29 80 A7 E1 19 A6 6E 9F 8C D2 D4 0E<br />
E8 51 6E 32 65 AB 5D CE F7 AA 3C F5 29 67 36 C4 1F EC 55 C2 6D 50 C2 76 D3<br />
DF 5A 16 D3 50 B2 76 4D C9 F9 47 60 3F A3 BE AC 8D 8B EF 51 A5 5B D7 CB B3<br />
95 4F 2A 11 EC 26 C1 B8 E0 E4 87 1E 6C CE 79 60 E9 CF 95 D5 1C 38 F0 4A D7 51<br />
16 73 7B 46 5F 1B 67 79 5A F0 4E 5B 65 84 1C DC 1A 4E 59 D9 5F 7E 52 F7 E7 B2<br />
8A<br />
S4 11BB F7 9A E5 2B 6A 68 04 42 2E DC 45 55 93 F8 72 11 7B 36 3B D7 71 97 0B 33 8D 4C<br />
D1 1C 24 C0 44 71 04 31 44 D5 68 55 44 36 5B 60 A8<br />
S5 411A 71 C6 74 E5 B5 0C 1C 6C 2A 91 6D 53 74 49 2A AD DB F6 95 18 39 23 30 5D AE<br />
06 26 C3 2F 80 54 D3 EE 88 7E EC AD E6 23 17 DC FD DF 71 09 36 C5 1E F4 4E<br />
7D 23 DF 24 5A D5 50 47 67 CA FC D7 13 F7 AB 6B 1C 58 B8 23 AF B9 D6 84 27<br />
8A E4 9B 86 63 4B 84 83 5F 64 AE 6C 12 48 71 5C D7 41 80 90 6B 82 23 1C 28 FA<br />
9B D7 E8 C0 94 51 D5 F1 30 E0 70 61 5E 5F E6 1B E5 B6 35 43 ED 86 E9 97 84 F5<br />
B8
Page 162 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
ID Check sum Hexadecimal value<br />
S6 3CA8 F7 9A E5 2B 6A 68 04 42 2E DC 45 55 93 F8 72 11 7B 36 3B D7 71 97 0B 33 8D 4C<br />
D1 1C 24 40 45 F5 B3 14 A4 27 0E 8A FF 6D A4 35 EF BC D7 29 5B 53 40 22 11 76<br />
E2 2A AC 9F C3 90 8B D9 B1 DE BB 8C B8 59 9C 6A 66 88 E1 22 02 2F AD 98 A5<br />
21 38 74 57 FB 6D 21 AF 7D E6 B9 4A DA 9A 01 10 8B B7 11 55 64 FE 1C 84 5E<br />
CD 8E F5 DC 65 C2 CC E3 53 34 47 09 10 11 7D 6C C5 29 09 C3 A2 BF DB 69 0D<br />
7A<br />
S7 3FD9 8E 39 8B 1A 4A F3 E3 93 D5 6E 92 AC 8B B6 D5 52 24 09 6A E7 C6 DC CF A2 51<br />
F9 D9 3C D0 7F AB 2C 11 77 81 13 52 19 DC E8 23 02 20 8E F6 C9 3A E1 0B B1 82<br />
DC 20 DB A5 2A AF B8 98 35 03 28 EC 08 54 94 E3 A7 47 DC 50 46 29 7B D8 75<br />
1B 64 79 9C B4 7B 7C A0 9B 51 93 ED B7 8E A3 28 BE 7F 6F 94 7D DC E3 D7 05<br />
64 28 17 3F 6B AE 2A 0E CF 1F 8F 9E A1 90 19 C7 4F 6E 71 5B 8A BA E3 37 B7 12<br />
AE<br />
S8 425C DE 02 AE 27 BF 91 0C 53 CF 3E AC 4C 71 6E EC CB 1E ED D3 FC 21 CF 61 EF D0<br />
80 B4 33 02 40 5C 9A 9B 54 71 F0 2C A5 A9 CC BB 4D 56 F0 15 71 3D FC 88 62 9E<br />
79 F5 62 63 8B 77 61 A7 08 91 60 1E F1 84 F0 81 7B FA 5E 67 ED FD 1B 2B 25 5C<br />
70 7E 9A D2 B1 9A 25 95 48 7F 54 76 10 1B BC EB 0C 30 54 EC E3 A4 44 CD 38 44<br />
8B 00 F7 8C 27 84 0B DF D2 F3 3F 6F C8 D9 59 2A E3 83 F4 D6 95 8C D1 2C AA<br />
Table 27: Encoded Specific <strong>Test</strong> Telegrams
Page 163 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Annex B (Normative), Air-gap Reference Equipment<br />
B1 General<br />
This Annex establishes the unified test method, and the specification of the specific reference equipment <strong>for</strong> the<br />
tests that have to be done on products in order to establish Interoperability. It also specifies the use of the test<br />
equipment as the common reference <strong>for</strong> <strong>Eurobalise</strong>. This Annex is needed <strong>for</strong> Interoperability between different<br />
products that are part of the <strong>Eurobalise</strong> Sub-system.<br />
The specification of the Reference Loops that correspond to the definitions in Part 1 of this Norm is one of the<br />
main purposes of this Annex. The Reference Loops are used <strong>for</strong> absolute level measurements.<br />
For the test, it is also necessary to define a <strong>Test</strong> Antenna that is activating the Balise during the tests. It shall<br />
also be able to receive the signal from the Balise. This <strong>Test</strong> Antenna is used <strong>for</strong> relative measurements, and not<br />
used <strong>for</strong> absolute level measurements. All absolute measurements are related to the Reference Loops.<br />
In addition to this, a special Activation Antenna is required <strong>for</strong> activating the Balise during cross-talk and Uplink<br />
tests. This device shall not have a loop <strong>for</strong> receiving Up-link signals.<br />
In general, this document defines the minimum requirements of the Reference Equipment. Better accuracy is<br />
always advantageous, and will reduce necessary margins in the measurement process during Product Qualification.<br />
B2 Reference Loops<br />
B2.1 Size of Reference Loops<br />
The Standard Size and Reduced Size Balises have the below stated Reference Areas <strong>for</strong> the measurement of<br />
field strength from the Antenna Unit to the Balise. These Reference Areas are also valid <strong>for</strong> the measurement of<br />
output field strength from the Balise.<br />
Standard Size (width × length)<br />
Reduced Size (width × length)<br />
Reduced Size, Transversal (width × length)<br />
= 358 mm × 488 mm<br />
= 200 mm × 390 mm<br />
= 390 mm × 200 mm<br />
The Reference Loops shall be made in such a way that the output signal is proportional to the magnetic flux<br />
through this Reference Area <strong>for</strong> the respective loop size of the Reference Area.<br />
The loop shall be protected with an insulating plate. The total thickness of this plate shall be 25 mm to 28 mm,<br />
and the physical interface with the environment in the other directions (X and Y) shall be 19 mm to 25 mm<br />
outside the Reference Area (i.e., the length and the width of the Reference Loop shall be 38 mm to 50 mm larger<br />
than the Reference Area). This plate defines the position and the distance from the Reference Area to where the<br />
physical interface with the environment is located. The exact location of this physical interface has to be defined<br />
during testing of the debris influence on the flux through the Reference Area and the influence on the<br />
output field from the encirculating current.<br />
The Reference Loop shall have visible markings that define the reference position <strong>for</strong> the Reference Loop. It<br />
shall be located in the centre of the plate ±10 mm. This reference position shall be used to indicate the electrical<br />
centre of the Reference Loop (i.e., centre of the Reference Area). A positive direction in each of the X, Y, and Z<br />
directions relative to the Reference Loop shall be defined.
Page 164 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B2.2 Field Requirements<br />
B2.2.1<br />
Magnetic Field (H-field)<br />
The Reference Loop shall be tested relative to another Reference Loop of the same kind. <strong>Test</strong>s shall be per<strong>for</strong>med<br />
in free air with the two Reference Loops in horizontal orientation, and top side facing each other (i.e.,<br />
the positive z-direction of each Reference Loop is facing each other). The longest sides shall be parallel, and the<br />
X-direction is defined as the direction of the longest side of the loop. The Y-axis is in the horizontal plane and<br />
in right angle to the X-axis. The mutual inductance shall be measured between the two Reference Loops, both<br />
with the x-axis in parallel and in anti parallel, and the result shall be compared with the theoretically calculated<br />
values. The measurements shall be made <strong>for</strong> the vertical distances (Z), and the lateral (Y) and longitudinal (X)<br />
horizontal displacements between the Reference Loops according to the table below.<br />
In the table below, the mutual inductance M is defined in a slightly different <strong>for</strong>m. The attenuation (A) is given<br />
in dB according to following <strong>for</strong>mula:<br />
⎛ ω⋅ M ⎞<br />
10<br />
A = −20<br />
⋅ log⎜<br />
⎟ or inverted: M = 25 Ω ⋅<br />
⎝ 25 Ω ⎠<br />
ω<br />
The measured mutual impedance expressed in <strong>for</strong>m of A (see above) between two Reference Loops, shall not<br />
deviate more than ± 0.5 dB from the following theoretical calculated values. For the Reduced Size Transversal<br />
Reference Loops, the values <strong>for</strong> the Reduced Size Reference Loops are valid. The calculation is made according<br />
to the definition of the Reference Areas. Furthermore, the matching transfer ratio B (see sub-clause B2.3 on<br />
page 166) and the electrical centre shall be evaluated <strong>for</strong> each individual Reference Loop.<br />
Table 28 below shows the calculated values <strong>for</strong> the mutual impedance between two identical Reference Loops.<br />
-A/20<br />
Height,<br />
z<br />
[mm]<br />
Lateral,<br />
y<br />
[mm]<br />
Longitudinal,<br />
x<br />
[mm]<br />
Standard size,<br />
Tele-powering<br />
[-dB]<br />
Standard size,<br />
Up-link<br />
[-dB]<br />
Reduced size,<br />
Tele-powering<br />
[-dB]<br />
Reduced size,<br />
Up-link<br />
[-dB]<br />
220 0 0 1.43 17.55 10.85 26.97<br />
220 0 150 3.33 19.45 13.37 29.49<br />
220 0 -150 3.33 19.45 13.37 29.49<br />
220 0 250 6.48 22.60 17.86 33.98<br />
220 0 -250 6.48 22.60 17.86 33.98<br />
220 100 100 3.62 19.74 14.52 30.64<br />
220 100 -100 3.62 19.74 14.52 30.64<br />
220 -100 100 3.62 19.74 14.52 30.64<br />
220 -100 -100 3.62 19.74 14.52 30.64<br />
220 150 200 7.74 23.86 21.22 37.34<br />
220 150 -200 7.74 23.86 21.22 37.34<br />
220 -150 200 7.74 23.86 21.22 37.34<br />
220 -150 -200 7.74 23.86 21.22 37.34<br />
220 150 0 4.35 20.47 16.58 32.70<br />
220 -150 0 4.35 20.47 16.58 32.70<br />
220 200 0 6.63 22.75 21.28 37.40<br />
220 -200 0 6.63 22.75 21.28 37.40<br />
340 0 0 7.48 23.60 18.39 34.51<br />
340 0 275 12.22 28.34 24.71 40.83<br />
340 0 -275 12.22 28.34 24.71 40.83<br />
340 225 225 15.35 31.47 29.90 46.02<br />
340 225 -225 15.35 31.47 29.90 46.02
Page 165 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Height,<br />
z<br />
[mm]<br />
Lateral,<br />
y<br />
[mm]<br />
Longitudinal,<br />
x<br />
[mm]<br />
Standard size,<br />
Tele-powering<br />
[-dB]<br />
Standard size,<br />
Up-link<br />
[-dB]<br />
Reduced size,<br />
Tele-powering<br />
[-dB]<br />
Reduced size,<br />
Up-link<br />
[-dB]<br />
340 -225 225 15.35 31.47 29.90 46.02<br />
340 -225 -225 15.35 31.47 29.90 46.02<br />
340 275 0 14.48 30.60 29.23 45.35<br />
340 -275 0 14.48 30.60 29.23 45.35<br />
460 0 0 12.63 28.75 24.46 40.58<br />
460 0 250 15.70 31.82 28.34 44.46<br />
460 0 -250 15.70 31.82 28.34 44.46<br />
460 0 350 18.72 34.84 32.11 48.23<br />
460 0 -350 18.72 34.84 32.11 48.23<br />
460 200 200 17.22 33.34 30.56 46.68<br />
460 200 -200 17.22 33.34 30.56 46.68<br />
460 -200 200 17.22 33.34 30.56 46.68<br />
460 -200 -200 17.22 33.34 30.56 46.68<br />
460 300 300 23.04 39.16 37.92 54.04<br />
460 300 -300 23.04 39.16 37.92 54.04<br />
460 -300 300 23.04 39.16 37.92 54.04<br />
460 -300 -300 23.04 39.16 37.92 54.04<br />
460 250 0 16.75 32.87 30.13 46.25<br />
460 -250 0 16.75 32.87 30.13 46.25<br />
460 350 0 20.73 36.85 35.26 51.38<br />
460 -350 0 20.73 36.85 35.26 51.38<br />
Table 28: Mutual Impedance between Reference Loops<br />
B2.2.2<br />
Electric Field (E-field)<br />
The E-field rejection of the Reference Loop shall be more than 25 dB.<br />
25 dB E-field rejection corresponds to 0.5 dB accuracy <strong>for</strong> a TEM wave (25 dB E-field rejection means that the<br />
Reference Loop will give 25 dB lower signal than from an H-field when E/H=377 Ω).<br />
This requirement means that an electrical field of 315 V/m shall generate less signal on the Reference Loop<br />
output than a magnetic flux of 10.3 nVs through the Standard Size Reference Loop. In the same way, it means<br />
that 445 V/m shall generate less signal on the Reference Loop output than a magnetic flux of 6.5 nVs through<br />
the Reduced Size and Transversal Reference Loop.<br />
In the real test situation, the E-field is much less than 377 Ω × H. If the accuracy of the Reference Loop shall<br />
comply with the required accuracy, then this must be valid with good margins in the near field zone.<br />
The Reference Loop shall be tested in a pure E-field environment (i.e., negligible magnetic field).
Page 166 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B2.3 Compensation <strong>for</strong> the Impedance of the Reference Loop<br />
The nominal impedance <strong>for</strong> the equipment connected to the Reference Loop shall be 50 Ω (i.e., the source impedance<br />
of the generator and the load impedance of the power meter shall be 50 Ω when connected to the Reference<br />
Loops).<br />
The Reference Loop should be connected to a 50 Ω load when it is used <strong>for</strong> Tele-powering flux measurements.<br />
Then the voltage V m shall be measured over this 50 Ω resistance. If the Reference Loop has a serial impedance<br />
(the shunting impedance must be negligible) of Z d <strong>for</strong> the actual frequency, and if the Reference Loop has the<br />
matching transfer ratio of B, then the flux through the reference area can be calculated according to:<br />
Vm<br />
⋅ B ⎞<br />
⎜<br />
⎛ Z<br />
Φ = + d<br />
d 1 ⎟<br />
ω ⎝ 50 ⎠<br />
If the Reference Loop is fed with a voltage source with the voltage 2×V S and with the serial resistance of 50 Ω,<br />
then the current encircling the reference area can be calculated according to:<br />
I<br />
U<br />
2 ⋅ VS<br />
⋅ B<br />
=<br />
⎜<br />
⎛ Z<br />
50 ⋅ 1 + u<br />
⎝ 50<br />
⎞<br />
⎟<br />
⎠<br />
where Z u is the serial impedance of the Reference Loop.<br />
The impedance of the Reference Loop may be influenced by the test object, or by the environment. In this case<br />
the measurement result must be compensated (if the compensation is not negligible) with respect to the actual<br />
impedance during the test (i.e., the impedance must then be measured). This has to be per<strong>for</strong>med <strong>for</strong> each individual<br />
set up with the Reference Loop.<br />
Another possibility is to directly measure the actual current into the Reference Loop, utilising a special Balun<br />
with current sense capabilities, and to measure the output voltage from the Reference Loop with a “high impedance”<br />
device (i.e., the impedance of the Reference Loop shall be negligible compared to the measuring device).<br />
However, please observe that the B-factor must be considered also in this case (e.g., in order to obtain a current<br />
of I ux encircling the reference area, the current measured by such a current sense balun shall be I ux /B)<br />
If the shunting impedance is not negligible, the designer of the Reference Loop must give and verify the <strong>for</strong>mula<br />
<strong>for</strong> how the influence of this shall be compensated.<br />
The B-factor is a matching transfer ratio that provides a compensation of a specific design solution so that the<br />
characteristics of Table 28 on page 165 are obtained. In general, this considers compensation if the electrical<br />
size of a specific solution is not exactly equal to the defined reference area (but still is within the acceptable<br />
tolerances <strong>for</strong> the Reference Loop), and compensation <strong>for</strong> other imperfections (such as stray capacitance etc.).
Page 167 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B2.4 Frequency Characteristics of the Reference Field<br />
Up-link:<br />
When the Reference Loop is supplied with a sinusoidal signal from a constant and perfect<br />
50 Ω source, then the amplitude of the Magnetic Field (H-field) shall be within +0 dB and -<br />
0.5 dB over the frequency band 3.89 MHz to 4.59 MHz. The requirement is applicable under<br />
free air conditions anywhere within the Contact Zone defined by Part 1 of this Norm.<br />
When the Reference Loop is supplied with a sinusoidal signal from a constant and perfect<br />
50 Ω source, then the amplitude of the Magnetic Field (H-field) shall be within +0 dB and -<br />
1.0 dB over the frequency band 3.5 MHz to 5.0 MHz. The requirement is applicable under<br />
free air conditions anywhere within the Contact Zone defined by Part 1 of this Norm.<br />
When the Reference Loop is supplied with a sinusoidal signal from a constant and perfect<br />
50 Ω source, then the variation of the group delay shall not be more than 35 ns over the frequency<br />
band 3.5 MHz to 5.0 MHz. The requirement is applicable under free air conditions<br />
anywhere within the Contact Zone defined by Part 1 of this Norm.<br />
Tele-powering: When a homogeneous and constant Magnetic Flux (φ) is passing through the Reference Loop,<br />
then the output voltage shall be as follows <strong>for</strong> the frequency range 27.095 MHz –10 kHz to<br />
27.095 MHz +10 kHz:<br />
• With a perfect 50 Ω load<br />
• For resistive loads within<br />
the Load Range 20 Ω to 200 Ω<br />
Output Voltage variation max. ±0.2 dB<br />
Output Voltage variation max. ±0.5 dB<br />
• For complex loads within<br />
the Load Range 20 Ω to 200 Ω Output Voltage variation max. ±1.0 dB 31<br />
The requirement is applicable under free air conditions anywhere within the Contact Zone<br />
defined by Part 1 of this Norm.<br />
B2.5 Influence of Debris<br />
B2.5.1<br />
The flux through the Reference Area<br />
When per<strong>for</strong>ming tests during influence of the various conditions defined by sub-clause B5 on page 185, the<br />
impedance of the Reference Loop will be changed. After having per<strong>for</strong>med compensation <strong>for</strong> this change of<br />
impedance, the accuracy of the measured induced voltage shall not be degraded more than 1 dB.<br />
B2.5.2<br />
The field from the Balise<br />
When per<strong>for</strong>ming tests during influence of the various conditions defined by sub-clause B5 on page 185, the<br />
impedance of the Reference Loop will be changed. After having per<strong>for</strong>med compensation <strong>for</strong> this change of<br />
impedance, the accuracy of the measured current shall not be degraded more than 1 dB.<br />
31<br />
It shall be possible to achieve better accuracy if special precautions are taken (e.g., by measuring the frequency<br />
and taking the actual Reference Loop impedance into account).
Page 168 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B2.6 Con<strong>for</strong>mity <strong>Test</strong>ing of Reference Loops<br />
B2.6.1<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Procedure<br />
The theoretically calculated mutual inductance between two identical Reference Loops <strong>for</strong> a number of positions<br />
is defined in sub-clause B2.2.1 on page 164, and shall be compared to measured values in order to determine the<br />
measurement accuracy of the Reference Loops. The following <strong>Test</strong> Procedure should be used:<br />
For each position described in B2.2.1 on page 164, the following procedure should be per<strong>for</strong>med <strong>for</strong> the Reference<br />
Loops.<br />
1. Measure the Up-link and Tele-powering attenuation between the two Reference Loops of the same<br />
kind.<br />
2. Measure the impedance of the Reference Loop that transmits the 27.095 MHz and 4.23 MHz signals<br />
respectively.<br />
3. Calculate the compensation factor <strong>for</strong> the impedance in the Reference Loop, and add this compensation<br />
factor to the measured attenuation. The compensation shall be based on the actual impedance<br />
of the transmitting Reference Loop (<strong>for</strong> each individual test point), and free air impedance of<br />
the receiving Reference Loop.<br />
4. Compare this compensated result with the theoretically calculated value.<br />
5. Rotate one of the Reference Loops 180° in the X-Y plane, and repeat steps 1 through 4. This step<br />
evaluates potential systematic asymmetry of the Reference Loops.
Page 169 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B2.6.2<br />
Measurement set-up<br />
A proposed test set-up is shown in Figure 51 below. 32<br />
suitable test equipment.<br />
Clause F1 of Annex F on page 287 gives an example of<br />
Reference Loop<br />
Port 1<br />
Point 1<br />
Point 2<br />
Reference Loop<br />
Ferrite Block<br />
Balun (Pos. 20)<br />
50 Ω, RG 214<br />
coaxial cable<br />
Port 2<br />
Network Analyser<br />
with S-parameter test<br />
set (Pos. 22)<br />
Figure 51: Measurement set-up<br />
32<br />
The Reference Loops shall be placed on a non-disturbing positioning system, and connected to the network analyser with<br />
a 50 Ω coaxial cable with ferrite devices. The cables shall be separated through placing the Reference Loops so that the<br />
cables will not be parallel to each other. The positioning system should have an accuracy in displacement in the X, Y,<br />
and Z directions of about 1 mm. It is essential that the positioning system does not disturb the field distribution. Ferrite<br />
devices shall be used in order to reduce the RF field effect on the measurements. The Baluns shall be placed at the end<br />
of the cables, i.e., at the Reference Loop and the network analyser connector. The ferrite blocks shall be placed regularly<br />
along the cables evenly spaced at approximately every 70 cm. The core material in the Ferrite Blocks shall be “Amidon<br />
43” or equivalent. It is essential that the cables are of double screened type (e.g., RG 214 coaxial cable).
Page 170 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B2.6.3<br />
Instrument set-up and Calibration<br />
A network analyser with S-parameter test set should be used to measure the attenuation between the Reference<br />
Loops, and also the impedance of one Reference Loop <strong>for</strong> the different positions.<br />
The following instrument set-ups and calibrations should be used:<br />
• Transmission measurements:<br />
Centre frequency:<br />
Up-link - 4.23 MHz, Tele-powering - 27.095 MHz<br />
Frequency span:<br />
2 MHz<br />
Trace 1 input: S21 (Transmission, Port 1 - Port 2)<br />
Display function:<br />
Log/Mag<br />
Marker:<br />
Up-link - 4.23 MHz, Tele-powering - 27.095 MHz<br />
The measurement shall be normalised with points 1 and 2 in Figure 51 connected together.<br />
• Impedance measurements:<br />
Centre frequency:<br />
Up-link - 4.23 MHz, Tele-powering - 27.095 MHz<br />
Frequency span:<br />
2 MHz<br />
Trace 2 input: S11 (Reflection, Port 1)<br />
Display function:<br />
Smith Chart<br />
Marker:<br />
Up-link - 4.23 MHz, Tele-powering - 27.095 MHz<br />
A “full one port calibration” shall be per<strong>for</strong>med at port 1 at the end of the cable, i.e., at point 1 defined in Figure<br />
51.<br />
B2.6.4<br />
Compensation <strong>for</strong> the impedance of the Reference Loop<br />
The measured values of the Reference Loop impedance and the attenuation between the two Reference Loops<br />
shall be recorded. The compensation factor <strong>for</strong> the mutual inductance between the Reference Loops is calculated<br />
from the measured impedance according to the following equation:<br />
⎡<br />
20 * LOG⎢<br />
⎢<br />
⎣<br />
(50 + re)<br />
50<br />
2<br />
+ im<br />
2<br />
⎤<br />
⎥<br />
⎥<br />
⎦<br />
where re = Real part of the Reference Loop impedance.<br />
im = Imaginary part of the Reference Loop impedance.<br />
The transmitting Reference Loop shall be compensated according to the equation above, considering the actual<br />
impedance of each individual test point. The receiving Reference Loop shall be compensated based on the<br />
impedance during free air conditions.<br />
The compensated value of the attenuation between the two Reference Loops is calculated by adding the compensation<br />
factor to the measured attenuation between the two Reference Loops. Compare the measured value<br />
with the theoretically calculated.<br />
The model of Figure 52 below is assumed as the basis <strong>for</strong> the process:
Page 171 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
2U<br />
50<br />
V 1<br />
50 V 2<br />
jωM<br />
Z 1<br />
Z 2<br />
Z in<br />
I 1 I 2<br />
Figure 52: Equivalent circuit diagram<br />
Measure Z 2 during free air conditions (i.e., long distance between the two Reference Loops), and Z in <strong>for</strong> each<br />
individual test position. The following equations apply:<br />
1) V1 = I1Z1<br />
− jωMI<br />
2<br />
2) V2 = −I<br />
2Z2<br />
+ jωMI1<br />
3)<br />
P<br />
f =<br />
2<br />
U<br />
50<br />
V2<br />
4) I 2 = ⇒ V2<br />
= 50I2<br />
50<br />
V1<br />
5) Zin<br />
= ⇒ {} 1 ⇒ Z<br />
I<br />
1<br />
in<br />
I2<br />
= Z1<br />
− jωM<br />
I<br />
1<br />
6) { 4 and 2}<br />
⇒ I<br />
2<br />
jωMI<br />
=<br />
50 + Z<br />
1<br />
2<br />
ω M<br />
+<br />
50 + Z<br />
7) { 5 and 6} Z Z<br />
N.B.Dependent on M !<br />
⇒<br />
2U<br />
8) I1<br />
= ⇒ {} 3 ⇒ I<br />
50 + Z<br />
in<br />
in<br />
V<br />
=<br />
1<br />
+ I<br />
1<br />
2<br />
2<br />
2<br />
2 50Pf<br />
=<br />
50 + Z<br />
2 2 2<br />
9) {} 2 ⇒ jωM<br />
= ⇒ { 4 and 8} ⇒ jωM<br />
=<br />
( 50 + Z )<br />
⎛ Z2<br />
⎞ Zin<br />
⎞<br />
50V2<br />
⎜1<br />
+ ⎟ ⎜1<br />
+ ⎟<br />
50 50<br />
10) {} 9 ⇒ jωM<br />
=<br />
⎝ ⎠⎛<br />
⎝ ⎠<br />
2 50P<br />
I<br />
1<br />
50V<br />
⎛ ⎞<br />
11) ⎜ ⎟ ⎜ + ⎟<br />
⎠⎛ ⎞<br />
ω =<br />
2k<br />
Z Z<br />
= +<br />
2 in<br />
Q j M wherek 1 1<br />
2 50P<br />
⎝ 50 ⎝ 50 ⎠<br />
f<br />
Z<br />
f<br />
in<br />
⎛ Z 2 ⎞<br />
V2<br />
⎜1<br />
+ ⎟<br />
⎝ 50 ⎠<br />
2<br />
50P<br />
f<br />
in
Page 172 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B2.6.5<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Environment<br />
The test should be per<strong>for</strong>med in a laboratory environment where no other H-field exists except the ones that are<br />
to be measured. The Reference Loops shall be separated more than 0.5 m from any metallic object during the<br />
measurements.<br />
B2.6.6<br />
Calculation of correction factors<br />
Three Reference Loops of the same kind should be crosswise tested against each other in accordance with the<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Procedure described in sub-clause B2.6.1 on page 168. Thereafter, the differences between the measured<br />
and the theoretical values should be allocated to each individual Reference Loop. This shall be per<strong>for</strong>med applying<br />
the following equation system to the measured values:<br />
ε<br />
ε<br />
ε<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
a<br />
=<br />
a<br />
=<br />
a<br />
=<br />
12<br />
12<br />
13<br />
+ a<br />
+ a<br />
+ a<br />
13<br />
23<br />
23<br />
− a<br />
2<br />
− a<br />
2<br />
− a<br />
2<br />
23<br />
13<br />
12<br />
− a<br />
− a<br />
− a<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
where: a 12 = measured attenuation between Reference Loop 1 and Reference Loop 2<br />
a 13 = measured attenuation between Reference Loop 1 and Reference Loop 3<br />
a 23 = measured attenuation between Reference Loop 2 and Reference Loop 3<br />
a 0 = theoretical attenuation between two Reference Loops<br />
ε 1 = error of Reference Loop 1<br />
ε 2 = error of Reference Loop 2<br />
ε 3 = error of Reference Loop 3<br />
An alternative is to make a measurement between two Reference Loops only, where one of these is an already<br />
characterised device, and the other is the device to be calibrated.<br />
Finally an attempt should be per<strong>for</strong>med in order to minimise the mean value and the standard deviation of the<br />
calculated errors <strong>for</strong> each individual Reference Loop.<br />
The method <strong>for</strong> doing this is to simulate a (small) movement of the electrical centre point (in X, Y, and Z) of the<br />
Reference Loop, add the corresponding compensation factors to the measured values, and to evaluate the compensated<br />
results. The compensation factors shall be calculated from the derivatives of the field distribution (in<br />
dB/cm) <strong>for</strong> each individual test point. The matching transfer ratio (‘B’) of the Reference Loop (that is nominally<br />
1.00) may also be changed. The method <strong>for</strong> this is introducing a compensation factor that is added to the measured<br />
values, and that minimises the overall mean value of the errors. In this case, the compensation factor is<br />
identical <strong>for</strong> all geometrical positions (<strong>for</strong> one specific Reference Loop), and constitutes a change of the ‘B’<br />
factor defined in sub-clause B2.3 on page 166. The derivatives of the field distribution are found in the Table 29<br />
below. In order to evaluate potential systematic asymmetry, one of the Reference Loops should be rotated 180°<br />
in the X-Y plane and the results should be taken into consideration.<br />
Applications suitable <strong>for</strong> per<strong>for</strong>ming the process are embedded in sub-clause B2.7 on page 175.
Page 173 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Height<br />
z<br />
[mm]<br />
Lateral<br />
y<br />
[mm]<br />
Longitudinal<br />
x<br />
[mm]<br />
Standard<br />
Size,<br />
x-derivative<br />
[dB/cm]<br />
Standard<br />
Size,<br />
y-derivative<br />
[dB/cm]<br />
Standard<br />
Size,<br />
z-derivative<br />
[dB/cm]<br />
Reduced<br />
Size,<br />
x-derivative<br />
[dB/cm]<br />
Reduced<br />
Size,<br />
y-derivative<br />
[dB/cm]<br />
Reduced<br />
Size,<br />
z-derivative<br />
[dB/cm]<br />
220 0 0 0 0 0.55 0 0 0.70<br />
220 0 150 0.25 0 0.49 0.34 0 0.63<br />
220 0 -150 0.25 0 0.49 0.34 0 0.63<br />
220 0 250 0.40 0 0.44 0.60 0 0.53<br />
220 0 -250 0.40 0 0.44 0.60 0 0.53<br />
220 100 100 0.18 0.27 0.47 0.24 0.54 0.54<br />
220 100 -100 0.18 0.27 0.47 0.24 0.54 0.54<br />
220 -100 100 0.18 0.27 0.47 0.24 0.54 0.54<br />
220 -100 -100 0.18 0.27 0.47 0.24 0.54 0.54<br />
220 150 200 0.33 0.42 0.36 0.48 0.86 0.26<br />
220 150 -200 0.33 0.42 0.36 0.48 0.86 0.26<br />
220 -150 200 0.33 0.42 0.36 0.48 0.86 0.26<br />
220 -150 -200 0.33 0.42 0.36 0.48 0.86 0.26<br />
220 150 0 0 0.40 0.45 0 0.81 0.41<br />
220 -150 0 0 0.40 0.45 0 0.81 0.41<br />
220 200 0 0 0.56 0.38 0 1.14 0.12<br />
220 -200 0 0 0.56 0.38 0 1.14 0.12<br />
340 0 0 0 0 0.46 0 0 0.55<br />
340 0 275 0.36 0 0.36 0.48 0 0.40<br />
340 0 -275 0.36 0 0.36 0.48 0 0.40<br />
340 225 225 0.30 0.44 0.25 0.39 0.66 0.13<br />
340 225 -225 0.30 0.44 0.25 0.39 0.66 0.13<br />
340 -225 225 0.30 0.44 0.25 0.39 0.66 0.13<br />
340 -225 -225 0.30 0.44 0.25 0.39 0.66 0.13<br />
340 275 0 0 0.54 0.25 0 0.79 0.09<br />
340 -275 0 0 0.54 0.25 0 0.79 0.09<br />
460 0 0 0 0 0.40 0 0 0.45<br />
460 0 250 0.25 0 0.34 0.32 0 0.36<br />
460 0 -250 0.25 0 0.34 0.32 0 0.36<br />
460 0 350 0.36 0 0.27 0.45 0 0.27<br />
460 0 -350 0.36 0 0.27 0.45 0 0.27<br />
460 200 200 0.20 0.27 0.29 0.25 0.36 0.28<br />
460 200 -200 0.20 0.27 0.29 0.25 0.36 0.28<br />
460 -200 200 0.20 0.27 0.29 0.25 0.36 0.28<br />
460 -200 -200 0.20 0.27 0.29 0.25 0.36 0.28<br />
460 300 300 0.31 0.41 0.14 0.38 0.52 0.04<br />
460 300 -300 0.31 0.41 0.14 0.38 0.52 0.04<br />
460 -300 300 0.31 0.41 0.14 0.38 0.52 0.04<br />
460 -300 -300 0.31 0.41 0.14 0.38 0.52 0.04<br />
460 250 0 0 0.34 0.29 0 0.44 0.27<br />
460 -250 0 0 0.34 0.29 0 0.44 0.27<br />
460 350 0 0 0.47 0.18 0 0.59 0.09<br />
460 -350 0 0 0.47 0.18 0 0.59 0.09<br />
Table 29: Derivatives of the field distribution
Page 174 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B2.6.7<br />
Labelling and Marking of Reference Loops<br />
In the event that the electrical centre point evaluated as defined by B2.6.6 is different from the geometrical centre<br />
point, then the electrical centre point shall be clearly marked on the Reference Loop. The geometrical centre<br />
point is already marked during the manufacturing process of the Reference Loop.<br />
Each individual Reference Loop should be equipped with a label where the following in<strong>for</strong>mation is defined:<br />
• Type of Reference Loop (Standard or Reduced Size)<br />
• Part Number<br />
• Serial Number<br />
• Revision Status<br />
• Impedance in free air<br />
• B-factor
Page 175 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B2.7 Application <strong>for</strong> Reference Loop Calibration<br />
B2.7.1<br />
General<br />
The herein included embedded objects constitute Excel applications that are to be used <strong>for</strong> the purpose of evaluating<br />
the calibration of the Reference Loops, and determining the applicable B-factors and (if necessary) positioning<br />
correction parameters.<br />
Instructions <strong>for</strong> use of the applications are included in the Excel charts.<br />
For in<strong>for</strong>mative purposes, the hereafter following sub-clause B2.7.2 and sub-clause B2.7.3 include bitmap pictures<br />
of the charts of the embedded objects.<br />
Please observe that that both the bitmaps and the embedded objects are filled with fictitious data (included in the<br />
yellow cells).<br />
Example_Std_Ref_Lo<br />
op_Calibration.xls<br />
Example_Red_Ref_L<br />
oop_Calibration.xls
Page 176 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B2.7.2<br />
Standard Size Reference Loop
Page 177 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007
Page 178 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007
Page 179 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007
Page 180 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B2.7.3<br />
Reduced Size Reference Loop
Page 181 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007
Page 182 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007
Page 183 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007
Page 184 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B3 <strong>Test</strong> Antenna<br />
B3.1 Size of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna<br />
The size of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna loop shall be 200 mm × 200 mm <strong>for</strong> the Tele-powering signal. The size of the Uplink<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Antenna loop shall be 40 mm × 40 mm. The two loops shall be in the same plane and have the same<br />
geometrical centre to within ±2 mm. A shielding plate shall be positioned parallel to the loops, and at 400 mm<br />
distance from the centre of the loops. The size of the shielding plate shall be 600 mm × 600 mm.<br />
The Tele-powering loop of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna shall be tuned with serial capacitors to the actual frequency band.<br />
The loop impedance <strong>for</strong> the Up-link loop shall be high enough at the Tele-powering frequency band so that the<br />
field generated from this not intended current is negligible. Vice versa, the loop impedance <strong>for</strong> the Telepowering<br />
loop shall be high enough at the Up-link frequency band so that the induced voltage from the Telepowering<br />
loop is negligible.<br />
The cable to the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna shall be of double shielded low loss type (e.g., RG 214). Furthermore, the cable<br />
shall be “de-bugged” using suitable ferrite clamps evenly spaced along the cable at distances of less than 70 cm.<br />
B3.2 Field Requirements<br />
The E-field rejection shall be more than 25 dB.<br />
The <strong>Test</strong> Antenna shall be able to generate an H-field that gives more than 20 nVs in the Standard Size Reference<br />
Loop, and more than 7.5 nVs in the Reduced Size Reference Loop. This shall be valid when the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna<br />
is positioned anywhere within the Contact Zone defined by Part 1 of this Norm.<br />
B3.3 Impedance<br />
The nominal source impedance <strong>for</strong> the Tele-powering loop is 50 Ω. The input impedance of the Tele-powering<br />
loop is to be defined by the supplier.<br />
The nominal load impedance <strong>for</strong> the Up-link loop is 50 Ω. The source impedance of the Up-link loop is to be<br />
defined by the supplier.
Page 185 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B4 Activation Antenna<br />
B4.1 Size of the Activation Antenna<br />
The size of the Activation Antenna loop shall be 200 mm x 200 mm <strong>for</strong> the Tele-powering signal.<br />
The Activation Antenna shall be tuned with serial capacitors to the actual frequency band. The loop impedance<br />
shall be high enough at the Up-link frequency band so that the field generated from this not intended current is<br />
negligible compared to the current in the Balise under test.<br />
The cable to the Activation Antenna shall be of double shielded low loss type (e.g., RG 214). Furthermore, the<br />
cable shall be “de-bugged” using suitable ferrite clamps evenly spaced along the cable at distances of less than<br />
70 cm.<br />
B4.2 Field Requirements<br />
The E-field rejection shall be more than 25 dB.<br />
The Activation Antenna shall be able to generate an H-field that gives more than 150 nVs in the Standard Size<br />
Reference Loop, and more than 60 nVs in the Reduced Size Reference Loop. This shall be valid when the Activation<br />
Antenna is positioned 220 mm above the Reference Loop, and at the same time having a maximum longitudinal<br />
deviation of up to 250 mm relative to the Reference Loop. The Reference Area shall be parallel to the<br />
X-axis, and the lateral deviation shall be zero as defined by Part 1 of this Norm.<br />
B4.3 Impedance<br />
The nominal source impedance <strong>for</strong> the equipment to be connected to the Activation Antenna is 50 Ω. The input<br />
impedance of the loop is to be defined by the supplier.<br />
B5 Conditions to be tested<br />
B5.1 General<br />
In general, when stating that something is related to the Reference Loop in the following sub-clauses, it also<br />
applies to the Balise and vice versa (if a specific test includes a Balise rather than a Reference Loop).<br />
This sub-clause includes all different debris and metallic object cases defined by Part 1 of this Norm. However,<br />
in the specific tests defined by this part of the Norm, a relevant selection might apply (i.e., only a few cases are<br />
judged being relevant <strong>for</strong> test purposes).
Page 186 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B5.2 Debris<br />
B5.2.1<br />
General<br />
The design of the Debris Box, and the utilisation, is according to Figure 53 and Figure 54 below. The size of the<br />
Debris Box is 1220 mm × 950 mm (X-direction × Y-direction).<br />
B5.2.2<br />
Liquid Debris<br />
Plastic bag<br />
Defined depth of debris<br />
Cable<br />
Debris Box<br />
Balise<br />
Sand<br />
Figure 53: Application of liquid debris<br />
There are two shaded areas in Figure 53 above, one to the left of the Balise (rectangular shape) and one to the<br />
right of the Balise (triangular shape). These are areas with material constituting free air conditions (or simply<br />
air). The rectangular area to the left of the Balise is the volume where the balun is positioned during calibrations<br />
with the Reference Loops. To ensure that the situation is not changed when real Balises are tested, this volume<br />
should constitute “free air conditions” also during Balise testing. The triangular area to the right of the Balise<br />
represents the unavoidable gap occurring when applying the plastic bag over the Balise. In order to achieve<br />
reproducibility, the plastic bag shall meet the foundation (exemplified by sand in the figure) at 45° angle.<br />
Furthermore, in order to practically cope with irregular Balise surfaces, and to allow the use of a plastic bag with<br />
sufficient strength/thickness, it is allowed that the distance between the bottom of the debris layer and the lowest<br />
point of the top surface of the Balise (excluding fixation holes) is maximum 2 mm. It is also allowed that the<br />
plastic bag is not firmly attached to the edges of the debris box.
Page 187 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B5.2.3<br />
Non-liquid Debris<br />
Defined layer of debris<br />
Cable<br />
Debris Box<br />
Balise<br />
Sand<br />
Enlarged area<br />
a<br />
Balise<br />
c<br />
b<br />
Figure 54: Application of non-liquid debris<br />
The maximum distance between the bottom of the debris layer and the lowest point of the top surface of the<br />
Balise (excluding fixation holes) is the distance a in Figure 54. This distance shall be less than 2 mm <strong>for</strong> debris<br />
Class B, and less than 5 mm <strong>for</strong> debris Class A. Provided that this is fulfilled, the debris material may be housed<br />
in specific boxes of a material constituting free air conditions.<br />
The maximum gap between the Balise and debris layer beside the Balise is the distance b in Figure 54. This<br />
distance shall not exceed 2 mm. Provided that this is fulfilled, the debris material may be housed in specific<br />
boxes of a material constituting free air conditions.<br />
The distance between the bottom of the debris layer on top of the Balise and the bottom of the debris layer beside<br />
the Balise is the distance c in Figure 54. This distance shall be 70 mm <strong>for</strong> debris Class B and 110 mm <strong>for</strong><br />
debris Class A.”<br />
The debris layer on top of the Balise shall be larger than the Balise/Reference Loop top surface with a tolerance<br />
of less than 2 mm.<br />
The debris layer beside the Balise shall end less than 100 mm from the edge of the debris box.
Page 188 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B5.2.4<br />
Reference Loop and Balise<br />
B5.2.4.1<br />
Salt Water<br />
Salt water with 0.1 % NaCl concentration shall be used.<br />
Two test cases apply, 100 mm salt water depth above the top surface of the Reference Loop <strong>for</strong> debris Class A,<br />
and 10 mm <strong>for</strong> debris Class B. The volume underneath the Reference Loop shall be filled with a material constituting<br />
free air conditions.<br />
B5.2.4.2<br />
Clear Water<br />
Two test cases apply, 200 mm clear water depth above the top surface of the Reference Loop <strong>for</strong> debris Class A,<br />
and 100 mm <strong>for</strong> debris Class B. The volume underneath the Reference Loop shall be filled with a material<br />
constituting free air conditions.<br />
B5.2.4.3<br />
Iron Ore (Magnetite)<br />
Two test cases apply, a 20 mm thick layer of iron ore (Magnetite) on top of the Reference Loop <strong>for</strong> debris<br />
Class A, and 2 mm <strong>for</strong> debris Class B. The volume underneath the Reference Loop shall be filled with a material<br />
constituting free air conditions. The following details apply to this debris condition:<br />
Contents of Fe 3 O 4 : 92.5 % to 97.5 %<br />
Contents of Fe (enriched material): less than 71 %<br />
Moisture: less than 4 %<br />
Bulk Density: 3.2⋅10 3 kg/m 3<br />
B5.2.4.4<br />
Iron Ore (Hematite)<br />
A 20 mm thick layer of iron ore (Hematite) on top of the Reference Loop is applicable <strong>for</strong> both debris Class A<br />
and debris Class B. The volume underneath the Reference Loop shall be filled with a material constituting free<br />
air conditions. The following details apply to this debris condition:<br />
Contents of Fe 2 O 3 : 90 % to 95 %<br />
Contents of Fe 3 O 4 :<br />
negligible<br />
Contents of Fe (enriched material): less than 68 %<br />
Moisture: less than 4 %<br />
Bulk Density: 2.7⋅10 3 kg/m 3<br />
B5.2.4.5<br />
Fresh Snow<br />
Snow with a depth of 300 mm on top of the Reference Loop is applicable <strong>for</strong> both debris Class A and debris<br />
Class B. The temperature of the fresh snow shall be approximately 0 °C. Artificially created (using conventional<br />
methods) snow is acceptable. The volume underneath the Reference Loop shall be filled with a material<br />
constituting free air conditions.
Page 189 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B5.2.4.6<br />
Wet Snow<br />
Snow with a depth of 300 mm on top of the Reference Loop is applicable <strong>for</strong> both debris Class A and debris<br />
Class B. The temperature of the wet snow shall be approximately 0 °C, and the water contents shall be 20 % by<br />
volume. Artificially created (using conventional methods) snow is acceptable. When creating wet snow, fresh<br />
snow with a temperature of 0 °C shall be mixed with clear water also having a temperature of 0 °C (20 % by<br />
volume of water). The volume underneath the Reference Loop shall be filled with a material constituting free<br />
air conditions.<br />
B5.2.4.7<br />
Ice<br />
Ice with a depth of 100 mm on top of the Reference Loop is applicable <strong>for</strong> both debris Class A and debris<br />
Class B. The ice shall not include pores other than those normally present when freezing water (starting from a<br />
water temperature of 20 °C) and caused by the gas present in the water. The ice shall be made from clear water.<br />
The volume underneath the Reference Loop shall be filled with a material constituting free air conditions.<br />
B5.2.4.8<br />
Ballast<br />
Ballast with a depth of 100 mm on top of the Reference Loop is applicable <strong>for</strong> both debris Class A and debris<br />
Class B. The ballast shall be crushed stone free from iron that is normally present in Railway environment. The<br />
volume underneath the Reference Loop shall be filled with a material constituting free air conditions.<br />
B5.2.4.9<br />
Dry Sand<br />
Sand with a depth of 20 mm on top of the Reference Loop is applicable <strong>for</strong> both debris Class A and debris<br />
Class B. The sand shall be dry and free from iron. The volume underneath the Reference Loop shall be filled<br />
with a material constituting free air conditions.<br />
B5.2.4.10 Wet Sand<br />
Sand with a depth of 20 mm on top of the Reference Loop is applicable <strong>for</strong> both debris Class A and debris<br />
Class B. The sand shall be free from iron, and the water contents shall be 20 % by volume (clear water). The<br />
volume underneath the Reference Loop shall be filled with a material constituting free air conditions.<br />
B5.2.4.11 Mud without Salt Water<br />
A 50 mm thick layer of mud on top of the Reference Loop is applicable <strong>for</strong> both debris Class A and debris<br />
Class B. The mud shall be free from iron, the water contents shall be 20 % by volume (clear water), and the<br />
mud shall be of terra-cotta type. The volume underneath the Reference Loop shall be filled with a material<br />
constituting free air conditions.<br />
B5.2.4.12 Mud with Salt Water<br />
Two test cases apply, a 50 mm thick layer of salted mud on top of the Reference Loop <strong>for</strong> debris Class A, and<br />
10 mm <strong>for</strong> debris Class B. The mud shall be free from iron, the water contents shall be 20 % by volume, the salt<br />
concentration (NaCl) of the water shall be 0.5 % by weight, and the mud shall be of terra-cotta type. The volume<br />
underneath the Reference Loop shall be filled with a material constituting free air conditions.
Page 190 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B5.2.4.13 Iron Dust<br />
A 10 mm thick layer of iron dust on top of the Reference Loop is applicable <strong>for</strong> both debris Class A and debris<br />
Class B. The iron dust (or braking dust) is a non-conductive mixture of grease and iron oxide, which is normally<br />
encountered in Railway environment. The volume underneath the Reference Loop shall be filled with a<br />
material constituting free air conditions.<br />
B5.2.4.14 Coal Dust<br />
A 10 mm thick layer of coal dust on top of the Reference Loop is applicable <strong>for</strong> both debris Class A and debris<br />
Class B. The coal dust shall include approximately 8 % of sulphur, and be of the type normally present in the<br />
nature (used <strong>for</strong> heating in some regions). The volume underneath the Reference Loop shall be filled with a<br />
material constituting free air conditions.<br />
B5.2.4.15 Oil and Grease<br />
A 50 mm thick layer of grease or depth of oil on top of the Reference Loop is applicable <strong>for</strong> both debris Class A<br />
and debris Class B. The grease shall be of ordinary ball bearing grease type, and the oil shall be standard mineral<br />
oil used <strong>for</strong> lubrication of engines. The volume underneath the Reference Loop shall be filled with a material<br />
constituting free air conditions.<br />
B5.2.5<br />
Antenna<br />
B5.2.5.1<br />
Ice<br />
<strong>Test</strong>ing shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with a layer of ice applied at the bottom of the Antenna Unit having a thickness of<br />
minimum 10 mm and maximum down to top of the Balise. The ice shall not include pores other than those<br />
normally present when freezing water (starting from a water temperature of 20 °C) and caused by the gas present<br />
in the water. The ice shall be made from clear water. The actual thickness is to be defined by the supplier<br />
of the Antenna.<br />
B5.2.5.2<br />
Fresh Snow<br />
<strong>Test</strong>ing shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with a layer of fresh snow applied at the bottom of the Antenna Unit having a thickness<br />
of minimum 20 mm and maximum down to top of the Balise. The temperature of the fresh snow shall be<br />
approximately 0 °C. Artificially created (using conventional methods) snow is acceptable. The actual thickness<br />
is to be defined by the supplier of the Antenna.<br />
B5.2.5.3<br />
Wet Snow<br />
<strong>Test</strong>ing shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with a layer of wet snow applied at the bottom of the Antenna Unit having a thickness<br />
of minimum 10 mm and maximum down to top of the Balise. The temperature of the wet snow shall be<br />
approximately 0 °C, and the water contents shall be 20 % by volume. Artificially created (using conventional<br />
methods) snow is acceptable. When creating wet snow, fresh snow with a temperature of 0 °C shall be mixed<br />
with clear water also having a temperature of 0 °C (20 % by volume of water). The actual thickness is to be<br />
defined by the supplier of the Antenna.
Page 191 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B5.2.5.4<br />
Mud without Salt Water<br />
<strong>Test</strong>ing shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with a layer of mud applied at the bottom of the Antenna Unit having a thickness of<br />
minimum 10 mm and maximum of 50 mm. The mud shall be free from iron, the water contents shall be 20 % by<br />
volume (clear water), and the mud shall be of terra-cotta type. The actual thickness is to be defined by the supplier<br />
of the Antenna.<br />
B5.2.5.5<br />
Mud with Salt Water<br />
<strong>Test</strong>ing shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with a layer of mud applied at the bottom of the Antenna Unit having a thickness of<br />
maximum of 50 mm. The mud shall be free from iron, the water contents shall be 20 % by volume, the salt<br />
concentration (NaCl) of the water shall be 0.5 % by weight, and the mud shall be of terra-cotta type. The actual<br />
thickness is to be defined by the supplier of the Antenna.<br />
B5.2.5.6<br />
Iron Ore (Magnetite)<br />
<strong>Test</strong>ing shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with a layer of Magnetite applied at the bottom of the Antenna Unit having a thickness<br />
of maximum of 5 mm. The actual thickness is to be defined by the supplier of the Antenna. More details<br />
on the material are found in sub-clause B5.2.4.3 on page 188.<br />
B5.2.5.7<br />
Iron Ore (Hematite)<br />
<strong>Test</strong>ing shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with a layer of Hematite applied at the bottom of the Antenna Unit having a thickness<br />
of maximum of 5 mm. The actual thickness is to be defined by the supplier of the Antenna. More details<br />
on the material are found in sub-clause B5.2.4.4 on page 188.<br />
B5.2.5.8<br />
Iron Dust<br />
<strong>Test</strong>ing shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with a layer of iron dust applied at the bottom of the Antenna Unit having a thickness<br />
of minimum 2 mm, and maximum of 5 mm. The iron dust (or braking dust) is a non-conductive mixture of<br />
grease and iron oxide, which is normally encountered in Railway environment. The actual thickness is to be<br />
defined by the supplier of the Antenna.<br />
B5.2.5.9<br />
Coal Dust<br />
<strong>Test</strong>ing shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with a layer of coal dust applied at the bottom of the Antenna Unit having a thickness<br />
of maximum of 5 mm. The coal dust shall include approximately 8 % of sulphur, and be of the type normally<br />
present in the nature (used <strong>for</strong> heating in some regions). The actual thickness is to be defined by the supplier of<br />
the Antenna.<br />
B5.2.5.10 Oil and Grease<br />
<strong>Test</strong>ing shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with a layer of oil or grease applied at the bottom of the Antenna Unit having a thickness<br />
of minimum 2 mm, and maximum of 20 mm. The grease shall be of ordinary ball bearing grease type, and<br />
the oil shall be standard mineral oil used <strong>for</strong> lubrication of engines. The actual thickness is to be defined by the<br />
supplier of the Antenna.
Page 192 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B5.3 Metallic Objects<br />
B5.3.1<br />
Iron Bars outside the metallic free volume of the Balise<br />
The configuration according to Figure 55 below applies.<br />
3000<br />
3000<br />
Bar profile<br />
y-axis<br />
R<br />
Reference Loop<br />
or Balise<br />
a<br />
R<br />
150<br />
50<br />
a<br />
5<br />
x-axis<br />
Bar profile<br />
z-axis<br />
Reference Loop<br />
or Balise<br />
a<br />
a<br />
y-axis<br />
The resistance ‘R’ shall be 200 Ω.<br />
Figure 55: Iron bars close to the Reference Loop<br />
The distance ‘a’ shall be 400 mm <strong>for</strong> the Standard Size Reference Loop, 315 mm <strong>for</strong> the longitudinally mounted<br />
Reduced Size Reference Loop, and 410 mm <strong>for</strong> the transversally mounted Reduced Size Reference Loop.
Page 193 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B5.3.2<br />
Guard Rails<br />
The configuration according to Figure 56 below applies.<br />
3000<br />
20<br />
3000<br />
y-axis<br />
R<br />
Reference Loop<br />
or Balise<br />
300<br />
a<br />
R<br />
bar profile<br />
150<br />
50<br />
a<br />
5<br />
x-axis<br />
bar profile<br />
z-axis<br />
Reference Loop<br />
or Balise<br />
a<br />
a<br />
y-axis<br />
Figure 56: Guard Rails close to the Reference Loop<br />
The resistance ‘R’ shall be 200 Ω.<br />
The distance ‘a’ shall be 300 mm <strong>for</strong> the Standard Size Reference Loop, 320 mm <strong>for</strong> the transversally mounted<br />
Reduced Size Reference Loop, and 220 mm <strong>for</strong> the longitudinally mounted Reduced Size Reference Loop.
Page 194 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B5.3.3<br />
Metallic Plane underneath the Balise<br />
The configuration according to Figure 57 below applies.<br />
z-axis<br />
d<br />
Reference Loop<br />
or Balise<br />
Z b<br />
Rail<br />
Metallic Plane<br />
thickness 5 mm<br />
y-axis<br />
Figure 57: Metallic plane underneath the Reference Loop<br />
The metallic plane shall be centred with respect to the Reference Loop and in a plane parallel to the top of Rails.<br />
The size along the x-axis shall be 1200 mm, and the size along the y-axis shall be 900 mm.<br />
The following test cases shall be per<strong>for</strong>med:<br />
Size Case d [mm] Zb [mm]<br />
Standard 1 292 152<br />
Standard 2 420 210<br />
Standard 3 203 103<br />
Reduced 1 283 143<br />
Reduced 2 403 193<br />
Reduced 3 193 103<br />
The Rails are not part of the test set-up. They simply serve as height references.
Page 195 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B5.3.4<br />
Steel Sleepers<br />
This condition is optional, and applies only to products intended to be used during such conditions.<br />
The configuration according to Figure 58 below applies.<br />
sleeper profile<br />
35<br />
z-axis<br />
d<br />
Reference Loop<br />
or Balise<br />
80<br />
130<br />
200<br />
35<br />
x-axis<br />
Figure 58: Steel sleeper underneath the Reference Loop<br />
The steel sleeper shall be centred with respect to the Reference Loop. The size along the y-axis shall be<br />
2000 mm.<br />
The distance d is 45 mm <strong>for</strong> a Standard Size Reference Loop, and 60 mm <strong>for</strong> a Reduced Size Reference Loop.
Page 196 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B5.3.5<br />
Other Sleepers<br />
The configuration according to Figure 59 below applies.<br />
Even non-conductive sleepers may include metallic mounting assemblies. However, the total area of such assemblies<br />
must be limited. For test purposes, the assemblies should be placed directly underneath the Reference<br />
Loop.<br />
y-axis<br />
a<br />
Reference Loop<br />
or Balise<br />
b<br />
x-axis<br />
Simulated Mounting<br />
Assembly<br />
Figure 59: Mounting assemblies underneath the Reference Loop<br />
The mounting assemblies should be simulated using metallic plates, centred with respect to the Reference Loop,<br />
and of the following dimensions <strong>for</strong> the respective Reference Loop size:<br />
Size a [mm] b [mm]<br />
Standard 100 300<br />
Reduced 70 200<br />
The thickness of the metallic plates shall be 2 mm.<br />
For specific Balises, the test case may be modified, and shall be in accordance with the supplier’s specification.<br />
B5.3.6<br />
Loop Cable<br />
See sub-clauses 4.2.5.5 on page 62 and 5.2.10.3 on page 148. See also Annex J on page 324.
Page 197 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B5.3.7<br />
Metallic objects outside the metal free volume of the Antenna Unit<br />
Two different conditions apply. The first is a “box concept” with elongated openings in the corners (simulating<br />
equipment boxes surrounding the Antenna), and the second is a homogenous metal plate with an aperture <strong>for</strong> the<br />
Antenna. See Figure 60 and Figure 61 below.<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Case 1:<br />
Antenna<br />
E<br />
d<br />
d<br />
A<br />
C<br />
A<br />
A<br />
d<br />
B<br />
d<br />
A<br />
Figure 60: Metallic box around the Antenna<br />
The thickness of the metallic plates should be at least 2 mm.<br />
The distance ‘d’ is to be defined by the supplier of the Antenna.<br />
The distance ‘A’ is 300 mm, the distances ‘B’ and ‘C’ shall be according to the suppliers specification, and the<br />
distance ‘E’ is the Antenna height.
Page 198 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Case 2:<br />
Metal Plane<br />
x-axis<br />
Antenna<br />
z-axis<br />
d<br />
d<br />
Metal Plane<br />
Antenna<br />
d<br />
d<br />
y-axis<br />
x-axis<br />
Figure 61: Metallic plate around the Antenna<br />
The thickness of the metal plate should be at least 2 mm, and the outer dimension at least 1000 mm × 1000 mm.<br />
The distance ‘d’ is to be defined by the supplier of the Antenna.
Page 199 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
B5.3.8<br />
Metallic Masses in the Track<br />
The configuration according to Figure 62 below applies.<br />
Antenna<br />
z-axis<br />
Metallic profile<br />
w<br />
50 mm<br />
d<br />
Rail<br />
y-axis<br />
Figure 62: Metal masses in the Track<br />
The metallic profile shall have a thickness of at least 2 mm, and a length of 1200 mm.<br />
The following basic test cases apply:<br />
<strong>Test</strong> case w [mm] d [mm]<br />
1 120 92<br />
2 200 50<br />
3 800 0<br />
The Rails are not part of the test set-up. They simply serve as height references.
Page 200 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Annex C (Normative), Measurement Points<br />
C1 Geometrical <strong>Test</strong> Points contact zone<br />
The following geometrical test points apply (relative distances between the Balise / Reference Loop and the<br />
Antenna):<br />
Z [mm] Y [mm] X [mm] Z [mm] Y [mm] X [mm]<br />
220 -200 0 460 -350 0<br />
220 -150 0 460 -300 300<br />
220 -150 200 460 -300 -300<br />
220 -150 -200 460 -250 0<br />
220 -100 -100 460 -200 200<br />
220 -100 100 460 -200 -200<br />
220 0 250 460 0 -350<br />
220 0 150 460 0 -250<br />
220 0 0 460 0 0<br />
220 0 -150 460 0 250<br />
220 0 -250 460 0 350<br />
220 100 -100 460 200 200<br />
220 100 100 460 200 -200<br />
220 150 200 460 250 0<br />
220 150 -200 460 300 300<br />
220 150 0 460 300 -300<br />
220 200 0 460 350 0<br />
340 275 0<br />
340 225 225<br />
340 225 -225<br />
340 0 -275<br />
340 0 0<br />
340 0 275<br />
340 -225 225<br />
340 -225 -225<br />
340 -275 0<br />
Table 30: Geometrical <strong>Test</strong> Points within Contact Zone
Page 201 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
C2 Geometrical <strong>Test</strong> Points Side Lobe Zone<br />
The following geometrical test points apply (relative distances between the Balise / Reference Loop and the<br />
Antenna):<br />
Z<br />
[mm]<br />
Y<br />
[mm]<br />
X<br />
[mm]<br />
Z<br />
[mm]<br />
Y<br />
[mm]<br />
X<br />
[mm]<br />
Z<br />
[mm]<br />
Y<br />
[mm]<br />
X<br />
[mm]<br />
Z<br />
[mm]<br />
Y<br />
[mm]<br />
220 0 200 220 0 -200 220 150 0 220 -150 0<br />
220 0 250 220 0 -250 220 200 0 220 -200 0<br />
220 0 300 220 0 -300 220 250 0 220 -250 0<br />
220 0 350 220 0 -350 220 300 0 220 -300 0<br />
220 0 400 220 0 -400 220 350 0 220 -350 0<br />
220 0 450 220 0 -450 220 400 0 220 -400 0<br />
220 0 500 220 0 -500 220 450 0 220 -450 0<br />
220 0 550 220 0 -550 220 500 0 220 -500 0<br />
220 0 600 220 0 -600 220 550 0 220 -550 0<br />
220 0 650 220 0 -650 220 600 0 220 -600 0<br />
220 0 700 220 0 -700 220 650 0 220 -650 0<br />
220 0 750 220 0 -750 220 700 0 220 -700 0<br />
220 0 800 220 0 -800 220 750 0 220 -750 0<br />
220 0 850 220 0 -850 220 800 0 220 -800 0<br />
220 0 900 220 0 -900 220 850 0 220 -850 0<br />
220 0 950 220 0 -950 220 900 0 220 -900 0<br />
220 0 1000 220 0 -1000 220 950 0 220 -950 0<br />
220 0 1050 220 0 -1050 220 1000 0 220 -1000 0<br />
220 0 1100 220 0 -1100 220 1050 0 220 -1050 0<br />
220 0 1150 220 0 -1150 220 1100 0 220 -1100 0<br />
220 0 1200 220 0 -1200 220 1150 0 220 -1150 0<br />
220 0 1250 220 0 -1250 220 1200 0 220 -1200 0<br />
220 0 1300 220 0 -1300 220 1250 0 220 -1250 0<br />
220 1300 0 220 -1300 0<br />
220 1350 0 220 -1350 0<br />
220 1400 0 220 -1400 0<br />
Table 31: Geometrical <strong>Test</strong> Points within Side Lobe Zone<br />
X<br />
[mm]
Page 202 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
C3 Geometrical <strong>Test</strong> Points Cross-talk protected zone<br />
The following geometrical test points apply (relative distances between the Balise / Reference Loop and the<br />
RL_probe):<br />
Z<br />
[mm]<br />
Y<br />
[mm]<br />
X<br />
[mm]<br />
Z<br />
[mm]<br />
Y<br />
[mm]<br />
X<br />
[mm]<br />
Z<br />
[mm]<br />
Y<br />
[mm]<br />
X<br />
[mm]<br />
Z<br />
[mm]<br />
Y<br />
[mm]<br />
220 0 1350 220 0 -1350 220 1400 0 220 -1400 0<br />
220 0 1400 220 0 -1400 220 1450 0 220 -1450 0<br />
220 0 1450 220 0 -1450 220 1500 0 220 -1500 0<br />
220 0 1500 220 0 -1500 220 1550 0 220 -1550 0<br />
220 0 1550 220 0 -1550 220 1600 0 220 -1600 0<br />
220 0 1600 220 0 -1600 220 1650 0 220 -1650 0<br />
220 0 1650 220 0 -1650 220 1700 0 220 -1700 0<br />
220 0 1700 220 0 -1700 220 1750 0 220 -1750 0<br />
220 0 1750 220 0 -1750 220 1800 0 220 -1800 0<br />
220 0 1800 220 0 -1800 220 1850 0 220 -1850 0<br />
220 0 1850 220 0 -1850 220 1900 0 220 -1900 0<br />
220 0 1900 220 0 -1900 220 1950 0 220 -1950 0<br />
220 0 1950 220 0 -1950 220 2000 0 220 -2000 0<br />
220 0 2000 220 0 -2000 220 2050 0 220 -2050 0<br />
220 0 2100 220 0 -2100 220 2100 0 220 -2100 0<br />
220 0 2200 220 0 -2200 220 2200 0 220 -2200 0<br />
220 0 2300 220 0 -2300 220 2300 0 220 -2300 0<br />
220 0 2400 220 0 -2400 220 2400 0 220 -2400 0<br />
220 0 2500 220 0 -2500 220 2500 0 220 -2500 0<br />
220 0 2600 220 0 -2600 220 2600 0 220 -2600 0<br />
220 0 2700 220 0 -2700 220 2700 0 220 -2700 0<br />
220 0 2800 220 0 -2800 220 2800 0 220 -2800 0<br />
220 0 2900 220 0 -2900 220 2900 0 220 -2900 0<br />
220 0 3000 220 0 -3000 220 3000 0 220 -3000 0<br />
Table 32: Geometrical <strong>Test</strong> Points within Cross-talk Protected Zone<br />
X<br />
[mm]
Page 203 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
C4 <strong>Test</strong> Points <strong>for</strong> contact zone and side-lobe zone<br />
This clause applies <strong>for</strong> testing of the On-board Transmission Equipment only.<br />
In general, the geometrical test points shall be chosen so that various Antenna Units can be verified with respect<br />
to the required contact length and considering potential side lobes at different lateral deviations.<br />
The Antenna Units shall be verified <strong>for</strong> minimum, nominal, and maximum heights. The nominal height is defined<br />
as the sum of the mean value of the static position <strong>for</strong> the Antenna Unit in question, and the highest specified<br />
position of the Balise (93 mm below top of rail). This sub-clause defines the full set of geometrical test<br />
points. Tailoring will be made during certain tests (see test matrices according to clauses C6 and C7 of Annex C<br />
on pages 205 and 207 respectively).<br />
Please observe that test heights are limited in some specific cases. See sub-clause 5.2.2.2 on page 116.<br />
During testing, the X-positions should be selected according to:<br />
From 0 mm to ± 500 mm, in steps of 20 mm (total of 51 points).<br />
From ± 550 mm to ± 1300 mm, in steps of 50 mm (total of 32 points).<br />
The first zone (from 0 to ± 500 mm) is referred to as contact zone in the test matrices of clauses C6 and C7 of<br />
Annex C on pages 205 and 207 respectively, and the second zone (from ± 500 mm to ± 1300 mm) is referred to<br />
as side lobe zone.<br />
The lateral positions (Y-positions) shall be according to definition of the Antenna Unit supplier (<strong>for</strong> each lateral<br />
deviation, testing shall be per<strong>for</strong>med at the X-positions defined above).<br />
The geometrical test position [X = 0, Y = 0, Z = maximum height] is denominated the geometrical reference<br />
point (see sub-clauses 5.2.3.1 and 5.2.4.1 on page 118 and 122 respectively).<br />
It is the responsibility of the supplier of the Antenna Unit to define the profile of maximum lateral deviation<br />
versus vehicle speed. This profile shall take into consideration the requirements on Balise installation (specified<br />
in Part 1 of this Norm), and the installation dependent requirements <strong>for</strong> each Antenna Unit type in question<br />
(defined by the supplier of the Antenna).
Page 204 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
C5 <strong>Test</strong> Points <strong>for</strong> cross-talk protected zone<br />
This clause applies <strong>for</strong> testing of the On-board Transmission Equipment only.<br />
The following geometrical positions shall be tested:<br />
Point<br />
x<br />
[mm]<br />
y<br />
[mm]<br />
Point<br />
x<br />
[mm]<br />
y<br />
[mm]<br />
CT1 0 +1400 CT2 0 -1400<br />
CT3 0 +1600 CT4 0 -1600<br />
CT5 0 +1800 CT6 0 -1800<br />
CT7 0 +2000 CT8 0 -2000<br />
CT9 0 +2200 CT10 0 -2200<br />
CT11 0 +2400 CT12 0 -2400<br />
CT13 0 +2600 CT14 0 -2600<br />
CT15 0 +2800 CT16 0 -2800<br />
CT17 0 +3000 CT18 0 -3000<br />
CT19 0 +3200 CT20 0 -3200<br />
CT21 0 +3400 CT22 0 -3400<br />
CT23 0 +3600 CT24 0 -3600<br />
CT25 +1400 0 CT26 -1400 0<br />
CT27 +1600 0 CT28 -1600 0<br />
CT29 +1800 0 CT30 -1800 0<br />
CT31 +2000 0 CT32 -2000 0<br />
CT33 +2200 0 CT34 -2200 0<br />
CT35 +2400 0 CT36 -2400 0<br />
CT37 +2600 0 CT38 -2600 0<br />
CT39 +2800 0 CT40 -2800 0<br />
CT41 +3000 0 CT42 -3000 0<br />
CT43 +3200 0 CT44 -3200 0<br />
CT45 +3400 0 CT46 -3400 0<br />
CT47 +3600 0 CT48 -3600 0<br />
Table 33: Geometrical test points <strong>for</strong> On-board Cross-talk verification<br />
The Antenna Unit shall be positioned at the minimum and the maximum heights as defined by the supplier.
Page 205 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
C6 <strong>Test</strong> Matrix <strong>for</strong> Transmission and Cross-talk tests<br />
C6.1 <strong>Test</strong> Conditions versus <strong>Test</strong> Zones<br />
The following applies to tests defined by the sub-clauses 5.2.3 on page 118, 5.2.5 on page 128, and 5.2.9 on<br />
page 140. The test zones referred to in the table are defined in the clauses C4 on page 203 and C5 on page 204.<br />
The following combinations of test conditions and test zones shall be tested:<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Condition Sub-clause Contact<br />
Zone<br />
Side Lobe Zone<br />
Cross-talk Zone<br />
Nominal 5.2.2.1 X X X<br />
Tilt 5.2.2.2.1 X X<br />
Pitch 5.2.2.2.1 X X<br />
Iron Bars 5.2.2.2.3 X X X<br />
Guard Rails 5.2.2.2.3 X X X<br />
Metallic Plane,<br />
Reference Loop<br />
5.2.2.2.3 X X<br />
Steel Sleepers 5.2.2.2.3 X<br />
Other Sleepers 5.2.2.2.3 X<br />
Loop Cable 5.2.2.2.3 X X<br />
Metallic Objects;<br />
Antenna<br />
5.2.2.2.3 X X<br />
Salt Water 5.2.2.2.4 X<br />
Clear Water 5.2.2.2.4 X<br />
Iron Ore 5.2.2.2.4 X<br />
Ice on the Antenna 5.2.2.2.4 X<br />
Combination - X<br />
Table 34: Transmission and Cross-talk <strong>Test</strong>s, <strong>Test</strong> Conditions versus <strong>Test</strong> Zones<br />
During the first fourteen test conditions, one case is evaluated per test. During the last combined test condition,<br />
the following case is applicable:<br />
• Metallic Plane underneath the Reference Loop in combination with Metallic Objects outside the Antenna<br />
metal free volume (see sub-clause 5.2.2.2.3 on page 116).<br />
Per<strong>for</strong>mance over temperature range is considered through spot check evaluation according to sub-clause 5.2.3.2<br />
on page 120 (and sub-clause 5.2.4 on page 122).
Page 206 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
C6.2 <strong>Test</strong> Conditions versus Geometrical <strong>Test</strong> Points<br />
The following applies to tests defined by the sub-clauses 5.2.3 on page 118, 5.2.5 on page 128, and 5.2.9 on<br />
page 140. The test zones referred to in the table are defined in the clauses C4 on page 203 and C5 on page 204.<br />
During the testing, the number of test points within the contact and side lobe zone shall be according to Table 35<br />
below. The reason is that the number of test points defined in sub-clause C4 on page 203 needs to be minimised.<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Condition Sub-clause Full R1 R2<br />
Nominal 5.2.2.1 X<br />
Tilt 5.2.2.2.1 X<br />
Pitch 5.2.2.2.1 X<br />
Iron Bars 5.2.2.2.3 X<br />
Guard Rails 5.2.2.2.3 X<br />
Metallic Plane,<br />
Reference Loop<br />
5.2.2.2.3 X<br />
Steel Sleepers 5.2.2.2.3 X<br />
Other Sleepers 5.2.2.2.3 X<br />
Loop Cables 5.2.2.2.3 X<br />
Metallic Objects;<br />
Antenna<br />
5.2.2.2.3 X<br />
Salt Water 5.2.2.2.4 X<br />
Clear Water 5.2.2.2.4 X<br />
Iron Ore 5.2.2.2.4 X<br />
Ice on the Antenna 5.2.2.2.4 X<br />
Combinations<br />
(see sub-clause C6.1)<br />
- X<br />
Table 35: Transmission and Cross-talk <strong>Test</strong>s, Geometrical <strong>Test</strong> Points within the Contact Zone<br />
The following is applicable:<br />
• ‘Full’ indicates all points according to sub-clause C4 on page 203.<br />
• ‘R1’ indicates maximum and minimum height only. In addition to this, a further limitation is that minimum<br />
height only applies within the side lobe zone.<br />
• ‘R2’ indicates maximum height only.
Page 207 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
C7 <strong>Test</strong> Matrix <strong>for</strong> Other Characteristics<br />
C7.1 <strong>Test</strong> Conditions versus Characteristics<br />
The following applies to tests defined by the sub clauses 5.2.8 on page 138, 5.2.12 on page 152, 5.2.6 on page<br />
131, 5.2.7 on page 135, 5.2.13 on page 153, and 5.2.14 on page 154. The applicable geometrical test points are<br />
further defined by clause C4 on page 203.<br />
The following combinations of characteristics and test conditions shall be tested:<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Condition<br />
Subclause<br />
Up-link<br />
Electrical<br />
Char.<br />
(Sub-clause<br />
5.2.8)<br />
Various<br />
Telegrams<br />
(Subclause<br />
5.2.12)<br />
Telepowering<br />
Char.<br />
(Sub-clause<br />
5.2.6)<br />
Maximum<br />
Flux Level<br />
(Subclause<br />
5.2.7)<br />
Balise<br />
Sequence<br />
(Subclause<br />
5.2.13)<br />
Basic<br />
Receiver<br />
(Subclause<br />
5.2.14)<br />
Nominal 33 5.2.2.1 X X X X X X<br />
Tilt 5.2.2.2.1<br />
Pitch 5.2.2.2.1<br />
Iron Bars 5.2.2.2.3 X X X<br />
Guard Rails 5.2.2.2.3<br />
Metallic Plane,<br />
Reference Loop<br />
5.2.2.2.3 X X X X X<br />
Steel Sleepers 5.2.2.2.3 X X X<br />
Other Sleepers 5.2.2.2.3<br />
Loop Cable 5.2.2.2.3<br />
Metallic Objects;<br />
Antenna<br />
Salt Water 5.2.2.2.4<br />
Clear Water 5.2.2.2.4<br />
Iron Ore 5.2.2.2.4<br />
Ice on the Antenna<br />
5.2.2.2.3 X X X X<br />
5.2.2.2.4 X<br />
Table 36: Other Characteristics, Characteristics versus <strong>Test</strong> Conditions<br />
Tele-powering Characteristics are evaluated at nominal temperature, and at upper and lower temperature extremes.<br />
33<br />
Applicable parts of nominal conditions apply (e.g., during tests of Up-link Electrical Characteristics the<br />
conditions <strong>for</strong> the Up-link signal are modified in accordance with the test procedure, and during testing of<br />
various telegrams other telegrams than type 8 are selected). Please refer to the specific test procedures <strong>for</strong><br />
more details.
Page 208 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
C7.2 <strong>Test</strong> Conditions versus Geometrical <strong>Test</strong> Points<br />
The following applies to tests defined by the sub clauses 5.2.8 on page 138, 5.2.12 on page 152, 5.2.6 on page<br />
131, 5.2.7 on page 135, 5.2.13 on page 153, and 5.2.14 on page 154. The applicable geometrical test points are<br />
further defined by clause C4 on page 203.<br />
During the testing, the number of test points within the Contact and Side Lobe Zone shall be according to Table<br />
37 below. <strong>Test</strong>ing within the cross-talk zone is not applicable <strong>for</strong> these tests. The reason is that the number of<br />
test points defined in clause C4 on page 203 need to be minimised.<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Case Sub-clause R3 R4 R5<br />
Up-link Electrical<br />
Characteristics<br />
5.2.8 X<br />
Various Telegrams 5.2.12 X<br />
Tele-powering<br />
Characteristics<br />
5.2.6 X<br />
Maximum Flux Level 5.2.7 X<br />
Balise Sequence 5.2.13 X<br />
Concepts of Basic<br />
Receiver<br />
5.2.14 X<br />
Table 37: Other Characteristics, Geometrical <strong>Test</strong> Points<br />
The following is applicable:<br />
• ‘R3’ indicates nominal height with no lateral displacement only.<br />
• ‘R4’ indicates nominal height at position [X=0, Y=0] only.<br />
• ‘R5’ indicates minimum height with no lateral displacement and within the Contact Zone only.
Page 209 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
C7.3 Source of data <strong>for</strong> Controlled Balises versus <strong>Test</strong> Cases<br />
Subclause<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Case Int. ‘C’ Default<br />
Telegram<br />
Comment<br />
4.2.2 Up-link Field Con<strong>for</strong>mity X All calibrations and tests in free air<br />
only.<br />
Up-link calibrations <strong>for</strong> I/O Characteristic<br />
measurements are explicitly<br />
per<strong>for</strong>med within 4.2.4.<br />
4.2.3 Tele-powering Field Con<strong>for</strong>mity<br />
4.2.4 I/O Characteristics,<br />
Free Air<br />
4.2.4 I/O Characteristics,<br />
Other Conditions<br />
4.2.5 Cross-talk Immunity with cables<br />
X<br />
All calibrations and tests <strong>for</strong> Field<br />
Con<strong>for</strong>mity in free air only. However,<br />
a few calibrations are made in<br />
other conditions and used <strong>for</strong> I/O<br />
Characteristics measurements.<br />
X X For “Default Telegram”, no connection<br />
to generator<br />
X<br />
X<br />
No connection to generator<br />
4.2.6 Balise Impedance X No connection to generator<br />
4.2.7 Up-link Signal Characteristics X X For “Default Telegram”, connection<br />
to (disabled) generator required.<br />
A few exceptions explicitly detailed<br />
in specific test cases.<br />
4.2.8 Balise controlling interface<br />
per<strong>for</strong>mance<br />
4.2.9 <strong>Test</strong> <strong>for</strong> Damaging X No connection to generator<br />
X<br />
Table 38: Source of data <strong>for</strong> controlled Balises
Page 210 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Annex D (In<strong>for</strong>mative), Descriptions of <strong>Test</strong> Tools<br />
D1 Description of Time and Odometer Module (LTOM)<br />
D1.1 Operational Context<br />
The LTOM is required to operate in different test configurations involving the equipment shown in Figure 63.<br />
Balises and Reference Loops (used <strong>for</strong> their simulation) are typically kept in a defined position of the test bed.<br />
In the tests of the On-board transmission equipment, the antenna is kept still over the Reference Loop that is<br />
used <strong>for</strong> simulation of the Balise Up-link signal in the air-gap. In this case, the dynamic Up-link Balise signal,<br />
corresponding to the simulated movement of the antenna in the whole speed range from 0 km/h to 500 km/h, is<br />
generated by the RSG_1 as realistically as possible at each pre-defined position of the corresponding Balise.<br />
During testing of the overall transmission sub-system, the APT moves the antenna back and <strong>for</strong>th over the Balise<br />
at reduced speed. In order to submit the BTM functionality to realistic conditions, the alternate movement of the<br />
antenna can be conveniently “translated” in a mono-directional movement by the LTOM, without losing the<br />
control of its real position. The data transmitted by the Balise is consistently updated at each passage.<br />
The LTOM is controlled by the LTMS (or by the operator) in setting up the required operational mode and in<br />
providing the relevant input data <strong>for</strong> the current test step (e.g., speed patterns <strong>for</strong> each simulated trip, location of<br />
Balises to be simulated, etc.). It reports back its current operating status as well as all the test related data that is<br />
used as reference <strong>for</strong> the evaluation of the test results (e.g., time and odometer co-ordinates of the Balise centre).<br />
APT<br />
Interface V3<br />
Interface S1<br />
Interface S2<br />
RSG_1<br />
Interface S3<br />
Interface S4<br />
RSG_C<br />
LTOM<br />
Interface S5<br />
Interface T4<br />
Interface V2/V4<br />
LTMS<br />
Interface V1<br />
On-Board<br />
Equipment<br />
+ Interface Adapter<br />
Balise or<br />
Reference Loop<br />
Balise Location and<br />
Transmission System<br />
Figure 63: LTOM operational context
Page 211 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D1.2 Functional requirements<br />
D1.2.1<br />
Basic functions<br />
The tool should per<strong>for</strong>m, on external request, one or more basic functions of the following list:<br />
• Accurate generation of the current master time.<br />
• Controllable simulation of antenna movement with pre-defined speed/acceleration patterns.<br />
• Accurate measurement of the current speed and distance of the antenna under test in real low speed<br />
conditions.<br />
• Reliable and accurate generation of the time and odometer co-ordinates <strong>for</strong> driving the BTM functionality<br />
under test, in real or in simulated movement condition.<br />
• Reliable and accurate generation of the speed sensor signals expected by the On-board equipment in<br />
conditions of low speed real movement of the antenna.<br />
• Accurate distance based trigger <strong>for</strong> the RSG_1 in order to start the real-time simulation of the dynamic<br />
signals of the Up-link Balise.<br />
• Accurate distance based trigger <strong>for</strong> the RSG_C in order to start the real-time trigger of transient<br />
events at the Balise Interface ‘C’.<br />
• Recording and stamping with the current time and odometer co-ordinates of the feedback signals<br />
coming from the RSG_1 or from the RSG_C at defined instants of the Balise passage simulation.<br />
D1.2.2<br />
Operational modes<br />
D1.2.2.1<br />
General<br />
In order to keep consistency with the in<strong>for</strong>mation continuously given at the Interface V2 or at the Interface V4,<br />
there should be a suitable co-ordination between real and simulated movements at the instants when an operational<br />
mode switch occurs.<br />
In addition to the LTMS control (“remote control”), the LTOM should also be controllable, <strong>for</strong> its basic operations,<br />
by the operator (“local control”) by means of a suitable Man Machine Interface. The Man Machine Interface<br />
should permit the same basic operations that can be commanded by the LTMS and should present in an<br />
easily understandable way the same output in<strong>for</strong>mation required by the LTMS. This manual mode is typically<br />
used <strong>for</strong> simplified verifications of the test set-up or of the equipment under test.<br />
D1.2.2.2<br />
Idle or static mode<br />
It is the default mode at power on or on request of the LTMS or of the operator. In this mode, a standing still<br />
condition is simulated. The Interface V2 is driven consistently.<br />
D1.2.2.3<br />
Self-test mode<br />
This mode is aimed at installation and at maintenance support. The basic functionality of the tool is verified<br />
with suitable self-test routines. This operational mode may be invoked at the beginning of the test session or<br />
whenever it is deemed necessary by the LTMS or by the operator. The test mode can cause interruptions or<br />
discontinuities at the LTOM outputs.
Page 212 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D1.2.2.4<br />
Dynamic simulated mode<br />
This mode is required <strong>for</strong> those tests of the On-board equipment that are scheduled in distance based sequences.<br />
In such cases the antenna is standing still in a defined position with respect to the Reference Loop. The LTOM<br />
simulates the movement of the antenna, following pre-defined speed and acceleration patterns. The current time<br />
and odometer co-ordinates are evaluated consistently with the current status of the simulated movement. They<br />
are periodically broadcast to the Interface V2. The Interface V4 signals are also driven consistently with the<br />
simulated movement.<br />
The LTOM is also in charge of triggering the RSG_1 <strong>for</strong> starting the simulation of the Up-link signals corresponding<br />
to a Balise group passage with a pre-defined speed. The simulation of each Balise group starts when a<br />
very precise simulated position of the antenna is reached. During the Balise group simulation, the LTOM reads<br />
the marker pulse (Balise Centre Marker), generated by the RSG_1 in correspondence of each simulated Balise<br />
centre, stamps it with the current time and odometer value and reports it (as soon as possible) to the LTMS.<br />
This data is homogeneous and comparable with the test outputs of the BTM functionality (reports at Interface<br />
V1 – see clause E1 on page 266).<br />
In order to allow the preparation of the next Balise group simulation, the RSG_1 issues another marker pulse<br />
(End of Balise Group Marker) at the end of the current group. This pulse is read by the LTOM, converted into<br />
appropriate <strong>for</strong>mat and passed on (as soon as possible) to the LTMS <strong>for</strong> allowing all the required actions <strong>for</strong> the<br />
next simulation step.<br />
D1.2.2.5<br />
Real dynamic mode<br />
This mode is required <strong>for</strong> those tests that use low speed, real movements of the antenna.<br />
During this operation, the LTOM evaluates the longitudinal speed, the current distance from a reference position<br />
and the running direction of the antenna, in order to get the current time and odometer co-ordinates. The inputs<br />
<strong>for</strong> this evaluation are provided by speed sensor signals (Interface V3) of the APT in charge of per<strong>for</strong>ming the<br />
required movement.<br />
The LTOM keeps constant control of the real position of the antenna during all possible movements and consistently<br />
drives both the Interface V2 and the Interface V4.<br />
Despite of this, the LTOM may be requested to “translate” the data sent to the Interface V2, or the signals to the<br />
Interface V4, in such a way that the <strong>for</strong>ward/backward movements are understood as “mono-directional” ones<br />
by the equipment under test. This allows the simulation of realistic conditions <strong>for</strong> subsequent Balise passages<br />
and longer “virtual” journeys than actually allowed by the size limitations of the test bed.<br />
Some distance-based events can also be triggered by the LTOM, during the movement, in correspondence with<br />
pre-defined antenna positions (e.g., telegram switching or insertion of telegram errors, during a Balise/antenna<br />
“contact”).<br />
Additionally, suitable marker pulses, generated by the LTOM at defined antenna positions are read back by the<br />
same LTOM, stamped with the current time and odometer data and reported to the LTMS as references <strong>for</strong> the<br />
evaluation of some test results.<br />
The LTOM should always be able to keep control of the longitudinal position of the antenna <strong>for</strong> all the various<br />
movement conditions that are possible during a test session.
Page 213 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D1.3 External interfaces<br />
D1.3.1<br />
Interface T4<br />
The Interface T4 is used to exchange commands and data between the LTMS and the LTOM.<br />
The LTMS commands are used to set the LTOM in the required operating mode.<br />
The LTMS data is used either <strong>for</strong> setting up a defined configuration of the LTOM (e.g., parameters regarding<br />
Interface V3 or Interface V4) or <strong>for</strong> describing specific conditions required <strong>for</strong> a test sequence (e.g., a distancebased<br />
speed/acceleration profile or tables of distance-based triggers <strong>for</strong> starting the Balise group simulations).<br />
The following list gives examples of possible commands and data from the LTMS to the LTOM:<br />
• Reset speed and position.<br />
• Reset speed, position, time and mode.<br />
• Local control.<br />
• Remote control.<br />
• Simulated dynamic mode.<br />
• Real dynamic mode without direction detection.<br />
• Real dynamic mode with direction detection.<br />
• <strong>Test</strong> mode.<br />
• Idle mode.<br />
• Status request.<br />
• Request <strong>for</strong> the current time and odometer co-ordinates.<br />
• Request <strong>for</strong> the time and odometer stamps corresponding to the recorded marker pulses (Markers<br />
Events Table).<br />
• Clear the Marker Events Table.<br />
• Distance parameter corresponding to one period of the Interface V3 signals.<br />
• Distance parameter corresponding to one period of the Interface V4 signals.<br />
• Distance based pattern <strong>for</strong> speed and acceleration during a train trip simulation.<br />
• Set of distance based triggers <strong>for</strong> start of Balise group simulation.<br />
• Set of distance based triggers <strong>for</strong> Interface C event simulation.<br />
A list of possible answers from LTOM to LTMS is:<br />
• Confirmation of successful execution of a received command.<br />
• In<strong>for</strong>mation about possible abortion or unsuccessful execution of a received command.<br />
• LTOM current Status (e.g., “not available” or “available” <strong>for</strong> communication, “not ready” <strong>for</strong> a new<br />
command, “failure condition”).<br />
• Feedback data regarding the controlled test events (e.g., set of time and odometer co-ordinates corresponding<br />
to the received input markers).<br />
• Table of the most recent time and odometer co-ordinates broadcast at the Interface V2.<br />
• Confirmation of correct reception of the set of distance-based triggers <strong>for</strong> Balise group simulation.<br />
• Confirmation of correct reception of the set of distance-based triggers <strong>for</strong> Interface C events.
Page 214 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D1.3.2<br />
Man Machine Interface<br />
The Man Machine Interface should be realised in such a way as to allow the operator to send, in an easy way,<br />
the same commands and data to the LTOM functions as from the LTMS.<br />
The output data from the LTOM should also be graphically displayed in order to allow the operator to check the<br />
correct execution of the test steps during both the remote and the local control.<br />
The “local control” via the Man machine Interface should be automatically disabled during the “remote control”<br />
operation.<br />
D1.3.3<br />
Interface V2<br />
The Interface V2 is used by the LTOM <strong>for</strong> periodically broadcasting the current time and odometer co-ordinates<br />
towards the BTM functionality under test.<br />
The values given by the LTOM should represent realistic cases <strong>for</strong> the entire duration of the test session. This<br />
requires that the Interface is fed regularly and without interruptions and that the transmitted values are selfconsistent<br />
during the whole duration of a test session.<br />
The BTM functionality receives the LTOM in<strong>for</strong>mation through a suitable Interface Adapter provided by each<br />
manufacturer. This is in charge of converting the LTOM data (including possible sporadic cases of lack of continuity)<br />
to the specific requirements of the equipment under tests.<br />
The following in<strong>for</strong>mation is periodically broadcast by the LTOM:<br />
• Current time since the start of the test session or since the last “reset”.<br />
• Current distance of the antenna centre from the starting point of the test session or from the last “reset”<br />
position.<br />
• Confidence level of the current time and odometer co-ordinates.<br />
• Current value of the longitudinal speed (real or simulated).<br />
• Data <strong>for</strong> checking the regularity and the integrity of the transmission.<br />
The transmission period should be sufficiently short in relation to the worst-case train acceleration or deceleration.<br />
More details about this Interface are given in clause E2 on page 271.<br />
D1.3.4<br />
Interface V3<br />
The LTOM receives real-time speed/distance signals from the APT containing the following in<strong>for</strong>mation:<br />
• Distance run by the antenna along the longitudinal direction from a given starting point;<br />
• Instantaneous value of the longitudinal speed;<br />
• Current direction of the movement.<br />
These signals are read and analysed by the LTOM in order to evaluate the current longitudinal position of the<br />
antenna, the time and odometer values <strong>for</strong> the Interface V2 and <strong>for</strong> the shape of the speed sensor signals produced<br />
at the Interface V4.<br />
This interface consists of a pair of square wave signals whose repetition period represents a given distance unit<br />
run by the antenna. This parameter is characteristic of the used APT speed sensors. Typically the signal period<br />
should correspond to a distance value ranging between 0.1 mm and 1 mm. The phase difference (+90 ° or –90 °)<br />
between the two square waves in<strong>for</strong>ms about the APT running direction.
Page 215 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D1.3.5<br />
Interface V4<br />
The LTOM generates a pair of real-time speed signals, coherent with the real longitudinal speed used in the<br />
tests, <strong>for</strong> feeding the On-board equipment under test in a similar way as with the real sensors in the same speed<br />
conditions.<br />
The requirements of consistence and continuity, already seen <strong>for</strong> the data at the Interface V2, apply also in this<br />
case.<br />
More details about this Interface are given in clause E3 on page 273.<br />
D1.3.6<br />
Interface S1<br />
During the simulation of a defined train trip, the LTOM issues a suitable distance-based trigger pulse towards<br />
the RSG_1 (Balise Group Triggering Pulse) in order to command the generation of the real-time signal corresponding<br />
to a defined group of Balises. The various Up-link wave<strong>for</strong>ms, corresponding to each Balise, must be<br />
prepared in advance within the RSG_1 (e.g., off-line and/or during the time in which the simulated train “runs”<br />
from the previous “Balise group” to the next one). For each Balise group, the triggering pulse corresponds to a<br />
pre-defined position of the simulated antenna movement just prior to the location of the Balise group (e.g., at<br />
1 m in advance of the centre of the first Balise of the group).<br />
D1.3.7<br />
Interface S2<br />
During the simulation of the current Balise group, a suitable marker pulse (Balise Centre Marker) is generated<br />
by the RSG_1 in correspondence to the location of the centre of each simulated Balise. This pulse is rapidly<br />
received by the LTOM, and used <strong>for</strong> evaluating the time and odometer co-ordinates corresponding to the simulated<br />
Balise centre. These co-ordinates include in<strong>for</strong>mation about time, location and speed of the antenna during<br />
the Balise passage. This set of data is sent back, as quickly as possible, to the LTMS <strong>for</strong> the purpose of evaluation<br />
of the test results.<br />
D1.3.8<br />
Interface S3<br />
Immediately after completing the simulation of the current Balise group (e.g., about 1 m after the last Balise<br />
centre of the group), the RSG_1 issues a marker pulse (End of Group Marker), to in<strong>for</strong>m the LTMS, via the<br />
LTOM, about the conclusion of the current Balise group simulation. This in<strong>for</strong>mation is used by the LTMS <strong>for</strong><br />
the analysis of the BTM functionality reported data and <strong>for</strong> initiating a new test step.<br />
The marker pulse is received by the LTOM, stamped with the current time and odometer co-ordinates and sent<br />
back, as quickly as possible, to the LTMS.<br />
D1.3.9<br />
Interface S4<br />
The LTOM issues suitable distance-based trigger pulses towards the RSG_C (Interface ‘C’ Event Trigger) in<br />
order to command the generation of defined transient events at the Interface ‘C’ signals, during low speed passages<br />
of the antenna over the Balise. The triggering pulse may command the RSG_C to switch from one telegram<br />
to another or to insert a pre-defined error pattern in the current telegram, or to simulate a given transient<br />
fault.<br />
Trigger pulses of this type may also be generated at periodical distances, during the antenna movement. These<br />
pulses fed back into the LTOM, via the Interface S5, allow it to record time and odometer co-ordinates as well<br />
as antenna speed at such regular positions. This in<strong>for</strong>mation is then <strong>for</strong>warded to the LTMS as reference data<br />
<strong>for</strong> the verification of the BTM function reports.
Page 216 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D1.3.10<br />
Interface S5<br />
A suitable marker pulse (Interface ‘C’ Event Marker) is generated by the RSG_C with close time correspondence<br />
to the transient event generated at the Interface ‘C’, in response to the Interface S4 trigger.<br />
Alternatively, the same trigger pulses generated at even distance at the Interface S4 are read back by the LTOM<br />
from this interface.<br />
These marker pulses are rapidly received by the LTOM, stamped with the current time and odometer coordinates<br />
and sent back as soon as possible to the LTMS <strong>for</strong> enabling evaluation of the test results.<br />
D1.4 Required per<strong>for</strong>mance<br />
The following per<strong>for</strong>mance is required of the basic functions of the LTOM:<br />
• For the real antenna movement in the longitudinal direction, the maximum distance of interest is<br />
about 5 m. It can be covered in both <strong>for</strong>ward and backward direction. The relevant speed can range<br />
from 0 m/s up to 0.5 m/s with a maximum acceleration of the order of ±0.3 m/s 2 .<br />
• The maximum distances <strong>for</strong> the simulated train trips can be up to 43000 km. The relevant speed can<br />
range from 0 km/h up to 500 km/h with any acceleration ranging from –2.5 m/s 2 up to +2.5 m/s 2 , in<br />
steps of 0.02 m/s 2 .<br />
• The Balise group simulation can be organised, within the RSG_1, in groups of 1 to 8 Balises, spaced<br />
in a range of 2.3 m to 5.0 m. Some limitation in the minimum distance (and there<strong>for</strong>e in the minimum<br />
time) between successive group simulations might be imposed by practical limitations of the RSG_1.<br />
• The LTOM shall support static tests where the equipment under test undergoes only time-based conditions<br />
(e.g., continuous Balise signal simulation at standing still with telegram switching events).<br />
• The maximum time duration of a continuous test session is longer than 20 hours. During the whole<br />
test session, the time and odometer in<strong>for</strong>mation delivered towards the equipment under test needs to<br />
be continuous and consistent with the real/simulated movements of the antenna.<br />
• The time and odometer accuracy/resolution of the in<strong>for</strong>mation delivered at the LTOM output interfaces<br />
(T4, V2, V4, and S1 through S5) <strong>for</strong> the whole range of test speed should be better than ±5 mm<br />
in distance and ±25 µs in time.<br />
• In order to avoid possible reactions of the equipment under test, disrupting the correct development of<br />
the test procedures, the data provided at the Interface V2 and the signals at Interface V4 should always<br />
be consistent and within the specified accuracy <strong>for</strong> the whole duration of the test session. For<br />
special purposes, aimed at simplification of the test procedures, it can be possible to restart (“Reset”)<br />
the LTOM at its zero position.<br />
• In case of “Reset” the Interface V2 Adapter or the Interface V4 Adapter, should be in charge, if<br />
needed, of smoothing possible discontinuities to the requirements of the specific equipment under<br />
test.
Page 217 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D2 Description of Reference Signal Generator (RSG)<br />
D2.1 Operational Context<br />
The RSG is used <strong>for</strong> generating wave<strong>for</strong>ms fulfilling the characteristics that are described in the applicable test<br />
procedures and in Part 1 of this Norm.<br />
The RSG is intended <strong>for</strong> use in the simplified environment illustrated by Figure 64 below.<br />
Laboratory <strong>Test</strong><br />
Management<br />
System (LTMS)<br />
Telegram Generator<br />
(OLTG)<br />
Laboratory Time<br />
and Odometer<br />
Module (LTOM)<br />
Operator<br />
REFERENCE<br />
SIGNAL<br />
GENERATOR<br />
‘C1’, ‘C6’<br />
Laboratory Reference<br />
Receiver Tool (LRRT)<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Antennas,<br />
Reference Loops<br />
‘A4’<br />
Up-Link<br />
Balise<br />
Balise Location and<br />
Transmission System<br />
‘A1’<br />
Antenna +<br />
BTM function<br />
Figure 64: RSG Operational Context<br />
The RSG environment is composed of:<br />
• Laboratory <strong>Test</strong> Management System (LTMS). The LTMS is in charge of managing all the scenarios<br />
<strong>for</strong> the different test procedures.<br />
• Telegram Generator (OLTG). The data (<strong>Eurobalise</strong> telegrams) used <strong>for</strong> the generation of telegrams<br />
transmitted via the Interface ‘A1’ and Interface ‘C1’ are generated with the specific Telegram Generator.<br />
• Time and Odometer Module (LTOM). The LTOM is in charge of delivering the current time and<br />
position to the BTM function. It is also in charge of the stamping (in time and position) the theoretical<br />
Balise centre <strong>for</strong> simulated Balise passages. The Balise centre in<strong>for</strong>mation is provided by the<br />
RSG (a position/time marker pulse).<br />
• <strong>Test</strong> Antennas and Reference Loops. The <strong>Test</strong> Antennas (a set of various antennas including test<br />
antennas and activation antennas) and Reference Loops (standard size and reduced size) are used to<br />
transmit the air-gap signals.<br />
• Reference Receiver (LRRT). The LRRT is in charge of the reception of Up-link telegrams at Interface<br />
‘A1’.
Page 218 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
The RSG is used to test the following <strong>Eurobalise</strong> devices:<br />
• Antenna and BTM functionality. During static conditions, the RSG generates the (Up-link) signal<br />
<strong>for</strong> Interface ‘A1’. In order to simulate a dynamic sequence, the RSG generates a signal simulating<br />
the signal transmitted by a Balise being passed by a train, including the radiation pattern of the specific<br />
On-board antenna. In this sequence, the RSG supplies the following signals :<br />
• FSK Up-link signal.<br />
• Balise Passage signal (PB2), and the radiation pattern.<br />
• End of transmission marker <strong>for</strong> a group of Balises.<br />
• Marker <strong>for</strong> the passage of the train over the centre of a Balise, and a telegram-switching marker.<br />
• Up-link Balise. In order to test the per<strong>for</strong>mance of the Up-link Balise, the RSG generates the Interface<br />
‘C’ signals and the Tele-powering signal (Interface ‘A4’). The amplitude of the Tele-powering<br />
signal is modulated by a signal simulating the train passing over the Balise. A marker indicates the<br />
expected start of transmission of a telegram.<br />
• Tele-powering signal.<br />
• Balise Passage signal (PB1) and a marker that indicates that the signal has reached the flux level<br />
φ d1 (as a result of the measurement of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna current).<br />
• Interface ‘C’ signals.<br />
• Interface ‘C’ signals with various generated Return Loss conditions.<br />
• Start of transmission marker on Interface ‘C’.<br />
D2.2 Functional requirements<br />
D2.2.1<br />
Basic functions<br />
D2.2.1.1<br />
General<br />
The RSG is functionally divided into the following three parts:<br />
• RSG_1. Generates the Up-link FSK test wave<strong>for</strong>ms (including dynamic patterns).<br />
• RSG_2. Generates the Tele-powering test wave<strong>for</strong>ms (including dynamic patterns).<br />
• RSG_C. RSG_C. Generates the Interface ‘C’ test wave<strong>for</strong>ms (including alteration of the source impedance<br />
during Return Loss testing).
Page 219 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D2.2.1.2<br />
RSG_1<br />
The following Table 39 lists various test cases requiring the RSG_1 functionality. For each case, the required<br />
operational mode is indicated.<br />
Item <strong>Test</strong> Case Operational mode<br />
1 Calibration of 4.2 MHz Balise loop current Continuous mode<br />
2 Calibration of Balise input to output characteristics Continuous mode<br />
3 Cross-talk immunity tests (Up-link) Continuous mode<br />
4 Cross-talk immunity with cables Continuous mode<br />
5 Evaluation of radiation pattern Continuous mode<br />
Single mode<br />
6 Transmission tests Continuous mode<br />
Single mode<br />
7 Electrical Up-link characteristics Continuous mode<br />
Single mode<br />
8 Cross-talk immunity tests Continuous mode<br />
Single mode<br />
9 Cross-talk immunity with cables Continuous mode<br />
Single mode<br />
10 <strong>Test</strong> of handling of various telegrams Continuous mode<br />
Single mode<br />
Switching mode<br />
11 Balise Sequence capability tests Sequence mode<br />
Table 39: <strong>Test</strong> cases versus functionality
Page 220 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D2.2.1.3<br />
RSG_2<br />
The following Table 40 lists various test cases requiring the support of the RSG_2 functionality. For each case<br />
the required operational mode is indicated.<br />
Item <strong>Test</strong> Case Operational mode<br />
1 Calibration of 27 MHz Tele-powering flux Continuous mode CW<br />
2 Balise Up-link con<strong>for</strong>mity measurements Continuous mode CW<br />
3 Balise Tele-powering con<strong>for</strong>mity measurements Continuous mode CW<br />
4 Balise Input to Output characteristics Continuous mode CW<br />
5 Cross-talk immunity with cables Continuous mode CW<br />
6 Measurements of Balise Up-link electrical characteristics Continuous mode CW<br />
Single mode CW<br />
Single mode Toggling<br />
Single mode Non-toggling<br />
7 Delay time and Interface ‘C’ parameter variation Continuous mode CW<br />
8 Interface ‘C’ per<strong>for</strong>mance measurements Continuous mode CW<br />
Single mode CW<br />
9 KER compatibility Single mode CW<br />
10 Calibration of Balise response Continuous mode CW<br />
Table 40: <strong>Test</strong> cases versus functionality<br />
D2.2.1.4<br />
RSG_C<br />
The following Table 41 lists various test cases requiring the RSG_C functionality. For each case the required<br />
operational mode is indicated.<br />
Item <strong>Test</strong> Case Operational mode<br />
1 Up-link signal characteristics Continuous mode<br />
2 Delay time and Interface ‘C’ parameter variation.<br />
Continuous mode<br />
3 Interface ‘C’ per<strong>for</strong>mance measurements Continuous mode<br />
Modified telegram mode<br />
4 Default telegram switching Switching mode<br />
5 Blocking of telegram switching Continuous mode<br />
6 KER compatibility Continuous mode<br />
7 Return Loss testing Continuous mode<br />
Table 41: <strong>Test</strong> cases versus functionality
Page 221 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D2.2.2<br />
Operational modes<br />
D2.2.2.1<br />
RSG_1<br />
D2.2.2.1.1<br />
General<br />
RSG_1 functionality intends to provide, under local or remote control, generation of signals in one of the following<br />
modes.<br />
D2.2.2.1.2<br />
Continuous mode<br />
This includes continuous generation of an FSK signal simulating the transmission of one telegram. The functionality<br />
does not need a trigger to start the generation.<br />
D2.2.2.1.3<br />
Single mode<br />
This includes generation of an FSK signal (simulating the transmission of one telegram) modulated with the<br />
radiation pattern, or with the signal that simulates a Balise passage (PB2). The generation is triggered (either a<br />
software trigger by the LTMS, or a hardware trigger by the LTOM). The RSG provides the Balise centre<br />
marker to the LTOM.<br />
D2.2.2.1.4<br />
Switching mode<br />
This includes generation of an FSK signal (simulating the transmission of one telegram) modulated with the<br />
radiation pattern, or with a signal that simulates a Balise passage (PB2). It simulates a telegram switch. For the<br />
telegram-switching test, the functionality provides a second marker, the telegram-switching marker, which indicates<br />
the beginning of the second telegram.<br />
D2.2.2.1.5<br />
Sequence mode<br />
This includes generation of a sequence of Balise passages with a specific telegram <strong>for</strong> each Balise passage. The<br />
generation is triggered by the LTOM. The RSG provides the Balise centre marker <strong>for</strong> each Balise passage and<br />
an end of group marker.<br />
D2.2.2.2<br />
RSG_2<br />
D2.2.2.2.1<br />
General<br />
The RSG_2 functionality intends to provide, under local or remote control, generation of signals in one of the<br />
following modes.<br />
D2.2.2.2.2<br />
Continuous mode CW<br />
This includes continuous generation of a Continuous Wave (CW) Tele-powering signal at a frequency of<br />
27.095 MHz.
Page 222 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D2.2.2.2.3<br />
Single mode CW<br />
This includes generation of a 27.095 MHz Tele-powering signal, but the flux is modulated to simulate a train<br />
passage (PB1). The generation is triggered (either by a software trigger from the LTMS, or by a hardware trigger<br />
from the LTOM). The RSG provides a marker which indicates that the signal has reached the flux level φ d1 .<br />
D2.2.2.2.4<br />
Single mode non-toggling<br />
This includes generation of a 27.095 MHz Tele-powering signal that is modulated with a Non-toggling AM<br />
signal. The flux is also modulated to simulate a train passage (PB1). The generation is triggered (either by a<br />
software trigger from the LTMS, or by a hardware trigger from the LTOM). The RSG provides a marker which<br />
indicates that the signal has reached the flux level φ d1 .<br />
D2.2.2.2.5<br />
Single mode toggling<br />
This includes generation of a 27.095 MHz Tele-powering signal that is modulated with a Toggling AM signal.<br />
The flux is also modulated to simulate a train passage (PB1). The generation is triggered (either by a software<br />
trigger from the LTMS, or by a hardware trigger from the LTOM). The RSG provides a marker which indicates<br />
that the signal has reached the flux level φ d .<br />
D2.2.2.3<br />
RSG_C<br />
D2.2.2.3.1<br />
General<br />
The RSG_C functionality intends to provide, under local or remote control, generation of signals in one of the<br />
following modes.<br />
D2.2.2.3.2<br />
Continuous mode<br />
This includes the continuous generation of a signal simulating the transmission of one telegram. The RSG provides<br />
a marker that indicates the beginning of the telegram.<br />
D2.2.2.3.3<br />
Switching mode<br />
This includes the continuous generation of a signal simulating the transmission of one telegram. A simulated<br />
telegram switch changes to another telegram after reception of a pulse command from the LTOM. The RSG<br />
provides a marker that indicates the beginning of new the telegram.<br />
D2.2.2.3.4<br />
Modified telegram mode<br />
This includes the continuous generation of a signal simulating the transmission of one telegram. A simulated<br />
event in a telegram (errors or other simulated failures) occurs after reception of a pulse command from the<br />
LTOM. The RSG provides a marker that indicates the resumption of the telegram after the simulated event.
Page 223 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D2.3 External interfaces<br />
D2.3.1<br />
RSG_1<br />
D2.3.1.1<br />
Interface with the LTMS<br />
The LTMS needs specific commands in order to control the RSG <strong>for</strong> simulating the required signal. The required<br />
signal is defined in the test scenario loaded in the LTMS and adjusted via the measurements of the signal<br />
generated by the RSG. There<strong>for</strong>e, power meters connected to the reference loop per<strong>for</strong>m measurements.<br />
D2.3.1.2<br />
Interface with the LTOM<br />
D2.3.1.2.1<br />
Triggering pulse<br />
During the simulation of a defined case, the LTOM issues a suitable trigger pulse towards the RSG in order to<br />
command the generation of signals.<br />
D2.3.1.2.2<br />
Balise centre marker<br />
Correlated with the centre of each Balise, a marker is generated by the RSG. The pulse is received by the<br />
LTOM and used to evaluate the time and odometer co-ordinates of the simulated Balise centre.<br />
D2.3.1.2.3<br />
End of group marker<br />
In order to allow down-loading of new wave<strong>for</strong>ms, immediately after completing the simulation of the current<br />
Balise group, the RSG issues a suitable marker signal. It is received by the LTOM.<br />
D2.3.1.2.4<br />
Telegram switching marker<br />
Correlated with any telegram switching, or other similar events during the simulated Up-link Balise signal, a<br />
suitable marker pulse is generated by the RSG.<br />
D2.3.2<br />
RSG_2<br />
D2.3.2.1<br />
Interface with the LTMS<br />
The LTMS needs specific commands in order to control the RSG <strong>for</strong> simulating the required signal. The required<br />
signal is defined in the test scenario loaded in the LTMS and adjusted via the measurements of the signal<br />
generated by the RSG. There<strong>for</strong>e, power meters connected to the test antennas do measurements.<br />
D2.3.2.2<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Antenna<br />
The <strong>Test</strong> Antenna requires the source impedance of the generator of 50 Ω. The generator tolerates fluctuating<br />
impedance caused by the variation of the test object impedance.
Page 224 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D2.3.2.3<br />
Current Sense (CS) from <strong>Test</strong> Antenna<br />
The needed input power and modulation depth is dependent on the dynamic impedance of the test object. The<br />
correct flux level is related to the measurement per<strong>for</strong>med at the current sense output, considering a specific<br />
calibration procedure.<br />
D2.3.2.4<br />
Interface with the LRRT<br />
The marker of the level φ d1 , provided by the RSG, indicates that the RSG reaches the flux level φ d1 (the interface<br />
denomination is Interface S6).<br />
D2.3.3<br />
RSG_C<br />
D2.3.3.1<br />
Interface with the LTMS<br />
The LTMS needs specific commands in order to control the RSG <strong>for</strong> simulating required signals.<br />
D2.3.3.2<br />
Interface with the LTOM<br />
D2.3.3.2.1<br />
Start of transmission marker<br />
It indicates the start of the transmission of a new message. It is also used <strong>for</strong> some tests to start the LRRT measurements.<br />
D2.3.3.2.2<br />
Switching trigger<br />
This trigger, provided by the LTOM, allows the switch from a first telegram to a second telegram (or simulated<br />
error). The telegram switching must be effected, after reception of trigger, immediately after the preceding<br />
telegram has been completed.
Page 225 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D2.4 Required per<strong>for</strong>mance<br />
D2.4.1<br />
RSG_1<br />
From the list of the required functionality summarised in sub-clause D2.2.1.2, the following minimum per<strong>for</strong>mance<br />
can be extracted when considering the requirements of Part 1 of this Norm:<br />
• Output Level Requirements. The RSG should be able to increase or decrease its output power in<br />
steps of 0.2 dB. The RSG should be able to reach the peak current level I u3 + 20 dB in the applicable<br />
Reference Loop. The accuracy should be better than 0.05 dB, and the resolution should be better than<br />
0.1 dB.<br />
• Up-link Requirements. The RSG should be able to generate the Up-link signal with the following<br />
characteristics.<br />
Characteristics Nominal value Min/max values Accuracy Resolution<br />
Centre Frequency 4.233 MHz 4.033 MHz / 4.433 MHz 20 kHz 1 kHz<br />
Frequency Deviation 282.24 kHz 268.13 kHz / 296.36 kHz 3.0 kHz 10 Hz<br />
Mean data Rate 564.48 kbit/s 550.36 kbit/s / 578.59 kbit/s 0.01 % 0.01 kbit/s<br />
Amplitude Jitter 0 dB +1.5/-2.0 dB 0.15 dB 0.15 dB<br />
MTIE See sub-clause 5.2.2.1.4 See Part 1 of this Norm<br />
Table 42: Up-link characteristics<br />
• Radiation Pattern or Balise Passage Requirements. The RSG should be able to generate these signals<br />
with an accuracy of better than 0.01 ms.<br />
• Operational mode. The RSG should be able to operate in four different modes (see sub-clause<br />
D2.2.2.1).<br />
D2.4.2<br />
RSG_2<br />
From the list of required functionality summarised in sub-clause D2.2.1.3, the following minimum per<strong>for</strong>mance<br />
can be extracted when considering the requirements of Part 1 of this Norm:<br />
• Output Level Requirements. The RSG should be able to increase or decrease its output power in<br />
steps of 0.2 dB. The RSG shall be able to generate a flux level from φ d1 –5 dB to φ d5 .<br />
• Tele-powering Requirements. The RSG should be able to generate the Tele-powering signal with<br />
the following characteristics:<br />
Characteristics Nominal value Min/max values Accuracy Resolution<br />
CW frequency 27.095 MHz 27.090 MHz / 27.100 MHz 0.5 kHz 0.1 kHz<br />
Carrier Noise<br />
< 110 dBc/Hz<br />
Table 43: CW characteristics
Page 226 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Characteristics Nominal value Min/max values Accuracy Resolution<br />
AM frequency 50.0 kHz 49.990 kHz / 50.010 kHz 1 Hz 1 Hz<br />
Modulation depth 100 % 50 % / 100 % 5 % 1 %<br />
Pulse width 2.0 µs / 3.5 µs 0.15 µs 0.1 µs<br />
Pulse width jitter < ± 0.1 µs<br />
Amplitude variation < 0.5 %<br />
Table 44: Non-toggling modulation characteristics<br />
Characteristics Nominal value Min/max values Accuracy Resolution<br />
AM frequency 50.0 kHz 49.990 kHz / 50.010 kHz 1 Hz 1 Hz<br />
Modulation depth 100 % 50 % / 100 % 2 % 1 %<br />
Pulse width 2.0 µs / 3.5 µs 0.15 µs 0.1 µs<br />
Pulse width variation 0.8 µs / 1.5 µs 0.1 µs 0.1 µs<br />
Amplitude variation < 0.5 %<br />
Table 45: Toggling modulation characteristics<br />
• Balise Passage Requirements. The RSG should be able to generate this signal with an accuracy of<br />
better than 0.01 ms.<br />
• Operational mode: The RSG should be able to operate in four different modes (see sub-clause<br />
D2.2.2.2).
Page 227 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D2.4.3<br />
RSG_C<br />
From the list of required functionality summarised in sub-clause D2.2.1.4, the following minimum per<strong>for</strong>mance<br />
can be extracted when considering the requirements of Part 1 of this Norm:<br />
The Interface C1 signal is a Differential Bi-phase level coded signal simulating the transmission of one telegram.<br />
Characteristics Nominal value Min/max values Accuracy Resolution<br />
Signal level (V 2 ) 16.0 Vpp 14 Vpp / 18.0 Vpp 0.1 Vpp 0.1 Vpp<br />
Mean data rate 564.48 kbit/s 564.36 kbit/s / 564.60 kbit/s 20 ppm 0.01 kbit/s<br />
Time jitter 0 ns < ± 60 ns 10 ns<br />
Normal Return Loss<br />
≥ 23 dB<br />
Extreme Return Loss 6 dB 5.5 dB / 6 dB<br />
Table 46: Interface ‘C1’ characteristic<br />
The RSG should also be able to simulate the extremes of the Eye Diagram parameters and respect minimum rise<br />
time and fall time requirements (see Part 1 of this Norm).<br />
The RSG shall be able to simulate various Return Loss conditions used <strong>for</strong> testing the source impedance effect<br />
of the Interface ‘C1’.<br />
Characteristics Nominal value Min/max values Accuracy Resolution<br />
Signal level 22.0 Vpp 20.0 Vpp / 23.0 Vpp 0.15 Vpp 0.1 Vpp<br />
Frequency 8.820 kHz 8.72 kHz / 8.92 kHz 10 Hz 1 Hz<br />
Second Harmonic<br />
< -20 dBc<br />
Harmonic content < -40 dBc (0.1 MHz to 1 MHz)<br />
Normal Return Loss<br />
≥ 23 dB<br />
Extreme Return Loss 4 dB 3.8 dB / 4 dB<br />
Table 47: Interface ‘C6’ characteristics<br />
The RSG shall be able to simulate various Return Loss conditions used <strong>for</strong> testing the source impedance effect<br />
of the Interface ‘C6’.<br />
A possible implementation <strong>for</strong> the Return Loss functionality is found in the document of item IIA in the bibliography<br />
(see Annex I on page 322).
Page 228 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D3 Description of Antenna Positioning Tool (APT)<br />
D3.1 Operational Context<br />
The APT is required to operate in different test configurations involving the equipment shown in Figure 65.<br />
The APT is used to locate either the On-board Antenna or the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna tools in various, X, Y, and Z positions<br />
and with different angular displacements relative to the Balise under test, or to the Reference Loop tools.<br />
Balises or Reference Loops are typically kept in a defined fixed position that constitutes the origin of the spatial<br />
reference system used <strong>for</strong> defining the movements.<br />
The APT is automatically controlled in its basic X, Y, and Z movements either in response to the operator’s<br />
commands via Man Machine Interface in “local control”, or in response to LTMS commands in “remote control”.<br />
Angular displacements, less frequently changed, can be controlled either in a similar automatic way or<br />
manually.<br />
The antenna positioning may be per<strong>for</strong>med in a quasi-static way (e.g., move <strong>for</strong> a defined step towards the target<br />
position, stop and evaluate the current position error, move again one step, and so on up to minimise the position<br />
error) or continuously.<br />
The APT shall also allow <strong>for</strong> static tests where the antenna is held still <strong>for</strong> indefinite time in a given position,<br />
during manual tests or during adjustments of the test set-up.<br />
Finally, the APT shall also allow <strong>for</strong> continuous movements in the longitudinal direction, at nearly constant<br />
speed or with pre-defined speed patterns, in order to simulate the train movement at low speed. For this case,<br />
the tool should provide the LTOM with real-time speed/distance signals or data allowing continuous and accurate<br />
monitoring of longitudinal speed and position of the carried antenna.<br />
The minimum volume of interest <strong>for</strong> the movement is about 3.6 m in the longitudinal direction by 1.5 m in the<br />
lateral direction by 0.4 m in the vertical direction. The required positioning accuracy is higher in the central<br />
volume (“contact zone”), and less demanding outside. A rotation of the table along the three axes (vertical,<br />
longitudinal, and lateral ones) shall also be possible from 0 ° to ±15 ° with sufficient accuracy and resolution.<br />
Operator<br />
LTOM<br />
Man Machine<br />
Interface<br />
Interface V3<br />
Interface V2/V4<br />
APT<br />
Interface T4<br />
Mechanical<br />
Interface Adapters<br />
Interface T2<br />
LTMS<br />
Interface V1<br />
Balise Location and<br />
Transmission System<br />
On-Board<br />
Antenna<br />
BTM + Interface<br />
Adapter<br />
<strong>Test</strong><br />
Antenna<br />
Balise or<br />
Reference Loop<br />
Figure 65: APT operational context
Page 229 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D3.2 Functional requirements<br />
D3.2.1<br />
Basic functions<br />
The APT is basically composed of the following sub-assemblies:<br />
• Fixed, highly stable, mechanical frame holding the whole system.<br />
• Accurately moving (along X, Y, and Z axes) and rotating head (around X, Y, and Z axes).<br />
• Set of mechanical Interface Adapters <strong>for</strong> fixing various types of On-board antennas and of <strong>Test</strong> Antennas<br />
to the moving head.<br />
• Movement actuators and relevant transducers.<br />
• Electronic drives <strong>for</strong> the actuators.<br />
• Controller/supervisor of the drives.<br />
• Interface to the LTMS.<br />
• Interface to the LTOM.<br />
• Diagnostic tools <strong>for</strong> verification of the positioning accuracy and <strong>for</strong> alignment of the moving head<br />
with the fixed test bed holding the Balise or the Reference Loop.<br />
The tool should per<strong>for</strong>m, on external request, one or more basic functions of the following list:<br />
• Interfacing with the operator.<br />
• Interfacing with the LTMS.<br />
• Interfacing with the LTOM.<br />
• Self-checking of all the basic functions of the tool.<br />
• Searching <strong>for</strong> the Positioning Reference Point.<br />
• Recovery of the lost Positioning Reference Point.<br />
• Detection and reporting of the current position.<br />
• Positioning the moving head along the X-axis.<br />
• Positioning the moving head along the Y-axis.<br />
• Positioning the moving head along the Z-axis.<br />
• Rotating the moving head around the X-axis (Tilting).<br />
• Rotating the moving head around the Y-axis (Pitching).<br />
• Rotating the moving head around the Z-axis (Yawing).<br />
• Positioning the moving head to a given point (X, Y, Z) with any combination of angular displacement.<br />
• Continuously moving the moving head along the X-axis, at given longitudinal, vertical and angular<br />
displacements.
Page 230 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D3.2.2<br />
Operational modes<br />
D3.2.2.1<br />
General<br />
The two basic operational modes are “remote control”, via Interface T2 under full supervision of the LTMS, and<br />
“local control”, via a suitable Man Machine Interface under control of the operator.<br />
The Man Machine Interface should permit the same basic operations that can be commanded by the LTMS and<br />
should present in an easily understandable way the same output in<strong>for</strong>mation. This manual mode is typically<br />
used <strong>for</strong> simplified verifications of the test set-up or <strong>for</strong> aligning the Balise or Reference Loop to the required<br />
test position.<br />
Independently of the internal reference system used by the APT controlling logic, all data regarding positioning<br />
of the Balise, and of the antenna, shall be translated in such a way that the operator and the LTMS can always<br />
refer to the reference axes, origins of co-ordinates, and angular displacements defined in Clause 4.5.1 of Part 1<br />
of the Norm.<br />
D3.2.2.2<br />
Idle mode<br />
This is the default mode at power on or on request from the LTMS or the operator. In this mode, a safe standing<br />
still condition is achieved. This mode is typically used when test staff is working in the area of the test bed. It is<br />
recommended, <strong>for</strong> this operational mode, that high safety level is ensured against unwanted movements of the<br />
moving head.<br />
D3.2.2.3<br />
Self test mode<br />
This mode is aimed at installation and at maintenance support. The basic functionality of the tool is verified<br />
with suitable self-test routines. This operational mode may be invoked at the beginning of the test session or<br />
whenever it is deemed necessary by the LTMS or by the operator. The test may consist, <strong>for</strong> example, in automatically<br />
positioning the antenna at pre-stored checkpoints and in verifying, with the help of absolute position<br />
sensors or precision tools, the correctness of the reached positions.<br />
D3.2.2.4<br />
Recovery of the lost position<br />
If the APT looses, <strong>for</strong> any reason, the control of the current antenna position, it can start a recovery procedure<br />
after in<strong>for</strong>ming the operator (through the MMI) and/or the LTMS with a suitable error code. This procedure<br />
includes the return to the nearest “home position” equipped with absolute position sensors, the detection of such<br />
position and the re-initialisation of the software. The help of the operator can be invoked and guided if some<br />
action must be per<strong>for</strong>med manually.
Page 231 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D3.2.2.5<br />
Quasi static antenna positioning<br />
This mode is required <strong>for</strong> all Balise tests and <strong>for</strong> most tests of the On-board equipment.<br />
The antenna positioning is done with discrete steps along the X, Y, and Z axes, possibly following a timeoptimised<br />
path. Typically, only the initial and the final positions are of interest in this type of operation. The<br />
intermediate ones have no specific interest <strong>for</strong> the measurements and <strong>for</strong> the required accuracy.<br />
However, in some cases, when objects exposed to the moving antenna might be present the test bed, it could be<br />
necessary to put some constraints to the free movement towards a given final position. A case when this is<br />
absolutely needed is, <strong>for</strong> example, in those tests that require the debris box in the test bed.<br />
Some tests require measurements with the antenna in very numerous different positions. In such cases, the<br />
positioning time takes an important part of the overall test time, there<strong>for</strong>e it is recommended to use positioning<br />
algorithms that combine the movements along the various axes in such a way as to minimise the travelling time.<br />
Depending on the construction of the moving head and on the type of mechanical Interface Adapters used <strong>for</strong><br />
fixing the Antenna, it may be necessary that the positioning algorithms provide means to compensate <strong>for</strong> the X,<br />
Y, and Z position errors introduced by angular displacement (Tilting and Pitching) around axes not coincident<br />
with the antenna Reference Axes.<br />
D3.2.2.6<br />
Continuous longitudinal antenna movement<br />
This mode is required <strong>for</strong> those tests that use low speed, real movements of the antenna.<br />
Keeping constant the lateral, vertical, and angular displacements, it shall be possible to run a continuous longitudinal<br />
movement at nearly constant speed in order to simulate a Balise passage at low speed. It should be possible<br />
to achieve constant speed of 0.2 m/s 2 to 0.5 m/s 2 <strong>for</strong> the whole contact zone centred over the Balise under<br />
tests (e.g., <strong>for</strong> X included between -0.5 m and 0.5 m).<br />
A typical continuous movement is characterised by a constant acceleration phase lasting <strong>for</strong> about 0.3 m to<br />
0.5 m, a constant speed phase lasting <strong>for</strong> about 1 m to 2 m, and by a constant deceleration phase lasting <strong>for</strong> about<br />
0.3 m to 0.5 m.<br />
Also in this case, it may be necessary that the movement control algorithms provide means to compensate <strong>for</strong> the<br />
X, Y, and Z position errors introduced by angular displacement (Tilting and Pitching) around axes not coincident<br />
with the antenna Reference Axes.
Page 232 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D3.3 External interfaces<br />
D3.3.1<br />
Interface T2<br />
The Interface T2 is used to exchange commands and data between the LTMS and the APT.<br />
The LTMS commands are used to set the APT in the required operating mode and to get the desired antenna<br />
position or movement.<br />
The following list gives examples of possible commands and data from the LTMS to the APT:<br />
• Switch to local control.<br />
• Switch to remote control.<br />
• Emergency Stop.<br />
• Send APT configuration data.<br />
• Go to the idle status.<br />
• Return to “home”.<br />
• Per<strong>for</strong>m self-test.<br />
• Report current position.<br />
• Go to the next position X, Y, and Z with the given angular displacements and movement constraints.<br />
• Move from the current position along the X-axis (or Y-axis or Z-axis) by a given step value with the<br />
given angular displacements and movement constraints.<br />
• Per<strong>for</strong>m a continuous longitudinal movement within the defined X co-ordinate range, with the given<br />
lateral, vertical, and angular displacements and at a required top speed.<br />
A list of possible answers from APT to LTMS is:<br />
• Confirmation of successful execution of a received commands.<br />
• In<strong>for</strong>mation about possible abortion or unsuccessful execution of a received command.<br />
• APT current Status (e.g., “not ready” <strong>for</strong> a new command, “failure condition”).<br />
• Report about the current position and angular displacements.<br />
D3.3.2<br />
Man Machine Interface<br />
The Man Machine Interface should be realised in such a way as to allow the operator to send, in an easy way,<br />
the same commands and data to the APT functions as from the LTMS.<br />
The output data from the APT should also be graphically displayed in order to allow the operator to easily check<br />
the correct execution of the test steps during both the remote and the local control. Acoustical warnings should<br />
be issued when the operator is required to per<strong>for</strong>m critical actions.<br />
The “local control” via the Man machine Interface should be automatically disabled during the “remote control”<br />
operation.<br />
Nonetheless, an Emergency Stop command should be easily available to the operator to quickly overrun any<br />
other command or internal operational condition in case of dangerous situations.
Page 233 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D3.3.3<br />
Interface V3<br />
The APT sends real-time in<strong>for</strong>mation to the LTOM about the current distance run by the antenna along the<br />
longitudinal direction from a given starting point, the instantaneous value of the longitudinal speed and the<br />
current direction of the movement.<br />
This in<strong>for</strong>mation is processed by the LTOM in order to monitor the current longitudinal position and speed of<br />
the antenna and to control accordingly the required test procedures.<br />
More details on this interface are given in sub-clause D1.3.4 on page 214.<br />
D3.4 Required per<strong>for</strong>mance<br />
D3.4.1<br />
<strong>Test</strong> bed characteristics<br />
The following per<strong>for</strong>mance is required of the basic functions of the APT:<br />
• The minimum volume of interest <strong>for</strong> the positioning is about 3.6 m in the longitudinal direction, by<br />
1.5 m in the lateral direction, by 0.5 m in the vertical direction. The required positioning accuracy is<br />
higher in the central volume (“contact zone”), and less demanding outside. A rotation of the table<br />
along the three axes (X, Y, and Z) shall also be possible. In particular the Pitching angle should range<br />
from 0 ° to ±5 °, the Tilting angle from 0 ° to ±10 °, and the Yawing angle from 0 ° to ±5 °. These<br />
angular displacements may occur in any possible combination.<br />
• A continuous longitudinal movement of the antenna in both <strong>for</strong>ward and backward direction should<br />
be possible in a range of 2 m to 4 m, at a nearly constant speed of 0.1 m/s to 0.5 m/s, with a maximum<br />
acceleration of the order of ±0.3 m/s 2 .<br />
• The available power <strong>for</strong> movement control should be sufficient <strong>for</strong> ensuring the required acceleration/deceleration<br />
values.<br />
• The quasi-static positioning in X and Y directions may be limited to only positive co-ordinates. <strong>Test</strong>s<br />
requiring negative co-ordinates can be done by properly rotating the Balise and the antenna. For such<br />
needs, the Yaw angle can also be set to ±180 °. In a similar way, by rotating the Balise and antenna<br />
by a Yaw angle of ±90 °, it is possible to trans<strong>for</strong>m a transversal movement into a longitudinal one.<br />
This allows some economy both in the APT and in the requirements on the size of the test room.<br />
• In order not to get disturbances of the tests from the surrounding environment, there shall be a space<br />
free from metallic objects around the Balise, and in the whole space occupied by the antenna in the<br />
various test positions, as indicated in sub-clause 4.1.1 of this Norm.<br />
• The vertical and angular positioning of the antenna may be done with some manual intervention coordinated<br />
and assisted by the APT logic.<br />
• The mechanical frame holding the moving parts shall have enough inertia and stability to easily absorb<br />
possible counter-effects of the movement and to minimise vibrations of the carried antenna.<br />
• The maximum payload of the APT should be of about 30 kg, including the weight of the antenna, the<br />
possible mechanical frames <strong>for</strong> its mounting, the debris (see sub-clause 5.2.3) or the metallic objects<br />
(see sub-clause 5.3.7) used in the tests. The maximum size of the antenna is about<br />
640 mm × 640 mm × (h = 200) mm. The size and the shape of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna are given in subclause<br />
J3.3.<br />
• Enough free space should be required around the nominal Balise area, in order to allow <strong>for</strong> the installation<br />
of the debris box (see sub-clause D5.2), or the reference units simulating the effect of guard<br />
rails, metallic sleepers, metallic plates, cables or metallic masses in the tracks, as defined in subclause<br />
D5.3.<br />
• Suitable protections (preferably APT independent) shall be used <strong>for</strong> avoiding dangerous situations <strong>for</strong><br />
both personnel and equipment in case of failure or malfunction of the APT controlling devices.
Page 234 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D3.4.2<br />
Positioning Accuracy<br />
Three main areas are identified <strong>for</strong> the antenna positioning/movement in a plane parallel to the XY plane, at a<br />
given height Z:<br />
• The “contact zone”, a square delimited by the lines X = ±500 mm and Y= ±400 mm;<br />
• The “side-lobes zone” a square delimited by the lines X = ±1400 mm and Y = ±1400 mm, with the<br />
exclusion of the contact zone;<br />
• The “cross-talk protected zone”, a square delimited by the lines X = ± 3600 mm and Y = ±3600 mm,<br />
with the exclusion of the contact and the side lobe zones.<br />
The X, Y, and Z co-ordinates are referred to the Balise Reference System defined in sub-clause 4.5.1 of part 1 of<br />
this Norm.<br />
The positioning accuracy and resolution depend on the considered zone. Finer resolution and better accuracy<br />
are required <strong>for</strong> the inner zones. The whole ranges <strong>for</strong> the antenna positioning parameters with the respective<br />
resolution/accuracy requirements are summarised in the following Table 48. Similar indications <strong>for</strong> the Balise<br />
positioning are summarised in Table 49 as well.<br />
It should be observed that, in the event of achieving better accuracy in Balise positioning than the maximum<br />
tolerances stated by Table 49, this will increase the allowed maximum tolerances of Table 48 accordingly. This<br />
is applicable to positions in the contact zone and to angular displacements.<br />
Parameter Range of variation Minimum<br />
Resolution<br />
Maximum<br />
Tolerance<br />
Z 0 mm to +400 mm 10 mm ±1 mm<br />
X - contact zone -500 mm to +500 mm 5 mm ±1 mm<br />
X - side-lobe zone -1400 mm to +1400 mm 10 mm ±2 mm<br />
X - cross-talk prot. zone -3600 mm to +3600 mm 50 mm ±10 mm<br />
Y - contact zone -400 mm to +400 mm 5 mm ±1 mm<br />
Y - side-lobe zone -1400 mm to +1400 mm 10 mm ±2 mm<br />
Y - cross-talk prot. zone -3000 mm to +3000 mm 50 mm ±10 mm<br />
Ti tilting -10 ° to +10°<br />
(0 ° to 20 ° with adapter)<br />
Pi pitching -5 ° to +5°<br />
(0 ° to 10 ° with adapter)<br />
1 ° ±0.25 °<br />
1 ° ±0.25 °<br />
Yo yawing -5 ° to +5 °<br />
(0 °to 10 ° with adapter)<br />
-90 ° to +90 ° (manually)<br />
-180 ° to +180 ° (manually)<br />
1 °<br />
90 °<br />
90 °<br />
±0.25 °<br />
±0.25 °<br />
±0.25 °<br />
Table 48: Antenna positioning ranges, resolution, and accuracy
Page 235 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Parameter Range of variation Minimum<br />
Resolution<br />
Maximum<br />
Tolerance<br />
Z -210 mm to –93 mm 10 mm ±1 mm<br />
X -3000 mm to +3000 mm 500 mm ±1 mm<br />
Y -1400 mm to +1400 mm 200 mm ±1 mm<br />
Ti tilting -2 ° to +2 ° 1 ° ±0.25 °<br />
Pi pitching -5 ° to +5 ° 1 ° ±0.25 °<br />
Yo yawing -10 ° to +10 °<br />
-90 ° to +90 °<br />
-180 ° to +180 °<br />
1 °<br />
90 °<br />
90 °<br />
±0.25 °<br />
±0.25 °<br />
±0.25 °<br />
Table 49: Balise positioning ranges, resolution, and accuracy
Page 236 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D4 Description of Off-line Telegram Generator (OLTG)<br />
D4.1 Operational Context<br />
The OLTG is the tool used <strong>for</strong> generation of test telegrams, and <strong>for</strong> checking received telegrams, in accordance<br />
with the coding requirements of Part 1 of this Norm. This includes:<br />
• Generation of test telegrams to be used at Interface ‘C’ and Interface ‘A’.<br />
• Checking of telegrams received at Interface ‘A’ and Interface ‘V’.<br />
• Generation of telegrams <strong>for</strong> the internal Up-link Balise memory (the Default Telegram).<br />
The OLTG is intended <strong>for</strong> use in the simplified environment illustrated by Figure 66 below.<br />
Operator<br />
Telegram<br />
Generator (OLTG)<br />
Programming<br />
Equipment<br />
Up-link<br />
telegrams<br />
Laboratory <strong>Test</strong><br />
Management System<br />
(LTMS)<br />
Telegrams at<br />
Interface ‘V1’<br />
Reference Receiver<br />
(LRRT)<br />
Telegrams at<br />
Interface ‘A’<br />
Reference Signal<br />
Generator (RSG)<br />
Telegrams at<br />
Interface ‘A’<br />
Telegrams at Interface ‘C’<br />
Antenna +<br />
BTM function<br />
Up-link<br />
Balise<br />
Balise Location and<br />
Transmission System<br />
Figure 66: OLTG Operational Context<br />
The OLTG environment includes the following:<br />
• Antenna and BTM functionality. The tests of the Antenna and BTM functionality need the OLTG<br />
<strong>for</strong> generation of test telegrams intended <strong>for</strong> transmission via the Interface ‘A1’ (Up-link functionality).<br />
It can also be used <strong>for</strong> checking the actually received telegrams via Interface ‘V’.<br />
• Up-link Balise. The tests of the Up-link Balise per<strong>for</strong>mance need the OLTG <strong>for</strong> generation of telegrams<br />
intended <strong>for</strong> transmission via Interface ‘C1’. The same applies <strong>for</strong> telegrams stored in the internal<br />
Balise memory (the Default Telegram). The OLTG can also be used <strong>for</strong> checking the actually<br />
transmitted telegrams via Interface ‘A1’.<br />
• Operator. Human operator to operate the OLTG.
Page 237 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
• <strong>Test</strong> Management System (LTMS). The LTMS is in charge of the management of all the test procedures<br />
and test tools.<br />
• Reference Signal Generator (RSG). The RSG is in charge of the transmission of Up-link telegrams<br />
at Interface ‘A1’ and Interface ‘C1’.<br />
• Reference Receiver (LRRT). The LRRT is in charge of the reception of Up-link telegrams at Interface<br />
‘A1’.<br />
• Programming Equipment. The (company specific) programming equipment is in charge of the programming<br />
the internal Balise memory with the intended Default Telegram.<br />
D4.2 Functional requirements<br />
D4.2.1<br />
Basic functions<br />
The following functions should be implemented in the OLTG:<br />
• Encoding function. This function is used to trans<strong>for</strong>m the user data into a <strong>Eurobalise</strong> telegram.<br />
• Decoding function. Considering that the OTGL should be used as reference tool <strong>for</strong> the coding strategy<br />
verification, this function is integrated in order to check the integrity of telegrams against the coding<br />
requirements possibly generated by other sources. This function is also used to verify that a string<br />
of bits (341 bits or 1023 bits) fulfils the coding requirements.<br />
• MMI functions. These functions are used as interface between the OLTG and other tools or the operator.<br />
The Man Machine Interface should be graphically based, and provide the following functionality.<br />
For the encoding function:<br />
• Entering user data to be encoded.<br />
• Storing user data in a file.<br />
• Encoding more than one telegram.<br />
• Storing encoded telegrams in a file.<br />
For the decoding function:<br />
• Loading files containing the encoded telegram.<br />
• On the screen displaying the CRC checking of the telegrams and the user data after decoding.<br />
• Storing user data in a file.
Page 238 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D4.2.2<br />
Functional architecture<br />
The Telegram Generator could be composed of five main parts (see Figure 67).<br />
• Graphical User Interface (GUI). Manages the calls of the different software functions.<br />
• User Data Interface. For entering and storing the user data and displaying the result of decoding. The<br />
user data can be typed by the operator or loaded from a file.<br />
• Encoding/Decoding. Encodes the user data and decodes the encoded telegram.<br />
• Encoded Telegram Interface. Displays the encoded telegram resulting from the above operation and the<br />
encoded telegram loaded from a file by the “Printout/File Interface”.<br />
• Printout/File Interface. Prints the encoded telegram, or stores/loads it to/from a file.<br />
User Data<br />
User Data File<br />
User Data<br />
Interface<br />
GUI<br />
Encoding /<br />
Decoding<br />
Encoded Telegram<br />
Interface<br />
Printout/File<br />
Interface<br />
Telegram File<br />
Printer<br />
Figure 67: Functional Architecture of the OLTG
Page 239 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D4.3 External Interfaces<br />
D4.3.1<br />
User Data<br />
D4.3.1.1<br />
General<br />
User Data interfacing should be provided on various levels:<br />
1. High level description using packets and variables according to ERTMS/ETCS language.<br />
2. Using hexadecimal representation of User Bits.<br />
Interfacing by means of in<strong>for</strong>mation from file, and interactive interfacing via the MMI should be supported.<br />
The OLTG should provide handling of several consecutive telegrams stored within the same file.<br />
D4.3.1.2<br />
Packet and variables representation<br />
User Data is entered and displayed in accordance with the packets and the variables defined by the<br />
ERTMS/ETCS language. During interactive input (i.e., not from file), some variables are possible to automatically<br />
determine. This should be supported by the OLTG. Automatic padding (with “ones”) should be supported<br />
when required.<br />
D4.3.1.3<br />
Hexadecimal representation<br />
In this case the representation should be in accordance with the <strong>for</strong>mat of Table 20 in sub-clause A2 on page<br />
129.<br />
D4.3.2<br />
Telegram File<br />
The OLTG should provide encoded telegram data consistent with the input User Data. This encoded data<br />
should be stored on file and displayed via the Graphical User Interface.<br />
Additionally, the OLTG should be able to provide decoded User Data, based on encoded telegrams (from file).<br />
This decoded data should be stored on file and displayed via the Graphical User Interface.<br />
The <strong>for</strong>mat of the encoded telegram file should be in accordance with the representation exemplified in Table 22<br />
in sub-clause A2 on page 131.<br />
D4.3.3<br />
Printout<br />
The OLTG should support printing of all relevant input and output in<strong>for</strong>mation.
Page 240 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D5 Description of <strong>Test</strong> Management System (LTMS)<br />
D5.1 Operational Context<br />
The LTMS is in charge of automatic control and management of the <strong>Eurobalise</strong> laboratory tests regarding trackside<br />
Balise, On-board Transmission Equipment, and overall transmission systems (combinations of Balises and<br />
On-board Transmission Equipment). It controls all the instruments and the tools required <strong>for</strong> a given test procedure,<br />
collects and analyses the relevant measurement data, and summarises the test results in final <strong>Test</strong> Bulletins.<br />
A simplified context diagram <strong>for</strong> the tool is given in Figure 68. It shows the external interfaces used <strong>for</strong> commands<br />
and data exchange with the controlled equipment. The commands are specific <strong>for</strong> each controlled device.<br />
The exchanged data is generally of two distinct types. One is configuration settings exchanged at the start up of<br />
a test procedure. The other is on-line raw test data resulting from the execution of the test routines.<br />
V4<br />
V2<br />
TEST<br />
OPERATOR<br />
LTOM<br />
LRRT<br />
V3<br />
T4<br />
M M I<br />
S1 – S5<br />
T1<br />
S6<br />
APT<br />
RSG<br />
T2<br />
T3<br />
T5<br />
LTM S<br />
POW ER<br />
M E T E R S<br />
T6<br />
T7<br />
V1<br />
BTM +<br />
IN T E R F A C E<br />
V1<br />
Adapter *<br />
Network<br />
A nalyser<br />
Environmental<br />
Sensors<br />
* C om pany Specific<br />
Figure 68: LTMS operational context
Page 241 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
The tool interacts with the <strong>Test</strong> Operator, via a Graphical Man Machine Interface, <strong>for</strong> all the needs of personalisation,<br />
control, and monitoring of the test procedures.<br />
The tool fulfils the following basic operations:<br />
• Guiding the operator during the preparation of the test set-up and displaying the progress status of the<br />
test procedure as well as the results of the current step.<br />
• Controlling the APT <strong>for</strong> getting the positions required <strong>for</strong> each test step.<br />
• Controlling the LTOM <strong>for</strong> the current speed measurement, or simulation, as well as <strong>for</strong> initial settings<br />
and synchronisation.<br />
• Controlling the RGS <strong>for</strong> simulating the required signals at Interface ‘A’ and/or at Interface ‘C’.<br />
• Controlling the LRRT, the Power Meters, and the Network Analyser <strong>for</strong> measuring the characteristics<br />
of the signals at Interface ‘A’ or at Interface ‘C’.<br />
• Controlling the operational mode of the Antenna/BTM functionality under test, and collecting the<br />
relevant test data.<br />
• Controlling the environmental sensors <strong>for</strong> periodical measurements of ambient temperature and humidity<br />
within the test bed.<br />
• Analysing and checking the correctness of the measurement results.<br />
• Recording results and conditions of each test step in a structured way, and printing of the summary<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Bulletins.<br />
D5.2 Functional requirements<br />
D5.2.1<br />
Basic Functions<br />
The LTMS is used <strong>for</strong> automatic management of those procedures that require long sequences of elementary test<br />
steps.<br />
The LTMS is basically composed of a Personal Computer equipped with I/O Interface Boards, <strong>for</strong> interfacing<br />
the tools and the instruments indicated in Figure 68. Such tools and instruments typically per<strong>for</strong>m the front-end<br />
functions required <strong>for</strong> each test procedure, which can generically be distinguished in generation of input signals<br />
<strong>for</strong> the equipment under test and measurement of its output signals. The LTMS co-ordinates the operation of<br />
such instruments according to the needs of each test procedure, and records in a structured way all the relevant<br />
data.<br />
The operator controls the operational mode of the tool. In particular, he commands the start or the abortion of a<br />
defined test sequence. The tool provides an on-line operational guide to the operator when manual intervention<br />
is required during the progress of the test. Visual or acoustic warnings are issued in order to alert, in case of<br />
critical occurrences or when a manual intervention is needed.<br />
Specific self-tests of the various interconnected tools may be invoked <strong>for</strong> allowing procedures <strong>for</strong> re-calibration<br />
or trouble-shooting.<br />
The tool should per<strong>for</strong>m, in various combinations, the following basic functions:<br />
• Support to editing, debugging and personalisation of the test procedures.<br />
• Interfacing with the <strong>Test</strong> Operator.<br />
• Interfacing with the RSG.<br />
• Interfacing with the APT.<br />
• Interfacing with the LTOM.<br />
• Interfacing with the LRRT.
Page 242 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
• Interfacing with Power Meters.<br />
• Interfacing with the Network Analyser.<br />
• Interfacing with the BTM functionality.<br />
• Interfacing with the temperature and humidity sensors.<br />
• Interfacing with the software tool that handles and stores the raw test data and produces the summary<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Bulletins.<br />
• Closed-loop control of the Up-link current level.<br />
• Closed loop control of the Tele-powering current level.<br />
• Execution of an expandable set of pre-compiled test procedures.<br />
D5.2.2<br />
Operational Modes<br />
D5.2.2.1<br />
General<br />
In order to ensure flexibility of use, combined with guarantee of correct handling of the test results, the LTMS<br />
should allow a selective operator access, via a suitable password handling, to the editing and the updating resources<br />
of the tool.<br />
The tool should allow the following possibilities <strong>for</strong> a generic operator:<br />
• Logging-in <strong>for</strong> entering basic in<strong>for</strong>mation regarding <strong>Test</strong> Operators and <strong>Test</strong> Set-up that are reported<br />
in the <strong>Test</strong> Bulletins.<br />
• Open/Close a given test procedure.<br />
• Start the execution of a pre-selected test procedure.<br />
• Abort the execution of the test procedure in execution.<br />
• Restart the execution of a given test procedure from the step at which it was possibly interrupted.<br />
For authorised operators the following additional possibilities should be allowed:<br />
• Editing a test procedure by introducing pauses, deletion, replacement, insertion or skip of individual<br />
test steps.<br />
• Updating input data <strong>for</strong> a given test procedure.<br />
• Step by step execution of the test procedure <strong>for</strong> troubleshooting purposes.<br />
D5.2.2.2<br />
Idle and self-test mode<br />
This is the default mode of the tool at power on or at the conclusion of a given test procedure. In this mode, all<br />
the controlled tools should be kept inactive. The local control condition should be enabled <strong>for</strong> each of them and<br />
their outputs set to a safe status.<br />
Under command of the operator, the tool should allow the individual verification of correct behaviour of the<br />
external interfaces and of the interconnected tools and instruments.
Page 243 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D5.2.2.3<br />
<strong>Test</strong> procedure control<br />
D5.2.2.3.1<br />
Con<strong>for</strong>mity tests <strong>for</strong> Reference Loops<br />
The mutual impedance between two Reference Loops of the same typology is measured in a number of different<br />
reciprocal positions during free space conditions. The measurements are compared with the expected data that<br />
are derived both from theoretical evaluations and from analogous measurements on validated Reference Loops.<br />
In these measurements, the LTMS is required to control:<br />
• The APT <strong>for</strong> locating one of the two Reference Loops under test in the required test positions.<br />
• The Network Analyser, with S-parameter <strong>Test</strong> Set, <strong>for</strong> generation of the input test signal and <strong>for</strong><br />
measurement of the respective test output.<br />
• The software tool <strong>for</strong> handling and storing the test data, as well as <strong>for</strong> checking the fulfilment of the<br />
con<strong>for</strong>mity requirements, and <strong>for</strong> evaluating the Reference Loop compensation factors (B factor see<br />
sub-clause H2.4 on page 305).<br />
The procedure applies to both typologies of Reference Loops (i.e., Standard and Reduced sizes), and to both<br />
transmission channels (i.e., Up-link transmission and Tele-powering).<br />
D5.2.2.3.2<br />
Calibration measurements <strong>for</strong> Balise tests<br />
D5.2.2.3.2.1<br />
Tele-powering flux<br />
These measurements provide basic reference data from the combined use of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna, which generates<br />
the Tele-powering field in the air-gap, and of the Reference Loop that receives the concatenated flux. The resulting<br />
test data is a set of values <strong>for</strong> the 27 MHz current to be driven into the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in order to get a<br />
given concatenated flux into the Reference Loop, <strong>for</strong> all required positions of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna and <strong>for</strong> all debris<br />
conditions over the Reference Loop. The recorded values are used <strong>for</strong> checking, by comparison, the transmission<br />
properties of the Balise in the same test conditions.<br />
The following tools are controlled by the LTMS <strong>for</strong> this test:<br />
• The APT <strong>for</strong> locating the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna very accurately to the required test positions referred to the<br />
centre of the Reference Loop. Two main zones of the test bed are involved in this test: “Contact<br />
Zone” and “Side Lobe Zone”.<br />
• The RSG <strong>for</strong> generating a controlled current into the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in order to get a defined flux level<br />
into the Reference Loop. The flux level is measured indirectly by means of a Power Meter connected<br />
at the Reference Loop output. The LTMS closes the control loop of the 27 MHz current including<br />
RSG, <strong>Test</strong> Antenna, Reference Loop, and Power Meter.<br />
• The Power Meter <strong>for</strong> measuring the current level entering into the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna and the output power<br />
delivered by the Reference Loop <strong>for</strong> each test condition.<br />
• The Environmental Sensors <strong>for</strong> measuring, at regular intervals, the ambient temperature and humidity<br />
near the test bed.<br />
• The software tool <strong>for</strong> handling and storing the Tele-powering calibration data that are used by other<br />
Balise test procedures.
Page 244 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D5.2.2.3.2.2<br />
Up-link Balise signal<br />
These measurements provide basic reference data from the combined use of the Reference Loop, which generates<br />
the Up-link field in the air-gap, and of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna that receives a signal induced at its receiving coil.<br />
The resulting test data is a set of values <strong>for</strong> the Up-link power received by the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna <strong>for</strong> all the required<br />
test positions and debris types over the Reference Loop, when a given Up-link current is driven into the same<br />
Reference Loop. The recorded values are used <strong>for</strong> checking, by comparison, the transmission properties of the<br />
Balise in the same test conditions.<br />
The following tools are controlled by the LTMS <strong>for</strong> this test:<br />
• The APT <strong>for</strong> locating the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in the same positions used <strong>for</strong> the Tele-powering flux measurements<br />
as well as in additional positions of the “Cross-Talk protected Zone”.<br />
• The RSG <strong>for</strong> driving a controlled Up-link current into the Reference Loop. The current is measured<br />
by means of a probe whose output is read by the Power Meter. The LTMS closes the control loop of<br />
the 4.2 MHz current including RSG, Reference Loop, current probe, and Power Meter.<br />
• The Power Meter <strong>for</strong> measuring the current entering into the Reference Loop as well as the Up-link<br />
signal received by the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna at each test condition.<br />
• The Environmental Sensors <strong>for</strong> measuring, at regular intervals, the ambient temperature and the humidity<br />
near the test bed.<br />
• The software tool <strong>for</strong> handling and storing the Up-link calibration data that are used by other Balise<br />
test procedures.<br />
D5.2.2.3.3<br />
Balise Con<strong>for</strong>mity tests<br />
D5.2.2.3.3.1<br />
Tele-powering flux<br />
The amplitude of the 27 MHz current, needed <strong>for</strong> concatenating a defined flux level with the Balise active area,<br />
is measured <strong>for</strong> each position of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna. In such positions, the achievement of the desired flux level is<br />
indirectly verified by measuring the Up-link signal received, from the Balise under test, by a 4.2 MHz Antenna<br />
kept in a fixed central position. The results are compared with the Tele-powering calibration data determined<br />
<strong>for</strong> the applicable Reference Loop.<br />
The following tools are controlled by the LTMS <strong>for</strong> this test:<br />
• The APT <strong>for</strong> locating the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna at defined test positions referred to the centre of the Balise<br />
under test. The same test positions as those used <strong>for</strong> the Tele-powering calibration measurements are<br />
used <strong>for</strong> this test as well.<br />
• The RSG <strong>for</strong> driving the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna with a 27 MHz current that produces the same Tele-powering<br />
flux that was used during the Tele-powering calibration phase <strong>for</strong> the same test condition. The LTMS<br />
closes the controlling loop of the 27 MHz current including RSG, <strong>Test</strong> Antenna, Current Probe, and<br />
Power Meter.<br />
• The Power Meter <strong>for</strong> measuring the 27 MHz current entering into the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna and the Up-link<br />
signal received, from the Balise under test at each test condition, by the 4.2 MHz Antenna.<br />
• The Environmental Sensors <strong>for</strong> measuring, at regular intervals, the ambient temperature and the humidity<br />
near the test bed.<br />
• The software tool <strong>for</strong> handling and storing the Tele-powering con<strong>for</strong>mity results and <strong>for</strong> checking the<br />
fulfilment of the respective requirements.
Page 245 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D5.2.2.3.3.2<br />
Up-link signal<br />
An Activation Antenna located in fixed position is driven by the RSG in order to power the Balise. Its input<br />
current is controlled in such a way as to concatenate a suitable Tele-powering flux into the Balise, producing the<br />
same Up-link signal that was measured during the Up-link calibration measurements with the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in<br />
central position. Keeping the 27 MHz current constant during all other measurements, the Up-link signal received<br />
by the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in all the test positions is measured and checked against the reference Up-link calibration<br />
data.<br />
The following tools are controlled by the LTMS <strong>for</strong> this test:<br />
• The APT <strong>for</strong> locating the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna very accurately in the same positions as those used <strong>for</strong> the Uplink<br />
calibration measurements.<br />
• The RSG <strong>for</strong> driving the Activation Antenna with a controlled 27 MHz current that produces the same<br />
Up-link signal as in the calibration phase with the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna in central position. The LTMS closes<br />
the control loop of the 27 MHz current including RSG, Activation Antenna, <strong>Test</strong> Antenna, and Power<br />
Meter. When applicable, the RSG is also controlled <strong>for</strong> generation of the Interface ‘C’ signals, presenting<br />
the required electrical characteristics and carrying the chosen test telegram.<br />
• The Power Meter <strong>for</strong> measuring the current level entering into the Activation Antenna and the Uplink<br />
signal received, from the Balise under test, by the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna at each test condition.<br />
• The Environmental Sensors <strong>for</strong> measuring, at regular intervals, the ambient temperature and the humidity<br />
near the test bed.<br />
• The software tool <strong>for</strong> handling and storing the Up-link con<strong>for</strong>mity results and <strong>for</strong> checking the fulfilment<br />
of the respective requirements.<br />
D5.2.2.3.4<br />
Input to Output Characteristics<br />
The <strong>Test</strong> Antenna that is driven by the RSG with a suitable 27 MHz current, corresponding to different flux<br />
levels, is used <strong>for</strong> powering the Balise. The Up-link signal received by the same <strong>Test</strong> Antenna is measured and<br />
recorded <strong>for</strong> each flux level condition. The flux levels are determined on the basis of Tele-powering calibration<br />
measurements giving, <strong>for</strong> the actual position of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna and <strong>for</strong> a known flux level, the 27 MHz current<br />
to be driven into its Tele-powering coil. The measured Up-link signal power is translated into Up-link current<br />
encircling the applicable Reference Area on the basis of the Up-link calibration measurements. The set of recorded<br />
values of flux level versus the corresponding Up-link signal current is used <strong>for</strong> plotting the Balise I/O<br />
characteristics. The software tool <strong>for</strong> handling and storing the I/O characteristic results is also used <strong>for</strong> checking<br />
the fulfilment of the respective requirements.<br />
The same tools of the Up-link con<strong>for</strong>mity tests are controlled by the LTMS also <strong>for</strong> this test with the exception<br />
of the Activation Antenna that is replaced by the activation coil of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna. This test is per<strong>for</strong>med only<br />
at the central position of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna.
Page 246 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D5.2.2.3.5<br />
Electrical characteristics of the Up-link signal<br />
The electrical characteristics of the Up-link signal are evaluated in the elementary test steps listed hereafter. The<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Antenna powers the Balise, to the required flux levels, from its central position <strong>for</strong> all the test steps. The<br />
Up-link signal received by the same antenna is processed by the LRRT and the final test results are stored and<br />
<strong>for</strong>matted by the LTMS.<br />
The following characteristics of the Up-link Balise signal are verified, both in static and in dynamic, simulated<br />
conditions:<br />
• Centre frequency and frequency deviation.<br />
• Mean data rate.<br />
• Maximum time interval error (MTIE).<br />
• Amplitude jitter.<br />
• Signal bandwidth.<br />
• Balise start-up behaviour.<br />
• Balise behaviour in “non-toggling” Tele-powering mode.<br />
• Time delay between Interface ‘C’ data signal and air-gap Up-link signal.<br />
• Blocking signal at Interface ‘C’ during the Balise start-up.<br />
The same characteristics of the Up-link Balise signal are verified, in different conditions, regarding to the Interface<br />
‘C’ signals:<br />
• Nominal and worst case electrical characteristics of the Interface ‘C’ signals.<br />
• Different Return Loss conditions.<br />
• Transient failure conditions <strong>for</strong> the Interface ‘C’ signals leading to the transmission of the default telegram.<br />
The following tools are controlled by the LTMS <strong>for</strong> this test:<br />
• The APT, the RSG, The <strong>Test</strong> Antenna, and the Power Meter in a similar way as <strong>for</strong> the Balise I/O<br />
Characteristic tests.<br />
• The RSG <strong>for</strong> generating the required signals at Interface ‘C’, with the required electrical characteristics,<br />
and carrying the required test telegram.<br />
• The LRRT <strong>for</strong> processing and checking the characteristics of the Up-link signal received by the <strong>Test</strong><br />
Antenna, in order to get final test data <strong>for</strong> LTMS recording and <strong>for</strong>matting.<br />
• The Environmental Sensors <strong>for</strong> measuring, at regular intervals, the ambient temperature and the humidity<br />
near the test bed.
Page 247 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D5.2.2.3.6<br />
Tele-powering radiation patterns <strong>for</strong> the On-board equipment<br />
This test consists in determining the level of Tele-powering flux concatenated with the applicable Reference<br />
Loop when the antenna under test is kept still in defined positions along the longitudinal direction, with different<br />
vertical, lateral and angular displacements. The test should be organised in such a way as to cover the different<br />
areas of the test bed: “contact zone”, “side-lobe zone” and “cross-talk protected zone”.<br />
The output 27 MHz power from the Reference Loop, measured in correspondence to a given position of the<br />
antenna under test, is used <strong>for</strong> the evaluation of the corresponding concatenated flux level. The set of flux levels<br />
measured along the longitudinal direction within the contact zone is used <strong>for</strong> generating distance-based radiation<br />
diagrams of the antenna that are used <strong>for</strong> the transmission tests. The measurement results in the cross-talk and<br />
side-lobe zones are used <strong>for</strong> the evaluation of the physical cross-talk protection margins of the On-board equipment.<br />
The following tools are controlled by the LTMS <strong>for</strong> this test:<br />
• The APT <strong>for</strong> positioning the Antenna under test in the required positions over horizontal planes of the<br />
test bed referred to the centre of the Reference Loop.<br />
• The LTOM <strong>for</strong> providing the BTM function with the current time and odometer in<strong>for</strong>mation consistent<br />
with the antenna movement.<br />
• The Interface V1 Link, <strong>for</strong> controlling the required operational mode of the BTM function and <strong>for</strong><br />
collecting the reported test data.<br />
• The Power Meter <strong>for</strong> measuring the 27 MHz power delivered by the Reference Loop in correspondence<br />
of the various positions of the antenna under test.<br />
• The Environmental Sensors <strong>for</strong> measuring, at regular intervals, the ambient temperature and the humidity<br />
near the test bed.<br />
• The software tool <strong>for</strong> handling and storing, <strong>for</strong> each tested condition, the Tele-powering flux values<br />
together with the corresponding geometrical co-ordinates of the antenna under test. Such data are<br />
used by other test procedures regarding the On-board equipment.<br />
D5.2.2.3.7<br />
Up-link radiation pattern <strong>for</strong> the On-board equipment<br />
The test consists in determining, <strong>for</strong> each position of the antenna under test, the 4.2 MHz current level that is<br />
needed in the applicable Reference Loop <strong>for</strong> reaching the threshold level of the BTM receiver functionality.<br />
The correct signal detection is evaluated from observation of the BTM function data reported at the Interface<br />
V1. The test requires simplified simulation of Balise passages at a given constant speed, with controllable Uplink<br />
current driven into the Reference Loop. For each position, the Up-link current is increased from zero up to<br />
the level at which the BTM function is able to correctly receive the transmitted Up-link data. The set of Up-link<br />
threshold currents measured along the longitudinal direction within the contact zone is used <strong>for</strong> generating distance-based<br />
reception diagrams of the antenna that are used <strong>for</strong> the transmission tests. The measurement results<br />
in side-lobe and cross-talk zones are used <strong>for</strong> the evaluation of the physical cross-talk protection margins of the<br />
On-board equipment.<br />
The LTOM is controlled consistently with the simulated Balise passages, both during each measurement phase<br />
and outside the measurement, in order to respect normal constraints about real or simulated speed conditions and<br />
the minimum distances allowed between consecutive Balises and Balise groups.<br />
The test is per<strong>for</strong>med <strong>for</strong> the same longitudinal positions used <strong>for</strong> the Tele-powering radiation diagrams and <strong>for</strong><br />
the same lateral, vertical and angular displacements.
Page 248 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
The following tools are controlled by the LTMS <strong>for</strong> this test:<br />
• The APT <strong>for</strong> positioning the Antenna under test in the same positions as those used <strong>for</strong> the Telepowering<br />
radiation diagrams.<br />
• The LTOM <strong>for</strong> providing the BTM function with the current time and odometer in<strong>for</strong>mation consistent<br />
with the real and the simulated antenna movements.<br />
• The Interface V1 Link, <strong>for</strong> controlling the required operational mode of the BTM function and <strong>for</strong><br />
collecting the reported test data.<br />
• The RSG <strong>for</strong> providing an Up-link FSK current burst, carrying the required test telegram, with controlled<br />
amplitude and dynamic characteristics.<br />
• The Power Meter <strong>for</strong> measuring the Up-link current level in the Reference Loop, during the initial<br />
calibration phase.<br />
• The Environmental Sensors <strong>for</strong> measuring, at regular intervals, the ambient temperature and the humidity<br />
near the test bed.<br />
• The software tool <strong>for</strong> handling and storing, <strong>for</strong> each tested condition, the Up-link threshold current<br />
together with the corresponding geometrical co-ordinates of the antenna under test. Such data are<br />
used by other test procedures regarding the On-board equipment.<br />
D5.2.2.3.8<br />
Transmission tests <strong>for</strong> the On-board equipment<br />
This test consists in simulating, by the use of the RSG and the applicable Reference Loop, a dynamic Up-link<br />
Balise signal, according to the requirements of each test scenario, while keeping the antenna under test in a fixed<br />
central position. The time envelope of these signals as well as its electrical characteristics and the carried data<br />
telegram is generated by the RSG <strong>for</strong> each test condition (off-line) be<strong>for</strong>e running the tests. The correct behaviour<br />
of the On-board equipment under test is assessed on the basis of the BTM function data reported at the<br />
Interface V1.<br />
In general the test consists in simulating a “virtual test line” with Balises located in pre-defined realistic positions.<br />
Different test telegrams, representing realistic application cases, are used <strong>for</strong> the different Balise simulations.<br />
The various test scenarios are organised in order to verify the achievable transmission per<strong>for</strong>mance (“contact<br />
length” or “contact time” or “number of received valid telegrams) in combination with different operational<br />
conditions including:<br />
• The two different types of Reference Loops and the relevant installation conditions.<br />
• The applicable mode of Tele-powering (CW or Toggling).<br />
• The speed regime (from standing still to the maximum allowed speed).<br />
• The installation conditions <strong>for</strong> the antenna.<br />
• The worst case combination of debris conditions.<br />
• The quality of the Up-link Balise signal (electrical characteristics).<br />
• The possible Balise layouts (Balise sequences within a group).<br />
• The typology of data and of Balise telegrams.<br />
• The presence of data error conditions in the telegrams.<br />
The signal patterns, corresponding to a complete test scenario, are evaluated and pre-loaded into the RSG <strong>for</strong><br />
their real-time handling during the initial configuration phase of the scenario itself.<br />
The LTMS controls the LTOM <strong>for</strong> simulation of the required speed pattern during the whole “test trip” as well<br />
as <strong>for</strong> triggering the RSG <strong>for</strong> starting the Balise signal simulations at the exact time and odometer co-ordinates<br />
required by the test scenario.<br />
All the BTM function reports at Interface V1 are checked against the expected results and reported with all<br />
in<strong>for</strong>mation about test conditions, in the final <strong>Test</strong> Bulletins.
Page 249 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
The following tools are controlled by the LTMS <strong>for</strong> this test:<br />
• The APT <strong>for</strong> positioning the antenna under test in a fixed central position.<br />
• The LTOM <strong>for</strong> simulating the required distance-based speed pattern and <strong>for</strong> generating the time and<br />
odometer in<strong>for</strong>mation <strong>for</strong> the BTM function consistently with the simulated speed. It also issues triggering<br />
pulses to the RSG <strong>for</strong> the generation of the relevant Balise signal, according to pre-defined distance-based<br />
Balise layouts.<br />
• The RSG <strong>for</strong> providing the Up-link FSK signal, emulating the required test telegrams, with accurately<br />
controlled amplitude envelope and electrical characteristics.<br />
• The Interface V1 Link <strong>for</strong> controlling the required operational mode of the BTM function and <strong>for</strong> collecting<br />
its reported data.<br />
• The Power Meter <strong>for</strong> measuring the 4.2 MHz current level into the Reference Loop during the initial<br />
calibration phase.<br />
• The Environmental Sensors <strong>for</strong> measuring, at regular intervals, the ambient temperature and the humidity<br />
near the test bed.<br />
• The software tool <strong>for</strong> handling and storing, <strong>for</strong> each tested condition, the set of reported Up-link telegram<br />
data, the respective Balise location data, and the number of received telegrams <strong>for</strong> each simulated<br />
Balise passage. Such data are used <strong>for</strong> off-line evaluation of the achievable transmission reliability<br />
per<strong>for</strong>mance of the On-board equipment.<br />
D5.3 External interfaces<br />
D5.3.1<br />
Man Machine Interface (MMI)<br />
The Man Machine Interface should allow the operator to per<strong>for</strong>m, in an easy way, the following actions:<br />
• To recall one or more test procedure from the set of pre-compiled ones.<br />
• To support the updating of the test step sequence of a given procedure to better fit to the specific<br />
needs of the test set-up (e.g. introduction of break points, skipping or insertion or replacement of specific<br />
steps).<br />
• To save any newly updated test procedure.<br />
• To personalise the actual test cases of interest with input data provided directly by the operator (e.g.<br />
lateral or vertical displacement of the On-board antenna).<br />
• To choose the applicable values <strong>for</strong> the input parameters required <strong>for</strong> a specific test procedure.<br />
• To command the step by step execution of the test procedure.<br />
• To command the full execution of the test procedure.<br />
• To abort the on going execution of the test procedure.<br />
• To re-start an interrupted procedure from the test in which it was possibly interrupted.<br />
• To follow the current status and the regularity of execution of the on-going test as well as the summary<br />
of the test results in progress.
Page 250 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D5.3.2<br />
Interface V1<br />
The Interface V1 regards commands and data exchange between the LTMS and the On-board equipment under<br />
test.<br />
The dialog over this interface is mastered by the LTMS <strong>for</strong> commands issued by the LTMS. As far as the reports<br />
of the On-board equipment to the LTMS are concerned, the dialog can be started by the BTM function at<br />
any time, independently from the LTMS status. The LTMS should guarantee that no reported data is lost even<br />
when it is occasionally occupied in long general management tasks. More details on the exchanged commands<br />
and data and can be found in clause E1 on page 266.<br />
D5.3.3<br />
Interface T1<br />
The interface T1 regards commands and data exchange between the LTMS and the LRRT.<br />
The dialog over this interface is always mastered by the LTMS. The LRRT only answers to LTMS when requested.<br />
More details on the exchanged data can be found in sub-clause D6.3.1 on page 263.<br />
D5.3.4<br />
Interface T2<br />
The interface T2 regards commands and data exchange between the LTMS and the APT.<br />
The dialog over this interface is always mastered by the LTMS. The APT only answers to LTMS when requested.<br />
More details on the exchanged data can be found in sub-clause D3.3.1 on page 232.<br />
D5.3.5<br />
Interface T3<br />
The interface T3 regards commands and data exchange between the LTMS and the RSG.<br />
The dialog over this interface is always mastered by the LTMS. The RSG only answers to LTMS when requested.<br />
More details on the exchanged data can be found in sub-clauses D2.3.1.1 on page 223, D2.3.2.1 on<br />
page 223, and D2.3.3.1 on page 224.<br />
D5.3.6<br />
Interface T4<br />
The Interface T4 is used to exchange commands and data between the LTMS and the LTOM.<br />
The dialog over this interface is always mastered by the LTMS. The LTOM only answers to LTMS when requested.<br />
More details on the exchanged data can be found in sub-clause D1.3.1 on page 213.<br />
D5.3.7<br />
Interface T5<br />
The Interface T5 is used to exchange commands and data between the LTMS and the Power Meter.<br />
The dialog over this interface is always mastered by the LTMS. The Power Meter only answers to LTMS when<br />
requested. More details on the exchanged data can be found in the instrument user manuals.<br />
D5.3.8<br />
Interface T6<br />
The Interface T6 is used to exchange commands and data between the LTMS and the Network Analyser.<br />
The dialog over this interface is always mastered by the LTMS. The Network Analyser only answers to LTMS<br />
when requested. More details on the exchanged data can be found in the instrument user manuals.
Page 251 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D5.3.9<br />
Interface T7<br />
The Interface T7 is used to exchange commands and data between the LTMS and the Temperature and Humidity<br />
Sensors.<br />
The dialog over this interface is always mastered by the LTMS. The sensors only answer to the LTMS when<br />
requested. More details on the exchanged data can be found in the sensor user manual.<br />
D5.4 Required per<strong>for</strong>mance<br />
The following per<strong>for</strong>mance is required to the basic functions of the LTMS:<br />
• The tool must allow <strong>for</strong> uninterrupted test procedures lasting from few minutes to about 20 hours.<br />
• The reaction time of the tool to test related events should not exceed 0.2 s, during normal conditions,<br />
when the management of the on-going test procedure is the main task of the tool. This reaction time<br />
can sporadically be extended to 1 s to 2 s when the test procedure is managed in coincidence with<br />
other general tasks of the tool. Sufficient provisions should be put in place in such case in order not<br />
to lose incoming test data or inputs of any kind.<br />
• The memory capability of the tool should guarantee that no test related data (e.g., the data reported<br />
from the BTM function via the Interface V1) is lost during the admitted latency time of the tool.<br />
• In order to minimise the test time regarding long repetitive procedures, the overall closed loop operations<br />
regarding Up-link or Tele-powering current adjustment should be done within a maximum time<br />
of 2 s.<br />
• The recording of the test related data should be suitably protected after test corruption or manipulation<br />
of any kind.
Page 252 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D6 Description of Reference Receiver Tool (LRRT)<br />
D6.1 Operational Context<br />
The LRRT is used <strong>for</strong> analysing the electrical characteristics of the signals exchanged between <strong>Eurobalise</strong> units<br />
(track-side Balise and On-board equipment) and tools at their standard interfaces (i.e., Interface ‘A’ and Interface<br />
‘C), in order to verify the fulfilment of the relevant requirements.<br />
The analysis is typically done off-line, after memorising a defined time record of the signal under test. The main<br />
characteristic of this tool is that the signal acquisition and its first level analysis (e.g., demodulation) is per<strong>for</strong>med<br />
whenever is possible by commercial instruments used as front-end RF devices. When this is not practically<br />
possible, the tool itself per<strong>for</strong>ms specific signal analysis algorithms.<br />
A context diagram of the laboratory test environment involving the LRRT is given in Figure 69.<br />
According to the actual test step, the signals submitted to the LRRT analysis can be:<br />
1. The Up-link signal A1 that is generated by the Balise under test and is picked up by the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna.<br />
For purposes of calibration of the set-up, the Up-link signal A1 may also be generated by the RSG,<br />
transmitted in the air-gap via the Reference Loop and picked up by the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna;<br />
2. The Tele-powering signal A4 that is generated by the On-board equipment under test and is picked up<br />
by the Reference Loop. For purposes of calibration of the set-up, the Tele-powering signal A4 may<br />
also be generated by the RSG, transmitted in the air-gap via the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna and picked-up by the<br />
Reference Loop;<br />
3. The Interface ‘C’ signals (data signal C1 and biasing signal C6) measured over the respective reference<br />
resistive loads, and the blocking signal C4, received via a suitable current/voltage probe from the<br />
Balise under test during its start-up transient.<br />
In order to allow fast verification of the test set-up, or to run simplified tests, the LRRT can be controlled in<br />
local mode, via a graphical Man Machine Interface (MMI), by the Operator.<br />
The LRRT is controlled, in remote mode, by the LTMS by exchange of data and commands via the Interface T1.<br />
In dynamic simulated test cases, the tool receives fast triggering signals from the RSG (Interface S6) <strong>for</strong> starting<br />
the measurements at suitable instants, correlated with the RSG output signals.<br />
RSG<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Operator<br />
S6<br />
MMI<br />
C1, C6, C4<br />
A4-rsg<br />
LTMS<br />
T1<br />
LRRT<br />
C1, C6, C4<br />
AA1<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Antenna<br />
A4-rl<br />
A4-ta<br />
A1<br />
Reference<br />
Loop<br />
A4-ob<br />
On-board<br />
Equipment +<br />
Interface Adapter<br />
Up-link<br />
Balise<br />
B alise Location<br />
and Transmission<br />
System<br />
Figure 69: LRRT operational context
Page 253 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D6.2 Functional requirements<br />
D6.2.1<br />
Basic functions<br />
The tool per<strong>for</strong>ms the following basic functions that correspond to distinct or to overlapping operational modes.<br />
The basic functions of the LRRT are:<br />
1. Interfacing with the <strong>Test</strong> Operator via the MMI.<br />
2. Interfacing with the LTMS via the Interface T1.<br />
3. Per<strong>for</strong>ming all the required verifications of the electrical characteristics of the Up-link signal (A1)<br />
generated by the Balise under test, using the test antenna.<br />
4. Per<strong>for</strong>ming all the required verifications of the electrical characteristics of the Tele-powering signal<br />
(A4) generated by the on-board equipment under test.<br />
5. Per<strong>for</strong>ming all the required verification of the electrical characteristics of the Interface ‘C’ signals<br />
generated both by the LEU (C1 and C6 signals shall be monitored at the LEU end of the Interface ‘C’<br />
cable) and by the Balise under test (C4).<br />
For each operational mode, the tool per<strong>for</strong>ms one, or a combination of, the following elementary functions:<br />
• Sampling the input signal with adequate sampling rate and recording of a signal record with the required<br />
duration, time and frequency resolution, and accuracy.<br />
• Per<strong>for</strong>ming spectral or modulation analysis of the recorded signal in the required frequency range<br />
with different levels of frequency resolution.<br />
• Per<strong>for</strong>ming frequency-based separation of signals simultaneously present on the same medium.<br />
• Per<strong>for</strong>ming different kinds of demodulation on the recorded signal, either <strong>for</strong> reconstructing the intentional<br />
modulating signal or <strong>for</strong> verifying the fulfilment of other requirements.<br />
• Extracting additional in<strong>for</strong>mation (e.g., modulation clock reconstruction) from the demodulated signal,<br />
necessary <strong>for</strong> the complete signal analysis.<br />
• Per<strong>for</strong>ming a logical analysis on the extracted data.<br />
• Per<strong>for</strong>ming self-check routines <strong>for</strong> verification of correct insertion of the front-end instruments required<br />
<strong>for</strong> a given test set-up.<br />
• Implementing the commands of the LTMS and reporting back the measurement results.<br />
• Displaying the measurement results with reference to the relevant tolerance ranges.<br />
The LRRT is basically composed of a Personal Computer controlling commercial instruments that per<strong>for</strong>m the<br />
required front-end functions of signal acquisition and preliminary analysis.<br />
The LRRT per<strong>for</strong>ms some specific analysis on the acquired signals that are not possible with general purposes<br />
commercial instruments. Finally, it checks the achieved per<strong>for</strong>mance versus the respective requirements and<br />
<strong>for</strong>mats the results <strong>for</strong> a friendly presentation to the Operator.
Page 254 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
The following list gives a set of commercial front-end instruments needed <strong>for</strong> the complete set of required verifications:<br />
• A Vector Signal Analyser <strong>for</strong> acquisition, spectral analysis and demodulation of the Up-link signal<br />
A1.<br />
• A Spectrum Analyser <strong>for</strong> the evaluation of the frequency characteristics of the Tele-powering signal<br />
A4 and of the Biasing signal C6 of the Interface ‘C’. It may also be used <strong>for</strong> the evaluation of Return<br />
Loss of the biasing signal in Interface ‘C6’.<br />
• A Digital Storage Oscilloscope <strong>for</strong> the evaluation of some time characteristics of the Tele-powering<br />
signal A4, of the data signal C1, of the Biasing signal C6, and of the Blocking signal C4 of the Interface<br />
‘C’.<br />
• A Network Analyser <strong>for</strong> the evaluation of the Return Loss of the Data signal C1, and of the Biasing<br />
signal C6 of the Interface ‘C’.<br />
D6.2.2<br />
Operational modes<br />
D6.2.2.1<br />
Idle and self-test mode<br />
This is the default mode of the tool at power on or at the conclusion of a given test procedure. In this mode, all<br />
the controlled instruments should be kept or restored to their local control.<br />
Under command of the Operator, the tool should allow the individual verification of correct behaviour of the<br />
external interfaces and of the interconnected instruments.<br />
D6.2.2.2<br />
Up-link signal analysis (LRRT_1)<br />
D6.2.2.2.1<br />
General<br />
The Up-link signal A1 is read from the receiving loop of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna, is pre-analysed by the Vector Signal<br />
Analyser, and is finally processed and checked by the LRRT function LRRT_1 with reference to the applicable<br />
requirements.<br />
D6.2.2.2.2<br />
Signal power<br />
The Vector Signal Analyser, under proper control of the LRRT_1 functionality, evaluates the power of the Uplink<br />
signal within the frequency band of interest. The instrument should be configured as a scalar spectrum<br />
analyser <strong>for</strong> this measurement. Additionally, it should be possible to set the “centre frequency” within the range<br />
of 4.24 MHz ±1.5 MHz, the “frequency span” between 0.8 MHz and 8.0 MHz, the “frequency resolution” between<br />
10 Hz and 10 kHz, and the “averaging factor” between 1 and 10.<br />
D6.2.2.2.3<br />
Signal bandwidth<br />
The signal bandwidth verification of the Up-link signal is per<strong>for</strong>med by the LRRT_1 functionality on the basis<br />
of three signal power measurements, per<strong>for</strong>med by means of the Vector Signal Analyser as mentioned above.<br />
The power at the centre frequency of the signal, measured within a span of 1 MHz, is compared with the power,<br />
measured at ±1 MHz from the centre frequency with the same 1 MHz span.<br />
This test should be preceded by evaluation of the average centre frequency of the actual Up-link signal under<br />
consideration.
Page 255 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D6.2.2.2.4<br />
Centre frequency and frequency deviation<br />
The centre frequency and the frequency deviation of the Up-link signal are evaluated on the basis of a phase<br />
demodulated signal record provided by the front-end Vector Signal Analyser.<br />
The following settings of the Vector Signal Analyser should be possible:<br />
• Analogue phase demodulation.<br />
• Centre frequency selectable between 4.0 MHz and 4.5 MHz.<br />
• Frequency span selectable between 1.0 MHz and 8.0 MHz.<br />
• Time duration of the recorded signal selectable between 1 ms and 4 ms.<br />
This test should be preceded by evaluation of the average centre frequency of the actual Up-link signal under<br />
consideration. This average centre frequency is then used <strong>for</strong> the required setting of the analogue phase demodulation.<br />
Both static and dynamic simulated conditions should be allowed. For the last one, the signal acquisition and<br />
analysis should be started immediately after an external trigger pulse.<br />
The LRRT_1 functionality should per<strong>for</strong>m the following additional analysis over the demodulated data from the<br />
Vector Signal Analyser:<br />
• Detection of the exact time intervals corresponding to each demodulated symbol (clock recovery).<br />
• Linear fitting of the phase demodulated signal over each symbol duration and evaluation of the corresponding<br />
average centre frequency and frequency deviation.<br />
• Evaluation of the centre frequency and frequency deviation by searching worst case combinations of<br />
maximum and minimum bit frequency within a sliding window.<br />
• Verification of compliance with the relevant centre frequency and frequency deviation requirements.<br />
D6.2.2.2.5<br />
Mean data rate<br />
The mean data rate of the Up-link signal is evaluated by the LRRT_1 functionality on the basis of data provided<br />
by the front-end Vector Signal Analyser configured as Analogue Phase Demodulator. For other settings, the<br />
Vector Signal Analyser should be configurable in a similar way as <strong>for</strong> the centre frequency and frequency deviation<br />
test, both in relation to static conditions and to dynamic simulated ones.<br />
This test should be preceded by evaluation of the average centre frequency of the actual Up-link signal under<br />
consideration. This average centre frequency is then used <strong>for</strong> the analogue phase demodulation.<br />
The LRRT_1 functionality should per<strong>for</strong>m the following additional analysis over the demodulated data from the<br />
Vector Signal Analyser:<br />
1. Linear fitting of the phase demodulated signal and detection of the exact instants of symbol transitions.<br />
2. Identification of the exact time interval corresponding to each symbol by splitting the time between<br />
two consecutive transitions into an integer number of symbols.<br />
3. Evaluation of the time duration corresponding to a defined number of consecutive symbols (selectable<br />
between 100 and 2000 symbols) starting at any possible symbol transition within the stored record.<br />
4. Evaluation of the average data rate over the defined bit sequence.<br />
5. Shift of the bit sequence by a pre-defined number of bits (expressed in percentage of overlapping with<br />
the previous window, selectable between 1% and 100%) and repetition of steps 4 and 5 until the<br />
whole duration of the acquired signal is analysed.<br />
6. Verification of fulfilment of the data rate requirement <strong>for</strong> all evaluated sequences and printout of the<br />
final average data rate over the analysed signal record.
Page 256 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D6.2.2.2.6<br />
Maximum Time Interval Error – MTIE<br />
Both typologies of MTIE verifications (i.e. MTIE1 and MTIE2) allowed <strong>for</strong> the Up-link signal should be supported.<br />
The MTIE verifications are per<strong>for</strong>med by the LRRT_1 functionality on the basis of data provided by the<br />
front-end Vector Signal Analyser configured as Analogue Phase Demodulator. For other settings, the Vector<br />
Signal Analyser should be configurable in a similar way as <strong>for</strong> the centre frequency and frequency deviation<br />
test, both in relation to static conditions and to dynamic simulated ones.<br />
This test should be preceded by the evaluation of the average centre frequency of the actual Up-link signal under<br />
consideration and by the Mean Data Rate verification. This average centre frequency is then used <strong>for</strong> the analogue<br />
phase demodulation. The Mean Data Rate is used <strong>for</strong> the MTIE2 verification.<br />
The LRRT_1 functionality should per<strong>for</strong>m the following additional analysis over the demodulated data from the<br />
Vector Signal Analyser:<br />
1. Linear fitting of the phase demodulated signal and detection of the exact instants of symbol transitions.<br />
2. Identification of the time interval corresponding to each symbol on the basis of the reconstructed symbol<br />
transitions as well as on the reference average data rate that is the nominal Balise data rate <strong>for</strong> the<br />
MTIE1 verification, or the previously measured average data rate <strong>for</strong> the MTIE2 verification.<br />
3. Evaluation of the time jitter <strong>for</strong> each reconstructed symbol with reference to the reference data rate.<br />
The overall time error evaluated between two subsequent symbol transitions is equally shared among<br />
all the equal symbols included between them.<br />
4. Evaluation of the maximum time error of each symbol duration within an observation window of variable<br />
length (ranging between 1 symbol up to the half of the maximum window length). The initial<br />
position of this observation window is shifted bit by bit from the first bit of the analysed window, up<br />
to its last bit minus the actual length of the observation window.<br />
5. Verification of fulfilment of the MTIE requirement <strong>for</strong> all evaluated observation windows and printout<br />
of the final pattern of evaluated MTIE data versus the respective length of the observation window.<br />
D6.2.2.2.7<br />
Amplitude jitter<br />
The verification of the amplitude jitter, possibly present over the Up-link signal, is per<strong>for</strong>med by the LRRT_1<br />
functionality on the basis of data provided by the front-end Vector Signal Analyser configured as Analogue<br />
Amplitude Demodulator. For other settings, the Vector Signal Analyser should be configurable in a similar way<br />
as <strong>for</strong> the centre frequency and frequency deviation test, both in relation to static conditions and to dynamic<br />
simulated ones.<br />
The LRRT_1 functionality should per<strong>for</strong>m the following additional analysis over the amplitude-demodulated<br />
data from the Vector Signal Analyser:<br />
1. Evaluation of the average (RMS) amplitude of the demodulated signal within an observation window<br />
of duration selectable between 50 µs and 800 µs and within a shorter window of 1.77 µs duration at<br />
its centre. The amplitude jitter expresses, in dB, the ratio between the signal amplitude averaged over<br />
the shorter window and the signal amplitude averaged over the longer observation window. This jitter<br />
evaluation is repeated <strong>for</strong> all possible longer successive windows, each one shifted by 1.77 µs<br />
from the previous one. The algorithm should cover with continuity the whole duration of the recorded<br />
signal.<br />
2. Verification of fulfilment of the amplitude jitter requirement <strong>for</strong> all evaluated windows and printout<br />
of the final pattern of evaluated amplitude jitter versus the instant of each observation window centre.
Page 257 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D6.2.2.2.8<br />
Delay time between Interface ‘C1’ and Interface ‘A1’<br />
The time delay between the data carried by the Up-link signal and the corresponding data at the Balise Interface<br />
‘C1’ is evaluated by the LRRT_1 functionality on the basis of data provided by the front-end Vector Signal<br />
Analyser configured as Analogue Phase Demodulator. For other settings, the Vector Signal Analyser should be<br />
configurable in a similar way as <strong>for</strong> the centre frequency and frequency deviation test, both in relation to static<br />
conditions and to dynamic simulated ones.<br />
Delay evaluation refers to the Balise internal delay excluding the delay in the Interface ‘C’ cable.<br />
This test should be preceded by the evaluation of the average centre frequency of the actual Up-link signal under<br />
consideration. This average centre frequency is then used <strong>for</strong> the analogue phase demodulation.<br />
The Vector Signal Analyser should start acquisition and demodulation of the Up-link signal soon after receiving<br />
a triggering pulse generated by the RSG with a known time relation with an easily detectable symbol (“reference<br />
symbol”) of the stream transmitted to the Balise Interface ‘C1’. Additionally, during dynamic simulated tests,<br />
the RSG should be kept synchronised with the rising Tele-powering ramp, in order to get simultaneity of the<br />
Vector Signal Analyser trigger with the expected start-up of the Balise.<br />
The LRRT_1 functionality should per<strong>for</strong>m the following additional analysis over the phase-demodulated data<br />
provided by the Vector Signal Analyser:<br />
1. Average data rate evaluation <strong>for</strong> the whole duration of the recorded signal.<br />
2. Identification of the exact start and end time of each symbol, based the detected bit transitions.<br />
3. Verification of correct correspondence between the symbols contained in a window of defined length<br />
(selectable between 100 and 1500 symbols) and the ones sent to the Interface ‘C1’.<br />
4. Identification of the “reference symbol”, corresponding to the RSG acquisition trigger, evaluation of<br />
its delay with respect to the triggering instant, and verification of compliance with the corresponding<br />
requirement.<br />
D6.2.2.2.9<br />
KER compatibility<br />
The correct answer of the Balise, when it is being energised by Tele-powering signal in “non toggling” mode, is<br />
evaluated by the LRRT_1 functionality on the basis of data provided by the front-end Vector Signal Analyser<br />
configured as Analogue Amplitude Demodulator. For other settings, the Vector Signal Analyser should be<br />
configurable in a similar way as <strong>for</strong> the centre frequency and frequency deviation test, both in relation to static<br />
conditions and to dynamic simulated ones. The Digital Storage Oscilloscope could alternatively be used <strong>for</strong> this<br />
verification.<br />
The LRRT_1 functionality should per<strong>for</strong>m the following additional analysis over the data provided by the Vector<br />
Signal Analyser:<br />
1. Filtering the received signal over a defined bandwidth selectable between 0.5 MHz and 2.0 MHz.<br />
2. Evaluation of the average amplitude of the demodulated signal in a moving window of defined length<br />
(1 µs – 10 µs) over the whole duration of the acquired signal.<br />
3. Evaluation of the overall duration of possible Up-link signal bursts from the Balise <strong>for</strong> the entire duration<br />
of the acquired signal. Possible noise from the test equipment shall be disregarded. This can be<br />
done by comparison with what is received without the presence of the Balise.<br />
4. Verification of fulfilment of the Up-link signal requirement with non-toggling Tele-powering and<br />
printout of the time pattern of the average amplitude of the Up-link signal.
Page 258 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D6.2.2.3<br />
Tele-powering signal analysis (LRRT_2)<br />
D6.2.2.3.1<br />
Carrier frequency and phase noise in CW<br />
The carrier frequency and its frequency noise are evaluated by the LRRT_2 functionality on the basis of measurement<br />
data provided by the Network Analyser configured as a Spectrum Analyser. The instrument evaluates<br />
the power spectrum of the Tele-powering signal with specific settings selected <strong>for</strong> the measurement. Such settings<br />
include centre frequency (typically set at the nominal Tele-powering frequency), frequency span (selectable<br />
between 10 kHz and 200 kHz around the centre frequency), bandwidth resolution (selectable between<br />
1.0 Hz and 100 Hz).<br />
Because of the high level of accuracy required <strong>for</strong> the carrier noise evaluation, it is necessary that the measurement<br />
be per<strong>for</strong>med with minimised environmental noise within the frequency band of interest. When this is not<br />
possible, the measurement should be corrected <strong>for</strong> the background noise measured at the frequencies of interest,<br />
with all the transmitting equipment turned off but keeping the same geometry of the test set-up that is used during<br />
the carrier noise measurement.<br />
The LRRT_2 functionality controls the following steps:<br />
1. Noise pre-calibration measurement with the equipment under test switched off (if applicable).<br />
2. Evaluation of the power spectrum of the Tele-powering signal with the chosen settings.<br />
3. Post-calibration noise measurement with the equipment under test switched off (if applicable).<br />
4. Verification of fulfilment of the carrier frequency requirement.<br />
5. Evaluation of the carrier power and of the worst case power level within the chosen frequency span,<br />
outside a 20 kHz frequency band centred on the carrier frequency.<br />
6. Evaluation of the carrier noise (dBc/Hz), after subtracting (if applicable) the environmental noise<br />
spectrum resulting from the averaging the spectra recorded during the pre and post calibration steps,<br />
from the Tele-powering power spectrum. A further scaling of the Tele-powering worst case noise<br />
power is needed in order to translate the measurement result from the chosen bandwidth resolution to<br />
the required 1 Hz resolution.<br />
7. Verification of fulfilment of the carrier frequency and noise requirements and printout of the noise<br />
spectrum data obtained from the noise calibration steps and during the Tele-powering signal analysis.<br />
D6.2.2.3.2<br />
Toggling modulation frequency<br />
The toggling modulation frequency of the Tele-powering signal is evaluated by the LRRT_2 functionality on the<br />
basis of measurement data provided by the Network Analyser configured as a Spectrum Analyser. The instrument<br />
evaluates the toggling modulation frequency by measuring the frequency of a selectable number of harmonics<br />
present in the power spectrum of the Tele-powering signal.<br />
This verification should be based on the measurement of the frequency of a certain number of signal harmonics<br />
centred around the Tele-powering carrier frequency. In order to get enough accuracy, each harmonic frequency<br />
measurement should be based on an individual power spectrum evaluation per<strong>for</strong>med with appropriate span and<br />
frequency resolution settings.
Page 259 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
The LRRT_2 functionality controls the following steps:<br />
1. Measurement of the frequency corresponding to the peak level of the power spectrum centred on a<br />
given nominal frequency of the signal harmonic under consideration.<br />
2. Repetition of the step 1 <strong>for</strong> the desired set of signal harmonics under consideration.<br />
3. Evaluation of the toggling frequency based on the average frequency distance between successive signal<br />
harmonics.<br />
4. Verification of fulfilment of the toggling frequency requirement and printout of the whole set of<br />
measured harmonic frequencies.<br />
D6.2.2.3.3<br />
Pulse width, jitter, modulation depth, and overshoot<br />
The time and amplitude characteristics of the toggling modulation pulses: time duration, off-edge jitter, modulation<br />
depth, and overshoot are elaborated and verified by the LRRT_2 functionality on the basis of a Telepowering<br />
signal record acquired by means of the Digital Storage Oscilloscope with a suitable sampling rate.<br />
The LRRT_2 functionality per<strong>for</strong>ms the following analysis over the acquired signal record:<br />
1. AM-demodulation based on the previously evaluated centre frequency.<br />
2. Evaluation of the average pulse width and width deviation based on the analysis of the AMdemodulated<br />
signal.<br />
3. Evaluation of the falling-edge jitter based on the previously evaluated modulation frequency and on<br />
the analysis of the AM-demodulated signal.<br />
4. Evaluation of the modulation depth, individually <strong>for</strong> the short and long pulse (when toggling modulation),<br />
based on the analysis of the AM-demodulated signal.<br />
5. Evaluation of initial and residual overshoot of the carrier amplitudes based on the analysis of the AMdemodulated<br />
signal.<br />
6. Verification of fulfilment of the electrical characteristic requirement of the toggling signal and printout<br />
of the AM-demodulated signal as well as of whole set of evaluated characteristics.
Page 260 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D6.2.2.4<br />
Interface ‘C’ signal analysis (LRRT_C)<br />
D6.2.2.4.1<br />
Electrical characteristics of the Interface ‘C1’ signal<br />
The analysis of the electrical characteristics of the Interface C1 signal is per<strong>for</strong>med by the LRRT_C functionality<br />
on the basis of a suitably long record of voltage acquired by the Digital Storage Oscilloscope over the reference<br />
resistor loading the LEU output.<br />
The LRRT_C functionality per<strong>for</strong>ms the following evaluations over the acquired signal:<br />
1. Separation, by frequency filtering, of the C1 signal from the C6 signal.<br />
2. Scanning, sample by sample, the C1 signal in order to find its amplitude value just in advance of each<br />
signal transition. The set of values so obtained <strong>for</strong>ms the basis <strong>for</strong> the verification of the requirements<br />
regarding maximum and minimum signal values.<br />
3. DBPL decoding, applying to a selectable window of 1000-2000 symbols, and data rate evaluation and<br />
verification procedures similar to those used <strong>for</strong> the Up-link Balise signal. These procedures, supplemented<br />
by the narrow data rate tolerance constitute an indirect verification of correct DBPL coding<br />
as well.<br />
4. Time jitter evaluation and verification over the same signal record used <strong>for</strong> the mean data rate verification.<br />
A recovered data clock is reconstructed on the basis of the evaluated mean data rate value.<br />
The time differences between the active edges of the recovered data clock and the actual zero crossing<br />
instants of the C1 signal are evaluated, after some iterations aimed at finding the best phase of the recovered<br />
clock that minimises the average value of such time differences. The maximum jitter value<br />
found among all the transitions of the analysed signal record is then verified versus the maximum jitter<br />
requirement.<br />
D6.2.2.4.2<br />
Return Loss of the Interface ‘C1’<br />
The Return Loss on the Interface ‘C’1 is verified by the LRRT_C functionality on the basis of the measurement<br />
data provided by the Network Analyser, controlled according to the procedure described in sub-clause G1.4 on<br />
page 294.<br />
D6.2.2.4.3<br />
Electrical characteristics of the Interface ‘C6’ signal<br />
The analysis of the electrical characteristics of the Interface ‘C6’ signal is per<strong>for</strong>med by the LRRT_C functionality<br />
on the basis of a suitably long record of voltage acquired by the Digital Storage Oscilloscope over the reference<br />
resistor loading the LEU output.<br />
The LRRT_C functionality, after filtering the C6 signal from the C1 signal, reconstructs the time pattern of the<br />
C6 signal amplitude by means of rectification, peak detection, and filtering per<strong>for</strong>med over the acquired C6<br />
signal record. The maximum and minimum values of the amplitude pattern are checked against the respective<br />
requirements.<br />
The LRRT_C functionality verifies the frequency and the harmonic contents of the C6 signal on the basis of<br />
measurement data provided by the Network Analyser configured as Spectrum Analyser.<br />
The frequency of the C6 signal should be measured from the Interface ‘C’ signal spectrum by using appropriate<br />
values of bandwidth resolution and frequency span that allow adequate frequency measurement accuracy and<br />
separation between the C1 and the C6 signal harmonics. The peak detection facility of the Spectrum Analyser<br />
should be used <strong>for</strong> detecting the fundamental frequency of the C6 signal.
Page 261 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
In order to distinguish the higher order harmonics of the C6 signal from those of the C1 signal within the frequency<br />
range of interest, narrow span settings centred over exact multiples of the previously detected fundamental<br />
harmonic should be individually used <strong>for</strong> all possible higher harmonic frequencies. The overall harmonic<br />
contents should be finally evaluated <strong>for</strong> the entire region of interest by summing up the individual harmonics<br />
power and checked against the allowed limits, together with the individual content of the second harmonic.<br />
D6.2.2.4.4<br />
Return Loss of the Interface ‘C6’<br />
The Return Loss on the Interface ‘C6’ is verified by the LRRT_C functionality on the basis of the measurement<br />
data provided by the Network Analyser, controlled according to the procedure described in sub-clause G1.7 on<br />
page 297.<br />
D6.2.2.4.5<br />
Electrical characteristics of the Interface ‘C4’ signal<br />
Records of suitable duration of the signals at the Balise Interface ‘C’ are acquired simultaneously by means of a<br />
High Vertical/Horizontal Resolution Digitiser Board. Acquisition is per<strong>for</strong>med from a certain time in advance<br />
of a trigger pulse generated during the rising ramp of the Balise Tele-powering flux burst, at the instant of crossing<br />
over the φ d1 level.<br />
The Interface ‘C1’ signal shall be a telegram constituted by an indefinite string of ‘ones’, which corresponds to a<br />
continuous square wave at 564.48 kHz. This means that all harmonics of the Interface ‘C1’ signal are above<br />
564.48 kHz, so a low pass filter can easily filter them out. Additionally, the Interface ‘C6’ signal should be<br />
synthesized with sufficient vertical resolution (e.g., better than 12 bits) in order to minimise low frequency harmonics<br />
due to quantisation effects.<br />
It is assumed that one polarity of the output of the RSG_C connected to the Balise terminal can be safely connected<br />
to the common ground of the signal-acquiring instrument.<br />
Finally, it is assumed that a calibrated resistor of approximately 20 Ω, used <strong>for</strong> current sensing, can be connected<br />
in series with the hot terminal of the Balise without impairing the amplitude driving capabilities of the RSG_C.<br />
The Interface ‘C6’ signal is separated from the corresponding Interface ‘C1’ signal via suitable low pass filtering<br />
both during the transient condition and during steady state conditions just be<strong>for</strong>e and after transient. The<br />
following applies:<br />
• Fifth order Butterworth low pass filters (passive H/W) with 100 kHz cut-off frequency used <strong>for</strong> filtering<br />
out the Interface ‘C1’ signal, so allowing the digitiser board to use the best possible vertical resolution.<br />
• Low pass FIR filters with “Top Flat Windowing” with 50 kHz cut-off frequency <strong>for</strong> filtering out the<br />
quantisation noise in the acquired signal.<br />
The acquired signals are used <strong>for</strong> identification of a suitable linear circuit that model the behaviour of the input<br />
circuitry of the Balise during various instants of the explored transient.<br />
In order to get good time resolution, this identification process must be per<strong>for</strong>med within a very short subwindow<br />
(e.g., 40 µs) and consecutively repeated many times in order to cover the entire transient duration.<br />
The modulus of the identified circuit impedance at sinusoidal regime is evaluated <strong>for</strong> the minimum, the nominal,<br />
and the maximum frequency allowed <strong>for</strong> the Interface ‘C6’ signal (8720 Hz, 8820 Hz, and 8920 Hz).The identification<br />
algorithms are based on the pure differential equation describing two possible types of linear circuits<br />
used <strong>for</strong> modelling the input of the Balise (serial RL circuit or parallel RC circuit). Such algorithms provide the<br />
best approximation of serial RL or parallel RC circuits during the sinusoidal steady state condition preceding<br />
and following the impedance transient as well as during the transient condition.
Page 262 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
The starting instant of the Interface ‘C4’ signal is defined as the instant at which the modelled input impedance<br />
of the Balise crosses down below the limit defined in UNISIG SUBSET-036 at the Balise end of the cable. This<br />
instant is used <strong>for</strong> determining the time delay from the triggering event of the signal acquisition.<br />
The ending instant of the Interface ‘C4’ pulse signal is defined as the instant at which the modelled input impedance<br />
of the Balise steadily crosses over the limit defined in UNISIG SUBSET-036 at the Balise end of the cable.<br />
This value is used in conjunction with the starting instant defined above <strong>for</strong> determination of the low impedance<br />
transient duration.<br />
In summary, the LRRT_C functionality verifies the following characteristics:<br />
• Time delay of the blocking pulse with respect to the external triggering instant<br />
• Time duration of the blocking pulse<br />
• Impedance level during steady state conditions and during the blocking pulse<br />
Further in<strong>for</strong>mation is found in the document referenced as item IIIA in the bibliography (see Annex I on page<br />
322), where the document with further details is referenced.
Page 263 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D6.3 External interfaces<br />
D6.3.1<br />
Interface T1<br />
The Interface T1 is used <strong>for</strong> exchanging commands and settings data from the LTMS to the LRRT and test results<br />
from the LRRT to the LTMS.<br />
The LTMS commands and data to the LRRT regard:<br />
1. Self-test and calibration of the LRRT functions.<br />
2. Start-up or Restart after a malfunction.<br />
3. Switching from On-line to Off-line mode and vice-versa.<br />
4. Activate or deactivate one or more basic function (LRRT_1, LRRT_2 or LRRT_C).<br />
5. Request <strong>for</strong> the operational status of the tool.<br />
6. Input parameters and instrument settings <strong>for</strong> each required measurement.<br />
The LRRT data to the LTMS regard:<br />
1. Acknowledgement of an LTMS command.<br />
2. Status of the tool (e.g., busy, ready, active, error codes).<br />
3. Results from the required measurement.<br />
The following Table 50 gives a possible list of LTMS commands <strong>for</strong> the basic functions of the LRRT.<br />
LRRT_Mng LRRT_1 LRRT_2 LRRT_C<br />
General re-start LRRT_1 Self-test LRRT_2 Self-test LRRT_C Self-test<br />
LRRT_Mng status LRRT_1 Re-start LRRT_2 Re-start LRRT_C Re-start<br />
Activate LRRT_1 LRRT_1 Status LRRT_2 Status LRRT_2 Status<br />
Activate LRRT_2 LRRT_1 Close LRRT_2 Close LRRT_C Close<br />
Activate LRRT_C Signal power Carrier frequency and<br />
noise<br />
Signal C1 level<br />
Open EXCEL file Signal bandwidth Signal spectrum C1 data rate<br />
Input from file<br />
Centre freq. and freq.<br />
deviation<br />
Modulation frequency<br />
C1 jitter<br />
Output to file Mean data rate Modulation depth C1 Return Loss<br />
Print from file MTIE1 Pulses average width C6 Amplitude<br />
MTIE2 Pulse width deviation C6 Frequency<br />
Amplitude jitter Pulse jitter C6 Harmonics<br />
Delay C1/A1 Amplitude overshoot C4 characteristics<br />
KER Compatibility<br />
Table 50: LTMS commands to LRRT
Page 264 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D6.3.2<br />
Fast trigger Interface S6<br />
This interface is used <strong>for</strong> quickly triggering the front-end instruments to start acquisition and analysis of the<br />
corresponding input signals. In such cases the time delay of the instrument to start the required operation plays<br />
an important role <strong>for</strong> the accuracy of the corresponding measurement. The instruments are pre-set to the required<br />
configuration by the corresponding LRRT functionality, prior to the estimated occurrence of the trigger<br />
event.<br />
The S6 interface is typically a short positive pulse of 1 µs – 10 µs duration. It is typically generated by the RSG<br />
at pre-defined instants correlated to Balise Tele-powering or to Interface ‘C’ transients.<br />
D6.3.3<br />
Man Machine Interface – MMI<br />
For each measurement or combination of measurements, a suitable graphical interface should allow the operator,<br />
when the tool is in local control, to send the same commands and data as those handled by the LTMS. The same<br />
MMI should allow an easy display of test results and possibly of some intermediate test data. Off-line zooming<br />
and re-scaling of the measurement results presented in graphical <strong>for</strong>m should also be allowed.<br />
The MMI should also support test data saving in files and print out of the <strong>Test</strong> Bulletins.
Page 265 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
D6.4 Required per<strong>for</strong>mance<br />
D6.4.1<br />
LRRT_1<br />
• Signal power: accuracy better than 0.5 dB.<br />
• Signal bandwidth: frequency resolution better than 10 kHz.<br />
• Centre frequency and frequency deviation: accuracy better than 5 kHz.<br />
• Mean data rate: accuracy better than 100 ppm.<br />
• MTIE1 and MTIE2: accuracy better than 50 ns.<br />
• Amplitude jitter: accuracy better than 0.2 dB.<br />
• Interface C1/A1 delay time: accuracy better than 100 ns.<br />
• KER compatibility: accuracy better than 1 dB.<br />
D6.4.2<br />
LRRT_2<br />
• Carrier frequency: accuracy better than 50 Hz.<br />
• Carrier noise: background noise collected by the Reference Loop less than –120 dBm.<br />
• Carrier noise: frequency resolution better than 1 Hz.<br />
• Carrier noise: input signal dynamics higher than 110 dB.<br />
• Modulation frequency: accuracy better than 1 Hz.<br />
• Toggling signal: time resolution better than 10 ns.<br />
• Toggling signal: amplitude accuracy better than 0.02 dB.<br />
D6.4.3<br />
LRRT_C<br />
• Interface C1 signal level: accuracy better than 100 mV.<br />
• Interface C1 mean data rate: accuracy better than 10 ppm.<br />
• Interface C1 time jitter: accuracy better than 10 ns.<br />
• Interface C1 Return Loss: accuracy better than 0.5 dB.<br />
• Interface C6 signal level: accuracy better than 100 mV.<br />
• Interface C6 frequency: accuracy better than 100 ppm.<br />
• Interface C6 harmonics power: better than 0.5 dBm.<br />
• Interface C6 Return Loss: accuracy better than 0.5 dB.<br />
• Interface C4: Impedance accuracy better than 10 %.<br />
• Interface C4 Time accuracy/resolution better than 10 µs.
Page 266 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Annex E (In<strong>for</strong>mative), <strong>Test</strong> Interfaces <strong>for</strong> the On-board<br />
Equipment<br />
E1 Interface V1<br />
E1.1 General<br />
The Interface V1 defines the data exchanged between the LTMS and the BTM functionality of the On-board<br />
ERTMS/ETCS Equipment, in order to facilitate the tests defined in Clause 5 of Part 2 of the present Norm. This<br />
Interface may require the use of a company specific Interface V1 Adapter in order to translate the required test<br />
data to <strong>for</strong>mats and timings compatible with those internal to the equipment under test.<br />
E1.2 Operational Data<br />
E1.2.1<br />
Mode Selection (TESTCONF)<br />
The test configuration data, included in the variable TESTCONF, is transmitted from the LTMS to the BTM<br />
functionality via the Interface V1. It is used to set the On-board Equipment under test in a defined operational<br />
mode, among the following ones:<br />
• <strong>Test</strong> Mode<br />
• CW/Toggling Mode<br />
• Down-link transmission enabled/disabled<br />
• Tele-Powering on/off<br />
The variable TESTCONF is a string of 7 ASCII characters organised according to the structure shown in Table<br />
51.<br />
Char # Meaning Value<br />
Char 1 <strong>Test</strong> mode:<br />
on/off<br />
“0” = off<br />
“1” = on<br />
Char 2 Separator. “-“<br />
Char 3 Tele-powering Mode:<br />
CW/Toggling<br />
“0” = CW<br />
“1” = Toggling<br />
Char 4 Separator. “-“<br />
Char 5 Down-Link:<br />
on/off<br />
“0” = off<br />
“1” = on<br />
Char 6 Separator. “-“<br />
Char 7 Tele-powering:<br />
on/off<br />
“0” = off<br />
“1” = on<br />
Table 51: TESTCONF variable structure
Page 267 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
The LTMS sends a new TESTCONF variable each time it requires a new operating mode <strong>for</strong> the On-board<br />
Equipment under test. The LTMS waits <strong>for</strong> a maximum time of 1 second <strong>for</strong> receiving an answer, via the<br />
BTMSTAT variable, from the Equipment under test, confirming the switch to the requested operational mode.<br />
It also waits <strong>for</strong> a maximum time of 5 second <strong>for</strong> receiving a positive answer, via the ANTTEST variable, from<br />
the same equipment confirming the correct status of the transmission units (Antenna, Transmitter, Receiver etc.).<br />
The LTMS also checks that a coherent variable ALIVE is periodically and regularly transmitted approximately<br />
every 5 seconds from the equipment under test.<br />
E1.2.2<br />
Mode Status (BTMSTAT)<br />
The status variable BTMSTAT is sent by the On-board Equipment under test to the LTMS, as a response to a<br />
new configuration request issued by the LTMS by means of a new TESTCONF variable. This response shall be<br />
issued within an overall delay time of 1 second since the mode selection order was issued.<br />
The variable BTMSTAT is a string of 11 ASCII characters organised according to the structure shown in Table<br />
52.<br />
Char # Meaning Value<br />
Char 1 to Char 3 Header: Company Acronym “XYZ”<br />
Char 4 Separator. “-“<br />
Char 5<br />
<strong>Test</strong> mode:<br />
on/off<br />
“0” = off<br />
“1” = on<br />
Char 6 Separator. “-“<br />
Char 7<br />
Tele-powering Mode:<br />
CW/Toggling<br />
“0” = CW<br />
“1” = Toggling<br />
Char 8 Separator. “-“<br />
Char 9<br />
Down-Link:<br />
on/off<br />
“0” = off<br />
“1” = on<br />
Char 10 Separator. “-“<br />
Char 11<br />
Tele-powering:<br />
on/off<br />
“0” = off<br />
“1” = on<br />
Table 52: BTMSTAT variable structure
Page 268 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
E1.2.3<br />
Link Status (ALIVE)<br />
The status variable ALIVE is periodically sent by the On-board Equipment under test to the LTMS approximately<br />
every 5 seconds to confirm that the equipment and its link with the LTMS are correctly working.<br />
The correct behaviour of the link is indicated by a modulo 10 counter that is regularly incremented by 1 at each<br />
transmission. The status of this counter is contained in the ALIVE variable sent to the LTMS.<br />
The ALIVE variable is a string of 4 ASCII characters organised according to the structure shown in Table 53.<br />
Char # Meaning Value<br />
Char 1 to Char 3 Header: Company Acronym “XYZ”<br />
Char 4 Mod. 10 counter: current value “0”, “1”, “2”,.., “9”.”0” …<br />
Table 53: ALIVE variable structure<br />
E1.3 <strong>Test</strong> Data<br />
E1.3.1<br />
Self-test Report (ANTTEST)<br />
The ANTTEST variable is used to in<strong>for</strong>m the LTMS about the status of the On-board transmission Equipment<br />
under test. This equipment sporadically transmits this variable to the LTMS in case of failure detection or,<br />
independently on its internal status, after a request of “<strong>Test</strong> Mode on” is received from the LTMS, via a new<br />
TESTCONF variable. In this latter case, the ANTTEST response is expected within a maximum delay time of 5<br />
seconds.<br />
The ANTTEST variable is a string of 5 ASCII characters organised according to the structure shown in Table<br />
54.<br />
Char # Meaning Value<br />
Char 1 to Char 3 Header: Company Acronym “XYZ”<br />
Char 4 Separator. “-“<br />
Char 5<br />
Health Status:<br />
failure/no-failure<br />
“0” = failure<br />
“1” = no-failure<br />
Table 54: ANTTEST variable structure
Page 269 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
E1.3.2<br />
Balise Passage Report (BALL_PASS)<br />
After receiving an Up-link Balise signal, the following set of data shall be passed on by the On-board Equipment<br />
under test to the LTMS:<br />
• Set of User Data extracted from the received telegrams (validated and decoded);<br />
• Balise location data (given by the absolute time and/or distance from a defined reference point) referring<br />
to the Balise Reference Position either passed or preliminarily estimated;<br />
• Overall number of non-overlapping good telegrams received between two subsequent reports to the<br />
LTMS (not the number accumulated during the Balise passage) considering the safety targets within<br />
the class of reception defined. The number of non-overlapping telegrams is defined as a number of<br />
valid bits received between two continuous reporting instants, divided by 1023 <strong>for</strong> a long telegram or<br />
by 341 <strong>for</strong> a short telegram. This resulting number is subsequently multiplied by a suitable correction<br />
factor, selected by each company under their responsibility, in order to include possible shortcomings<br />
determined by safety related verifications in the telegram acceptance.<br />
• Percentage of number of non-overlapping good telegrams within a reporting period compared with<br />
the maximum number of non-overlapping telegrams within the same reporting period (considering the<br />
correction factor above).<br />
• BTM function reporting time (time <strong>for</strong> data being available to the Kernel).<br />
• Class of reception.<br />
∗ Class A, when no error correction is implemented.<br />
∗ Class B n when error correction is implemented (the suffix n is any identification number defined<br />
by the supplier).<br />
The LTMS checks the logical consistency between the various fields of the BAL_PASS variable transmitted by<br />
the BTM functionality, via the Interface V1 Adapter. Missing or erroneous reporting leads to the conclusion<br />
that the Balise Up-link signal is not correctly received.<br />
For low speed conditions, the On-board Equipment could per<strong>for</strong>m periodical reporting via the Interface V1<br />
Adapter. The reporting period, within a Balise contact condition, could range between 50 ms and 600 ms.<br />
The interface V1 Adapter converts the data, received from the On-board Equipment under test, to the <strong>for</strong>mat<br />
prescribed <strong>for</strong> the BAL_PASS variable and then transmits it to the LTMS. The LTMS should have an internal<br />
buffering capability, in order to allow the LTMS to possibly postpone the on-line data elaboration, when it has<br />
to handle more urgent tasks than the Interface V1 communication. The buffering is dimensioned so that at least<br />
20 seconds of test data can be received without losses, even when the On-board Equipment continuously receives<br />
Balise data <strong>for</strong> a prolonged time (e.g. when the Antenna is standing still over the Balise). The buffering<br />
can be of circular type. This implies that, during a continuous flow of test data, some of the data older than 20<br />
seconds, can sporadically be lost by the LTMS.
Page 270 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
The BAL_PASS variable is a string of 262 ASCII characters organised according to the structure shown in<br />
Table 55.<br />
Char # Meaning Value<br />
Char 1 to Char 3 Header: Company Acronym “XYZ”<br />
Char 4 Separator. “-“<br />
Char 5 to Char 212 Decoded User Bits:<br />
“H 0 ” = Hex(bit 0 to bit 3)<br />
Hexadecimal notation with ASCII characters “0”, “H 1 ” = Hex(bit 4 to bit 7)<br />
“1”, “2”, …., “9”, “A”, ..“F”, in correspondence<br />
with the actual value of each group of 4 bits. “H 2 ” = Hex(bit 8 to bit 11)<br />
For short telegrams, the 6 unused bits<br />
(bit211÷bit216) are set to the 0 value.<br />
For long telegrams, the 2 unused bits (bit 831 and<br />
……..<br />
“H 208 ” = Hex(bit 829 to bit 832)<br />
bit 832) are set to the 0 value.<br />
For short telegrams, the unused characters are filled<br />
with the “blank” character.<br />
In case of Balise detection without valid data reception,<br />
the whole field must be filled with the ASCII<br />
character “X”.<br />
Char 213 Separator. “-“<br />
Char 214 to Char 224<br />
Balise Time Location:<br />
TBAL gives the absolute time of the Balise centre<br />
passage.<br />
TBAL is a string of 11 ASCII characters identifying<br />
hours, minutes, seconds, milliseconds and tenths of<br />
milliseconds.<br />
If this variable is not used, the corresponding fields<br />
must be filled with ASCII “space” characters.<br />
Char 225 Separator. “-“<br />
“HH” – hours<br />
“MM” – minutes<br />
“SS” – seconds<br />
“.” – decimal point<br />
“mmm” – milliseconds<br />
“µ” – hundreds of microsecond<br />
Char 226 to Char 235 Balise Distance Location:<br />
“mmmmmmmmm” – millimetres<br />
MBAL gives the absolute distance of the Balise<br />
centre passage, from a reference position.<br />
MBAL is a string of 10 characters identifying the<br />
distance in millimetres.<br />
If this variable is not used, the corresponding fields<br />
must be filled with the ASCII “space” characters.<br />
Char 236 Separator. “-“<br />
Char 237 to Char 247 BTM Reporting Time:<br />
TBTM gives the absolute time of when the<br />
“HH” – hours<br />
“MM” – minutes<br />
BALL_PASS variable is made available <strong>for</strong> external “SS” – seconds<br />
reporting.<br />
“.” – decimal point<br />
TBTM is a string of 11 ASCII characters identifying<br />
hours, minutes, seconds, milliseconds and tenths of “mmm” – milliseconds<br />
milliseconds.<br />
“µ” – hundreds of microsecond<br />
Char 248 Separator. “-“
Page 271 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Char # Meaning Value<br />
Char 249 to Char 254 Overall number of non-overlapping good telegrams:<br />
TEL is a string of 6 ASCII characters giving the<br />
decimal number of received telegrams.<br />
“M” – thousands<br />
“H” – hundreds<br />
“D” – tens<br />
Alternatively, the variable “Percentage of good “U” – units<br />
telegrams” may be reported.<br />
“.” – decimal point<br />
If this variable is not used, the corresponding fields<br />
shall be filled with ASCII “space” characters. “T” – tenth<br />
Char 255 Separator. “-“<br />
Char 256 to Char 257 Class of Reception:<br />
RXCL is a string of 2 ASCII characters giving the<br />
implemented Class of reception.<br />
“ A” - No error correction<br />
“B1” – Error correction of type 1<br />
“B2” – Error correction of type 2<br />
“Bn” – Error correction of type n<br />
Char 258 Separator “-“<br />
Char 259 to Char 263 Percentage of good telegrams:<br />
PTEL is a string of 5 ASCII characters giving the<br />
“H” – hundreds<br />
“D” – tens<br />
decimal number of percentage of good received “U” – units<br />
telegrams.<br />
“.” – decimal point<br />
Alternatively, the variable “Overall number of nonoverlapping<br />
good telegrams” may be reported. “T” – tenth<br />
If this variable is not used, the corresponding fields<br />
shall be filled with ASCII “space” characters.<br />
Table 55: BAL_PASS variable structure<br />
E2 Interface V2<br />
E2.1 General<br />
The Interface V2 defines the data exchanged between the LTOM and the On-board Transmission Equipment<br />
under test, in order to facilitate the tests defined in Clause 5 of Part 2 of the present Norm. This Interface may<br />
require the use of a company specific Interface V2 Adapter in order to translate the required test data to <strong>for</strong>mats<br />
and timings compatible with those internal to the equipment under test.<br />
This interface is mostly used when the antenna/BTM functionality is tested as stand-alone equipment. The<br />
values given by the LTOM must represent realistic cases <strong>for</strong> the entire duration of the test session. This requires<br />
that the Interface is fed, as far as possible, regularly and without interruptions and that the transmitted values are<br />
self-consistent and do not present any lack of continuity <strong>for</strong> all possible operational modes.
Page 272 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
E2.2 Interface V2 Data<br />
The following data is periodically transmitted by the LTOM:<br />
• Current distance of the On-board Antenna centre from the starting point of the test session or from the<br />
last “reset” point.<br />
• Current time since the start of the test session or since the last “reset” instant.<br />
• Confidence level of the current time and odometric co-ordinates (<strong>for</strong> any manufacturer specific use).<br />
• Current speed (real or simulated) of the on-board Antenna.<br />
• Data allowing the check of regularity and integrity of the transmitted data (Sequence Number and<br />
CRC code).<br />
The data is transmitted every 50 ms in a serial way according to the telegram structure reported in Table 56.<br />
The whole telegram transmission must be sufficiently short (i.e., less than 2 ms) in relation to the worst-case<br />
train acceleration or deceleration, in order to minimise time delay errors.<br />
The periodicity of the transmission must be sufficiently stable (i.e., uncertainty less than 5 µs), both in the short<br />
and in the long term, so as to allow time or distance evaluations, based on the transmitted data, of long test runs<br />
with good accuracy levels (e.g., better than 0.1 ms <strong>for</strong> time based events and 10 mm <strong>for</strong> distance based ones).<br />
The Sequence Number consists of a modulo 255 counter variable, incremented by 1 at each telegram transmission.<br />
It is used by the On-board Equipment (or Interface V2 Adapter) to check the correct operation of the<br />
LTOM functionality and the regularity of the Interface V2 link.<br />
The integrity of the whole set of transmitted data is allowed by a CRC protection code characterised by the<br />
following generator polynomial:<br />
X 32 + X 30 + X 27 + X 25 + X 22 + X 20 + X 13 + X 12 + X 11 + X 10 + X 8 + X 7 + X 6 + X 5 + X 4 + X 0<br />
No handshaking procedure is <strong>for</strong>eseen between the LTOM and the equipment under test, <strong>for</strong> managing possible<br />
transmission error occurrences.<br />
# Variable Format Resolution Comment<br />
1 Distance Unsigned integer<br />
4 bytes<br />
2 Distance Error Unsigned integer<br />
4 bytes<br />
3 Speed Signed integer<br />
2 bytes<br />
4 Time Unsigned integer<br />
4 bytes<br />
5 Time Error Unsigned integer<br />
1 byte<br />
6 Sequence Number Unsigned integer<br />
1 byte<br />
1 cm Absolute current position of the antenna<br />
(since the last re-start)<br />
1 cm Intended <strong>for</strong> company specific use<br />
0.01 m/s Speed and direction of the antenna motion<br />
0.1 ms Absolute current time (since the last re-start)<br />
referred to the start of the telegram transmission<br />
0.1 ms Intended <strong>for</strong> company specific use<br />
- Intended <strong>for</strong> Transmission regularity checks<br />
7 CRC 4 bytes - Intended <strong>for</strong> data integrity checks<br />
Table 56: Telegram <strong>for</strong>mat <strong>for</strong> the Interface V2
Page 273 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
E3 Interface V4<br />
E3.1 General<br />
The Interface V4 defines the in<strong>for</strong>mation associated to the signals generated by the LTOM <strong>for</strong> feeding the Onboard<br />
Transmission Equipment under test, in order to facilitate the tests defined in Clause 5 of Part 2 of the<br />
present Norm. This Interface may require the use of a company specific Interface V4 Adapter in order to translate<br />
the required test signals to levels and shapes compatible with those required by the equipment under test.<br />
This interface is mostly used when the antenna/BTM functionality is tested as an integrated functionality of the<br />
overall ERTMS/ETCS On-board Equipment. The Interface V4 signals must represent realistic cases <strong>for</strong> the<br />
entire duration of the test session. This requires that the Interface is fed, as far as possible, regularly and without<br />
interruptions and that the signals are always self-consistent and do not present any lack of continuity <strong>for</strong> all<br />
possible operational modes.<br />
E3.2 Interface V4 Signals<br />
A pair of synchronised square-wave signals, whose period corresponds to a pre-defined longitudinal distance<br />
run by the On-board antenna and whose phase difference corresponds to the running direction, constitute the<br />
Interface V4.<br />
The LTOM generates these real-time speed signals, coherent with the longitudinal speed (real or simulated) used<br />
in the tests, <strong>for</strong> feeding the On-board equipment in a similar way as with the speed sensors used in real operation.<br />
The LTOM can be configured in such a way that the period of the square waves corresponds to a pre-defined<br />
distance, ranging between 1 mm and 50 mm, with resolution of 1 mm.<br />
The phase difference between the two signals is typically 90 degrees <strong>for</strong> a positive speed and –90 degrees <strong>for</strong> a<br />
negative speed.<br />
In order to allow the best accuracy during fast acceleration/deceleration transients, the signal frequency updating<br />
shall be per<strong>for</strong>med by the LTOM at each wave<strong>for</strong>m transient (i.e. 4 times per period).
Page 274 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
E4 Physical and Link Control<br />
E4.1 Architecture<br />
The following general architecture applies <strong>for</strong> connecting the On-board system under test to the test environment<br />
via Interface ‘V’.<br />
ERTMS/ETCS<br />
On-board<br />
Constituent<br />
ERTMS/ETCS<br />
Kernel<br />
Interface ‘V 1 ’<br />
On-board<br />
Transmission<br />
Equipment<br />
BTM function<br />
Antenna Unit<br />
Interface<br />
Adapter<br />
Interface ‘V 2 ’<br />
LTMS<br />
LTOM<br />
‘A’<br />
Figure 70: Architecture<br />
The data to be exchanged between the On-board system and the test environment (in this case the LTMS and<br />
LTOM respectively) is defined in Clause E1 on page 266 and Clause E2 on page 271.<br />
In general, interaction via Interface ‘V 1 ’ is defined through the following variables:<br />
• Mode Selection<br />
• Mode Status<br />
• Link Status<br />
• Self <strong>Test</strong> Report<br />
• Balise Passage Report<br />
The variables are of various lengths, and no checksum mechanism is defined on that level. The variables are<br />
transmitted on a one by one basis at various repetition rates or instants.<br />
Interaction via Interface ‘V 2 ’ is defined through the following variables:<br />
• Distance<br />
• Distance Error<br />
• Speed<br />
• Time<br />
• Time Error<br />
• Sequence Number<br />
Also in this case, the variables are of various lengths, but a 32-bit CRC is defined (together with a defined generator<br />
polynomial). All these variable are transmitted as one complete package each 50 ms.<br />
Further details are found in Clause E1 on page 266 and Clause E2 on page 271.
Page 275 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
E4.2 Physical Control<br />
E4.2.1<br />
General<br />
Interface ‘V 1 ’ and Interface ‘V 2 ’ shall use two physically separated transmission channels.<br />
The channel <strong>for</strong> Interface ‘V 1 ’ shall constitute full duplex communication, and the channel <strong>for</strong> Interface ‘V 2 ’<br />
shall constitute simplex communication. No handshaking shall be used.<br />
The media <strong>for</strong> Interface ‘V 1 ’ shall be two twisted shielded pairs of wires, and the media <strong>for</strong> Interface ‘V 2 ’ shall<br />
use one twisted shielded pair of wires. The nominal characteristic impedance of the cable shall be 120 Ω.<br />
The interfaces shall fulfil the requirements of the RS485 standard.<br />
The connector layout and the disposition of the connector in the interface adapter are company specific.<br />
E4.2.2<br />
Interface ‘V 1 ’, Mechanical Data<br />
DSUB connectors with 9 pins/sockets shall be used.<br />
Connector layout:<br />
Interface Adapter side 34<br />
LTMS side<br />
Pin Signal Pin Signal<br />
Positive Adapter Transmit terminal 1 Ground<br />
Negative Adapter Transmit terminal 2 Ground<br />
Ground 3 Unconnected<br />
Positive LTMS Transmit terminal 4 Positive Adapter Transmit terminal<br />
Negative LTMS Transmit terminal 5 Negative Adapter Transmit terminal<br />
6 Unconnected<br />
7 Unconnected<br />
8 Positive LTMS Transmit terminal<br />
9 Negative LTMS Transmit terminal<br />
Table 57: Pin Configuration <strong>for</strong> Interface ‘V 1 ’<br />
The cable connector in the LTMS end of the cable shall be of female type.<br />
The cable connector in the Interface Adapter end of the cable shall be of male type.<br />
Note: Adequate termination shall be per<strong>for</strong>med in the LTMS (a load resistor shall be connected between pins<br />
4 and 5 of the LTMS cable connector).<br />
34<br />
The actual configuration with respect to pinning and disposition of the connector in the Interface Adapter are company<br />
specific.
Page 276 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Interface Adapter<br />
+5 V<br />
R B<br />
5<br />
R L<br />
0 V<br />
R B<br />
LTMS<br />
8<br />
+5 V<br />
R B<br />
R L<br />
9<br />
4<br />
0 V<br />
R B<br />
Figure 71: Physical Configuration <strong>for</strong> Interface ‘V 1 ’<br />
The load resistance R L shall be 110 Ω ±10 Ω.<br />
The biasing resistors R B shall be 650 Ω ±30 Ω.<br />
Please observe that the actual configuration with respect to pinning and disposition of the connector in the Interface<br />
Adapter are company specific. The load and biasing resistors indicated inside the Interface Adapter may<br />
also be external to the Interface Adapter (similarly to the LTMS side).
Page 277 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
E4.2.3<br />
Interface ‘V 2 ’, Mechanical Data<br />
DSUB connectors with 9 pins/sockets shall be used.<br />
Connector layout:<br />
Interface Adapter side 35<br />
LTOM side<br />
Pin Signal Pin Signal<br />
1 Ground<br />
2 Ground<br />
Ground 3 Unconnected<br />
Positive LTOM Transmit terminal 4 Unconnected<br />
Negative LTOM Transmit terminal 5 Unconnected<br />
6 Unconnected<br />
7 Unconnected<br />
8 Positive LTOM Transmit terminal<br />
9 Negative LTOM Transmit terminal<br />
Table 58: Pin Configuration <strong>for</strong> Interface ‘V 2 ’<br />
The cable connector in the LTOM end of the cable shall be of female type.<br />
The cable connector in the Interface Adapter end of the cable shall be of male type.<br />
Note: Adequate termination shall be per<strong>for</strong>med in the Interface Adapter.<br />
35<br />
The actual configuration with respect to pinning and disposition of the connector in the Interface Adapter are company<br />
specific.
Page 278 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Interface Adapter<br />
+5 V<br />
R B<br />
R L<br />
0 V<br />
R B<br />
LTOM<br />
8<br />
9<br />
Figure 72: Physical Configuration <strong>for</strong> Interface ‘V 2 ’<br />
The load resistance R L shall be 110 Ω ±10 Ω.<br />
The biasing resistors R B shall be 650 Ω ±30 Ω.<br />
Please observe that the actual configuration with respect to pinning and disposition of the Interface Adapter are<br />
company specific. The load and biasing resistors indicated inside the Interface Adapter may also be external to<br />
the Interface Adapter.
Page 279 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
E4.3 Link Control<br />
E4.3.1<br />
General<br />
The used communication channels shall be RS485. The applicable port configuration shall be:<br />
• Data Rate 115.2 kbit/s<br />
• Idle state of the channels at the high level (logical ‘one’)<br />
• No Parity<br />
• One start bit (a ‘zero’)<br />
• 8 data bits (direct NRZ encoding)<br />
• One stop bit (a ‘one’)<br />
E4.3.2 Interface ‘V 1 ’<br />
The variables defined in Clause E1 on page 266 shall be transmitted on a one by one basis. Each variable shall<br />
be preceded by a unique header, a sequence number, and in<strong>for</strong>mation on length of data, and shall be succeeded<br />
by a 32-bit CRC. This is illustrated as follows.<br />
Header<br />
(1 byte)<br />
Seq. Number<br />
(1 byte)<br />
Length of Data<br />
(2 bytes)<br />
Variable<br />
(X bytes)<br />
CRC<br />
(4 bytes)<br />
The header be<strong>for</strong>e the package of variables (and be<strong>for</strong>e the ‘Length of Data’ and ‘Seq. Number’ fields) shall be<br />
one byte long and consist of a unique value <strong>for</strong> each variable as defined below.<br />
The ‘Length of Data’ field shall be two bytes long and include the number of data bytes in the ‘Variable’ field<br />
(which in this case is as recalled below). The most significant byte shall be transmitted first.<br />
The ‘Seq. Number’ field shall be one byte long and include a counter (individual <strong>for</strong> each variable) that is incremented<br />
by one each time the variable is transmitted. The variable shall be a modulo 256 counter (counting 0<br />
to 255), which is initialised to zero at power on or if the interface adapter is reset.<br />
The ‘Variable’ of the succeeding field has the following length, and shall be announced by the below defined<br />
header:<br />
• Mode Selection (TESTCONF) Header = 0 Length of Data = 7 (decimal)<br />
• Mode Status (BTMSTAT) Header = 1 Length of Data = 11 (decimal)<br />
• Link Status (ALIVE) Header = 2 Length of Data = 4 (decimal)<br />
• Self <strong>Test</strong> Report (ANTTEST) Header = 3 Length of Data = 5 (decimal)<br />
• Balise Passage Report (BAL_PASS) Header = 4 Length of Data = 263 (decimal)
Page 280 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
The concluding ‘CRC’ shall be calculated over the overall bit stream of each transmission (i.e., the fields<br />
‘Header’, ‘Seq. Number’, ‘Length of Data’, and ‘Variables’), be<strong>for</strong>e the inclusion of start and stop bits, using<br />
the following generator polynomial:<br />
X 32 + X 30 + X 27 + X 25 + X 22 + X 20 + X 13 + X 12 + X 11 + X 10 + X 8 + X 7 + X 6 + X 5 + X 4 + X 0<br />
For the purpose of initialisation of the 32 bit shift register <strong>for</strong> the generator polynomial, the pattern 0x00FF0000<br />
(most significant bit …... least significant bit) applies.<br />
The data flow is from most significant byte to least significant byte of each variable. The least significant bit is<br />
transmitted first <strong>for</strong> each byte.<br />
If the LTMS detects the loss of data packages (using the ‘Seq. Number) or detects corruption of data (through<br />
evaluation of the CRC), it shall terminate the test that is in progress, and re-start the test.<br />
E4.3.3 Interface ‘V 2 ’<br />
The package of variables shall be succeeded by a 32-bit CRC. This is illustrated as follows.<br />
Variables<br />
(16 bytes)<br />
CRC<br />
(4 bytes)<br />
The ‘Variables’ of the succeeding package shall be transmitted in the following order:<br />
1. Distance 4 bytes<br />
2. Distance Error 4 bytes<br />
3. Speed 2 bytes<br />
4. Time 4 bytes<br />
5. Time Error 1 byte<br />
6. Sequence Number 1 byte<br />
The concluding ‘CRC’ shall be calculated over the overall bit stream (i.e., the field ‘Variables’), be<strong>for</strong>e the<br />
inclusion of start and stop bits, using the following generator polynomial:<br />
X 32 + X 30 + X 27 + X 25 + X 22 + X 20 + X 13 + X 12 + X 11 + X 10 + X 8 + X 7 + X 6 + X 5 + X 4 + X 0<br />
For the purpose of initialisation of the 32 bit shift register <strong>for</strong> the generator polynomial, the pattern 0x00FF0000<br />
(most significant bit …... least significant bit) applies.<br />
The data flow is from most significant byte to least significant byte of each variable. The least significant bit is<br />
transmitted first <strong>for</strong> each byte.<br />
In the event that the interface adapter detects unacceptably frequent corruption of Interface ‘V 2 ’ data, it should<br />
in<strong>for</strong>m the LTMS. This should be per<strong>for</strong>med through the sporadic transmission of a Self-test Report (variable<br />
ANTTEST) via Interface ‘V 1 ’. In this case the ANTTEST variable should be assigned the value “2” (with the<br />
meaning “Adapter Failure”). After this, the LTMS shall terminate the test that is in progress, and re-start the<br />
test.
Page 281 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
E4.4 Interface ‘V 1 ’ Link Synchronisation<br />
E4.4.1<br />
General<br />
There are four different scenarios where the synchronisation mechanism applies:<br />
• During an initial switching ON sequence. There are two possibilities:<br />
• Case 1 – The BTM is switched on be<strong>for</strong>e the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver<br />
• Case 2 – The Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver is switched on be<strong>for</strong>e the BTM<br />
• During re-starting scenarios. There are two possibilities:<br />
• Case 3 – The Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver is re-started but the BTM remains on<br />
• Case 4 – The BTM is re-started but the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver remains on<br />
The general mechanism used by the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver to synchronise with the BTM is that <strong>for</strong> each<br />
BTMSTAT, ALIVE, ANTTEST, or BALPASS variable, whose internal sequence number (i.e., the sequence<br />
number stored by the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver that is received from the BTM) is equal to 0, the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver<br />
updates itself with the sequence number (SN) received from the BTM. See also sub-clause E4.4.6 on page 285.<br />
In general, when stating “BTM” in this sub-clause, it implies “BTM and/or company specific Interface ‘V’<br />
adapter”.<br />
E4.4.2<br />
Case 1 – The BTM is switched on be<strong>for</strong>e the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver<br />
Case 1 is the normal situation. As shown in Figure 73, the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver internally synchronises with the<br />
ALIVE variable, thus modifying its sequence number.<br />
Figure 73: Case 1
Page 282 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
E4.4.3<br />
Case 2 – The Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver is switched on be<strong>for</strong>e the BTM<br />
Case 2 is not a normal case because the BTM is normally switched on be<strong>for</strong>e the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver. However,<br />
it might happen, and then the BTM shall be able to synchronise with the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver. As shown<br />
in Figure 74, the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver waits <strong>for</strong> some time to receive the ALIVE status from the BTM. It gives a<br />
time out error after some time as no ALIVE variable has been received.<br />
Figure 74: Case 2
Page 283 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
E4.4.4<br />
Case 3 – The Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver is re-started but the BTM remains on<br />
This case could happen sometimes. If a test procedure has finished and a new one is started, the BTM remains<br />
on whereas the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver is closed in the first test procedure and re-opened again in the second one.<br />
The Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver needs to synchronise with the BTM.<br />
As shown in Figure 75, the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver is re-started at some point of time. The first time the Interface<br />
‘V 1 ’ driver receives a variable from the BTM, the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver internally synchronises with the variable<br />
in a similar way as in Case 1. This normally happens with ALIVE, BTMSTAT, ANTTEST (when transmitted<br />
sporadically), and BALPASS variables.<br />
When the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver sends a TESTCONF variable after being re-started, the BTM is the one that<br />
synchronises with the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver as shown in Figure 76. The BTM does not answer with a<br />
BTMSTAT variable the first time. This is due to synchronisation mechanism. The BTM needs a second<br />
TESTCONF variable to continue the communication.<br />
Figure 75: Case 3, ALIVE variable
Page 284 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Figure 76: Case 3, TESTCONF variable<br />
It should be considered that the BTM behaviour depends on each single implementation. This description only<br />
intends to clarify the behaviour of the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver.<br />
In this case (Case 3), there might be various BTMs that answer with BTMSTAT and/or ANTEST to the first<br />
TESTCONF. This is also a correct implementation as long as the sequence number is correctly updated.<br />
Refer to the description of the synchronisation mechanism in sub-clause E4.4.6 on page 285 to understand all<br />
the possible situations.<br />
E4.4.5<br />
Case 4 – The BTM is re-started but the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver remains on<br />
This case is an abnormal situation from the test procedure point of view. If the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver is active,<br />
this is because the test procedure is under execution. While the test procedure is running the BTM cannot be<br />
restarted. If the BTM is restarted during a test procedure, this is due to a BTM failure. In that case, the test<br />
procedure should stop and re-start again with a correctly operating BTM.<br />
The BTM, and the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver, are re-started and synchronise according to Case 1.
Page 285 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
E4.4.6<br />
Behaviour of the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver<br />
The following behaviour is implemented in the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver.<br />
1. The Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver sends a TESTCONF variable and waits <strong>for</strong> the corresponding BTMSTAT<br />
variable from BTM.<br />
If BTMSTAT is received, the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver:<br />
• Displays the received status in the button indicators.<br />
• The first time (Interface ‘V 1 ’ SN = 0), it does not check the SN of BTMSTAT answer, but it<br />
updates its own SN with the new one coming from the BTM. No error is displayed. In all the<br />
subsequent cases it checks the incoming SN and, if different from its own, it displays ”Stat<br />
Sequence Number” error.<br />
• If BTMSTAT has a status different from the requested TESTCONF status, there is an error<br />
message “BTMSTAT error”, and the button indicators appear grayed.<br />
• If BTMSTAT is received outside the Time out, it displays “Stat Time out” error.<br />
If BTMSTAT is not received, the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver:<br />
• Displays the error “Stat Time out”.<br />
• Displays the error “BTMSTAT error”.<br />
2. In particular, when the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver sends a TESTCONF variable with test mode ON, it waits<br />
also <strong>for</strong> the corresponding ANTTEST variable from the BTM.<br />
If ANTTEST is received, the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver:<br />
• Displays the three characters of the company acronym plus the received value of “Health<br />
Status” in the ANTTEST display.<br />
• The first time (Interface ‘V 1 ’ SN = 0), it does not check the SN of “Health Status” answer, but<br />
it updates its own status with the new one coming from the BTM. No error is displayed. In all<br />
the subsequent cases, it checks the incoming SN and, if different from its own, it displays “Ant<br />
<strong>Test</strong> Sequence Number” error.<br />
• If “Health Status” is not equal to 1, “Ant <strong>Test</strong> health” error is displayed.<br />
• If ANTTEST is received outside the Time out (only with the <strong>Test</strong> Mode ON), it displays the<br />
error “Ant <strong>Test</strong> Time out”.<br />
If ANTTEST is not received, the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver:<br />
• Displays the error “Ant <strong>Test</strong> Time out”.<br />
3. The Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver checks continuously if ANTTEST is received from the BTM. In case of sporadic<br />
reception, it:<br />
• Displays the three characters of the company acronym plus the received value of “Health<br />
Status” in the ANTTEST display.<br />
• The first time (Interface ‘V 1 ’ SN = 0), it does not check the SN of the “Health Status” answer,<br />
but it updates its own status with the new one coming from the BTM. No error is displayed.<br />
In all the subsequent cases, it checks the incoming SN and, if different from its own, it displays<br />
“Ant <strong>Test</strong> Sequence Number” error.<br />
• If “Health Status” is not equal to 1, “Ant <strong>Test</strong> health” error is displayed.
Page 286 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
4. The Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver waits continuously <strong>for</strong> BTM alive status.<br />
When ALIVE is received by the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver, it:<br />
• Displays the three characters of the company acronym plus the “Mod 10 counter” in the<br />
ALIVE display.<br />
• The first time (Interface ‘V 1 ’ SN = 0) it does not check the SN of “Alive”, but it updates its<br />
own status with the new one coming from the BTM. No error is displayed. In all the subsequent<br />
cases, it checks the incoming SN and, if different from its own, it displays “Alive Sequence<br />
Number” error.<br />
• The first time (Interface ‘V 1 ’ SN = 0) it does not check the “Mod 10 counter” of Alive, it but it<br />
updates its own status with the new one coming from the BTM. No error is displayed. In all<br />
the subsequent cases, it checks the incoming “Mod 10 counter” of “Alive” and, if different<br />
from its own, it displays “Alive Modulo 10” error.<br />
• The first time (Interface ‘V 1 ’ SN = 0) it does not check if it is received within Alive period +<br />
tolerance. No error is displayed. In all the subsequent cases, it checks if it is received within<br />
the Alive period + tolerance.<br />
If ALIVE is not received or is received outside the Alive period ± tolerance, “Alive period” error is displayed.<br />
5. The Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver checks continuously if BALPASS is received from the BTM. When<br />
BALPASS is received, the Interface ‘V 1 ’ driver:<br />
• Displays the received variable in the BALPASS table.<br />
• The first time (Interface ‘V 1 ’ SN = 0) it does not check the SN of BALPASS, but it updates its<br />
own status with the new one coming from the BTM. No error is displayed. In all the subsequent<br />
cases, it checks the incoming SN and, if different from its own, displays “BalPass Sequence<br />
Number” error.
Page 287 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Annex F (In<strong>for</strong>mative), <strong>Test</strong> Tools and Instruments<br />
F1 Recommended <strong>Test</strong> Tools and Instruments<br />
The following list includes suitable test equipment. Other equipment with similar per<strong>for</strong>mance may substitute<br />
these. “Item” refers to numbers in the <strong>Test</strong> and Calibration configurations.<br />
Item: Equipment: Type: Comment:<br />
1 Signal Generator HP 8647A<br />
2 Attenuator 6 dB<br />
3 RF Power Amplifier ENI A150 100 W<br />
4 Attenuator 3 dB 100 W<br />
5 (Standard) <strong>Test</strong> Antenna see clause H3 on<br />
page 306<br />
6 Modified <strong>Test</strong> Antenna see clause H3 on<br />
page 306<br />
7 Reference Loop various, see sub-clause<br />
H2.1 on page 299<br />
8 Reference Loop Balun see clause H5 on<br />
page 317<br />
9 Attenuator 20 dB<br />
10 Power Meter<br />
Power Sensors<br />
R&S NRVD<br />
R&S NRV-Z5<br />
11 Attenuator 10 dB<br />
12 Low Pass Filter Mini Circuits,<br />
BLP-10.7<br />
13 Reference Signal Generator see clause D2 on<br />
page 217<br />
14 Current Sense Balun see clause H5 on<br />
page 317<br />
See also clause F3 on page 292.<br />
Has to be calibrated<br />
15 Vector Signal Analyser HP 89410A Set <strong>for</strong> 1.2 MHz bandwidth. Has to<br />
be calibrated against a power meter.<br />
16 Pre-amplifier Mini Circuits, 15542<br />
ZFL-500<br />
17 4.2 MHz Antenna see clause H4 on<br />
page 312<br />
18 Activation Antenna see clause H4 on<br />
page 312
Page 288 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Item: Equipment: Type: Comment:<br />
19 Reduced Size Reference Loop see sub-clause H2.1 on<br />
page 299<br />
20 General purpose Balun see clause H5 on<br />
page 317<br />
21 Deleted<br />
22 Network Analyser HP 3577A Including S-parameter test set<br />
HP 35677A.<br />
23 Directional Coupler DDC-2112 R5-40 RF Power Inc.<br />
24 Deleted<br />
25 Deleted<br />
26 Deleted<br />
27 Adjustable Attenuator AC401/AC501 Pascall<br />
28 RF Power Amplifier ENI 325LA 30 W<br />
29 Attenuator 3 dB 30 W<br />
30 Deleted<br />
31 Attenuator 20 dB 20 W, VSWR < 1:1.05<br />
32 Current probe Tektronix CT-2 Has to be calibrated<br />
33 Attenuator 10 dB 20 W, VSWR < 1:1.05<br />
34 Interface V 1 adapter Supplier specific<br />
35 Spectrum Analyser HP 8594E<br />
36 RF Switch CX-600N Toyo Tsusho<br />
37 Oscilloscope TDS 754A Tektronix<br />
38 Laboratory <strong>Test</strong> Management<br />
System<br />
39 Laboratory Time and Odometer<br />
Module<br />
see clause D5 on<br />
page 240<br />
see clause D1 on<br />
page 210<br />
40 Interface V 2 Adapter Company specific<br />
41 Vector Signal Analyser HP 89441A<br />
42 Laboratory Reference Receiver<br />
see clause D6 on<br />
page 252<br />
43 Network Analyser HP 8751A Including S-parameter test set<br />
HP 87511A.<br />
44 LZB Loop See Annex J<br />
45 High Power Low Pass Filter See clause F2 on<br />
page 289<br />
46 High Power Low Pass Filter L10M5001 Microwave Circuits Inc.
Page 289 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
F2 Recommended High Power Low Pass Filter<br />
F2.1 Characteristics<br />
The following characteristics apply:<br />
• Capability of handling a continuous power higher than 50 W at 27 MHz, and a pulsed power higher than<br />
100 W at 4 MHz <strong>for</strong> about 100 ms each second.<br />
• Input and output Voltage Standing Wave Ratio better than 1.1:4, within the band 3 MHz to 6 MHz.<br />
• Input and output Voltage Standing Wave Ratio better than 1.1:2, within the band 3.8 MHz to 4.6 MHz.<br />
• Attenuation, within the band 3 MHz to 6 MHz, less than 0.3 dB.<br />
• Attenuation ripple within the band 3 MHz to 6 MHz, less than 0.1 dB.<br />
• Group delay variation within the band 3 MHz to 6 MHz, less than ±10 ns.<br />
• Attenuation above 27 MHz higher than 60 dB.<br />
There is also a filter that provides VSWR of 1.1:1 in the frequency range 3 MHz to 6 MHz. See item 46 in<br />
clause F1 on page 287.
Page 290 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
F2.2 Suggested Implementation<br />
Figure 77: High Power Low Pass Filter<br />
In general, the recommended characteristics <strong>for</strong> the included components are:<br />
• Each capacitance shall be implemented using at least two ceramic NP0 capacitors in parallel. The voltage<br />
rate shall be at least 100 V, and the Q-value shall be better than or equal to 100.<br />
• Each inductance is a custom made inductor wound on a toroid ferrite core. The recommended core device<br />
is type T-50-6 supplied by Amidon Corporation (A C = 0.121 cm 2 , V C = 0.367 cm 3 ,<br />
A L = 46 µH/100 turns). The wire area shall be at least 0.6 mm 2 .
Page 291 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
F2.3 Inductor characteristics<br />
Figure 78: Frequency characteristics of the 0.8 µH Inductor (measurement)<br />
Figure 79: Frequency characteristics of the 1.5 µH Inductor (measurement)
Page 292 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
F3 Specific Low Pass Filter Characteristics<br />
The following specific characteristics apply to the low pass filter (Mini Circuits, BLP-10.7):<br />
• Input and output Voltage Standing Wave Ratio better than 1.1:2, within the band 1 MHz to 6 MHz. 36<br />
• Group delay variation within the band 3 MHz to 6 MHz, lower than ±10 ns.<br />
Apart from the above, the general recommended characteristics <strong>for</strong> item 12 in clause F1 on page 287 apply.<br />
The applicable temperature range where characteristics shall be fulfilled is from 0 °C to 40 °C.<br />
36<br />
The Mini Circuit data sheet guarantees a VSWR better than 1.7:1 over the entire temperature and frequency ranges.<br />
Measurements of several items confirm a value better than 1.2:1 over the applicable limited temperature and frequency<br />
ranges.
Page 293 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Annex G (In<strong>for</strong>mative), Recommended test procedures<br />
G1 <strong>Test</strong>ing of LEU output Return Loss<br />
G1.1 <strong>Test</strong> Abstract<br />
The Return Loss properties of the LEU are checked in accordance with the requirements given in Part 1 of this<br />
Norm in order to ensure correct interaction with the Balise.<br />
The measurement of the Interface ‘C1’ Return Loss of the LEU is carried out, during its normal operation, by<br />
the use of a Network Analyser injecting suitable test signals and measuring the corresponding reflected power.<br />
The measurements shall be preceded by a suitable calibration procedure as defined herein. Thereafter, the Return<br />
Loss shall be directly measured.<br />
In the case of Interface ‘C6’, the approach has to be modified since the S-parameter test sets that are available do<br />
not cover its very low operating frequency (8.8 kHz).<br />
Tailoring of these test methods is allowed if it can be shown that the same results are obtained, and if the same<br />
properties are explored<br />
G1.2 <strong>Test</strong> Set-up <strong>for</strong> Interface ‘C1’<br />
Interface ‘C’<br />
LEU<br />
Interface C Adapter<br />
20 dB<br />
Attenuator<br />
31.<br />
Network Analyser<br />
with S-parameter<br />
test set<br />
43.<br />
Figure 80: <strong>Test</strong> set-up <strong>for</strong> testing Interface ‘C1’ Return Loss<br />
The Network Analyser can be any set of commercial instrument ensuring the operation defined in the next subclause.<br />
In particular the used Port of the Network Analyser shall be able to handle signal levels higher than or<br />
equal to 10 dBm. Suggested suitable equipment is found in clause F1 on page 287.<br />
The 20 dB Attenuator can be any commercial RF device capable of handling an input power higher than 2 W. It<br />
is connected to the Port 1 terminal of the S Parameter <strong>Test</strong> Set.<br />
The Interface ‘C’ Adapter shall fulfil the following functions:<br />
• Adaptation of the non standardised mechanical and electrical properties of the LEU Interface ‘C’ to<br />
the characteristics of the 20 dB Attenuator;<br />
• Adaptation of the input impedance of the 20 dB Attenuator (typically 50 Ω) to the 120 Ω loading impedance<br />
of the LEU, as required <strong>for</strong> the test.
Page 294 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
The following Figure 81 suggests a possible solution <strong>for</strong> the Interface ‘C’ Adapter.<br />
LEU<br />
Connector<br />
and Cable<br />
70 Ω/ 1 W<br />
Coax Cable<br />
and connector<br />
to the 20 dB<br />
Attenuator<br />
Figure 81: Interface C Adapter<br />
The link between the LEU output and the Network analyser (all included) shall not be longer that three meters.<br />
The 70 Ω resistor may be split into two separate resistors connected to the two polarities of the LEU output.<br />
G1.3 Calibration of the test set-up <strong>for</strong> Interface ‘C1’<br />
The S11 “full one port calibration” of the network analyser shall be per<strong>for</strong>med by connecting “open”, “short”,<br />
and “120 Ω reference” to the point where the LEU output port is to be connected (i.e., the 20 dB Attenuator and<br />
the Interface ‘C’ Adapter shall be included in the calibration).<br />
The following settings shall be used <strong>for</strong> both the calibration and the subsequent measurements:<br />
Power Level:<br />
+15 dBm<br />
Internal attenuators: 30 dB<br />
Resolution bandwidth: 2 Hz<br />
Measurement:<br />
S11 refl.<br />
Display Format:<br />
LogMAG (i.e. 20*log(S11)<br />
Vertical scale:<br />
2 dB/div<br />
Sweep:<br />
200 kHz to 600 kHz<br />
Number of test points: >50 (evenly spaced)<br />
Averaging factor: >5<br />
After completion of the calibration, record the calibration status into a suitable media <strong>for</strong> possible uses later on.<br />
G1.4 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure <strong>for</strong> Interface ‘C1’<br />
Connect the LEU to the calibrated network analyser, set in the same state as after the previous calibration, and<br />
switch it on. Per<strong>for</strong>m the test using a long telegram (i.e., the telegram N. 18 of Table 23 on page 158).<br />
1. Command the LEU to transmit the current telegram.<br />
2. Restart the averaging process and wait <strong>for</strong> the completion of the new test step.<br />
3. Record the final diagram generated by the Network Analyser (see example in Figure 82) on a suitable<br />
medium.<br />
4. The Network Analyser directly provides the related absolute value of the Reflection Coefficient (in<br />
dB) within the required frequency range. Check that, in all its points, the diagram is below the allowed<br />
value of Return Loss (with inverted sign). Exclude from this check possible unrealistic values<br />
coming from interference with harmonics of the LEU signal (e.g., in small regions around 282 kHz<br />
and 565 kHz).
Page 295 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Figure 82: Example of test report<br />
G1.5 <strong>Test</strong> Set-up <strong>for</strong> Interface ‘C6’<br />
Interface ‘C’<br />
LEU<br />
Interface C Adapter<br />
20 dB<br />
Attenuator<br />
SpectrumAnalyser<br />
31. 43.<br />
Figure 83: <strong>Test</strong> set-up <strong>for</strong> testing Interface ‘C6’ Return Loss<br />
The Spectrum Analyser can be any commercial instrument ensuring the operation defined in the next sub-clause.<br />
In particular the used input port of the Spectrum Analyser shall be able to handle signal levels higher than or<br />
equal to 10 dBm. Suggested suitable equipment is found in clause F1 on page 287. Item 43 is suggested to be a<br />
Network Analyser configured as a Spectrum Analyser.<br />
The 20 dB Attenuator is the same as defined above <strong>for</strong> the test of the Interface ‘C1’ (see sub-clause G1.2 on<br />
page 293). It is connected to the input of the analyser (e.g., Port R of the Network Analyser).
Page 296 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
The Interface C Adapter is mechanically and electrically similar to the one used <strong>for</strong> the test of Interface ‘C1’<br />
(see sub-clause G1.2 on page 293). The exception is that the 70 Ω resistors shall be replaced by impedance<br />
components whose characteristics are as indicated in the following Table 59. See also allowance in sub-clause<br />
G1.2 regarding splitting of impedance into two separate parts.<br />
Step<br />
number<br />
Impedance<br />
type<br />
Value<br />
Tolerance<br />
Connection<br />
Nominal values <strong>for</strong> the overall impedance<br />
to be used <strong>for</strong> the evaluation<br />
1 Resistors 60 Ω / 1 W < 1 % As in Figure 81 R 1 ≈ 60 Ω<br />
2 Resistor 180 Ω / 1 W < 1 % As in Figure 81 R 2 ≈ 180 Ω<br />
3 Resistor +<br />
Capacitor<br />
120 Ω / 1 W-<br />
165 nF / 50 V<br />
< 1 %<br />
< 1 %<br />
As in Figure 81<br />
R/C in series<br />
R 3 ≈ 120 Ω<br />
X 3 ≈ -109.4 Ω<br />
Table 59: Impedance values used <strong>for</strong> the test<br />
Please observe that the actual impedance values should be measured be<strong>for</strong>e testing, and that the actual impedance<br />
should be used in the subsequent calculation according to sub-clause G1.7 on page 297 (otherwise the<br />
accuracy might not be sufficient).<br />
The link between the LEU output and the Network analyser (all included) shall not be longer than three meters.<br />
G1.6 Calibration of the test set-up <strong>for</strong> Interface ‘C6’<br />
It is required that all the components used <strong>for</strong> the test are measured within the 8 to 9 kHz range prior to the test.<br />
Their values shall be used in the evaluation defined hereafter instead of the nominal values of Table 59.<br />
The measurement of the impedance of R 1 , R 2 , Z 3 , and Z 0 shall be done according to the following procedure<br />
(refer to the diagram in Figure 84). The impedance can be measured by the use of the same Network Analyser<br />
recalled above or by other equivalent instruments.<br />
LEU<br />
Interface C<br />
Adapter<br />
20 dB<br />
Attenuator<br />
Analyser<br />
Z 0<br />
Z T<br />
Figure 84: Layout <strong>for</strong> <strong>Test</strong> Impedance Calibration<br />
Step1.<br />
Step2.<br />
Measure the impedance Z 0 (= R 0 + jX 0 ) at the connector of the Interface C Adapter on the Analyser<br />
side, with a 50 Ω termination connected to the output port of the attenuator (simulating the Analyser<br />
impedance).<br />
Measure the impedance Z T (i.e. the value of R 1 , R and Z 2 3 (= R 3 + j X 3) at the connector of the Interface<br />
C Adapter on the Analyser side, with a short-circuit placed at its LEU side connector.
Page 297 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
The following settings are recommended <strong>for</strong> the measurement layout of Figure 4, using the Network Analyser:<br />
Measurement: Spectrum R.<br />
Format:<br />
VOLT (RMS)<br />
Centre freq.<br />
8.82 kHz<br />
Span<br />
1 kHz<br />
Freq. Resolution:<br />
3 Hz<br />
Ref. value:<br />
500 mV<br />
Vert. scale:<br />
50 mV/div<br />
After completion of the calibration, record the calibration status into a suitable medium <strong>for</strong> possible uses later<br />
on.<br />
This test procedure requires the solution of a system of two non-linear equations that can be per<strong>for</strong>med either<br />
analytically or by the use of a suitable mathematical tool. A simple evaluation program within the MAPLE<br />
environment is a suggested solution.<br />
G1.7 <strong>Test</strong> Procedure <strong>for</strong> Interface ‘C6’<br />
Connect the LEU, via the Interface C Adapter and the attenuator, to the input R of the network Analyser and<br />
switch it on. Per<strong>for</strong>m the test <strong>for</strong> a long telegram (i.e., telegram number 18 from the list of Table 23 on page<br />
158).<br />
1. Set the test impedance of the Interface ’C’ Adapter according to the indication of Table 59 <strong>for</strong> the current<br />
test step.<br />
2. Command the LEU to transmit the test telegram.<br />
3. Wait until the peak value of the spectrum is stable.<br />
4. Record the final peak value of the spectrum in correspondence with the actual Interface ‘C6’ frequency (to<br />
be found within 8.82 kHz ± 0.1 kHz) on a suitable medium. Multiply the obtained values by the actual attenuation<br />
(nominally 10), in order to compensate <strong>for</strong> the 20 dB attenuation, and to obtain the values V 1 (1 st<br />
step), V 2 (2 nd step), and V 3 (3 rd step) to be used in the Equation 1 and Equation 2 below.<br />
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 <strong>for</strong> the new test impedance, until the three test cases are completed.<br />
6. Calculate the R S and X S values of the LEU output impedance at the Interface ‘C6’ frequency, by solving the<br />
system of Equation 1 and Equation 2, using the RMS voltage values (V 1 , V 2 and V 3 in Volt units) measured<br />
respectively at the 1 st , 2 nd and 3 rd step. The actual load impedance values (R 1 , R 2 and R 3 /X 3 in Ohm) apply<br />
<strong>for</strong> each calculation.<br />
7. Use the Equation 3 <strong>for</strong> calculating the final Return Loss value. Check that the obtained value is above the<br />
minimum specified limit.
Page 298 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
The following equivalent circuit and related equation system (applicable to Interface ‘C6’ measurements) shall<br />
be used <strong>for</strong> the calculations:<br />
R S +jX S<br />
R 1 ; R 2 ; R 3 +jX 3<br />
R 0 +jX 0<br />
Figure 85: Equivalent circuit <strong>for</strong> evaluation of the Return Loss at Interface ‘C6’<br />
Equation 1<br />
Equation 2<br />
k<br />
k<br />
1<br />
2<br />
V<br />
=<br />
V<br />
V<br />
=<br />
V<br />
2<br />
1<br />
2<br />
2<br />
2<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
=<br />
=<br />
2<br />
2<br />
( R 2 + R S + R 0 ) + ( XS<br />
+ X0<br />
)<br />
2<br />
( R + R + R ) + ( X + X ) 2<br />
1<br />
S<br />
0<br />
2<br />
( R 3 + R S + R 0 ) + ( XS<br />
+ X0<br />
+ X3<br />
)<br />
2<br />
( R + R + R ) + ( X + X ) 2<br />
1<br />
S<br />
0<br />
S<br />
S<br />
0<br />
0<br />
2<br />
Equation 3<br />
Re t.Loss<br />
C6<br />
= −10<br />
⋅ log<br />
10<br />
⎡<br />
⎢<br />
⎢⎣<br />
2 2<br />
( R − ) +<br />
( ) ⎥ ⎥ ⎤<br />
S 170 XS<br />
2 2<br />
R S + 170 + XS<br />
⎦<br />
G2 Harmonic contents on the Interface ‘C6’ LEU output<br />
In SUBSET-036, it is explicitly specified that harmonics within the frequency band 0.1 MHz to 1 MHz shall be<br />
below a certain value. For the purpose of LEU testing, this is judged being sufficiently verified through fulfilling<br />
the eye diagram <strong>for</strong> Interface 'C1'.
Page 299 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Annex H (In<strong>for</strong>mative), Air-gap Reference Equipment<br />
H1 General<br />
This in<strong>for</strong>mative Annex includes recommended implementations of the air-gap reference equipment. It includes<br />
specific implementations <strong>for</strong> the Reference Loops, <strong>Test</strong> Antennas, Activation Antennas, and Baluns suitable <strong>for</strong><br />
per<strong>for</strong>ming the tests defined within this Norm. Other implementations are allowed, but the requirements of<br />
Annex B shall be fulfilled, and the accuracy shall be at least as good as achieved with the implementations recommended<br />
within this Annex.<br />
H2 Reference Loops<br />
H2.1 Reference Loop Design<br />
H2.1.1<br />
Overall Design<br />
The Reference Loop is a conductor <strong>for</strong>med as a loop surrounding the active Reference Area. For several reasons,<br />
the Reference Loop shall be tuned. This provides better measurement accuracy, it decreases the sensitivity<br />
to E-field, and ensures that the current follows the border of the Reference Area.<br />
The Reference Loop has to be tuned <strong>for</strong> two frequency bands. For measuring the output from the Antenna, the<br />
Reference Loop shall be tuned to 27.095 MHz. When generating a field equivalent to a Balise output field, the<br />
Reference Loop shall be tuned to 4.23 MHz. In these cases, tuning means that the input reactance of the Reference<br />
Loop shall be minimised (close to zero).<br />
The Standard Size Reference Loop shall be designed according to the overall configuration shown in Figure 86.<br />
The metallic parts of the Reference Loop shall be made of solid copper. These parts shall be insulated from<br />
each other, and connected via printed circuit boards with the components according to Figure 88.<br />
The Reduced Size Reference Loop shall include four sections, instead of eight as <strong>for</strong> the Standard Size Reference<br />
Loop. See Figure 87.<br />
C 1 , L 2 and C 2 shall be mounted on the small PCB. L 1 in Figure 88 is the inductance of one of the Reference<br />
Loop sections. The total Reference Loop inductance L has to be determined (measured) be<strong>for</strong>e the tuning process.<br />
L 1 is then 1/4:th of L <strong>for</strong> the Reduced Size Reference Loop, and 1/8:th of L <strong>for</strong> the Standard Size Reference<br />
Loop. The component values shall be chosen so that the impedance of C 2 can be neglected <strong>for</strong> low frequencies,<br />
and the impedance of C 1 can be neglected <strong>for</strong> high frequencies. These assumptions give the following equations<br />
<strong>for</strong> the two resonance frequencies:<br />
ω<br />
1<br />
=<br />
(L<br />
1<br />
1<br />
+ L ) ⋅C<br />
2<br />
1<br />
(4.23 MHz)<br />
ω<br />
2<br />
=<br />
L1<br />
+ L2<br />
L ⋅ L ⋅C<br />
1<br />
2<br />
2<br />
(27.095 MHz)<br />
This Reference Loop will provide a 1 dB bandwidth of approximately 2 MHz <strong>for</strong> each frequency band. The<br />
inductance L 2 shall be an air wound coil with an inductance approximately equal to L 1 . C 1 and C 2 shall be porcelain<br />
or ceramic chip capacitors (with a temperature coefficient close to zero).
Page 300 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
3 mm<br />
Non-conducting joint<br />
PCB with components (see separate figure)<br />
Copper 5 mm × 20 mm<br />
TNC connector<br />
358 mm<br />
488 mm<br />
Intersection connected<br />
to TNC ground<br />
TNC signal pin<br />
connected to PCB<br />
PCB with components<br />
Figure 86: Standard Size Reference Loop, overall configuration
Page 301 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Non-conducting joint<br />
TNC connector<br />
PCB with components (see separate figure)<br />
200 mm<br />
3 mm<br />
390 mm<br />
Figure 87: Reduced Size Reference Loop, overall configuration<br />
PCB<br />
L 2<br />
C 1<br />
C 2<br />
L 1<br />
Figure 88: Printed Circuit Board (PCB) components within dashed box<br />
H2.1.2<br />
Loop Structure Mechanics<br />
The following separate sections of the Loop (denominated “loop element”) are included:<br />
• The right angle loop elements <strong>for</strong> the standard size loop (four in total).<br />
• The straight loop elements <strong>for</strong> the standard size loop without holes <strong>for</strong> the TNC connector (three in total).<br />
• The straight loop element <strong>for</strong> the standard size loop with holes <strong>for</strong> the TNC connector.<br />
• The right angle loop elements <strong>for</strong> the reduced size loop without holes <strong>for</strong> the TNC connector (three in total).<br />
• The right angle loop element <strong>for</strong> the reduced size loop with holes <strong>for</strong> the TNC connector.<br />
See Figure 86 on page 300 and Figure 87 on page 301.
Page 302 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
H2.1.3<br />
Non-conductive Joints<br />
There is a non-conductive washer used within the non-conductive joints between the Loop Elements.<br />
The same washer is used <strong>for</strong> both types of Reference Loops. Seven washers are used in the Standard Size Reference<br />
Loop, and three in the Reduced Size Reference Loop.<br />
The washers shall be mounted to the Loop Elements using M5 screws (four screws in each washer).<br />
H2.1.4<br />
Printed Circuit Board<br />
Two types of printed circuit boards (PCBs) exist. One type shall be used where connection to the TNC connector<br />
is required, and the other type shall be used in all the other positions.<br />
The PCBs shall be mounted to the loop elements using screws. Underneath the screw heads, a flat washer shall<br />
be mounted in order to ensure reliable electrical connection, and also to ensure that the PCB is not scratched<br />
during the assembly process. Screws and washers shall be made of nickel-plated brass.<br />
The surface of the PCB facing the Loop Element shall be plated and connected to the component side through<br />
many plated via holes. This together with the screw mounting will ensure a low impedance connection.<br />
H2.1.5<br />
PCB Components<br />
The components shown within the dashed box of Figure 88 on page 301 shall be determined in accordance with<br />
sub-clause H2.3. It is important that the components are of low loss type, and that they are stable with respect to<br />
temperature variations and ageing.<br />
The following types of components are recommended:<br />
• L 2 shall be an air wound fixed RF inductor. The recommendation is the 132 Series from Coilcraft.<br />
• C 1 shall be a combination of three ceramic capacitors of low temperature coefficient type. The recommendation<br />
is the ATC700 Series from American Technical Ceramics Corp.<br />
• C 2 shall be a combination of three porcelain capacitors of low temperature coefficient type. The recommendation<br />
is the ATC710 (or ATC700) series from American Technical Ceramics Corp.<br />
Considering experience, the following guidelines apply <strong>for</strong> the Standard Size Reference Loop:<br />
• The total inductance L is approximately 960 nH <strong>for</strong> both 4.23 MHz and 27.095 MHz. Consequently, the<br />
loop element inductance L 1 is approximately 120 nH. Considering this, the Coilcraft inductor 132-09 with<br />
an inductance of 138 nH should be selected <strong>for</strong> the component L 2 .<br />
• Using the appropriate equation in sub-clause H2.3 gives a theoretical capacitance <strong>for</strong> C 1 of 5.46 nF. Considering<br />
this, a parallel combination of two 2.2 nF and one 1.0 nF capacitor should be used. The recommended<br />
types are ATC700B222GP50X and ATC700B102GP50X.<br />
• Using the appropriate equation in sub-clause H2.3 gives a theoretical capacitance <strong>for</strong> C 2 of 537 pF. Considering<br />
this, a parallel combination of two 220 pF and one 100 pF capacitor should be used. The recommended<br />
types are ATC710B221FP200X and ATC700B101GP500X.
Page 303 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Considering experience, the following guidelines apply <strong>for</strong> the Reduced Size Reference Loop:<br />
• The total inductance L is approximately 640 nH at 4.23 MHz and 540 nH at 27.095 MHz. Consequently, the<br />
loop element inductance L 1 is approximately 160 nH at 4.23 MHz and 135 nH at 27.095 MHz. Considering<br />
this, the Coilcraft inductor 132-09 with an inductance of 138 nH should be selected <strong>for</strong> the component L 2 .<br />
• Using the appropriate equation in sub-clause H2.3 gives a theoretical capacitance <strong>for</strong> C 1 of 4.73 nF. Considering<br />
this, a parallel combination of two 2.2 nF and one 330 pF capacitor should be used. The recommended<br />
types are ATC700B222GP50X and ATC700B331GP200X.<br />
• Using the appropriate equation in sub-clause H2.3 gives a theoretical capacitance <strong>for</strong> C 2 of 505 pF. Considering<br />
this, a parallel combination of two 220 pF and one 68 pF capacitor should be used. The recommended<br />
types are ATC710B221FP200X and ATC700B680GP500X.<br />
It must be observed that the tuning process according to sub-clause H2.3 shall be followed, and that the component<br />
values above are guidelines only. The PCBs also have space available <strong>for</strong> one extra tuning capacitor (in<br />
parallel with the above described combinations <strong>for</strong> C1 and C2 respectively).<br />
H2.1.6<br />
Encapsulation<br />
The Reference Loop shall be protected with an insulating plate. The total thickness of this plate shall be 27 mm,<br />
and the physical interface with the environment in the other directions (x and y) shall be 22 mm outside the<br />
Reference Area.<br />
This means that the outer dimensions of the encapsulated Reference Loop shall be:<br />
Standard Size Reference Loop:<br />
Reduced Size Reference Loop:<br />
Width × Length = 402 mm × 532 mm<br />
Width × Length = 244 mm × 434 mm<br />
The Reference Loop shall have visible markings that define the geometrical centre position of the Reference<br />
Area. It shall be located in the centre of the plate ±10 mm.<br />
H2.2 Utilisation of the Reference Loops<br />
The Reference Loop shall be connected to the measuring equipment or signal source using a double shielded<br />
RG214 cable. At the end of the cable, close to the Reference Loop, there shall be a Balun connected. The cable<br />
shall be de-bugged using ferrite blocks evenly spaced at distances less than 70 cm. The core material in the<br />
ferrite blocks shall be “Amidon 43”. The Balun design is described in clause H5 of this Annex.<br />
It is important that the signal source feeding the Reference Loop (via the Balun) has a well-defined impedance.<br />
The same applies to the measuring equipment connected to the Reference Loop (via the Balun). The signal<br />
source and the measuring equipment nominal impedance shall both be 50 Ω.<br />
This Reference Loop design will provide the following maximum impedance <strong>for</strong> the respective frequency bands:<br />
• Standard Size Reference Loop 4.23 MHz<br />
• Standard Size Reference Loop 27.095 MHz<br />
• Reduced Size Reference Loop 4.23 MHz<br />
• Reduced Size Reference Loop 27.095 MHz<br />
max. 2 Ω<br />
max. 5 Ω<br />
max. 1 Ω<br />
max. 5 Ω<br />
Detailed instructions <strong>for</strong> utilisation of the Reference Loops are given in applicable sub-clauses of this Norm.
Page 304 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
H2.3 Tuning of the Reference Loops<br />
As part of the manufacturing process, the Reference Loops have to be electrically tuned. The following procedure<br />
shall be used. An acceptably tuned Reference Loop shall provide an absolute value of the reactance that is<br />
less than the resistance (at 4.23 MHz and 27.095 MHz).<br />
1. Temporarily short-circuit all components on the PCBs connecting the sections of the loop structure (e.g.,<br />
use a special set of PCBs with short circuits instead of components).<br />
2. Determine the total inductance of the loop structure. This is ‘L’ described in sub-clause H2.1.<br />
3. Calculate L 1 . This is the inductance of each section of the loop structure.<br />
L<br />
Standard Size Reference Loop: L 1 =<br />
8<br />
Reduced Size Reference Loop:<br />
L<br />
L 1 =<br />
4<br />
4. Determine L 2 using the following equation: L 2 ≈ L1<br />
5. Determine C 1 using the following equation:<br />
where f 1 = 4.23 MHz.<br />
6. Determine C 2 using the following equation:<br />
where f 2 = 27.095 MHz.<br />
C<br />
C<br />
1<br />
2<br />
=<br />
4π<br />
2<br />
⋅f<br />
L<br />
=<br />
4π<br />
2<br />
1<br />
⋅<br />
1<br />
2 2<br />
⋅f<br />
2<br />
1<br />
( L + L )<br />
+ L<br />
1<br />
2<br />
⋅ L ⋅ L<br />
1<br />
2<br />
2<br />
7. Measure the actual impedance at 4.23 MHz with all the components determined above mounted on the<br />
PCBs (and attached to the Loop Elements). If the absolute value of the reactance is not less than the resistance,<br />
then C 1 has to be adjusted accordingly.<br />
8. Measure the actual impedance at 27.095 MHz with all the components determined above mounted on the<br />
PCBs (and attached to the Loop Elements). If the absolute value of the reactance is not less than the resistance,<br />
then C 2 has to be adjusted accordingly.
Page 305 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
H2.4 Calibration of the Reference Loops<br />
The Reference Loops will have imperfections caused by the manufacturing process. The calibration procedure<br />
shall determine relevant calibration factors that are to be associated with each individual Reference Loop.<br />
Three Reference Loops of the same kind shall be measured in accordance with sub-clause B2.6 of Annex B on<br />
page 168. Thereafter, the differences between the theoretical and the measured values shall be allocated to each<br />
individual Reference Loop using the following equations:<br />
ε<br />
ε<br />
ε<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
a<br />
=<br />
a<br />
=<br />
a<br />
=<br />
12<br />
12<br />
13<br />
+ a<br />
+ a<br />
+ a<br />
13<br />
23<br />
23<br />
− a<br />
2<br />
− a<br />
2<br />
− a<br />
2<br />
23<br />
13<br />
12<br />
− a<br />
0<br />
− a<br />
− a<br />
0<br />
0<br />
where: a 12 = measured attenuation between loop 1 and loop 2<br />
a 13 = measured attenuation between loop 1 and loop 3<br />
a 23 = measured attenuation between loop 2 and loop 3<br />
a 0 = theoretical attenuation between two loops<br />
ε 1 = error of loop 1<br />
ε 2 = error of loop 2<br />
ε 3 = error of loop 3<br />
An alternative is to make a measurement between two Reference Loops, where one of these is an already characterised<br />
device, and the other is the device to be calibrated.<br />
The next step is to calculate the difference between the electrical centre of the device and the geometrical centre<br />
(marked on the Reference Loop). The method <strong>for</strong> this is to minimise the standard deviation and the average of<br />
the measurement errors <strong>for</strong> the Reference Loop in question. The minimisation is per<strong>for</strong>med by means of simulating<br />
a displacement in x, y, and z co-ordinates based on the derivatives of the field distribution (in dB/cm). A<br />
change of the electrical size of the Reference Loop should also be simulated (this is the ‘B’-factor in sub-clause<br />
B2.3 of Annex B on page 166). The results of this process shall be marked on the Reference Loop.<br />
The impedance of the Reference Loop during free air conditions shall also be measured and marked on the Reference<br />
Loop.
Page 306 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
H3 <strong>Test</strong> Antennas<br />
H3.1 General<br />
In addition to the Standard <strong>Test</strong> Antenna, hereafter simply denominated <strong>Test</strong> Antenna, there is a need <strong>for</strong> a<br />
Modified <strong>Test</strong> Antenna. This modified design is identical to the standard design except <strong>for</strong> including a 200 mm<br />
by 200 mm 4.23 MHz loop only (no 27.095 MHz loop). See sub-clause H3.3 on page 310. The reason is that<br />
there are certain tests required during Balise con<strong>for</strong>mity tests that require that there is no distortion of the Telepowering<br />
field. In order to minimise the presumptive distortion, the 27.095 MHz loop is removed.<br />
It shall be observed that the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna shall always have a 50 Ω load on the current sense output.<br />
The herein-described implementation provides the possibility to handle a maximum input power resulting in a<br />
current sense output of up to 7.4 dBm.<br />
The reference point of the <strong>Test</strong> Antennas is in the middle of the conductor of the 27 MHz loop element (zdirection),<br />
and at the centre of the loop element in the x-y plane. In case there is only a 4.2 MHz loop element<br />
(i.e., in the Modified <strong>Test</strong> Antenna), the definition applies to this loop element.
Page 307 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
H3.2 <strong>Test</strong> Antenna Design<br />
H3.2.1<br />
Overall Design<br />
The overall mechanical configuration shall be according to Figure 89 below. Please note that the details are not<br />
to scale. Details in red colour indicate water protection (see sub-clause 4.2.4.1 on page 47).<br />
“Bottom” view<br />
2-4 mm<br />
600 mm<br />
200 mm<br />
C<br />
260 mm<br />
250 mm<br />
200 mm<br />
40 mm<br />
27.095 MHz<br />
Loop<br />
40 mm<br />
C<br />
4.23 MHz<br />
Loop<br />
4.23 MHz<br />
Trans<strong>for</strong>mer<br />
27.095 MHz<br />
Trans<strong>for</strong>mer<br />
Current Sense<br />
Trans<strong>for</strong>mer<br />
600 mm<br />
x<br />
y<br />
Box <strong>for</strong> water protection -<br />
plastic material<br />
250 mm<br />
260 mm<br />
3 pcs of ‘N female to N female’ adapters<br />
Screen Plate<br />
(Aluminum)<br />
Holder <strong>for</strong> the Loops<br />
(plastic material)<br />
400 mm<br />
3 pcs of<br />
Baluns<br />
4 mm<br />
Fixing Plate<br />
RG58<br />
Coax<br />
Nylon Screw<br />
80 mm<br />
Side view<br />
Loops<br />
2-4 mm<br />
Current Probe<br />
Z co-ordinate of Reference<br />
Point of <strong>Test</strong> Antenna<br />
30 mm<br />
Figure 89: Overall Mechanical Layout
Page 308 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
H3.2.2<br />
Screen Plate<br />
The screen plate (of dimensions 600 mm × 600 mm and 4 mm thick) shall be made of aluminium. The purpose<br />
of the plate is to reduce environmental influence. The screen plate also holds the three ‘N female to N female’<br />
adapters. The adapters shall be located directly above the respective trans<strong>for</strong>mer they are connected to (in both<br />
x and y co-ordinates).<br />
H3.2.3<br />
Holder<br />
The holders shall be made of plastic material (polyvinyl chloride), and rigidly support the antenna loops<br />
(mounted on a fixing plate). The holders shall be positioned so that the Loops are at a 400 mm distance from the<br />
screen plate, and centred with respect to this. The dimension of the holders should be φ 25 mm. The holders are<br />
built up of two separate details.<br />
H3.2.4<br />
Loops<br />
H3.2.4.1<br />
General<br />
The cross-section of the 27.095 MHz loop shall be 10 mm × 20 mm, and the inner radius in the corners shall be<br />
approximately 10 mm. The cross-section of the 4.23 MHz loop shall be φ 2 mm, and the inner radius in the<br />
corners shall be approximately 5 mm.<br />
The loops shall be mounted on a fixing plate (of polyvinyl chloride), and the 27.095 MHz loop should be made<br />
of solid copper. The 4.23 MHz loop should be made of solid brass.<br />
H3.2.4.2<br />
Capacitors<br />
The capacitors in the 27.095 MHz loop (C in Figure 89) shall be mounted on small PCBs, which are directly<br />
connected the loop by screw mounting. Each C should be a combination of fixed surface mounted devices, and<br />
one variable capacitor (denominated C 1 and C 2 ). It is important that the capacitors are of high-Q type, and that<br />
they withstand at least 500 V. They shall also be able to withstand a current of at least 4 A.<br />
The following types of components are strongly recommended:<br />
• C 1 shall be a combination of four porcelain capacitors of low temperature coefficient type. The recommendation<br />
is the ATC710 (or ATC700) series from American Technical Ceramics Corp.<br />
• C 2 shall be a variable ceramic capacitor of low temperature coefficient type. The recommendation is the<br />
Gigahertz Trimmer Capacitor series from Tekelec Temex.<br />
Considering experience, the following guidelines apply:<br />
• For C 1 a parallel combination of three 43 pF and one 39 pF capacitors should be used. The recommended<br />
types are ATC700B430GP500X and ATC700B390GP500X.<br />
• For C 2 a variable capacitor with a capacitance range of 0.8 pF to 8.0 pF should be used. The recommended<br />
type is AT27291.<br />
It must be observed that the tuning process according to sub-clause H3.4 on page 310 shall be followed, and that<br />
the component values above are guidelines only. The PCBs also have space available <strong>for</strong> one extra tuning capacitor<br />
(in parallel with the above described combination of C 1 and C 2 ).
Page 309 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
H3.2.4.3<br />
Printed Circuit Board (PCB)<br />
The capacitors (C in Figure 89) shall be mounted on PCBs.<br />
The PCBs shall be mounted to the loop elements using screws. Underneath the screw heads a flat washer shall<br />
be mounted in order to ensure reliable electrical connection, and also to ensure that the PCB is not scratched<br />
during the assembly process.<br />
The surface of the PCB facing the loop element shall be plated and connected to the component side through<br />
many plated via holes. This together with the screw mounting will ensure a low impedance connection.<br />
H3.2.4.4<br />
27.095 MHz Trans<strong>for</strong>mer<br />
The trans<strong>for</strong>mer shall have a primary winding of 6 turns. The secondary winding shall be the loop itself<br />
(1 turn).<br />
It is important that all unshielded wires connected to the trans<strong>for</strong>mer are twisted (with a maximum open loop<br />
area of much less than 0.5 cm 2 ).<br />
The core material should be “Philips violet” (material 4C65), and the inner diameter of the core shall be approximately<br />
25 mm (type RCC 36/25/15 is recommended). The 10 mm × 20 mm loop structure shall not interfere<br />
with the inner diameter of the core.<br />
H3.2.4.5<br />
Current Sense Trans<strong>for</strong>mer and Current Probe<br />
The trans<strong>for</strong>mer shall have a primary winding of 8 turns. The secondary winding shall be the loop itself<br />
(1 turn). The primary winding shall be short-circuited, and the wire shall pass through the current probe (see<br />
Figure 90).<br />
8 turns<br />
Current<br />
Sense<br />
Output<br />
Figure 90: Current Sense Trans<strong>for</strong>mer<br />
It is important that all unshielded wires connected to the trans<strong>for</strong>mer are twisted (with a maximum open loop<br />
area of much less than 0.5 cm 2 ).<br />
The core material should be “Philips violet” (material 4C65), and the inner diameter of the core shall be approximately<br />
25 mm (type RCC 36/25/15 is recommended). The 10 mm × 20 mm loop structure shall not interfere<br />
with the inner diameter of the core.<br />
The current probe is a passive device. The recommended part is the High Frequency Current Probe CT-2 from<br />
Tektronix.<br />
The Current Probe provides a calibrated output voltage of approximately 1 mV/mA.
Page 310 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
H3.2.4.6<br />
4.23 MHz Trans<strong>for</strong>mer<br />
The trans<strong>for</strong>mer shall have a primary winding of 7 turns (the Modified <strong>Test</strong> Antenna 5 turns). The secondary<br />
winding shall be the loop itself (1 turn).<br />
It is important that all unshielded wires connected to the trans<strong>for</strong>mer are twisted (with a maximum open loop<br />
area of much less than 0.5 cm 2 ).<br />
The core material should be “Philips pink” (material 4A11), and the core outer diameter shall be approximately<br />
15 mm (type RCC 16/9.6/6.3 is recommended). The core shall have an A l value that is significantly higher than<br />
the loop inductance (which has been estimated to be approximately 40 nH).<br />
H3.2.5<br />
Balun<br />
There is a need <strong>for</strong> baluns as close as possible to the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna. The core shall have high impedance <strong>for</strong> the<br />
frequency range 3 MHz to 30 MHz. The recommendation is to use the General Purpose Balun defined by subclause<br />
H5.2 on page 317.<br />
H3.3 Modified <strong>Test</strong> Antenna Design<br />
The Modified <strong>Test</strong> Antenna does not include the 27.095 MHz loop. This is the main difference between the<br />
(Standard) <strong>Test</strong> Antenna and the Modified <strong>Test</strong> Antenna. Consequently, parts such as 27.095 MHz trans<strong>for</strong>mer,<br />
current sense trans<strong>for</strong>mer, current probe, and the related baluns are not required (and are removed). To improve<br />
the measurement repeatability, the fixing plate is replaced with another fixing plate with a bigger 4.23 MHz loop<br />
that is 200 mm x 200 mm.<br />
The 4.23 MHz trans<strong>for</strong>mer shall have a primary winding of 5 turns. The secondary winding shall be the loop<br />
itself (1 turn).<br />
Apart from this, the Modified <strong>Test</strong> Antenna is identical to the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna. Because of not having a<br />
27.095 MHz loop, the Modified <strong>Test</strong> Antenna is not tuned.<br />
Because of the modular design of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna, the Modified <strong>Test</strong> Antenna may be realised by simply substituting<br />
the original fixing plate with another fixing plate equipped with a bigger 4.23 MHz loop.<br />
H3.4 Tuning of <strong>Test</strong> Antenna<br />
As part of the manufacturing process, the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna has to be electrically tuned.<br />
The tuning (using the capacitors mounted on the PCBs) shall be per<strong>for</strong>med by means of maximising the signal<br />
from the current sense output, when the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna is supplied with a constant 27.095 MHz signal, and when<br />
keeping the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna subjected to free air conditions.
Page 311 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
H3.5 Per<strong>for</strong>mance Check of <strong>Test</strong> Antenna<br />
After having per<strong>for</strong>med tuning according to sub-clause H3.4 on page 310, and verified compliance with mechanical<br />
tolerances, the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna shall be tested according the following when supplied with a constant<br />
27.095 MHz signal. The actual impedance of the Reduced Size Reference Loop shall be taken into account.<br />
• A Reduced Size Reference Loop shall be positioned at [x = 0, y = 0, z = 220 mm] relative to the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna,<br />
and connected to a resistive 50 Ω load. The attenuation from the current sense output (loaded with<br />
50 Ω) to the output of the Reduced Size Reference Loop shall be 30 dB ± 2 dB.<br />
• A Reduced Size Reference Loop shall be positioned at [x = 0, y = 0, z = 220 mm] relative to the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna.<br />
The variation in attenuation from the current sense output (loaded with 50 Ω) to the output of the Reduced<br />
Size Reference Loop shall not exceed ± 0.5 dB when the load of the Reduced Size Reference Loop is<br />
within the resistance range 20 Ω to 50 Ω (resistive loads) 37 .<br />
• A Reduced Size Reference Loop shall be positioned at [x = 0, y = 0, z = 460 mm] relative to the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna,<br />
and connected to a resistive 50 Ω load. The attenuation from the input <strong>for</strong>ward current into the <strong>Test</strong><br />
Antenna to the output of the Reduced Size Reference Loop shall be 15 dB ± 2 dB. It shall be observed that<br />
the current sense output of the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna must be loaded with 50 Ω.<br />
37<br />
The procedure <strong>for</strong> per<strong>for</strong>ming measurements with loads not equal to 50 Ω requires special precautions. A<br />
method and suitable equipment is described in sub-clause 4.2.6 on page 66.
Page 312 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
H4 Activation Antennas<br />
H4.1 General<br />
In addition to the Activation Antenna, there is a need <strong>for</strong> a modified design, hereafter called 4.2 MHz Antenna,<br />
which is used as a probe during certain Balise con<strong>for</strong>mity tests. This modified design is identical to the Activation<br />
Antenna except <strong>for</strong> including a 4.23 MHz loop instead of a 27.095 MHz loop. The reason is that there are<br />
certain tests required during Balise con<strong>for</strong>mity tests that require that there is no distortion of the Tele-powering<br />
field when at the same time measuring the Up-link signal.<br />
It shall be observed that the Activation Antenna shall always have a 50 Ω load on the Current Sense output.<br />
The herein-described implementation provides the possibility to handle a maximum input power resulting in a<br />
current sense output of up to 7.4 dBm.<br />
The reference point of the Activation Antennas is in the middle of the conductor of the 27 MHz loop element (zdirection),<br />
and at the centre of the loop element in the x-y plane. In case there is only a 4.2 MHz loop element<br />
(i.e., in the 27 MHz Antenna), the definition applies to this loop element.
Page 313 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
H4.2 Activation Antenna Design<br />
H4.2.1<br />
Overall Design<br />
The overall mechanical configuration shall be according to Figure 91 below. Please note that the details are not<br />
to scale.<br />
200 mm<br />
"Bottom” view<br />
C<br />
200 mm<br />
27.095 MHz<br />
Trans<strong>for</strong>mer<br />
27.095 MHz<br />
Loop<br />
Current Sense<br />
Trans<strong>for</strong>mer<br />
C<br />
N female<br />
N female<br />
Balun<br />
Connector holder<br />
RG58 Coax<br />
Current Probe<br />
Fixing Plate<br />
N male<br />
N.B.: 2 pcs of Baluns are required<br />
(one <strong>for</strong> 27.095 MHz trans<strong>for</strong>mer,<br />
and one <strong>for</strong> current sense)<br />
Loop<br />
Plastic spacer<br />
Side view<br />
Figure 91: Overall Mechanical Layout
Page 314 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
H4.2.2<br />
Spacer<br />
The spacer shall be made of plastic material (polyvinyl chloride). The dimension of the Spacer should be<br />
φ 25 mm.<br />
H4.2.3<br />
Loop<br />
H4.2.3.1<br />
General<br />
The cross-section of the 27.095 MHz loop shall be 10 mm × 20 mm, and the inner radius in the corners shall be<br />
approximately 1 cm.<br />
The loop shall be mounted on a fixing plate (of polyvinyl chloride), and the 27.095 MHz loop should be made of<br />
solid copper.<br />
H4.2.3.2<br />
Capacitors<br />
The capacitors in the 27.095 MHz Loop (C in Figure 91) shall be mounted on small PCBs, which are directly<br />
connected to the loop by screw mounting. Each C should be a combination of fixed surface mounted devices,<br />
and one variable capacitor (denominated C 1 and C 2 ). It is important that the capacitors are of high-Q type, and<br />
that they withstand at least 500 V. They shall also be able to withstand a current of at least 4 A.<br />
The following types of components are strongly recommended:<br />
• C 1 shall be a combination of four porcelain capacitors of low temperature coefficient type. The recommendation<br />
is the ATC710 (or ATC700) series from American Technical Ceramics Corp.<br />
• C 2 shall be a variable ceramic capacitor of low temperature coefficient type. The recommendation is the<br />
Gigahertz Trimmer Capacitor series from Tekelec Temex.<br />
Considering experience, the following guidelines apply:<br />
• For C 1 a parallel combination of three 43 pF and one 39 pF capacitors should be used. The recommended<br />
types are ATC700B430GP500X and ATC700B390GP500X.<br />
• For C 2 a variable capacitor with a capacitance range of 0.8 pF to 8.0 pF should be used. The recommended<br />
type is AT27291.<br />
It must be observed that the tuning process according to sub-clause H4.4 on page 316 shall be followed, and that<br />
the component values above are guidelines only. The PCBs also have space available <strong>for</strong> one extra tuning capacitor<br />
(in parallel with the above described combination of C 1 and C 2 ).<br />
H4.2.3.3<br />
Printed Circuit Board (PCB)<br />
The capacitors (C in Figure 91) shall be mounted on PCBs.<br />
The PCBs shall be mounted to the loop elements using screws. Underneath the screw heads a flat washer shall<br />
be mounted in order to ensure reliable electrical connection, and also to ensure that the PCB is not scratched<br />
during the assembly process.<br />
The surface of the PCB facing the loop element shall be plated and connected to the component side through<br />
many plated via holes. This together with the screw mounting will ensure a low impedance connection.
Page 315 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
H4.2.3.4<br />
27.095 MHz Trans<strong>for</strong>mer<br />
The trans<strong>for</strong>mer shall have a primary winding of 6 turns. The secondary winding shall be the Loop itself<br />
(1 turn).<br />
It is important that all unshielded wires connected to the trans<strong>for</strong>mer are twisted (with a maximum open loop<br />
area of much less than 0.5 cm 2 ).<br />
The core material should be “Philips violet” (material 4C65), and the inner diameter of the core shall be approximately<br />
25 mm (type RCC 36/25/15 is recommended). The 10 mm × 20 mm loop structure shall not interfere<br />
with the inner diameter of the core.<br />
H4.2.3.5<br />
Current Sense Trans<strong>for</strong>mer and Current Probe<br />
The trans<strong>for</strong>mer shall have a primary winding of 8 turns. The secondary winding shall be the Loop itself<br />
(1 turn). The primary winding shall be short-circuited, and the wire shall pass through the current probe (see<br />
Figure 92).<br />
8 turns<br />
Current<br />
Sense<br />
Output<br />
Figure 92: Current Sense Trans<strong>for</strong>mer<br />
It is important that all unshielded wires connected to the trans<strong>for</strong>mer are twisted (with a maximum open loop<br />
area of much less than 0.5 cm 2 ).<br />
The core material should be “Philips violet” (material 4C65), and the inner diameter of the core shall be approximately<br />
25 mm (type RCC 36/25/15 is recommended). The 10 mm × 20 mm loop structure shall not interfere<br />
with the inner diameter of the core.<br />
The current probe is a passive device. The recommended part is the High Frequency Current Probe CT-2 from<br />
Tektronix.<br />
The current probe provides a calibrated output voltage of approximately 1 mV/mA.<br />
H4.2.4<br />
Connector Holder<br />
The Connector Holder shall be made of plastic material (polyvinyl chloride).<br />
H4.2.5<br />
Balun<br />
There is a need <strong>for</strong> baluns as close as possible to the Activation Antenna. The core shall have high impedance<br />
<strong>for</strong> the frequency range 3 MHz to 30 MHz. The recommendation is to use the General Purpose Balun defined<br />
by sub-clause H5.2 on page 317.
Page 316 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
H4.3 4.2 MHz Antenna Design<br />
The 4.2 MHz Antenna does not include the 27.095 MHz loop but includes a 4.2 MHz loop. This is the main<br />
difference between the Activation Antenna and the 4.2 MHz Antenna. Consequently, parts such as 27.095 MHz<br />
trans<strong>for</strong>mer, current sense trans<strong>for</strong>mer, current probe, and the related baluns are not required, and are substituted<br />
by a 4.2 MHz loop and a 4.2 MHz trans<strong>for</strong>mer (together with a General Purpose Balun).<br />
Parts related to the 4.2 MHz trans<strong>for</strong>mer are identical to the same design <strong>for</strong> the <strong>Test</strong> Antenna. The trans<strong>for</strong>mer<br />
shall have a primary winding of 7 turns. The secondary winding shall be the loop itself (1 turn). The core material<br />
should be “Philips pink” (material 4A11), and the core outer diameter shall be approximately 15 mm (type<br />
RCC 16/9.6/6.3 is recommended).<br />
Because of not having a 27.095 MHz loop, the 4.2 MHz Antenna is not tuned.<br />
H4.4 Tuning of Activation Antenna<br />
As part of the manufacturing process, the Activation Antenna has to be electrically tuned.<br />
The tuning (using the capacitors mounted on the PCBs) shall be per<strong>for</strong>med by means of maximising the signal<br />
from the current sense output, when the Activation Antenna is supplied with a constant 27.095 MHz signal, and<br />
when keeping the Activation Antenna subjected to free air conditions.<br />
H4.5 Per<strong>for</strong>mance Check of Activation Antenna<br />
After having per<strong>for</strong>med tuning according to sub-clause H4.4, and verified compliance with mechanical tolerances,<br />
the Activation Antenna shall be tested according the following when supplied with a constant<br />
27.095 MHz signal. The actual impedance of the Reduced Size Reference Loop shall be taken into account.<br />
• A Reduced Size Reference Loop shall be positioned at [x = 0, y = 0, z = 220 mm] relative to the Activation<br />
Antenna, and connected to a resistive 50 Ω load. The attenuation from the current sense output (loaded with<br />
50 Ω) to the output of the Reduced Size Reference Loop shall be 30 dB ± 2 dB.<br />
• A Reduced Size Reference Loop shall be positioned at [x = 0, y = 0, z = 220 mm] relative to the Activation<br />
Antenna. The variation in attenuation from the current sense output (loaded with 50 Ω) to the output of the<br />
Reduced Size Reference Loop shall not exceed ± 0.5 dB when the load of the Reduced Size Reference Loop<br />
is within the resistance range 20 Ω to 50 Ω (resistive loads) 38 .<br />
• A Reduced Size Reference Loop shall be positioned at [x = 0, y = 0, z = 460 mm] relative to the Activation<br />
Antenna, and connected to a resistive 50 Ω load. The attenuation from the input <strong>for</strong>ward current into the Activation<br />
Antenna to the output of the Reduced Size Reference Loop shall be 15 dB ± 2 dB. It shall be observed<br />
that the current sense output of the Activation Antenna must be loaded with 50 Ω.<br />
38<br />
The procedure <strong>for</strong> per<strong>for</strong>ming measurements with loads not equal to 50 Ω requires special precautions. A<br />
method and suitable equipment is described in sub-clause 4.2.6 on page 66.
Page 317 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
H5 Baluns<br />
H5.1 General<br />
This Annex is a Design <strong>Specification</strong> defining specific implementations of Reference Equipment Baluns. It<br />
includes a General Purpose Balun to be used together with <strong>Test</strong> Antennas, Activation Antennas and various<br />
instruments. A General Purpose Balun <strong>for</strong> Reference Loops, hereafter called Reference Loop Balun is also<br />
included. This device is intended to be connected to a Reference Loop (it is equipped with a TNC connector).<br />
This Annex also includes a balun with Current Sense capabilities, hereafter called Current Sense Balun. This<br />
balun is mainly intended <strong>for</strong> use together with Reference Loops in order to enable a simplified test method (direct<br />
measurement of current instead of calculations based on Reference Loop impedance).<br />
Please note that the figures of this document defining the overall configurations are not to scale.<br />
H5.2 General Purpose Balun Design<br />
H5.2.1<br />
Overall Design<br />
The General Purpose Balun consists of a toroid on which an RG58 coaxial cable is wound a sufficient amount of<br />
turns. This is placed inside a plastic box equipped with N connectors (one N male connector, and one N female<br />
connector). The toroid shall provide high impedance <strong>for</strong> the frequency range 3 MHz to 30 MHz.<br />
The General Purpose Balun shall be designed according to the overall configuration shown in Figure 93.<br />
Plastic Box<br />
Toroid<br />
N-female<br />
N-male<br />
RG58 Coaxial Cable<br />
Figure 93: General Purpose Balun, Overall Configuration
Page 318 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
H5.2.2<br />
Toroid<br />
The core material Amidon 77 is recommended, and the dimensions should be φ 35.6 mm × φ 22.9 mm ×<br />
12.7 mm (outer diameter × inner diameter × width). The recommended type is FT-140-77.<br />
The RG58 coaxial cable should have 10 turns on the core. See Figure 93.<br />
H5.3 Reference Loop Balun Design<br />
H5.3.1<br />
Overall Design<br />
The differences between the Reference Loop Balun and the General Purpose Balun are as follows:<br />
• A TNC male connector is used instead of the N male connector.<br />
• The size of the plastic box is different.<br />
• The device is equipped with support structures that fit together with a Reference Loop.<br />
The Reference Loop Balun shall be designed according to the overall configuration shown in Figure 94.<br />
Plastic Box<br />
Support<br />
Structure<br />
TNC-male<br />
Toroid<br />
N-female<br />
RG58 Coaxial Cable<br />
Figure 94: Reference Loop Balun, Overall Configuration<br />
H5.3.2<br />
Toroid<br />
The core material Amidon 77 is recommended, and the dimensions should be φ 35.6 mm × φ 22.9 mm ×<br />
12.7 mm (outer diameter × inner diameter × width). The recommended type is FT-140-77.<br />
The RG58 coaxial cable should have 10 turns on the core. See Figure 94.
Page 319 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
H5.4 Current Sense Balun Design<br />
H5.4.1<br />
Overall Design<br />
In order to provide current sense capabilities, the current sense balun shall be equipped with an additional current<br />
probe. This current probe shall be positioned inside a plastic box similar to the one used <strong>for</strong> the Reference<br />
Loop Balun.<br />
The differences between the Current Sense Balun and the Reference Loop Balun are as follows:<br />
• An additional N female connector is included.<br />
• The size of the plastic box is different.<br />
• The device is equipped with a Current Probe.<br />
The Current Sense Balun shall be designed according to the overall configuration shown in Figure 95.<br />
Plastic Box<br />
Support<br />
Structure<br />
Toroid<br />
N-female<br />
TNC-male<br />
Current<br />
Probe<br />
RG316 Coaxial Cable<br />
RG58 Coaxial Cable<br />
Figure 95: Current Sense Balun, Overall Configuration<br />
The support <strong>for</strong> the current probe, and the current probe itself, shall be fixed in the box using suitable glue.<br />
H5.4.2<br />
Toroid<br />
The core material Amidon 77 is recommended, and the dimensions should be φ 35.6 mm × φ 22.9 mm ×<br />
12.7 mm (outer diameter × inner diameter × width). The recommended type is FT-140-77.<br />
The RG58 and RG 316 coaxial cables should have 10 turns on the core. See Figure 95.
Page 320 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
H5.4.3<br />
Current Probe<br />
The current probe is a passive device. The recommended part is the High Frequency Current Probe CT-2 from<br />
Tektronix.<br />
The current probe provides a calibrated output voltage of approximately 1 mV/mA.<br />
H5.5 Calibration of the Current Sense Balun<br />
The current probe from Tektronix is a factory calibrated device. The device is specified to provide 1 mV/mA<br />
with an accuracy of ± 4 %.<br />
This accuracy may not be sufficient <strong>for</strong> certain reference measurements. There<strong>for</strong>e, it is recommended to calibrate<br />
the transfer function of the Current Probe using the below described procedure.<br />
Power<br />
Meter 1<br />
Signal<br />
Generator<br />
P lc<br />
In<br />
C.S.<br />
Current Sense<br />
Balun<br />
Out<br />
I<br />
Z A<br />
Attenuator<br />
(A)<br />
P M2<br />
Power<br />
Meter 2<br />
Figure 96: Current Sense Balun, Calibration set-up<br />
The following equations are applicable:<br />
1)<br />
2 AP<br />
I 0 =<br />
Z<br />
M2<br />
A<br />
2)<br />
P<br />
k =<br />
AP<br />
lc<br />
M2<br />
where P lc is the power reading of Power Meter 1, P M2 is the power reading of Power Meter 2, A is the attenuation<br />
of the attenuator, I 0 is the current through the Current Sense Balun during calibration, Z A is the input impedance<br />
of the attenuator, and k is the transfer ratio of the Current Sense Balun to be determined.<br />
Thereafter, the following is valid <strong>for</strong> any current (below 2.5 A) through the Current Sense Balun loaded with an<br />
impedance of less than 100 Ω (connected to the output port):<br />
3)<br />
I =<br />
P<br />
k Z<br />
lc<br />
A<br />
where I is the actual current through the Current Sense Balun during actual measurements.
Page 321 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Calibration Procedure:<br />
a) Characterise the attenuator (determine A and Z A ).<br />
b) Set the signal generator to 4.23 MHz and CW.<br />
c) Adjust the output amplitude so that the current through the Current Sense Balun is approximately<br />
50 mA. With a 20 dB attenuator this corresponds to a Power Meter 2 reading (P M2 ) of approximately<br />
+ 1 dBm.<br />
d) Record the exact reading of Power Meter 1 and Power Meter 2 (P lc should be approximately –<br />
13 dBm with the described design).<br />
e) Calculate k using equation 2 above (observe separate k-factors <strong>for</strong> 4.23 MHz and 27.095 MHz).<br />
f) Repeat steps a through e <strong>for</strong> the frequency 27.095 MHz.<br />
The attenuation of the attenuator used in the set-up should be approximately 20 dB, and has to be carefully<br />
evaluated prior to calibration. The exact attenuation value and the input impedance have to be considered (A<br />
and Z A in the equations above).<br />
In order to maintain the accuracy during the actual measurements, the same Power Meter 1 sensor shall to be<br />
used as during the calibration (otherwise the change of impedance might decrease the accuracy).<br />
Finally, it should be observed that this process ensures high accuracy <strong>for</strong> signals of frequencies in the Up-link<br />
and Tele-powering signal bands only.
Page 322 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Annex I (In<strong>for</strong>mative), Bibliography<br />
References to documents considered at different levels during the preparation of this Norm.<br />
I. EUROSIG documents:<br />
A. Measurement Methods <strong>for</strong> Verifying Up-link FSK Per<strong>for</strong>mance of Balises<br />
Ref. ERTMS-EUROSIG/WP341/ABB001, by EUROSIG, Issue 1.0.0.<br />
B. Air gap Reference Equipment <strong>for</strong> Product Qualification <strong>Test</strong>s<br />
Ref. ERTMS-EUROSIG/WP341/ABB002, by EUROSIG, Issue 2.0.0.<br />
C. <strong>Eurobalise</strong> Transmission Sub-system, <strong>Test</strong> Procedure <strong>for</strong> Balise Con<strong>for</strong>mity <strong>Test</strong>s<br />
Ref. ERTMS-EUROSIG/WP341/ABB003, by EUROSIG, Issue 1.0.0.<br />
D. Con<strong>for</strong>mity <strong>Test</strong> of Reference Loop<br />
Ref. ERTMS-EUROSIG/WP341/ABB004, by EUROSIG, Issue 1.0.0.<br />
E. <strong>Eurobalise</strong> Transmission Sub-system, <strong>Test</strong> Procedure <strong>for</strong> Antenna – BTM <strong>Test</strong>s<br />
Ref. ERTMS-EUROSIG/WP341/ABB005, by EUROSIG, Issue 1.0.0.<br />
F. <strong>Specification</strong> <strong>for</strong> <strong>Test</strong> Antenna<br />
Ref. ERTMS-EUROSIG/WP341/ABB008, by EUROSIG, Issue 3.0.0.<br />
G. <strong>Specification</strong> <strong>for</strong> Activation Antenna<br />
Ref. ERTMS-EUROSIG/WP341/ABB009, by EUROSIG, Issue 2.0.0.<br />
H. <strong>Eurobalise</strong> Transmission Sub-system, <strong>Specification</strong> <strong>for</strong> Reference Loops<br />
Ref. ERTMS-EUROSIG/WP341/ABB016, by EUROSIG, Issue 1.0.0.<br />
I. <strong>Test</strong> Procedure <strong>for</strong> evaluation of potential cable related Cross-talk<br />
Ref. ERTMS-EUROSIG/WP341/ABB017, by EUROSIG, Issue 1.0.0.<br />
J. <strong>Eurobalise</strong> Transmission Sub-system, <strong>Specification</strong> <strong>for</strong> Reference Equipment Baluns<br />
Ref. ERTMS-EUROSIG/WP341/ABB020, by EUROSIG, Issue 1.0.0.<br />
K. <strong>Eurobalise</strong> Transmission Sub-system, <strong>Test</strong> Procedure <strong>for</strong> Balise Impedance <strong>Test</strong>s<br />
Ref. ERTMS-EUROSIG/WP341/ABB021, by EUROSIG, Issue 1.0.0.<br />
L. Reference Units <strong>for</strong> Debris, Metallic Objects, and Cables<br />
Ref. ERTMS-EUROSIG/WP341/ABB078, by EUROSIG, Issue 1.0.0.<br />
M. Laboratory Instruments and Equipment of general use<br />
Ref. ERTMS-EUROSIG/WP341/ABB079, by EUROSIG, Issue 1.0.0.<br />
N. <strong>Eurobalise</strong> Laboratory <strong>Test</strong> <strong>Specification</strong>s<br />
Ref. ERTMS /WP341/ANS107, by EUROSIG, Issue 0.0.3.<br />
O. <strong>Eurobalise</strong> Air-gap Interoperability Demonstration in the EMSET Laboratory<br />
Ref. EMSET/WP5.22.1b/ANS123, by EUROSIG, Issue 1.0.0.<br />
P. Interface ‘C’ Per<strong>for</strong>mance Measurements <strong>for</strong> the Up-link Balise<br />
Ref. ERTMS/EUROSIG/WP341/GA0624, by EUROSIG, Issue 0.0.7.<br />
Q. <strong>Eurobalise</strong> Transmission Sub-system, Reference Receiver Tool <strong>for</strong> Laboratory<br />
Ref. ERTMS/WP341/ANS125, by EUROSIG, Issue 1.0.0.
Page 323 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
R. <strong>Eurobalise</strong> Transmission Sub-system, Laboratory <strong>Test</strong> Management System<br />
Ref. ERTMS/WP341/ANS130, by EUROSIG, Issue 1.0.0.<br />
S. <strong>Specification</strong> <strong>for</strong> the Laboratory Time and Odometer Module<br />
Ref. EMSET/TEN98/WP5.22.1.b/ANS142, Issue 1.0.0.<br />
T. <strong>Eurobalise</strong> Transmission Sub-system, <strong>Specification</strong> <strong>for</strong> the Reference Signal Generator<br />
Ref. EMSET/FFP/WP3.4.3/ALFR/GA0423, Issue 1.0.0.<br />
U. <strong>Test</strong> Telegrams <strong>for</strong> checking the <strong>Eurobalise</strong> Basic Receiver<br />
Ref. EMSET/TEN99/WP99-2/ADT022, Issue 0.0.3.<br />
II.<br />
CEDEX documents:<br />
A. Return Loss Network Development, New Design<br />
Ref. RL_cedex.<br />
III. UNISIG documents:<br />
A. Measurement of Interface ‘C4’ Impedance<br />
UNISIG_WGI_REP_Interface_C4.
Page 324 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Annex J (In<strong>for</strong>mative), <strong>Test</strong> Tool <strong>for</strong> LZB Cable testing<br />
J1 General<br />
The herein described implementations are sufficiently detailed <strong>for</strong> mandatory On-board testing purposes. Optional<br />
Balise testing may require adaptations because the test object is not only the Balise, but also fixation devices,<br />
installation rules, and possible RF chokes or similar devices.<br />
J2 Overall Designs<br />
J2.1 General<br />
The various tools used <strong>for</strong> LZB testing are loops surrounding defined areas. Some tools are tuned in order to be<br />
able to provide the required impedance and to achieve uni<strong>for</strong>mly distributed currents. The exception is the<br />
horizontal loop used <strong>for</strong> 4.2 MHz On-board tests. In that case, the current distribution is sufficiently uni<strong>for</strong>m<br />
without tuning, and the actual impedance is of less importance (since the actual current is monitored).<br />
J2.2 Vertical Loop used <strong>for</strong> 4.2 MHz Balise <strong>Test</strong>s<br />
This tool has to be tuned at 4.24 MHz.<br />
The overall impedance of the tool shall be 75 Ω (provided through adding sufficient resistance after tuning).<br />
This tool shall be designed according to the overall configuration shown in Figure 97. The assembly details<br />
shall be made from non-conductive material.<br />
The size of the loop shall be 1200 mm by 500 mm. The tool consists of 2 cable sections of 1200 mm each. The<br />
cable sections are inter-connected to the large low impedance vertical segments via PCB's, which are equipped<br />
with capacitors and a resistor. For measuring the current, the tool is equipped with a current probe. The recommended<br />
type is a Tektronix CT-2 current probe.<br />
The lower cable segment shall be positioned at least 200 mm above any ground structure (e.g., rein<strong>for</strong>ced concrete<br />
floors) in order to avoid influence from the environment.<br />
Technical data of the recommended cable <strong>for</strong>ming the 2 cable sections:<br />
Conductive material: Copper 7 x 0.6 mm ∅<br />
PE – Isolation: Thickness 3.6 mm<br />
PE – sheath: Thickness 1.7 mm<br />
Outside diameter: 12.4 mm ±0.3 mm
Page 325 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Z<br />
X<br />
1200 mm<br />
Y<br />
LZB - cable<br />
Possible Balise positions<br />
Current probe<br />
(32)<br />
500 mm<br />
Low impedance<br />
connection<br />
PCB with components<br />
Low impedance<br />
connection<br />
LZB - cable<br />
Figure 97: Vertical Loop used <strong>for</strong> 4.2 MHz Balise <strong>Test</strong>s<br />
6<br />
20<br />
12<br />
12<br />
1<br />
35<br />
Figure 98: Printed Circuit Board
Page 326 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
J2.3 Horizontal Loop used <strong>for</strong> 4.2 MHz On-board Equipment <strong>Test</strong>s<br />
This tool is not tuned.<br />
This tool shall be designed according to the overall configuration shown in Figure 99. The assembly plate shall<br />
be made from non-conductive material.<br />
The size of the loop shall be 1550 mm by 520 mm. The tool consists of one single piece of LZB loop cable. For<br />
measuring the current, the tool is equipped with a current probe. The recommended type is a Tektronix CT-2<br />
current probe.<br />
The tool is equipped with an internal Balun. The recommended type is 0010 from North Hills Signal Processing<br />
(50 Ω balanced to 50 Ω unbalanced Balun Trans<strong>for</strong>mer).<br />
Technical data of the recommended cable <strong>for</strong>ming the cable segment:<br />
Conductive material: Copper 7 x 0.6 mm ∅<br />
PE – Isolation: Thickness 3.6 mm<br />
PE – sheath: Thickness 1.7 mm<br />
Outside diameter: 12.4 mm ±0.3 mm<br />
Figure 99 Horizontal Loop used <strong>for</strong> 4.2 MHz On-board Equipment <strong>Test</strong>s
Page 327 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
Figure 100 Horizontal Loop, detail C<br />
Figure 101 Horizontal Loop, cut A-A<br />
Figure 102 Horizontal Loop, detail B
Page 328 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
18<br />
18<br />
18<br />
30<br />
M3<br />
50<br />
M4<br />
10<br />
40<br />
Figure 103: N-Connector support
Page 329 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
J2.4 Vertical Loop used <strong>for</strong> 27 MHz <strong>Test</strong>s<br />
This tool has to be tuned at 27.095 MHz. Please observe that the tuning needs to be per<strong>for</strong>med with the applicable<br />
balun connected to the loop. However, the balun is not part of the tool itself. There<strong>for</strong>e, the network analyser<br />
calibration (open, short and 50 Ω) shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with the balun.<br />
The overall impedance of the tool shall be 75 Ω (provided through adding sufficient resistance after tuning).<br />
This tool shall be designed according to the overall configuration shown in Figure 104. The assembly details<br />
shall be made from non-conductive material.<br />
The size of the loop shall be 1200 mm by 500 mm. The tool consists of several cable sections of lengths as<br />
defined in Figure 104. The cable sections are inter-connected via PCB's (see Figure 105), which are equipped<br />
with capacitors and a resistor. For measuring the current, the tool is equipped with a current probe. The recommended<br />
type is a Tektronix CT-2 current probe.<br />
The lower cable segment shall be positioned at least 200 mm above any ground structure (e.g., rein<strong>for</strong>ced concrete<br />
floors) in order to avoid influence from the environment.<br />
Technical data of the recommended cable <strong>for</strong>ming the cable sections:<br />
Conductive material: Copper 7 x 0.6 mm ∅<br />
PE – Isolation: Thickness 3.6 mm<br />
PE – sheath: Thickness 1.7 mm<br />
Outside diameter: 12.4 mm ±0.3 mm<br />
300<br />
600<br />
300<br />
100 100<br />
Current<br />
probe All thick lines are<br />
LZB Cable segments<br />
400 400<br />
N-connector<br />
400<br />
400<br />
400<br />
Figure 104: Vertical Loop used <strong>for</strong> 27 MHz <strong>Test</strong>s
Page 330 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
6<br />
20<br />
12<br />
12<br />
1<br />
35<br />
Figure 105: Printed Circuit Board
Page 331 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
J3 Printed Circuit Board and Components<br />
The cable sections are inter-connected via printed circuit boards. Each PCB is equipped with capacitors and a<br />
resistor.<br />
C<br />
R<br />
Figure 106: Printed Circuit Board components<br />
The components shown in Figure 106 shall be stable with respect to temperature variations and ageing.<br />
Considering experience, the following guidelines apply:<br />
• For the tool of sub-clause J2.2 on page 324, C should be a parallel combination of capacitors providing<br />
approximately 1.33 nF (to be precisely determined during the tuning process) <strong>for</strong> each PCB. For the tool<br />
of sub-clause J2.4 on page 329, C should be a parallel combination of capacitors providing approximately<br />
60 pF (to be precisely determined during the tuning process) <strong>for</strong> each PCB.<br />
• R shall be added such that the total loop impedance is 75 Ω <strong>for</strong> the loop described in sub-clause J2.2, and<br />
75 Ω <strong>for</strong> the loop described in sub-clause J2.4 (suitably split between all the PCB’s in both cases). Please<br />
observe that high power may apply to the loop described in sub-clause J2.4, and that inductance “free”<br />
resistors shall be used.
Page 332 of 332<br />
SUBSET-085, Issue 2.2.2<br />
November 9, 2007<br />
J4 Tuning of the LZB Loop<br />
As part of the manufacturing process, the loops described in sub-clauses J2.2 on page 324 and J2.4 on page 329<br />
have to be electrically tuned. Please observe that tuning of the loop described in sub-clause J2.4 shall be per<strong>for</strong>med<br />
with the applicable balun connected to the loop. However, the balun is not part of the tool itself. There<strong>for</strong>e,<br />
the network analyser calibration (open, short and 50 Ω) shall be per<strong>for</strong>med with the balun.<br />
The following procedure shall be used. An acceptably tuned tool shall provide a value of the imaginary part of<br />
the reactance that is less than one tenth of the overall target impedance (at 4.24 MHz and 27.095 MHz respectively).<br />
1. For the tool of sub-clause J2.2, connect capacitors such that 1.33 nF is obtained on each PCB, and short<br />
circuit all resistors. For the tool of sub-clause J2.4, connect capacitors such that 60 pF is obtained on<br />
each PCB, and short circuit all resistors.<br />
2. Measure the actual impedance at 4.24 MHz (<strong>for</strong> the tool of sub-clause J2.2) or at 27.095 MHz (<strong>for</strong> the<br />
tool of sub-clause J2.4) with all the capacitors mounted on the PCB's. If the value of the imaginary part<br />
of the reactance is not less than one tenth of the target impedance, then C has to be adjusted accordingly.<br />
3. Add one or several resistors at each PCB such that the overall impedance is 75 Ω <strong>for</strong> the loop described<br />
in sub-clause J2.2, and 75 Ω <strong>for</strong> the loop described in sub-clause J2.4. The total resistance should be as<br />
evenly spread as possible between the four PCB’s.
Change language